You are on page 1of 1032

Revit MEP

Metric Tutorial

25703-050000-5080A 2007
Copyright© 2007 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose.
AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE
MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS.
IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF ACQUISITION OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS.
THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT
EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE, IF ANY, OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN.
Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of the product at the time
of publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December,
3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI,
AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk
Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap,
AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil
3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer,
Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer,
DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert,
DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up
Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical
Desktop, MotionBuilder, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream,
ProjectPoint, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Revit, Showcase, SketchBook, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, Visual, Visual
Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual
Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, and Wiretap.
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,
Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, Wire.

Third Party Trademarks


All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Third Party Software Program Credits


ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc.
Copyright© 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.
IES <Virtual Environment>, IES <VE> Copyright© 2007 by Integrated Environmental Solutions Limited
Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved.
InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved.
PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult
current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color.
PANTONE® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc.© Pantone, Inc., 2002
Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in combination
with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless
as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product.
Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved.
Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002
RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002
Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German
Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin.
Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992.
Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved.
AutoCAD 2008 is produced under a license of data derived from DIC Color Guide® from Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Copyright ©
Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. All rights reserved. DIC Color Guide computer color simulations used in this product may not exactly match
DIC Color Guide, DIC color Guide Part 2 identified solid color standards. Use current DIC Color Guide Manuals for exact color reference. DIC
and DIC Color Guide are registered trademarks of Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc.
Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™.
WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock®
AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved.
The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan
Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within
this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002).
Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No.
5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending.
Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc.
OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved.
OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved.
OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002.
FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer
Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Contents

Part 1 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1


Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23


Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Creating Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Performing an Energy Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Designing Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Placing Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Resolving Routing Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Sizing the Primary Duct: Velocity Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Inspecting Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Placing Air Conditioning Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Completing the Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Checking Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Designing Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Creating Piping Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Placing Radiators and a Boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Creating the Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Creating Pipe Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Resolving Pipe Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Connecting the Boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Placing Circulator Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Inspecting Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213


Planning Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Preparing the Electrical Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Defining Required Lighting Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Assigning Room Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Designing the Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Contents | v
Adding Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Placing Lighting Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Placing Power Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Placing Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Creating Power Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Creating Switch Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Defining Circuit Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281


Planning Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Preparing the Plumbing Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Designing Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Add Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Begin Creating the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Refining the Urinal Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Adding Vents to the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Create the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Create the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335


Designing Fire Protection Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Starting the Fire Protection Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Connecting the Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Creating the Fire Protection Dry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

Part 2 Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419


Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469


Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482

vi | Contents
Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516

Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519


Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541

Chapter 9 Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547


Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Creating Line-based Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572

Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587


Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
Creating a Note Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
Creating a Drawing List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Creating a Component Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
Setting Up a Revision Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
Working with Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
Importing from Other Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Importing Image Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Importing Text Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611

Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613


Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616

Contents | vii
Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626

Part 3 Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631


Chapter 12 Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Viewing a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Exploring the Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Creating a Perspective View with a Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
Creating a Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
Creating Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
Controlling Fill Pattern Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
Creating a View Plan Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651

Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655


Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
Creating a New Render Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
Defining Daylights and Rendering the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682

Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685


Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689
Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694
Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694
Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697
Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
Orienting to True North for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701
Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704
Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704

Chapter 15 Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707


Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709
Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709
Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721
Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721
Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725

viii | Contents
Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730
Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750

Part 4 Creating Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753


Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755
Using Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756
Introduction to Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756

Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759


Creating a Door Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
Drawing the Door Plan View Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765
Assigning Materials to the Door Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768
Defining New Door Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770
Creating a Window Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
Specifying the New Window Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782
Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784
Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789
Assigning Materials to the Window Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801
Defining New Window Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804
Creating a Furniture Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808
Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808
Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818
Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827
Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833
Defining New Furniture Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836
Creating a Baluster Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
Drawing a Baluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 840
Creating Profile Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842
Drawing a Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842
Drawing a Rail Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842
Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843
Drawing a Reveal Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844
Drawing a Host Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845
Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846
Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 848
Creating a Room Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850
Specifying Room Tag Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850
Creating an Annotation Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
Adding the New North Arrow to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854
Creating a Titleblock Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855
Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855
Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858
Adding the Titleblock to a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
Creating In-Place Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 868
Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 868
Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874

Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879


Planning a Parametric Component Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880

Contents | ix
Determining Component Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880
Selecting the Family Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 881
Creating the Component Skeleton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884
Adding Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884
Adding Dimensions and Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890
Creating New Length Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894
Flexing the Component Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897
Adding Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900
Creating Solid Extrusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900
Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902
Creating Additional Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905
Testing the Family in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 914
Loading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 914
Testing a Family Instance in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915
Working with Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919
Adding a Nested Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919
Creating Formula-controlled Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923
Arraying Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 928
Reloading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933
Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935
Creating and Applying Subcategories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935
Creating Material Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940
Controlling Component Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942
Assigning Detail Level and View Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942
Creating Component Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945
Creating Multiple Component Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945
Creating Conditional Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946

Part 5 Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949


Chapter 19 Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952
Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952
Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956
Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958
Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960
Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963
Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965
Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966
Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967
Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969
Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970
Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971
Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972

Part 6 Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975


Chapter 20 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978
Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978
Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980
Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982
Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983
Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985
Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985
Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989
Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992
Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997
Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . . . . . . . . . . . 999
Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000

x | Contents
Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003
Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003
Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004
Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1008
Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011
Modifying Render Scene Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1013
Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015
Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016
Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018

Contents | xi
xii | Contents
Getting Started
1

1
2 | Chapter 1 Getting Started
Introduction
1
This introduction helps you get started with the Revit MEP 2008 tutorials and

presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:

■ how Revit MEP works.


■ the terms used when working with the product.
■ how to navigate the user interface.
■ how to perform some common tasks in the product.

3
Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to get started with the Revit MEP tutorials, including where to locate the training files
specified in the tutorials and how to create a new Revit MEP project from a template file.
The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title to display the
titles of the lessons in the tutorial, and expand a lesson title to display a list of exercises in the lesson.

NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. The
tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP.

Accessing Training Files


Training files are Revit MEP projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for the tutorials. The training
files, like the tutorials, are bundled with the product. Training files are provided to help you work through the tutorials.
In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?

Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME
2008\Training. Training files are grouped into three folders within the training folder:

■ Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units.
Common file names have a c_ prefix.
■ Imperial: files specifically for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix.
■ Metric: files specifically for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for
more information.

IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files
location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included
in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a dataset?

A dataset is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that is used to
complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Dataset section that references the training file to be used
with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing dataset.

Open a dataset
1 Click File menu ➤ Open.
2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon.
3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of dataset.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction
4 Click the dataset name, and click Open.

Save a dataset

5 To save a dataset with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As.
In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the
next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and
use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson.

6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

■ For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file.
You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you
save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required.

■ For File name, enter the new file name.


A good practice is to save the dataset with a unique name after you have made changes. For example,
if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as
c_settings_modified.rvt.

■ For Save as type, verify that Project Files is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template

7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing dataset, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project.


9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.
In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates.

10 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit MEP templates.

Accessing Training Files | 5


Templates are available for specific building types: commercial, construction, and residential. Each template
contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. For most tutorial
projects, you use the default template and customize the project as necessary.

11 Select Systems-Default_Metric.rte, and click Open.


12 Click OK.

Understanding the Basics


In this lesson, you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You
begin with the fundamental concepts that Revit MEP is built upon. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements,
how to navigate the user interface, and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

What is Revit MEP 2008?

The Revit MEP platform for building information modeling is a design and documentation system that supports the
design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modeling (BIM) delivers information
about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it.
In the Revit MEP model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the
same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit MEP collects information
about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit
MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets,
schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?

The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and
change management that Revit MEP provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or
by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of
relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This concept is important because
it is this capability that delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything
at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project.
The following are examples of these element relationships:

■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move
the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition.
■ Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the
relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional
characteristic.
■ The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or
roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Revit MEP 2008 keep things updated?

A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and
maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change
something, Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected
elements.
Revit MEP uses two key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships
while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is
software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler

Revit MEP uses five software element classes: host, component, annotation, view, and datum.

■ Hosts include walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings.


■ Components include windows, doors, and furniture.

6 | Chapter 1 Introduction
■ Annotations are 2D, view-specific elements that help you produce documentation.
■ Views are dynamic representations of the model and are always up-to-date.
■ Datums are reference elements that help you put your building together.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by
you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP.
In Revit MEP, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined
by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often,
you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases,
you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning two walls, for example.

Understanding Revit MEP 2008 terms

Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects.
However, there are some terms that are unique to Revit MEP, and understanding them is crucial to understanding the
software. This section defines the basic terms used in Revit MEP.
Project: In Revit MEP, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information
model. The project file contains all the information for your building design, from geometry to construction data. This
information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using
a single project file, Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter your design and have changes reflected in all associated
areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it
easier to manage the project.
Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and
ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You create a level for each
known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation.
To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.

Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan tiled next to it.

Element: When creating your project, you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. All elements
are considered categories. Revit MEP classifies elements by model component elements and annotation elements.

■ A model component element, such as a door, desk, or roof, represents the actual 3D geometry of the building.
■ An annotation building element, such as a door tag, elevation symbol, or room tag, helps document the model.

Family: Families are classes of elements in a category that group elements with a common set of parameters (properties),
identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some

Understanding the Basics | 7


or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, six-panel colonial
doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials.
Families are either component families or system families:

■ Component family files can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the
set of properties and the graphical representation of the family.
■ System families include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels, and are not available for loading or
creating as separate files.

■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families.
■ You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For
example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system; however, you can create different types of walls
with different compositions.
■ System families can be transferred between projects.

Type: Each family can have different types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a A0 title block or a 910
x 2110 door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A family can
have several types. For example, a table could come in several different sizes. Each different size would be a new type
within the same family.
Instance: Instances are the actual items that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building
(model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Revit MEP 2008 terms

Navigating the User Interface


One of the advantages of Revit MEP is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit MEP window is
arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy to understand what each button
represents. Revit MEP uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows
these conventions, learning Revit MEP is much easier.

8 | Chapter 1 Introduction
In the following illustration, the user interface is labeled. In the steps that follow, you navigate and become familiar
with the user interface.

Start a new project

1 On the Standard toolbar, click .


This creates a new project based on the default template.

The Title Bar

2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project
and the view that is currently open.

By default, new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. In addition, the Level
1 floor plan view is the default open view.

TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based.

The Menu Bar

3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom.

Navigating the User Interface | 9


The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File, Edit, and View.
To choose commands, place the cursor over the menu name, and click. Then, click the command name
to start the command. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process.
These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu.

TIP For example, the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR.

While working in the drawing area, you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. Another
timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. A context
menu appears with a list of all available commands. The context menu changes depending on the function
you are performing and what is currently selected.

The Toolbar

4 On the Window menu, click Toolbar.


There are six toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. The buttons on the toolbar
represent some of the more common commands. You can control the visibility of the six toolbars and turn
the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. You can use the toolbar grips to
resize and move each toolbar.

The Options Bar

5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall.


Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and
varies depending on the tool or selected component.

6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door.


Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. On the left side of the
Options Bar, notice a door type is specified.

10 | Chapter 1 Introduction
The Type Selector

7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. Select the drop-down list
to view the list of doors.

The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. If you select the Door tool, the Type Selector displays
a list of doors available within the project. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the
components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category.

8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall.


9 In the Type Selector, notice the list of walls that are available.
You use the Type Selector in two ways. First, you can select a component type before you add it to the
building model. For example, if you intend to add a door, the door type active in the Type Selector is the
door type that is added when you insert it into the building model. You can also use the Type Selector to
change a component type after it has been added to the building model. Within the drawing area, you can
select any component and then change the type from the Type Selector.

The Design Bar

10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars.

Navigating the User Interface | 11


The Show Design Bars dialog is displayed.

The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface, immediately below the Type Selector. There are
10 tabs in the Design Bar, containing buttons grouped by function. You can control which tabs display by
selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog.

11 Click OK.
Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu.

■ Basics tab: Includes commands for creating most basic building model components.
■ View tab: Commands for creating different views in the project.
■ Modelling tab: All the commands to create model elements.
■ Drafting tab: Commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the
project construction documents.
■ Rendering tab: Commands for creating rendered 3D images.

12 | Chapter 1 Introduction
■ Site tab: Commands for adding site components and producing site plans.
■ Massing tab: Commands for executing conceptual massing commands.
■ Room and Area tab: Commands for making room and area schemes and plans.
■ Structural tab: Commands for adding structural components to your project.
■ Construction tab: Includes commands for creating construction industry information.

To access the commands within a tab, click the tab, and the respective commands are displayed on the
Design Bar.

TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab
from the context menu.

The Project Browser

12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. In the Project Browser, select Views (all).

You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views, schedules, sheets, reports, families, and
groups of your current project:

■ Right-click in the browser to add, delete, and rename views, families, and groups.
■ The browser is conveniently organized by view type (floor plans, elevations, 3D), family category
(doors, walls, windows), and group name. Expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or -
sign next to the name.

Navigating the User Interface | 13


■ To open a view, double-click the name.
■ You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area, making it easy to add a family or
group to the project or add a view to a sheet.
■ The browser is dockable, so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser
title bar to a new location.

13 In the Type Selector, scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser.

14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization.


You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets. After you
create a browser organization scheme, you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by
selecting the scheme in the Type Selector.

15 In the Browser Organization dialog, click Cancel.

The Status Bar

16 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar, click Wall.


The cursor is displayed as a pencil.

17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. Do not click.

14 | Chapter 1 Introduction
In the bottom left corner of the window, notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you
should do next. In this case, it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point."

TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar.

18 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. The Status Bar also provides
information, in conjunction with Tooltips, regarding selected components within a view. When you place
the cursor over a component, it highlights and the status bar displays the component name.

TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view, use the Tab key to alternate
between nearby components.

19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area.
The elevation symbol consists of two parts, the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. Make
sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol. It highlights when the cursor is over it.

In the Status Bar, notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: West.

20 Press TAB, and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol, Elevations:
Elevation: Elevation 5.
When attempting to select a specific component in a complex or crowded view, you can use the Status Bar
and the Tab key to toggle between components and select the desired component.

Revit MEP 2008 Help

21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit MEP 2008 Help.

Navigating the User Interface | 15


Help is available online at all times during a Revit MEP session. You can use this tri-pane, HTML help
window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. There are several tools that help
you find information. You can select a topic on the Contents tab, find a keyword on the Index tab, search
for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab, or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab.
Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command.
You can access Help in the following ways:

■ Dialog Boxes: Dialog boxes include Help buttons. Click the Help button, and the topic specific to the
dialog box opens. If there is no Help button displayed, press F1 to get help on that dialog box.
■ Windows: From any window, press F1 to get the topic associated with the window.

■ Toolbar: From the Toolbar, click , and then click on a specific menu command or command
button for Help. You can also press SHIFT+F1. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed.
■ Tool Tips: To see Tool Tips, rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the Tool Tip displays.

TIP You can control the level of Tool Tip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu.

22 Close the Revit MEP Help window.

Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP


In this exercise, you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. After you
are familiar with how to complete these tasks, it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the unique tasks for
each tutorial.

Use zoom commands to adjust the view


1 In the tutorials, you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. For
example, you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or
floor plan in the view. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building
model in the window.
There are several ways to access zoom options:

■ View menu commands


■ Zoom command on the View toolbar
■ Shortcut keys
■ Wheel mouse
■ Dynamic View dialog

In the following steps, you open a dataset and practice adjusting the view with the zoom commands.

2 Click File menu ➤ Open.


3 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Cohouse.rvt.

16 | Chapter 1 Introduction
The 3D isometric view displays:

4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom options menu.


The zoom menu lists the zoom options and the shortcut keys for each option.

5 Click Zoom Out (2x).


6 On the View toolbar, click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options.

NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself automatically activates the Zoom In Region command.

7 Click Zoom To Fit, and the view of the buiding model is sized to fit the available window.
8 Click in the drawing area, and enter the shortcut keys ZR to zoom in on a region.
The cursor becomes a magnifying glass.

9 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region you wish to zoom; this is referred to as a
crossing selection.

Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP | 17


10 If you use a mouse where the middle button is a wheel, you can roll the wheel to zoom the view dynamically.
Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again.
If you do not have a wheel mouse, use a zoom menu command or the Toolbar option to zoom out within
the view.

NOTE As you zoom in and out within a view, Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less
than 2mm in the drawing area. To modify or add snap increments, click Settings menu ➤ Snaps.

11 Zoom is also available in Dynamic View mode. To display the Dynamic View dialog in a 2D or 3D view,

on the View toolbar, click .


The Dynamic View dialog displays in the lower-left corner of the screen.

12 Use one of the following methods to zoom:

■ In the Dynamic View dialog, click Zoom, and drag the cursor in the drawing area.
■ Without clicking in the dialog, press and hold CTRL, hold the middle mouse button (or left mouse
button on a wheel mouse), and drag the cursor.
■ On a wheel mouse, roll the wheel to zoom the view.

Resize elements using drag controls

13 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click 2nd Flr. Cnst.
When drawing or modifying a building model, it is important to understand how to adjust the size of
components in the drawing area. Small blue dots, called drag controls, display at the ends of selected lines
and walls in a plan view. Similar controls, referred to as shape handles, display along the ends, bottoms,
and tops of selected walls in elevation and 3D views.

14 Enter ZR, zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan, and select the wall, as shown:
Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. These are the drag controls.

18 | Chapter 1 Introduction
15 Click and drag the left control, moving the cursor to the left horizontally, to lengthen the wall.
16 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall.

Move an element

17 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan.

18 Select the Craftsman02 table, and on the Edit toolbar, click (Move).
Some commands, such as Move and Copy, require two clicks to complete the command. After selecting
the element to be moved, for example, click to specify the starting position, and click again to specify the
ending position. In this case, you want to move the table closer to the wall.

19 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table.

Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP | 19


20 Click next to the lower wall, as shown.
The table moves down and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint.

21 Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. Select the plant, and drag it
on top of the table.

Undo commands

22 On the Standard toolbar, click the drop-down menu next to .


All changes you make to a project are tracked. The Undo command allows you to undo several commands
by clicking the drop-down menu next to the Undo command on the Toolbar. In this example, you decide
that you like the table better where it was placed originally.

23 On the Undo menu, select the second item in the list, Move.
Selecting the second action in the list will undo the last two actions. All commands are canceled up to and
including the selected command. The table and plant are returned to their original locations.

20 | Chapter 1 Introduction
NOTE To quickly undo the previous action, on the Standard toolbar, click the Undo command, or press and
hold CTRL and enter Z.

End a command

24 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Lines.


Some commands, such as the Lines command, stay active or current until you choose another command
or end the current command.

25 Click in the drawing area to start the line and click again to end it.
Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to place lines.

26 To end the command, use one of the following methods:

■ Choose another command.


■ On the Design Bar, click Modify.
■ Press ESC twice.

27 Close the file without saving your changes.

Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP | 21


22 | Chapter 1 Introduction
Mechanical Systems
2
In this tutorial, you design a mechanical system for an office building. This system

consist of a VAV duct system and a hydronic piping system. As you create the

mechanical system, you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the

recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2008. This workflow begins

with systems planning and design, and concludes with documenting your design

and exporting your design. By following the recommended workflow, you learn

system design best practices while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems

designing more efficient.

The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Revit

MEP 2008. At the end of this tutorial, you will understand the process,

methodology, and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems.

NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially; each
exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. After finishing each
exercise, you can choose to save your work. However, it is highly recommended that
you always begin an exercise by opening the provided dataset. This dataset includes
the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The
datasets that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric
directory. You can search this directory to verify that the datasets have been
downloaded. If the tutorial datasets are not present, go to
http://www.autodesk.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.

23
Planning Mechanical Systems
Creating a mechanical system in Revit MEP is similar to any design project; planning is critical to a successful design.
In this lesson, you plan the system by first creating zones and then performing an energy analysis on the building space
to determine heating and cooling requirements.

Creating Zones
In this exercise, you create zones for the rooms on the first and second floors. Zones allow you to better analyze and
control the heating and cooling of the space. First, however, you create separate views in which to work with zones.
After you create these views, you create a shared project parameter, and then you use this parameter to assign each
zone to a room. Later in the design process, you refer back to the views to verify zone information.
Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Zones.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.

Create a new floor plan view

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, right-click the
view named 2 - Mech, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
A new view called Copy of 2 - Mech is created and becomes the active view (it is in boldface).

2 In the Project Browser, right-click Copy of 2 - Mech, and click Rename.


3 Enter 2 - Mech Zones for Name, and click OK.

Create a shared project parameter

4 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters.


5 After the Project Parameters dialog opens, click Add.
6 In the Parameter Properties dialog, select Shared parameter for Parameter Type, and click Select. When
prompted to choose a shared parameter file, click Yes.
7 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, click Create.
8 In the Save As dialog, enter Office for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save.
The shared parameter file is saved as a text file.

9 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, under Groups, click New, and name the new parameter group Rooms,
and click OK.
Notice that the new Rooms group is selected for the parameter group.

10 Under Parameters, click New, and enter Zone for Name in the Parameter Properties dialog, and click OK
3 times.
11 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Categories, select Rooms, and click OK twice.
Next, you copy the room tags from the level 2 architectural floor plan to the level 2 mechanical HVAC
floor plan. This allows you to easily identify the rooms when assigning zones.

Copy room tags

12 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click Level 2.
13 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner, drag the cursor to the lower right corner
to draw a pick box around the entire level 2 floor plan.

24 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


Notice that all of the selected elements highlight.

14 On the Options Bar, click to filter the selected elements.


15 In the Filter box, click Check None, and then select Room Tags, and click OK.
All level 2 room tags are selected. Remember that when drawing a pick box or using cross-picking (right
to left dragging) all elements visible in the view range are selected. In this case, only mechanical elements
are selected because the view discipline has been specified as Mechanical.

16 Press CTRL+C to copy the selection.


17 In the Project Browser, under Mechanical, double-click 2 - Mech Zones to make it the active view.
18 Click Edit ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Current View.
All level 2 room tags are pasted into the view.

TIP Notice that by selecting Paste Aligned, all room tags are automatically aligned based on their original
placement. If you had selected Paste from Clipboard (CTRL+V), you would have needed to manually align the
selection.

Creating Zones | 25
Assign zones to the level 2 rooms

19 In the 2 - Mech Zones view, select the Office 6 room component, and click (Properties).

TIP You can easily identify the room component by the diagonal lines that display after placing the cursor in
the room. Note that the Office 6 room tag is not the room component but a room tag (annotation).

Room Component Room Tag

20 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, enter zone 1 for Zone, and click OK.
You have assigned zone 1 to Office 6.

21 Assign zones to the remaining Level 2 rooms according to the table below.

TIP To assign the same zone to more than one room, select the first room component, press Ctrl, and select
each additional room component. Then, use the Element Properties dialog to assign the zone. To clear a selection,
press SHIFT and select the room component to clear.

Level 2 Room Name Zone

Office 6 zone 1

Office 7 zone 2

Office 8 zone 3

Office 33 zone 4

Office 32 zone 5

Conference Room 31 zone 6

Office 29 zone 7

Office 28, Office 27 zone 8

Office 26 zone 9

Lounge 25 zone 10

Open 2 zone 11

Ladies’ Room 23 zone 12

Men’s Room 22 zone 13

26 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


Assign zones to level 1 rooms

22 Using the methods that you just learned, do the following:

■ Create a new mechanical HVAC view based on 1 - Mech and name it 1 - Mech Zones.
■ Copy the room tags from the Level 1 architectural floor plan and paste them (using Paste Aligned)
into the 1 - Mech Zones view.

23 In the 1 - Mech Zones view, assign zones to the rooms according to the following table:

Level 1 Room Name Zone

Office 3 zone 14

Office 4, Office 5 zone 15

Office 18 zone 16

Office 17, Office 16 zone 17

Office 14, Office 13 zone 18

Office 12 zone 19

Office 11 zone 20

Office 10, Office 9 zone 21

Open 1 zone 22

Ladies’ Room 20 zone 23

Men’s Room 19 zone 24

24 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save.


25 In the Save As dialog, enter Zones Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click
Save.

NOTE After finishing each exercise, you can choose to save your work. However, it is highly recommended that
you always begin each exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. This dataset includes the work
from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.

In this exercise, you created new views by duplicating and renaming existing views. You then copied room tags into
the new views, and created a shared project parameter. Using this project parameter, you assigned zones to the level 1
and level 2 rooms. In the next exercise, you assign color scheme to these newly assigned zones in preparation for laying
out a VAV duct system.

Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones


In this exercise, you define a color scheme and assign it to the zones that you created in the previous exercise. A color
scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than you using room schedules
or accessing element properties.
Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Zones Color Scheme.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.

Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones | 27


Create a new color scheme legend type

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
2 - Mech Zones to make it the active view.
2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.
This displays the entire floor plan and centers it in the drawing area.

TIP You can also right-click, and click Zoom to Fit.

3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Color Scheme Legend.

NOTE If the Drafting tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Drafting.

4 On the Options Bar, click (Properties).


5 In the Element Properties dialog, click the Edit/New button.
6 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate to create a new color scheme legend type based on the existing
one.
7 For Name, enter HVAC, and click OK.
In the Type Selector, notice that Color Scheme Legend : HVAC is now the current color scheme legend
type.

8 Click OK twice.

Apply the color scheme

9 Move the cursor in the drawing area and notice that the color scheme legend outline indicates that no
color scheme has been assigned to the view.
The color scheme outline follows the cursor movement to help you accurately position the legend.

10 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan, and click to place the
legend.
11 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog, select Number for Color Scheme, and click OK.
You applied the color scheme but it is based on room number. Next, you modify the color scheme so that
it is based on zones.

Modify the color scheme

12 Select the color scheme legend, and on the Options Bar, click Edit Color Scheme.
13 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog, under Scheme Definition, do the following:

■ For Color, select Zone, and click OK after a message informs you that colors are not preserved when
changing a parameter.
■ Verify that By value is selected.

Colors are automatically assigned to the 24 zones that you previously defined.

14 Click OK.

28 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


The modified color scheme displays. Because you specified a color scheme based on zones, each room
displays the color that is associated with its zone.

NOTE Rooms that do not have zones assigned to them display as white. Also note that elevations have been
hidden in the view to enhance legend visibility.

Next, you create and modify the color scheme for level 1.

15 In the Project Browser, double-click 1 - Mech Zones to make it the active view.
16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Color Scheme Legend, and verify that Color Scheme Legend
: HVAC is selected in the Type Selector.
17 Position and insert the color scheme legend along the right side of the floor plan as you did in the 2 - Mech
Zones view.
The color scheme legend outline indicates that no color scheme has been assigned. This is because color
schemes are view specific, so you will need to assign a color scheme to this view. Notice that the HVAC
color scheme legend that you previously created is selected in the Type Selector.

18 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog, select Number for Color Scheme, and click OK.
The color scheme legend that you defined for level 2 is automatically applied.
Notice that the color for zone 22 (Open 1) is similar to that of zone 15 (Offices 4 and 5) and needs to be
changed for visual clarity.

19 In the drawing area, click the color scheme legend.


20 On the Options Bar, click Edit Color Scheme.
21 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog, scroll down to Value 22 (zone 22), and click the associated color.
22 In the Color dialog, under Basic Colors, select color RGB 255-255-128 (a light yellow color), and click OK
twice.

TIP Color names are displayed under Name in the Color box.

Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones | 29


Zone 22 (Open 1) displays the new color.

23 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save.


24 In the Save As dialog, enter Zones Color Scheme Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your
choice, and click Save.

In this exercise, you defined a new color scheme and applied it to the rooms in your building according to the zone
that you previously assigned each room. You also edited a color scheme for visual clarity. In the next exercise, you
perform an energy analysis to estimate building energy usage.

Performing an Energy Analysis


In this exercise, you perform an energy analysis on the building to evaluate energy loads.
Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Energy Analysis.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.

Specify room and area settings

1 Click Settings menu ➤ Room and Area Settings.


2 On the Calculations tab of the Room and Area Settings dialog, click Compute room volumes, and click
OK.

NOTE This setting must be configured to perform an accurate energy analysis. During an energy analysis, if you
receive warnings indicating that the compute room volumes option is not checked and the output will be
approximate, verify that Compute room volumes is selected.

Verify building information

3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Heating and Cooling Loads.

NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Mechanical.

4 Click the Building tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog, and do the following:

■ For Building Type, verify that Office is selected.

30 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


■ For Building Construction, verify that <Building> is selected.

You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking (Browser Building
Construction Settings).

■ For Building Service (Default Room Service), verify that VAV - Single Duct is selected.
■ For Place and Location, verify that Boston, MA is selected.

IMPORTANT Revit MEP stores the building information as project information. You can also access the building
information by clicking Settings menu ➤ Project Information. Then, under Energy Analysis, click Edit for Energy
Data.

You have verified the building information. Next, you view various rooms in the building. In the preview
pane of the Heating and Cooling dialog, notice that the rooms in the building display.

View rooms

5 While pressing SHIFT and the mouse scroll wheel, spin the view to verify the rooms (energy surfaces) in the
building.
Next, you need to view specific rooms.

6 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog, click the Rooms tab.
7 Select Level 1 for Level.
Each level that contains at least one room is listed under Level. Rooms are then listed for the selected
level.You can also select all levels that contain at least one room to list all of the rooms in the building.

8 Select 16 Office.

9 Click (Highlight).

Performing an Energy Analysis | 31


The Office 16 highlights in red.

NOTE Using the View Selector, you can select Wireframe or Shading for model graphics style. If you select
Shading, the rooms display in blue. The View Selector is located at the bottom left corner of the preview pane.

Also note that you click to dynamically modify (spin, pan, and zoom) the view in the preview pane as
you can in the drawing window or you can use your mouse.

10 With the Highlight tool active, select a different room or multiple rooms on a level to highlight them.
Remember that you may need to spin the view to see a selected room in the model.

TIP You can select multiple rooms by pressing CTRL-selecting them, or SHIFT-select a range of rooms. You can
also press CTRL+A to select all rooms on a level.

11 Click to deactivate the Highlight tool.


Highlighting rooms allows you to verify that the room boundaries are as you defined them. You can also
view a room in relation to the other rooms or architecture in the entire building.
Next, you isolate a room.

12 On the View Selector, click (Shading) to shade the room in blue.


13 Select Level 2 for Level, and then select 25 Lounge.

14 Click (Isolate).

32 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


The Lounge on level 2 displays while all other rooms are hidden.

15 With the Isolate tool active, select a different room or rooms on any level to isolate that them.

16 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool.


Isolating a room allows you to easily verify rooms that normally would be obstructed by other rooms and
difficult to view normally.
Next, you verify room information.

Verify room information

17 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog, select Office 3 on Level 1.


18 Verify that <Building> is selected for Room Type, Room Construction, and Room Service.
This indicates that the information in the building type named <Building> will be used for the Office 3
energy analysis.

19 Using the methods that you learned, verify the room information for the other rooms in the building.

TIP If you select multiple rooms that have different room type, room construction, or room service values, these
values on the Room tab will be blank. Make your room information selections based on your specifications.

IMPORTANT Revit MEP stores the room information as room properties. You can also access the room information
by selecting a room in the drawing area, right-clicking, and clicking Element Properties. The room information
is located under Energy Analysis.

Now that the building and room information has been verified, you can perform an energy analysis.

Perform an energy analysis and view the report

20 Click Calculate.
Revit MEP performs the building calculations for heating and cooling in partnership with IES (Integrated
Environmental Solutions).

RELATED <Virtual Environment> allows you to either export the building and room information to the IES <VE>
program to perform an energy analysis and create an IES model, or import the IES model that has already been
created.

After the energy analysis is completed, the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes, and the Loads Report
Summary displays.

Performing an Energy Analysis | 33


21 Review the Loads Report Summary, including the Project Information, Weather Data, and Room Summary.

NOTE You must perform a new energy analysis each time you change building or room parameters, otherwise
the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes.

TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports.

22 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save.


23 In the Save As dialog, enter Energy Analysis Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your
choice, and click Save.

In this exercise, you specified building and room information, and viewed room to verify room boundaries. You then
performed an energy analysis on your building and viewed an energy analysis report. This concludes the planning
stage of the systems project. In the next lesson, you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the rooms.

Designing Air Systems


Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. In this lesson, you will create supply air
systems. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding the VAV boxes. Then,
you create the secondary and primary supply air system and ductwork to connect the components that you added.
After system creation, you continue designing by resolving routing conflicts, sizing ductwork, adding AC units, and
validate your air system design.

IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems.
After completing the air systems lesson, you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design
the piping systems.

Placing Air Terminals


In this exercise, you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. As you place the air terminals, you create new views,
modify air terminal parameters, and learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan.
Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Air Terminals.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.

Create and modify a new ceiling plan view

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Ceiling Plans, and double-click
1 - Ceiling Mech to make it the active view.
2 Right-click in the drawing area, and click View Properties.

You can also select the 1 - Ceiling Mech view in the Project Browser and click (Properties).

3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, do the following:

■ Select Level 1 for Underlay.


■ Verify that Reflected Ceiling Plan is selected for Underlay Orientation.

4 Scroll down to the Extents category and click Edit for View Range.

34 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


5 In the View Range dialog, specify the following:

■ Under Primary Range, for the Top parameter, verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected, and
enter 2615 mm for Offset.
You specify 2615mm so that your view captures the air terminals (which will be located at the ceiling
height of 2600mm) and not other system components that may be above the air terminals and in the
same level. These components would obstruct your view of the air terminals.

■ Under Primary Range, for the Cut plane parameter, enter 0 for Offset.
■ Under View Depth, for the Level parameter, verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected, and enter
2615 for Offset.

NOTE When entering a value, you do not need to type measurement symbols instead, enter the value, and
press Tab. For example, you can enter 2600 and press Tab for 2600mm.

6 Click OK twice.
You will now use this ceiling plan to place the level 1 air terminals.

Add a supply air terminal

7 Verify that 1 - Ceiling Mech is the active view.


8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Air Terminal.
9 In the Type Selector, select M_Rectangular Diffuser - Round Connection : M_600x600 - 200 Neck.
10 Move your cursor to the upper left corner of the view, and click to place the supply air terminal as shown.

11 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.

TIP When you click Modify, the command in progress terminates. You can also press Esc to accomplish this.

Modify the supply air terminal flow and offset parameters

12 Select the supply air terminal that you just placed.


Notice that the selected air terminal turns red.

Placing Air Terminals | 35


13 On the Options Bar, enter 150 L/s for Flow, and then click .
14 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, enter 2600 for Offset, and click OK.
This places the air terminal with an 2600mm offset from level 1. This is also the ceiling height for all rooms.
Thus, the air terminal will be placed in the ceiling.

Move the supply air terminal

15 With the air terminal selected, click (Move) on the Edit toolbar.

TIP To use the Move tool, you first specify a start point on the component that you want to move and then you
specify an end point for the destination. The start point aligns with the end point when the move is completed.

16 Move the cursor to the bottom right corner of the air terminal, and after the (geometry) end point snap
displays, click to specify the move start point.

17 In the drawing area, move the cursor in Office 3 located in the upper left corner of the floor plan, and after
the mid point snap displays, click the center mid point of the ceiling grid to specify the move end point
as shown.

36 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


The air terminal is placed. Notice that the air terminal start point and end point align.

Copy the supply air terminal

18 With the Office 3 air terminal selected, click (Copy) on the Edit toolbar.

TIP You use the same procedure with the Copy tool as with the Move tool. First specify a copy start point on
the component that you want to copy and then specify the copy end point (or destination).

19 On the Options Bar, verify that Constrain is cleared and Copy is selected, then select Multiple.
Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the air terminal without reactivating the Copy tool after
each placement.

20 Select the bottom-right corner of the air terminal as the copy start point, and then click the center mid
point of the Office 4 and then of the Office 5 ceiling grids to specify copy end points.

Placing Air Terminals | 37


Copies of the air terminal are placed immediately after you specify each end point. Notice that after you
specify the copy start point, listening dimensions display to aid placement.

TIP You can enter SM to override all other snaps and display mid point snaps only. Note that snap overrides
deactivate after you make a selection.

Add exhaust air grills and return air terminals

21 On the Mechanical tab on the Design Bar, click Air Terminal.


22 In the Type Selector, select M_Exhaust Air Grill : M_600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection.
23 Using the add-move-copy placement method, place an exhaust air grill in the Ladies’ Room (upper restroom),
and then copy it to the Men’s Room (lower restroom) as shown.

38 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


Before you move the exhaust grill, make certain that you specify the airflow parameter to 120 L/s and the
offset to 2600mm.

24 In the Type Selector, select M_Return Air Diffuser : M_600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection.
25 Using the same placement method and offset parameter (2600mm), place 3 return air terminals in the
open office (Open 1) to the left of the restrooms, and specify a 150 L/s airflow for each of them.

Placing Air Terminals | 39


26 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.

TIP Notice that each air terminal type is identified by a different symbol.

Modify the airflow display arrows

27 Select the Office 3 supply air terminal and use the Copy tool to place a copy below the Men’s Room in the
Open 1 area.

28 Select the air terminal that you just placed, right-click, and click Element Properties.
29 In the Element Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear the UpFlowArrow check box, and click OK.

Complete the level 1 supply air terminal layout

30 Select the Office 3 air terminal, click on the Edit toolbar.


31 Place copies of this supply air terminal at the ceiling grid intersections as shown below.

40 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


After you place the supply air terminals, remember to modify the airflow display arrows for air terminals
that need 2-way and 3-way blow patterns.

Create the level 2 air terminal layout

32 Using the placement method that you learned for level 1, do the following for level 2:

■ Make 2 - Ceiling Mech the active view.


■ In the Element Properties dialog, specify the same view parameters as 1 - Ceiling Mech but use Level
2 as an Underlay and verify that Associate Level (Level 2) is set for the view range parameters.
■ Use the add-move-copy placement method to place the same type of air terminals on level 2 that you
did on level 1. Specify 150 L/s airflow for the supply and return diffusers, and 120 L/s airflow for the
exhaust diffusers. Specify the same 2600mm offset parameter for all air terminals as you did for level
1.
■ Modify the airflow display arrows for air terminals that need 2-way and 3-way blow patterns.

After you finish the level 2 air terminal layout, collapse the ceiling plan views in the Project Browser. You
will be using different views to design the systems. The completed level 2 air terminal layout is as shown.

33 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save.


34 In the Save As dialog, enter Air Terminals Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice,
and click Save.

Placing Air Terminals | 41


In this exercise, you placed air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms, modified the air terminal parameters, and learned
a method for precise placement. In the next exercise, you create the air systems. In the next exercise, you create schedules
and use them as not only as documents but as design tools.

Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool


Schedules allow you to document the mechanical system components and heating and cooling requirements. More
importantly, you can modify this information directly within a schedule making the schedule a design tool. The
schedule as a dynamic design tool is a very powerful method to monitor system requirements, and to quickly and
accurately make real-time system modifications across the entire Revit MEP project.
In this exercise, you create a schedule for the supply air system project. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a
construction document, you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied
to each of the rooms in the model. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more
closely meet design requirements.
Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Air System Schedules.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.

1 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities.

Define schedule type

2 In the New Schedule dialog, do the following:

■ Under Category, select Air Terminals.


Notice that the schedule name and the phase is automatically added.

■ Verify that Schedule building components is selected, and that Show categories from all disciplines is
cleared.
■ Click OK.

Define columns

3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Flow, and click Add to
add the Flow field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule.
4 Under Select available fields from, select Room.
Notice that the content of the Available fields list changes to fields associated with rooms.

5 While pressing Ctrl, and select the following fields from the Available fields list:

■ Room: Actual Supply Airflow


■ Room: Calculated Supply Airflow
■ Room: Name
■ Room: Number

6 Click Add to add them to the Scheduled fields list.


7 Select a field and click Move Up and Move Down to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows:

■ Room: Number
■ Room: Name
■ Flow
■ Room: Actual Supply Airflow

42 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


■ Room: Calculated Supply Airflow
If you need to remove a field, select the field and click Remove.

Create a calculated value parameter

8 Click Calculated Value.


9 In the Calculated Value dialog, do the following:

■ Enter Check Supply Airflow for Name.


■ Verify that Formula is selected.
■ Select HVAC for Discipline.
■ Select Air Flow for Type.
■ Enter Room: Actual Supply Airflow - Room: Calculated Supply Airflow for Formula.

NOTE You must enter the formula verbatim including spaces.

10 Click OK.
The Check Supply Airflow calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list) and
will display as a column in the schedule.

Format the calculated value parameter

11 On the Formatting tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, in the Fields list, select Check Supply Airflow,
and click Conditional Format.
12 In the Conditional Formatting dialog, do the following:

■ Verify that Check Supply Airflow is selected for Field.


■ Select Between for Test.
■ Enter -35 L/s and 35 L/s for Value.
Notice that the conditions that you specified display under Conditions to Use.

■ Click the Background Color and select Green in the Color dialog.
■ Click OK twice.

The Check Supply Airflow calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine the rooms that
meet the design requirements as they are green in the schedule. These rooms have a difference between
the actual airflow and the calculated airflow within the range of -35 L/s and 35 L/s.

Organize the data

13 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, do the following:

■ Select Room: Number for Sort by.


■ Verify that Ascending is selected.
■ Select Footer, and Totals only.
■ Select Blank line.
■ Verify that (none) is selected for Then by.
■ Verify that Grand totals is cleared, and Itemize every instance is selected.
■ Click OK.

Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool | 43


A new view opens called Air Terminal Schedule and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project
Browser. Notice that the data is sorted according to room number. The green values in the Check Supply
Airflow column immediately report that the actual amount of air being supplied to the room meets the
design airflow requirements within the range of plus or minus 35 L/s. All other Check Supply Airflow values
that do not meet these requirements are not green and need modification.
This schedule is not only a construction document but also a design tool. You can change one or more
entries in the schedule to modify your system. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates
throughout your project. This is because you are modifying the digital database of building information.
This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).
Next, you use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow for an air terminal to satisfy the design
requirements.

Use the schedule as a design tool

14 With the Air Terminal Schedule view active, click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows.
This closes all open windows that are hidden by the schedule.

NOTE If a different project is also open, click Window menu and select the project to make it the active view,
and click File menu ➤ Close to close the project.

15 In the Project Browser, under Views ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, double-click 1 - Mech to make
it the active view.
16 Enter ZR, and draw a zoom region around Office 4 located on the left outer wall of the floor plan.
17 Enter WT to tile the 2 views.
The schedule and the floor plan display simultaneously in the drawing area.

18 In the schedule, select the 150 L/s Flow parameter (in the Flow column) for the Office 4 air terminal.
A cursor displays in the selected cell in the schedule enabling you to modify the parameter, and if you click
in the floor plan to make it active, the selected air terminal displays in red.
Notice that the Flow column parameters are the only parameters that you can define in the schedule. The
other parameters are design or calculated parameters.

19 Delete 150 L/s enter 165, and press Tab.


The Check Supply Airflow value displays in green indicating that it now complies with the Office 4 airflow
design requirements.

NOTE After you select and modify data in a schedule, the associated system component is immediately selected
and modified in the project as if you used the Element Properties dialog. This allows you to use schedules to
make multiple modifications in one view. These changes dynamically propagate throughout your project because
you are changing the digital database of building information.

20 Modify the other Flow parameters for the supply air terminals so that the airflow design requirements are
met.

NOTE Do not modify the return or exhaust air terminals as these are not supply air terminals and do not affect
the supply airflow.

After you modify the airflow parameters, all Check Supply Airflow parameters display in green.

IMPORTANT By modifying each supply air terminal airflow parameter, you are changing the air terminal
connector size. Air terminal connector sizes are used to calculate airflow but are also used to calculate ductwork
sizing.

21 Close the schedule view, and maximize the 1 - Mech floor plan view.

44 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


22 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save.
23 In the Save As dialog, enter Using Schedules Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your
choice, and click Save.

In this exercise, you created a schedule to assess airflow for each room in the building. You then used this schedule as
a design tool to modify the airflow so that it meets the design requirements. You modified the airflow parameters
directly in the schedule and all changes occurred dynamically and propagated throughout the project. This occurred
because you were modifying the digital database of building information that the project sources. This is the power of
BIM.
In the next exercise, you create air systems.

Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems


In this exercise, you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. A system is the logical connection between system
components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform
various analyses including energy analysis. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment,
and then create the logical connection between the system components. After creating the logical connection, you
then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. This is the Revit MEP recommended workflow or
best practice for systems creation. During this exercise, you also use the System Browser to validate your systems.

IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either to a system that you create or to a default system. Unlike
logical connections, physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. However, they are necessary to
perform calculations that reference the physical geometry such as sizing.

Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.

Modify a floor plan view

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
1 - Mech to make it the active view.
2 Right-click in the drawing window, and click View Properties.
3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, click Edit for View Range.
4 In the View Range dialog, do the following:

■ Verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected for the view range parameters.
■ Under Primary Range, for the Top parameter, enter an Offset value of 3000.

5 Click OK twice.
You use multiple views to clearly and effectively communicate different systems information. Different
building professionals use different views during the course of the building project. You will create the
level 1 supply air systems in the 1 - Mech view.

Explore the System Browser

6 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click System Browser.

TIP You can also press F9 (Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. If the System
Browser does not respond, click in the drawing area to make it active, then press F9.

7 Expand the Unassigned systems folder, and expand each default systems to view all of the air terminals
that you placed in the building.

Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 45


IMPORTANT In the System Browser, all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according
to the system that you assigned to them. You assign a system component (mechanical equipment, air terminals,
and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or
by assigning a system component to an existing system. You will learn more about systems in this exercise. For
now, notice that all of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories
in the Unassigned folder. This occurred because each system component must be assigned to a system after it
is placed. So, after you placed the diffusers, Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Supply Air
system category located in the Unassigned folder. They remain in the default systems category until you assign
them to their proper system. As you assign diffusers to systems, the assigned diffusers move from the Unassigned
folder to their respective assigned system folder. Thus, if all system components are assigned, each default system
category would not contain any system components and would be considered empty. The System Browser is a
powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm air systems.

Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems.

Place a VAV (variable air volume) box

8 With the view active, enter ZR, and sketch a zoom region around Office 3 located in the top-left corner
of the floor plan.
The cursor changes to a magnifying glass when Zoom in Region is activated.

TIP Although this view does not contain room tags, you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room
component. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name
and number. If desired, you can add room tags to the mechanical floor plans using the Room Tag tool on the
Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.

9 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Mechanical Equipment.


10 In the Type Selector, select M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 - 200mm Inlet.
11 Move the cursor to the right of the Office 3 door, press Spacebar twice to rotate VAV box 180 degrees, click
to place the VAV box, and press Esc twice.

46 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


Modify VAV box parameters

12 Right-click the VAV box, and click Element Properties.


13 In the Element Properties dialog, do the following:

■ Under Constraints, enter 2900 for Offset.


■ Under Mechanical - Airflow, enter 165 L/s for AirFlow.
■ Click OK.

The offset value places the VAV box in the plenum space (between the level 1 ceiling and the level 2 floor
and above the level 1 air terminals). This VAV box services only Office 3 so the VAV airflow equals that of
the air terminal. Notice that the VAV box listing is placed in the Unassigned folder under the Default
Supply Air system in the System Browser. This is because you have yet to assign it to a system.

Create a secondary air system containing one diffuser

14 Select the Office 3 rectangular diffuser.

15 On the Options Bar, click (Create Supply Air System).


You created a system that includes the air terminal. Next, you add the VAV to this system.

IMPORTANT After you select a system component, system specific tools display on the Options Bar.

16 On the Options Bar, click (Select Equipment for System), and select the VAV box.

Notice that only mechanical equipment highlight and can be selected when using the Select Equipment
for System tool.

TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area, and cleared from the Options Bar, select an air terminal
that you added to the system. This system tool displays along with the other Options Bar system tools.

Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 47


The newly created system that logically connects the air terminal to the VAV box displays in red. This
display indicates that the new system is selected. It does not indicate a ductwork layout path.

Next you create the ductwork to physically connect the air system components (air terminal and VAV).

IMPORTANT The new system named Mechanical Supply Air 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Supply
Air in the Mechanical folder. The organization is from upstream, the VAV (the parent) to downstream, the air
terminal (the child) with the system between (connecting) them. Notice that the air terminal listing moved to
the assigned system but the VAV box is also listed under Unassigned. This is because you have yet to assign the
VAV primary and return air connections to their systems. They remain assign to their respective default systems,
Default Supply Air and Default Return Air.

TIP If you click in the drawing area and the highlighted system clears, place the cursor over the Office 3 air
terminal and press Tab, and select the system. You can also right-click the Mechanical Supply Air 1 listing in the
System Browser, and click Select to select the system.

Create the ductwork

17 With the new system selected, click Layout Path on the Options Bar.
The Layout Path tab appears on the Design Bar providing various layout tools. Notice that Solutions is
selected.

18 On the Options Bar, do the following:

19 ■ Verify that Network is select for Solution Type.

■ Click (Next Solution), and select solution 2.


The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green.

You can also view possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard.

20 On the Options Bar, click Settings.


21 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog, select Main.

48 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


22 Under System Type: Supply Air, do the following:

■ Verify that Rectangular Duct: Radius Elbows / Taps is selected for Duct Type.
■ Enter 2900mm for Offset.

23 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog, select Branch.
24 Under System Type: Supply Air, do the following:

■ Verify that Rectangular Duct: Radius Elbows / Taps is selected for Duct Type.
■ Enter 2900 for Offset.
■ Select Flex Duct Round : Flex - Round for Flex Duct Type.
■ Verify that 1800 is selected for Maximum Flex Duct Length.

25 Click OK.

NOTE Configuring the duct conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them
during your project. You can also configure these settings in the Mechanical Settings dialog by clicking Mechanical
Settings on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar (or Settings ➤ Mechanical Settings) before beginning your
project. For more information, refer to Help.

26 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Layout.
The physical connection composed of ducts and fittings is created.

NOTE All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. For
example, a transition connecting the elbow was automatically added, as was the elbow itself.

IMPORTANT Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. This is because the System Browser
lists system components and systems. The ductwork is a physical not a logical connection, thus it is not part of
the system. For example, you can delete ductwork and the system remains.

Change the geometry display

27 On the View Control Bar located below the bottom left of the drawing area, select Medium for Detail Level.
The duct geometry now displays in 2-line enabling you to better view the ductwork.

Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 49


TIP You can easily change the duct geometry representation. On the View Control Bar, select Coarse detail level
for single line, and Medium or Fine detail level for 2-line.

Note that the arrow over the duct is the diffuser airflow display arrow and not the supply airflow direction
in the duct.

Check duct connectivity

28 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights, and press Tab twice.

The system components and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected.

IMPORTANT When multiple ducts and fittings are connected, you check connectivity by moving the cursor
over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then press Tab. The first time you press Tab, the branch to
which the duct is connected highlights. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected
ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of
connected ducts, fittings, and equipment. If the entire network does not highlight, then you know that a
disconnection exists. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. You can repair
the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then
dragging it back again to reconnect. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between
the components that make the connection. Rerouting usually correct this issue.

Size the duct

29 Place the cursor over the duct, and press Tab twice to highlight the duct and the air terminal, and click to
select them.
Do not highlight or select the VAV box.

30 On the Options Bar, click Sizing.


31 In the Duct Sizing dialog, under Sizing Method, do the following:

■ Select Friction, and enter .65 Pa/m.


■ Verify that Only is selected.
■ Under Constraints, verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing, and that Restrict
Height and Restrict Width are cleared.
■ Click OK.

50 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


The Office 3 low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Friction method at .65 Pascals
per one meter of ductwork. Other sizing methods and values can also be used as well.

IMPORTANT The Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. It does not report the sizing
settings of the selected duct.

Create a secondary air system containing 2 diffusers

32 Click in the drawing area, enter ZR, and sketch a zoom region around Offices 4 and 5 (the offices
immediately below Office 3).
33 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Mechanical Equipment.
34 In the Type Selector, select M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 - 200mm Inlet.
35 Move the cursor to the right of the Office 4 door, press Spacebar twice to rotate VAV box 180 degrees, click
to place the VAV box, and click Modify on the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

36 In the left column of the System Browser, in the Unassigned folder under Default Supply Air, double-click
the second VAV box listed.
You can also right-click the second VAV box listed, and click Element Properties.

IMPORTANT Remember that all system components that you have not assigned to a system are placed in the
Unassigned folder in the System Browser.

Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 51


TIP To locate a system component in the System Browser, right-click the component in the left column, and
click Select from the context menu. The component highlights in the drawing area. Note that the correct view
must be active to see the highlighted component. If not, click Show from the context menu to open the
appropriate window and zoom in on the selected system component.

37 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, enter 2900mm for Offset, and enter 350 L/s for
AirFlow, and click OK.
This VAV airflow is the total airflow from the Office 4 and Office 5 air terminals.

TIP You can verify the airflow for the air terminals by opening the Air Terminal Schedule that you created in a
past exercise, or select an air terminal and the airflow displays on the Options Bar.

38 Select the Office 4 rectangular diffuser.


The selected diffuser and its connector highlights.

NOTE After you select a system component, the selected component and its connector(s) highlight.

39 Place the cursor over the diffuser connector, right-click, and click Create Supply Air System from the context
menu.

You can also select the diffuser and click (Create Supply Air System) on the Options Bar.

NOTE Remember that after select Create Supply Air System from the context menu or click on the
Options Bar, a new system is immediately created. This system includes the selected system component(s). You
can verify this new system in the System Browser.

40 Click (Edit System).


The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools. Notice that the
Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name, system equipment, and number of elements
in the active being edited.

41 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar, click Add To System.
System components that were not selected for this system are grayed out.

42 Place the cursor over the Office 5 rectangular diffuser.

52 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


43 Notice that the cursor changes to indicate that Add To System is active.

44 Select the Office 5 rectangular diffuser.


The bottom diffuser is no longer grayed out as it is now part of the system. On the Options Bar, the number
of elements has increased to 2.

45 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar, click Select Equipment.
46 Place the cursor over the VAV box located outside Office 4.
Notice that the cursor changes indicating that Select Equipment is active.

47 Select the VAV box.


On the Options Bar, the selected VAV is listed for System Equipment.

48 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar, click Finish System.
49 Place your cursor over the Office 4 rectangular diffuser and press Tab to display the new system.

Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 53


If you leave the mouse stationary, a tooltip displays the system name as Duct Systems : Mechanical Supply
Air 2.

50 Click to select the system.


The system displays in red.

Modify the layout path and create the ductwork

51 On the Options Bar, click Layout Path.


52 On the Options Bar, verify that Network is selected for Solution Type.
53 Use the left or right arrow keys on your keyboard to view the various layout solutions, and select solution
3.

54 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green.
You already configured the duct conversion settings for the first system. These settings remain the same
and do not need to be changed.

54 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Layout.
Ignore the warning reporting that no auto-route solution was found. You can click in the drawing area to
close the warning.
The ductwork physically connecting the system components is created.

Notice that the main is open and an endcap is needed to close the duct. This was the reason for the warning
message.

Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 55


IMPORTANT When creating layouts, you are creating the physical duct and not altering the logical system. So,
if a layout solution causes errors (not warnings) while attempting create duct, it is because the duct usually has
insufficient space to be created. You can either relocate the VAV box, select or modify a different layout solution
using the Layout Path tool, or modify the duct manually. Remember to check duct connectivity after modifying
ductwork. If a warning occurs, you can review it and take action if necessary, or click in the drawing area to close
the warning and continue your work.

Add an endcap

55 Zoom in on the open (left) end of the main duct in Office 4.

NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place an endcap.

56 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct Fitting.


57 In the Type Selector, select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard.
58 Move the cursor over the end of the main, and after the end point snap displays, click to place the endcap.
Notice that the centerline snap displays to aid in fitting placement.

59 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool.

Size the duct

60 Place the cursor over the duct, and press Tab twice to highlight the duct and the air terminals, and click to
select them.
Do not highlight or select the VAV box.

61 On the Options Bar, click Sizing.


62 In the Duct Sizing dialog, under Sizing Method, do the following:

■ Select Friction, and enter .65 Pa/m.


■ Verify that Only is selected.
■ Under Constraints, verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing, and that Restrict
Height and Restrict Width are cleared.
■ Click OK.

56 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


The low pressure secondary air system ductwork for Offices 4 and 5 is sized using the Friction method at
.65 Pascals per one meter of ductwork.

IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. It does not
report the sizing settings of the selected duct.

Check duct connectivity

63 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights, and press Tab twice.
The VAV box, air terminals, and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected.

Next, you create a low pressure secondary air system in which you modify the layout path and add a new
system component to it. However, this time you will add the component after the ductwork has been
created.

Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 57


Create and modify a secondary supply air system containing multiple diffusers

64 Right-click in the drawing area, click Zoom in Region from the context menu.
65 In the 1 - Mech view, sketch a zoom region around the air terminals in Open 1 (the large open space).

66 Use your mouse scroll wheel to adjust the view as shown below.

67 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Mechanical Equipment.


68 In the Type Selector, select M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 - 200mm Inlet.
69 Move the cursor to the left of the air terminals, and click to place the VAV box.

70 Click Modify on the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

58 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


71 Select the VAV, and on the Options Bar, click .
72 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, enter 2900 for Offset, and enter 825 for AirFlow, and
click OK.
This is the total amount of airflow for the 5 air terminals that will be connected. You can refer to the Air
Terminal Schedule or select each air terminal to verify this information.

73 While pressing CTRL, select the 5 air terminals to the right of the VAV.
Do not select the air terminal in the upper-right corner. You will add this later.
The selected diffusers highlight in red.

74 On the Options Bar, click .


The new supply air system displays in red.

The new system named Mechanical Supply Air 3 is now listed in the System Browser under Supply Air in
the Mechanical folder. Notice that the selected diffusers are included in the system.

TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area, and the red system display cleared, place the cursor over one of
the air terminals in the system, and press TAB once to highlight the system. Then, click to select the system.

75 On the Options Bar, click .


76 Select the VAV to add it to the system.

Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 59


The system displays in red and now includes the VAV. Remember that this display indicates that the new
system is selected. It does not indicate a ductwork layout path.

You have logically connected the air system components. Next, you create the ductwork to physically the
system components.

Modify the layout path and create the ductwork

77 With the system selected, click Layout Path on the Options Bar.
78 On the Options Bar, do the following:

■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type.

■ Click , and select solution 3.


The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green.

79 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.


80 In the drawing area, select the left section of the main.

60 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


After you select the main, notice that drag controls display.

IMPORTANT Layout Path provides 2 drag controls enabling you to modify the layout. The parallel control
(horizontal and vertical arrows) move the layout horizontally and vertically. The end control points (dots) moves
the layout ends in any direction.

81 Click the parallel drag control and drag the left section of the main down until it snaps creating a straight
path to the VAV.

82 Repeat this procedure and snap the right section of the main creating a straight main to the VAV.

Next, you need to modify the branch layout.

83 With Modify selected on the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar, select each of the 2 branches and drag
them to their new locations as shown.

Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 61


84 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Layout.
The ductwork is created. Remember that all duct and fittings are created automatically according to the
duct conversion settings that you configured earlier. The system components are now physically connected.

NOTE If flex duct is created instead of duct fittings, the branch path is too close to the diffuser. Undo the layout,
and reuse the Layout Path to modify the branch layout.

A change has occurred in the air system design, and you will need to add an air terminal to this system
and connect it to the existing ductwork.

Add a diffuser to a system containing ductwork

85 Select the main duct, and click on the Options Bar.

IMPORTANT After system components (air terminals, mechanical equipment, and so on) are logically connected
by a system and ductwork is created, you can select the duct or component to display system controls on the
Options Bar. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection).

86 On the Edit Systems tab of the Design Bar, click Add to System.
87 Select the upper-right diffuser to add it to the system.

62 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


Notice that on the Options Bar, the Number of Elements increased to 6. This verifies the added diffuser.
You can also verify the added diffuser by referring to the system in the System Browser.

88 On the Edit Systems tab of the Design Bar, click Finish System.

TIP You can also add a system component (air terminal, VAV, and so on) to a system by right-clicking the system
component connector and selecting Add to System from the context menu. Then, select a system component
that is already part of a system. The new system component is now part of the same system.

89 Place the cursor over the new diffuser and press TAB once to highlight the logical connection.

Next, you need to manually modify the ductwork to physically connect the diffuser.

90 Use the mouse scroll wheel and zoom in on the end of the ductwork.
91 While pressing CTRL, and working from the end of the main, select the transition, duct segment, elbow,
and the other duct segment.

92 Right-click, and click Delete on the context menu.

Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 63


The rectangular to round duct transition fitting is too close to the main. You need to widen the distance
between the 2 elements, otherwise an error will occur when you attempt to size the duct.

93 Zoom the view, select the transition fitting, and locate the top connector.

94 Drag the connector (and flex duct) straight down toward the diffuser to shorten the flex duct length and
provide sufficient space to create the duct.

NOTE If you are moving the transition fitting only, then you are dragging the lower connector. Undo and drag
the top transition connector to relocate the fitting and flex duct.

At this point, you can right-click the connector, and click Draw Duct on the context menu to draw the
duct. However, continue using the Layout Path tool. You will draw duct in the next exercise.

95 Zoom out the view, and select an air terminal in the system to display the system tools on the Options
Bar.
96 Click Layout Path on the Options Bar.
97 On the Options Bar, do the following:

■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type.

64 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


■ Click , and select solution 1

98 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Layout.
The new ductwork is created. Ignore the warning message.

Due to the takeoff based duct type, the main is open and it requires an endcap to close the duct. This caused
the warning message to display.

Add an endcap

99 Zoom in on the open end of the main duct.

NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place an endcap.

100 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct Fitting.
101 In the Type Selector, select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard.
102 Move the cursor over the end of the main, and after the end point snap displays, click to place the endcap.

Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 65


Notice that the centerline snap also displays to aid in fitting placement.

103 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool.

Check duct connectivity

104 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights, and press Tab twice.
The system components and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected.

TIP Depending on your ductwork layout, you may need to press TAB 2 or 3 times to check connectivity.

Size the duct

105 Right-click the VAV box, and click Element Properties from the context menu.
106 Under Mechanical - Airflow, change the airflow to 990 L/s.
You need to change the airflow because you added an air terminal to the system.

107 Place the cursor over the main duct, and click TAB twice to highlight the duct and diffusers but not the
VAV, and click to select them.

66 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


The selection displays in red.

108 On the Options Bar, click Sizing.


109 In the Duct Sizing dialog, under Sizing Method, do the following:

■ Select Friction, and enter .65 Pa/m.


■ Verify that Only is selected.
■ Under Constraints, verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing, and that Restrict
Height and Restrict Width are cleared.
■ Click OK.

This low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Friction method at .65 Pascals per one
meter of ductwork. Other sizing methods and values can also be used as well.

IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. It does not
report the sizing settings of the selected duct.

Next, you complete the low pressure secondary supply air systems for level 1.

Complete the level 1 secondary supply air systems

110 In the Project Browser, under Mechanical, double-click 1 - Mech floor plan to make it the active view.
111 Using the systems creation methods that you learned, complete the level 1 system layout according to the
following specifications and floor plan layout:

■ M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 - 200mm Inlet with a 2900mm offset. Reposition and rotate
if necessary.
■ For VAV airflow, specify the air terminal airflow. If multiple air terminals are connected to a system,
specify the total air terminal airflow for VAV airflow.

Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 67


■ Select and modify a Network layout path solution. You may experience cases where you need to modify
the duct manually such as a drag flex duct segment to connect it. Do not change the duct conversion
settings. Review the no auto-route solution warnings as some may be caused by disconnected diffusers
due to proximity issues and others due to the need for endcap fittings. If you receive errors, see the
note below.
■ Add M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard fittings where needed. Remember to zoom the view
for accurate placement.
■ Size the duct using the Friction sizing method at .65 Pa/m and select Only. Select Calculated Size Only
for Branch Sizing. Verify that all Other options are cleared. If you receive errors, see the note below.
■ Use TAB to check duct connectivity after creating ductwork and after performing sizing.

IMPORTANT Remember that when creating layouts and sizing duct, you are creating and sizing the physical
duct and not altering the logical system. So, if a layout solution or duct sizing causes errors or it seems incorrect,
it is because either the duct usually has insufficient space, an offset elevation is incorrectly specified, or the duct
or duct fittings are not connected properly. You can either relocate the VAV box, modify the layout, select a
different layout solution using the Layout Path tool, modify the duct manually, or reinsert duct fittings. You
should always check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork.

The completed level 1 secondary supply air systems are shown below. Note that created ductwork may
vary slightly from the illustration.

Next, you create the low pressure secondary supply air systems for level 2.

Create the level 2 secondary supply air systems

112 Use the 2 - Mech mechanical floor plan view. Verify that Associate Level (Level 2) is selected for all View
Range parameters, set the Primary Range Top Offset to 3000mm and the Detail Level to Medium.
113 Using the systems creation methods that you learned for level 1, create the level 2 system and duct layout
according to the following specifications and floor plan layout:

■ M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 - 200mm Inlet with a 2900mm offset. Reposition and rotate
if necessary.

68 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


■ For VAV airflow, specify the air terminal airflow. If multiple air terminals are connected to a system,
specify the total air terminal airflow for VAV airflow.
■ Select and modify a Network layout path solution. You may experience cases where you need to modify
the duct manually such as a drag flex duct segment to connect it. Do not change the duct conversion
settings. Review the no auto-route solution warnings as some may be caused by disconnected diffusers
due to proximity issues and others due to the need for endcap fittings. If you receive errors, see the
note above.
■ Add M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard fittings where needed. Remember to zoom the view
for accurate placement.
■ Size the duct using the Friction method at .65 Pa/m and select Only. Select Calculated Size Only for
Branch Sizing. Verify that all Other options are cleared. If you receive errors, see the note above.
■ Use TAB to check duct connectivity after creating ductwork and after performing sizing.

The completed level 2 secondary supply air systems are shown below. Again note that the created ductwork
may vary slightly from the illustration.

114 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save.
115 In the Save As dialog, enter Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems Training for File name, navigate
to the folder of your choice, and click Save.

In this exercise, you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. You used the Create Supply
Air Systems tool to logically connect the air terminals to the VAV boxes. You also modified a system by adding an air
terminal to an existing system. After creating each system, you used the Layout Path tool to create and modify duct
layouts to physically connect the system components. You also specified VAV airflow, checked duct connectivity, sized
the ductwork, and validated the systems in the System Browser. In the next exercise, you create 2 different views to
validate the ductwork geometry.

Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry


In this exercise, you use 2 different types of views to validate the duct geometry of the secondary supply air systems
that you created. Although you already checked duct connectivity, it is recommended to validate the duct geometry
to confirm that the geometry corresponds to your design intent.

Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 69


Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Using Views for Duct Validation.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
1 - Mech to make it the active view.

Create and use a section view to validate duct geometry

2 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area, and click Zoom to Fit.
This zooms the view to fit the drawing area.

3 Place the cursor in the drawing area, enter ZR, and sketch a zoom region around Offices 3, 4, and 5.

TIP Although room tags were not copied when you created this view, you can identify a room by placing the
cursor over the room component. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar)
confirm the room name and number.

4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Section.


Adding a section view is a 2-click process. The first click specifies the section head, and the second click
specifies the section tail. After you add the section, you can flip the view direction or modify the extents
of the view.

5 Place the cursor just above the Office 3 air terminal and click to set the start point for the section, move
the cursor down and click just below the Office 5 air terminal to set the end point.

A new section view named Section 1 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???.

6 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section), right-click Section 1, and
click Properties.
7 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select HVAC for Sub Discipline, and click OK.
The section relocates under HVAC.

70 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


8 In the drawing area, click the section.
The selected section displays in red.

9 Using the shape handles (triangles) on the far right, drag the clip planes of the view so that you capture
only the systems that you created and set the depth just past the VAV boxes as shown.
You many need to zoom out to view the shape handles.

10 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


The section head displays in blue, similar to the level heads in the elevation view. All section heads are
linked directly to their corresponding section view.

11 Double-click the section head to open the Section 1 view.


12 On the View Control Bar, select Medium for Detail Level, and Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style.
The system geometry displays with shading and outlined edges.

13 Use the mouse scroll wheel and zoom in on the bottom-right duct servicing offices 4 and 5, and verify that
the geometry and location of the duct that you created is as you expect it to be.

Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 71


14 Continue validate the duct geometry of the other secondary supply air systems in the Section view.
15 Sections are extremely useful in visualizing the detailed connections between ductwork and equipment in
a vertical space. They offer easy and immediate accessibility to all floors. You will create a number of sections
to both inspect and modify the duct layouts that you create.

Modify and use a 3D view to validate duct geometry

16 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


17 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views, and double-click
3D Mech to make it the active view.
18 On the View Control Bar, select Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style.
Notice that in the 3D Mech view, all of the mechanical elements display as shaded with edges but all
architectural elements displays as halftone underlays that highlight when you move the cursor over them.
This allows you to quickly and easily target your mechanical systems without the architecture obstructing
the mechanical design.

19 Right-click in the drawing area, and click View Properties.


20 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, select Section Box, and click OK.
A section box displays around the building model.

NOTE A section box allows you to limit the view so that you can target only the geometry that you want to
view. It is especially helpful in 3D views in which the three dimensional space makes it difficult to view some
geometry.

21 In the drawing area, click the section box and locate the top center drag handle.

72 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


22 Zoom in on the view and slowly drag the top center drag handle down to adjust the crop boundary until
the plenum space for the level 1 ceiling is exposed.

TIP Release the drag handle at certain points to see a preview of the section at the current crop boundary
position.

23 Click in the drawing area to deactivate the crop boundary.

24 On the View toolbar, click (Dynamically Modify View).


25 In the Dynamic View dialog, use the Zoom, Scroll, and Spin buttons to verify that the Office 3, 4, and 5
duct geometry is as you expected.

26 Zoom in on each air system to verify that the geometry and location of the systems that you created are
as you expect them to be.
3D views allow you to validate geometry of multiple duct runs in a three dimensional space by using the
zoom and spin controls. You will use both section and 3D views during your systems designing.

27 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save.


28 In the Save As dialog, enter Using Views for Duct Validation Training for File name, navigate to the
folder of your choice, and click Save.

In this exercise you created a section view and used a 3D view to validate the secondary supply air system duct geometry.
In the next exercise, you draw the primary supply air system ductwork.

Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 73


Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct
In this exercise, you draw the high pressure primary supply air ductwork and connect the primary to the VAV boxes.
Unlike the previous exercise in which you created the systems first and then selected from a series of duct layouts, you
manually draw the primary duct and connect to the VAVs. You will create the primary systems in a later exercise. This
exercise allows you to become familiar with manually drawing and modifying ductwork which is very important for
resolving duct layout errors caused by insufficient space.
Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Drawing Primary Supply Air Duct.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.

Draw the primary duct

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
1 - Mech to make it the active view.
2 Enter ZR, and sketch a zoom region around Mechanical/Electrical room.

3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct.


4 In the Type Selector, select Round Duct : Taps.
5 On the Options Bar, do the following;

■ Verify that 300 is selected for diameter (D:).


■ Verify that Auto Connect is selected.
■ Enter 2900 for Offset.
■ Verify that Angle is cleared.

6 Place the cursor in the Mechanical/Electrical room until a snap displays aligning to the furthermost left
partition of the Ladies’ Room above, and click to specify the start point.

74 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


7 Move the cursor to the left and when the listening dimensions appear, enter 2750 to specify a 2750mm
length for the first duct segment.

8 Press Enter to specify the end point of the first duct segment.
9 Move the cursor straight down and draw the second duct segment 9800mm, and click to specify the end
point.
10 Now, move the cursor down and 45 degrees to the right, and after the listening dimensions appear, enter
11000, and press Enter to specify the third segment end point.

Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 75


NOTE The primary duct needs to clear the exterior wall located on the left. Depending on the location of the
first duct start point, it may not clear the wall. If the duct does not clear the wall, place the cursor over the duct,
press Tab, and select the duct (duct displays in red). Then, use the Move tool to move the horizontal duct segment
(located over the Mechanical/Electrical) up until the duct clears the exterior wall.

11 Finally, move the cursor to the right, and after the listening dimensions appear, enter 3000, and press Enter
to specify the third segment end point.

12 Press Esc once to stop drawing the current duct.


Notice that the Draw tool remains active. If you happened to press Esc twice and closed the Draw tool, click
Duct on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar to open it again.
Next, you connect VAV boxes to the primary.

Connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct

13 Enter ZR, and sketch a zoom region around the VAV box outside of Office 3.
14 Place the cursor over the Office 3 VAV box supply air connection, after the connector snap displays, click
to specify the start point.

76 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


NOTE You must place the cursor over the connector to connect to the VAV primary. When drawing duct, use

the connector snap to quickly and accurately locate a connector. If you pause briefly, a tooltip appears
confirming the connector.

15 Move the cursor to the right to begin drawing duct, and press Spacebar to automatically change the duct
diameter and offset to match the 200mm VAV primary connector diameter.
You can also change the duct diameter from the Options Bar.

TIP When drawing duct, press the Spacebar after you specify your start point and move the cursor to begin
drawing duct. This automatically specifies the duct diameter or width and height, and offset parameter to match
that of the selected start point object. If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short, you pressed
Spacebar before you began drawing duct. Note that the Spacebar does not automatically specify the duct type.
You should always verify the duct type in the Type Selector.

16 Draw the first duct segment 600mm to the right, and click to specify the end point.

17 Move the cursor down and draw a 2450mm vertical second duct segment, and press Enter to specify the
end point.

Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 77


18 Move the cursor to the right and over the primary duct, and click after the centerline snap displays to
specify the end point for the third duct segment.

TIP When connecting duct to the centerline of another duct, the centerline snap makes the process quick and
easy.

After you click to specify the end point, the duct run connecting the Office 3 VAV to the primary is complete.

19 With the Draw tool open, zoom in on the VAV box outside of Office 4.

78 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


TIP When zooming or reorienting a view that uses Medium or Fine for Detail Level, you may experience
performance issues depending on the size and complexity of the system geometry. On the View Control Bar,
change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe to improve performance. This allows you to continue to use the
2-line display. You can also specify the Detail Level to Coarse for viewing a single line display

20 Place the cursor over the Office 4 VAV box supply air connection, and after the connector snap displays,
click to specify the start point.
21 Draw the duct to the right and connect it to the centerline of the primary.

22 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool.


Because the duct is complete after you connected it to the primary, you only need to press ESC once to
deactivate the Draw tool.

23 Zoom in on the Office 18 VAV box located in the lower-middle of the level 1 floor plan.
Remember that you quickly locate a room by highlighting the room component and viewing the room
tag information on a tooltip and on the Status Bar.

24 Select the Office 18 VAV, and place the cursor over the primary supply air connector.

25 Right-click, and click Draw Duct from the context menu.


26 In the Type Selector, verify that Round Duct : Taps is selected.

TIP If you right-click a connector and click Draw Duct on the context menu, the duct diameter, or width and
height, and offset automatically match that of the selected connector. However, you should always verify the
duct type in the Type Selector.

27 Draw a duct segment that connects to the centerline of the primary.

Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 79


28 Press Esc.
29 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.
30 Using the draw duct methods that you learned, zoom the view to the right of the primary, and connect
the 2 VAVs in Open 1 to the primary duct as shown.

31 The 5 secondary supply air system duct runs are now physically connected to the primary.

Check connectivity

32 Place the cursor over the primary duct and press Tab twice to check connectivity up to but not including
the VAV boxes.

80 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


You can press TAB 3 times to check connectivity including the VAVs and secondary system ductwork.

33 Validate the primary duct geometry using the Section 1 and 3D Mech views.

NOTE Do not size the primary at this time, you will do that in a later exercise.

IMPORTANT Notice that the VAV boxes are still listed in the Unassigned folder under Default Supply Air. This
is because you physically connected the VAVs to the primary duct but you have not logically connected the VAVs
with a system. You will create a system for the primary and add the VAVs to it in a later exercise.

Complete the level 1 primary duct

34 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
1-Mech to make it the active view.
35 Using the duct drawing methods that you learned, complete the level 1 primary duct according to the
following specifications and floor plan layout:

■ Draw the primary duct using Round Duct : Taps. The main has a 300mm diameter and the connections
to the VAV boxes have a diameter of 200mm. On the Options Bar, specify a 2900mm offset, and verify
that Auto Connect is selected, and Angle is cleared. Use approximate duct segment lengths from the
layout below.
■ Do not connect the Office 11 VAV because a routing conflict exists. You will connect this VAV in a
later exercise.
■ Do not size the primary. You will size the primary in a later exercise.
■ Check connectivity, and use the Section 1 and 3D Mech views for duct geometry validation.

IMPORTANT Remember that when drawing duct, you may encounter errors when connecting to the primary
duct or a VAV. This is usually caused by insufficient space preventing duct creation or fitting insertion. Modify
the duct length or relocate the VAV box to make sufficient space, and use the Draw Duct tool to reconnect.
Finally, remember to always check connectivity and validate the duct geometry.

Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 81


The completed level 1 air system layout is shown below.

Draw the level 2 primary duct

36 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
2 - Mech to make it the active view.
37 Using the duct drawing methods that you learned, complete the level 2 primary duct according to the
following specifications and floor plan layout:

■ Draw the primary duct using Round Duct : Taps. The main has a 300mm diameter and the connections
to the VAV boxes have a diameter of 200mm. On the Options Bar, specify a 2900mm offset, and verify
that Auto Connect is selected, and Angle is cleared. Use approximate duct segment lengths from the
layout below.
■ Do not connect the Office 26 VAV because a routing conflict exists. You will connect this VAV in a
later exercise.
■ Do not size the primary. You will size the primary in a later exercise.
■ Check connectivity, and use the Section 1 and 3D Mech views for duct geometry validation.

82 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


The completed level 2 air system layout is shown below.

38 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save.


39 In the Save As dialog, enter Drawing Primary Supply Air Duct Training for File name, navigate to
the folder of your choice, and click Save.

In this exercise, you used the Duct tool to manually draw the high pressure primary supply air duct and physically
connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct. You will connect the primary duct to AC units in a later exercise. While
drawing duct, you learned how to use connectors to create ductwork. Finally, you checked duct connectivity and
validated duct geometry using different views. In the next exercise, you resolve routing conflicts with the primary duct.

Resolving Routing Conflicts


Often as you create ductwork, you encounter routing conflicts such as the placement of fittings that prevents a duct
connection. You can resolve these conflicts manually or automatically. In this exercise, you use the Routing Solutions
tool to automatically resolve duct routing conflicts with the high pressure supply air primary duct by selecting from a
series of routing solutions.
Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Resolving Routing Conflicts.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.

Resolve a routing conflict on level 1

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
1- Mech to make it the active view.
2 Zoom in on the VAV box outside Office 11 located in the upper-right corner of the floor plan, and notice
that the duct run has an elbow that does not allow a connection from the VAV box to the primary.

Resolving Routing Conflicts | 83


3 Place the cursor over the primary duct run, press Tab once, and click to select the primary and its fittings.
The selected primary duct run displays in red.

4 On the Options Bar, click Routing Solutions.


Notice that 2 end control points display enabling you to modify the duct ends in any direction. However,
you will use the solutions to resolve the routing conflict.

5 Use the left and right arrow buttons on the Options Bar or to view the different routing solutions.
6 Select Solution 1, and click Finish.

84 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


The 45 degree elbows are replaced by a 90 degree elbow.

7 Select the VAV box, and place the cursor over the primary supply air connector.

8 Right-click, and click Draw Duct from the context menu.


9 In the Type Selector, verify that Round Duct : Taps is selected.
10 Draw the duct from the primary air connector to the centerline of the primary below, and click to specify
the end point.

Next, you check connectivity.

11 Place the cursor over the primary, and press TAB twice.

Resolving Routing Conflicts | 85


All connections to the VAVs highlight indicating that they are physically connected.

IMPORTANT Unlike the Layout Path tool which allows you to create entire duct layouts, the Routing Solutions
tool allows you to modify a specific segment of duct. Both tools provide a series of solutions and the ability to
modify those solutions.

12 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window.

Resolve a routing conflict on level 2

13 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
2 - Mech to make it the active view.
14 Zoom in on the Office 26 VAV box located in the upper-right corner of the floor plan.
15 Using the process that you just learned, select a routing solution to resolve the routing conflict that prevents
the Office 26 VAV box from connecting to the primary, then connect the VAV to the primary.
The routing solution and connection are shown below.

16 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save.


17 In the Save As dialog, enter Resolving Routing Conflicts Training for File name, navigate to the folder
of your choice, and click Save.

In this exercise, you used the Routing Solutions tool to resolve routing conflicts. You viewed various routing solutions
and selected the best solution to resolve 2 routing conflicts. After resolving the conflicts, you manually drew duct to
connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct. In the next exercise, you size the high pressure supply air primary duct.

Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method


In a previous exercise, you created the high pressure primary duct that supplies air to the VAV boxes but you have yet
to sized the primary. In this exercise, you size the primary to meet airflow requirements using the same sizing tool that
you previously used to size the low pressure secondary supply air ductwork. However, you use the Velocity sizing
method rather than the Friction method. Before sizing the primary, you must first determine the direction of the airflow
in the primary duct.
The airflow direction inside the primary must be determined to accurately size the primary duct run. Considering that
both ends of the primary are open, you place an endcap where no further connections are planned. This determines
the airflow direction.
Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Duct Sizing - Velocity.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.

86 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


Place an endcap on the level 1 primary to determine airflow

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
1 - Mech to make it the active view.
2 Zoom in on the lower end of the left primary located outside Office 18.
The upper end of the primary duct run will connect to a rooftop AC unit.

NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place the endcap.

3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct Fitting.

NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Mechanical.

4 In the Type Selector, select M_Round Duct Endcap : M_Standard.


5 Move the cursor over the end of the left primary duct run, and after the end point snap displays, click to
place the endcap.
Notice that the centerline snap displays to aid in fitting placement.

6 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool.

IMPORTANT When sizing duct that has multiple open ends, you must place endcaps to close all open ends
except the one that connects to the air source. This determines the airflow direction and the duct will size
accurately.

7 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.

Size the level 1 primary duct

8 Place the cursor on the left primary duct run and press Tab twice to highlight the entire run including the
VAV connections but not the VAV boxes, and click to select it.

Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method | 87


The selected primary displays in red.

9 On the Options Bar, click Sizing.

IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. It does not
report the sizing settings of the selected duct.

10 In the Duct Sizing dialog, under Sizing Method, do the following:

■ Select Velocity, and enter 12.5 m/s.


■ Verify that Only is selected.
■ Under Constraints, verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing, and that Restrict
Height and Restrict Width are cleared.
■ Click OK.

88 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


The sized left primary is shown below.

IMPORTANT Remember that when creating layouts and sizing duct, you are creating and sizing the physical
duct and not altering the logical system. So, if a layout solution or duct sizing causes errors or it seems incorrect,
it is because either the duct usually has insufficient space, or duct or duct fittings are not connected properly.
You can either relocate the VAV box, modify the layout, select a different layout solution using the Layout Path
tool, modify the duct manually, or reinsert duct fittings. You should always check duct connectivity after modifying
ductwork.

11 Place the cursor over each left side of the primary duct run, and press TAB twice.
The primary and the connections to the VAVs highlight indicating that they are physically connected.
Next, you place an endcap on the right side of the primary in order size the duct.

12 Zoom in on the lower end of the right primary duct run located outside Office 17.

13 Using the process that you just learned, place a round duct endcap at the lower end of the right primary
duct run, and size this primary using the same sizing method and parameters that you used for the left
primary.

Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method | 89


The sized right primary is shown below.

14 Using the method you have learned, check the connectivity of the right side of the primary duct run.

Size the level 2 primary duct run

15 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
2 - Mech to make it the active view.
16 Using the process that you learned for the level 1 primary duct run, place a round duct endcap on the
lower end of the left and right side of the primary duct run to determine airflow direction.
As in level 1, the upper ends of the primary duct run will connect to a rooftop AC unit.

17 Size both the left and right sides of the primary duct run using the same sizing method and parameters
that you used for the level 1 primary duct run.
18 Check connectivity for both sides of the primary duct.
The completed level 2 primary duct run is shown below.

90 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


19 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save.
20 In the Save As dialog, enter Duct Sizing - Velocity Training for File name, navigate to the folder of
your choice, and click Save.

In this exercise, you sized the primary duct for the building. First, you placed an endcap at the end of each side of the
primary duct run where no connection was planned. This determined the airflow direction inside the primary. Then,
you used the Duct Sizing tool to size the primary using the Velocity sizing method. In the next exercise, you assign a
color fill to the ductwork.

Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct


In this exercise, you assign a color scheme to the ductwork in your project. This procedure is similar to the one that
you used for rooms in a previous exercise. Like room color scheme, duct color scheme can help you communicate your
design immediately and effectively. This makes it much easier to determine whether the plan meets your requirements.
Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Duct Color Scheme.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.

Create a new view

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, right-click 1 -
Mech, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
A new floor plan view called Copy of 1 - Mech is created and becomes the active view.

2 In the Project Browser, right-click Copy of 1 - Mech, and click Rename.


3 In the Rename View dialog, enter 1 - Mech Duct Classes for Name, and click OK.

Apply the color scheme

4 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct Color Scheme Legend.

NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Mechanical.

5 In the Type Selector, verify that Color Scheme Legend : HVAC is selected for color scheme legend type.
Notice that you use the same duct color scheme legend type that you created in a previous exercise called
HVAC. Using the same color scheme legend type allows you to quickly assign consistent color scheme
legends throughout your design.

6 Move the cursor in the drawing area and notice that an outline of the color scheme legend indicates that
no color scheme has been assigned to the view displays.
7 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan, and click to place the
legend.
The color scheme outline follows the cursor movement to help you accurately position the legend.

Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct | 91


8 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog, verify that Duct Color Fill is selected for Color Scheme, and click OK.

Next, you change the color scheme.

NOTE Elevations have been hidden for legend clarity.

Edit the color scheme

9 In the Drawing area, select the duct color scheme legend that you placed, and on the Options Bar, click
Edit Color Scheme.
10 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog, do the following:

■ Select Velocity for Color, and click OK after a warning indicates that colors are not preserved.
■ Select By range.
■ In the At Least column, click in the second row, and enter 7.5 m/s.
■ In the Caption column, delete the existing text, and enter low velocity for the first row, and enter
high velocity for the second row.
■ In the Color column, click in the first row and select Green from the Basic colors in the Color box.
■ In the Color column, click in the second row and select Red from the Basic colors in the Color box.

TIP Color names are displayed under Name in the Color box.

■ Click OK.

92 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


The duct color scheme legend now identifies the duct by velocity. Notice that duct fittings do not have
color scheme applied to them.

Assign color scheme to the level 2 duct

11 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, right-click 2 -
Mech, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
A new floor plan view called Copy of 2 - Mech is created and becomes the active view.

12 In the Project Browser, right-click Copy of 2 - Mech, and click Rename.


13 In the Rename View dialog, enter 2 - Mech Duct Classes for Name, and click OK.
14 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct Color Scheme Legend.
15 In the Type Selector, verify that Color Scheme Legend : HVAC is selected for color scheme legend type.
16 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan, and click to place the
legend.
17 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog, verify that Duct Color Fill is selected for Color Scheme, and click OK.
The same velocity-based color scheme that you created for level 1 is automatically applied to the level 2
duct. Using the same color scheme allow you to quickly assign consistent color throughout your design.
The completed level 2 duct color scheme legend is shown below.

18 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save.


19 In the Save As dialog, enter Duct Color Fill Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice,
and click Save.

Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct | 93


In this exercise, you added duct color scheme legends to both levels of ductwork in your project. You edited the color
scheme by associating colors to velocity parameters and changed the caption text. In the next exercise, you size one
of the secondary supply air system duct runs using the Equal Friction sizing method.

Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method


In 2 previous exercises, you sized the secondary air system ductwork using the Friction sizing method and then you
sized the primary duct run using the Velocity method. In this exercise, you size the duct for one of the secondary air
systems that you previously sized. This allows you to more closely meet airflow requirements for that system. First, you
split the duct main into multiple pieces, and then you size the duct run using the Equal Friction method. Finally, you
tag the main duct of the secondary air system to annotate the duct segment sizes.
Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Duct Sizing - Equal Friction.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.

Locate the secondary air system

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
1 - Mech to make it the active view.
2 In the System Browser, expand the Mechanical systems folder.

TIP If the System Browser is closed, press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close it. If the
System Browser does not respond, click in the drawing area to make it active, then press F9.

All mechanical systems that have been created for the project are organized by system type in the Mechanical
folder. Remember that only systems (logical connections) and the assigned system components are in the
System Browser, not ductwork (physical connections).

3 Right-click Supply Air, and click Expand All.


Every supply air system that you created is listed. Notice that each system listing consists of a system name
and number, such as Mechanical Supply Air 6, and a hierarchy of system components that you assigned
to each system, such as a VAV box and diffusers.

4 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 3, and click Show.


The 1 - Mech view automatically zooms on the selected system, and the system including the assigned
components and the ductwork displays in red.

5 In the Element(s) In View dialog, click Close to deactivate the Show tool.
Notice that the main duct connecting the VAV box to the diffusers is one size.

You need to reduce the size of the main to ensure that the air pressure meets airflow requirements. To
accomplish this, you split the main into multiple duct segments and then size each segment.

94 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


Split the main

6 On the Tools toolbar, click (Split).


7 Move the cursor along the top edge of the main and to the right of the 2 middle diffusers.
8 Watch the listening dimensions, and split the main 2400mm from the end of the main.

TIP When splitting duct in 2-line display, move the cursor along the top or bottom edge of the duct to view
the split line and the listening dimensions.

9 With the Split tool open, split the main to the left of the middle branch at 4300mm from the beginning
of the main.

10 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Split tool.


Notice that a Rectangular Duct Union fitting is automatically inserted to connect the duct at each split.
You can place the cursor over the union and both a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the fitting.

Size the system

11 Move the cursor over the main, and press Tab twice to highlight the ductwork and air terminals located
downstream from the VAV box, and click to select them. Note that the VAV box is not selected.

Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method | 95


12 On the Options Bar, click Sizing.
13 In the Duct Sizing dialog, under Sizing Method, do the following:

■ Select Equal Friction, and enter .65 Pa/m.


■ Under Constraints, verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing, and that Restrict
Height and Restrict Width are cleared.
■ Click OK.

IMPORTANT Equal Friction sizing is an iterative process. The completion time varies according to the speed of
your computer.

NOTE If a Warning dialog opens alerting you that there is no loss defined, ignore this warning. You can click
anywhere in the drawing area to close it.

The low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Equal Friction method at .65 Pascals per
one meter of ductwork.

Notice that as the airflow decreases, transitions are automatically added to reduce duct size and maintain
air pressure. Next, you tag the main to annotate the duct segment sizes.

Tag the main

14 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category.


15 On the Options Bar, do the following:

■ Verify that Horizontal is selected.


■ Clear Leader.
■ Click Tags.

16 In the Tags dialog, under Category, for Ducts, verify that M_Duct Size Tag is loaded, and click Cancel.
17 Move the cursor over the 3 segments of the main, and notice that the tag outline dynamically displays the
size of each segment.
18 Position the tag outline in the center of each segment, and click to place each tag.

96 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


TIP To reposition a tag, select the tag and drag it to a new location. You may want to zoom the view for accurate
placement.

19 Click Modify on the Mechanical tab to deactivate the Tag tool.


The low pressure secondary air system duct run is sized and tagged.

20 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save.


21 In the Save As dialog, enter Duct Sizing - Equal Friction Training for File name, navigate to the folder
of your choice, and click Save.

In this exercise, you sized low pressure secondary air system ductwork to more closely meet airflow requirements. First,
you used the Split tool to split the main into multiple segments, and then you sized the duct run using the Equal
Friction sizing method. Finally, you tagged the main to annotate the duct segment sizes. In the next exercise, you use
the System Inspector to check flow and pressure in the secondary air system that you just sized.

Inspecting Air Systems


In this exercise, you use the System Inspector to inspect the low pressure secondary air systems. The System Inspector
is a unique tool enabling you to inspect each system for airflow, pressure, and pressure loss by placing the cursor over
it. Using this tool, you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them.
Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Inspecting Air Systems.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
2 - Mech to make it the active view.
2 Right-click in the view, click Zoom in Region from the context menu.
3 Draw a zoom region around the lower-right secondary air system in Open 2.

Inspecting Air Systems | 97


You will inspect this system.

4 Select the VAV box that you assigned to the secondary air system.

IMPORTANT To select a system, select any duct segment, duct fitting, diffuser, or mechanical equipment that
you have assigned to a system. System tools display on the Options Bar.

5 On the Options Bar, select (Inspect).


The System Inspector tab opens providing system inspection tools on the Design Bar.

RELATED If you select a system component that has been assigned to more than one system such as an AC

unit or a VAV box and click , the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select a system to inspect.
Each selected system highlights in red enabling you to preview it.

6 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Inspect.

NOTE You can also use System Inspector from in the System Browser. Right-click a system from the System
Browser, and click Inspect from the context menu. After the System Inspector opens, click Inspect from the
System Inspector tab on the Design Bar.

7 Place the cursor over the upper-left flex duct branch of the secondary air system to highlight it.
An inspection flag dynamically reports the airflow, pressure, and pressure loss in the highlighted duct
segment. Arrows display on the duct indicating the airflow direction for both the main and the branches
in the air system. A tooltip also displays the system information.

98 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


IMPORTANT As you inspect a system, remember that all information is color coded according to pressure. Red
information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction, also known as the critical
path.

Notice that the secondary air system and the assigned system components highlight and can be selected
but you cannot select other secondary air systems or the primary duct run. These are not logically connected
to this system.
Next, you inspect 2 areas of the air system to compare information.

Compare system information

8 With the cursor over the upper-left duct segment, click to temporarily place the inspection flag on segment.
9 Place the cursor over the middle duct segment to compare the airflow and pressure information with that
of the upper-left duct segment.

10 Click to place the current inspection flag and close the prior one.
11 Move the cursor over the upper-right air terminal to compare its information with that of the middle duct
segment.
You can continue to use this method to compare inspection information for system components or duct
across the selected system.

12 Click a blank space in the view to close the current inspection flag.

Inspecting Air Systems | 99


13 Continue to inspect the remaining secondary air systems in the building.

TIP You can also inspect systems in a 3D view.

14 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Inspector to deactivate the System Inspector.
15 Use the System Inspector to inspect other secondary air systems in the project.

NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork, the selected system
components or duct must be logically and physically connected. Ductwork and system components must be
connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). For
example, you cannot inspect the primary high pressure duct run because you have not created a system for it.
The primary is physically but not logically connected. In a later exercise, you will create a system for the primary
and then you can inspect the primary duct run.

16 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save.


17 In the Save As dialog, enter Inspecting Air Systems Training for File name, navigate to the folder of
your choice, and click Save.

In this exercise, you used the System Inspector to inspect the airflow direction, airflow, and pressure information for
various systems in the project. You learned that airflow and pressure information is specific to the selected system
component, and that all system information is color-coded for either the duct main or the branch. You also compared
system information across a system. In the next exercise, you place 2 AC units.

Placing Air Conditioning Units


In this exercise, you place 2 air conditioning roof top units (RTU) on the building. You also use create and use new
views to precisely locate the AC units.
Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Placing AC Units.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.

Create a new roof plan view

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans,
right-click Roof, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
A new view called Copy of Roof is created and becomes the active view.

2 In the Project Browser, right-click Copy of Roof, and click Rename.


3 Enter Roof Mech for Name, and click OK.
4 Right-click in the drawing area of the new view, and click View Properties.
5 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Mechanical for Discipline, and HVAC for
Sub-Discipline.
6 Click OK.

100 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


This specifies halftone for all architectural elements in the Roof Mech view. Notice that the level 2 system
components and ductwork display as an underlay. Also notice that the Roof Mech view is now located
under the Mechanical HVAC floor plans in the Project Browser.

Add the AC Unit that services level 2

7 In the Roof Mechanical view, enter ZR, and sketch a zoom region around Men’s Room (located below the
Mechanical/Electrical room).
You need to place the AC unit that services level 2 on the roof above the Men’s Room.

8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Mechanical Equipment.


9 In the Type Selector, select M_Rooftop AC Unit 15 - 25 Ton - Bottom Return Connection : M_15 Ton.
10 Move the cursor over the Men’s Room, and press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the unit.
The AC unit supply connection is now located at the top.

11 Snap to the lower end point of the horizontal partition wall in the Men’s Room as shown.
Zoom in if necessary to locate the lower end point snap.

12 Click to place the AC unit, and then click Modify on the Design Bar.

Placing Air Conditioning Units | 101


Next, you create a section view to precisely relocate the AC unit.

Create a new section view

13 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.


14 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Section.
15 Place the cursor below the AC unit and over the Office 8 VAV box, and click to specify the section start
point.

16 Move the cursor to the right, and after the cursor is past the AC unit, click to specify the section end point.

A new section view named Section 2 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???.

17 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section), right-click Section 2, and
click Properties.
18 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select HVAC for Sub Discipline, and click OK.
The section relocates under HVAC ➤ Sections (Building Section).

19 Select the section tail to display the drag handles.

102 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


20 Drag the top shape handle to adjust the depth view clip plane just past the AC unit. You may need to scroll
the view up to access the top shape handle.

The section should partially capture the VAV on the left.

21 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Relocate the AC unit to the roof surface

22 Double-click the section head to open the Section 2 view.


23 On the View Control Bar, click Medium for Detail Level.
This changes the duct display from single line to 2-line.

24 Zoom in on the AC unit and watch the level indicators, notice that the unit is located on the roof level
and not on the roof surface.

NOTE As with air terminals and VAV boxes, AC units are level-based components. Notice that the roof level is
not referencing the roof surface but the underside of the roof. To place the AC unit on the roof surface, you must
relocate it.

25 Select the AC unit, and click (Move) on the Edit toolbar.

Placing Air Conditioning Units | 103


26 Move the cursor over the bottom-left corner of the AC unit, and after the end point snap displays, click to
specify the move start point.

27 Move the cursor up along the left edge of the AC unit, and after the intersection and centerline snaps
display at the roof surface, (300mm directly above the start point), click to specify the move end point.

This specifies the AC unit offset level of 300mm which moves the AC unit to the roof surface.

TIP You can also specify the offset level in the Element Properties dialog.

Place the level 1 AC unit

28 Using the methods that you learned, place an AC unit for the level 1 supply air system according to the
following specifications and procedures:

■ Work in the Roof Mech view, and place a M_Rooftop AC Unit 15 - 25 Ton - Bottom Return Connection
: M_15 Ton above the Mechanical/Electrical room. First rotate the unit so that the return connection
is at the top. Then snap the top edge of the AC unit to the upper mechanical room wall and click to
place it. Use the Move tool, and move the top edge of the AC unit 500mm down. Next, use the Align
tool (on the Tools toolbar) to align the left edge of the level 1 AC unit to the left edge of the level 2
AC unit. (Remember to select the reference edge first). The AC unit placement is shown below.
Note that you must locate this AC unit above the Mechanical/Electrical room to allow the supply and
return air duct riser to pass through the level 2 Mechanical/Electrical room and into the level 1 plenum
space below.

■ Create a new section view above the AC unit as shown below, and adjust the depth view clip plane to
capture the level 1 AC unit only. Remember to relocate the view in the Project Browser as you did with
the Section 2 view.

104 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


■ Using the new Section 3 view with Medium detail level, relocate the AC unit 300mm above the roof
level to place the AC unit on the roof surface.
■ The 2 AC units and the section headers are as shown.

29 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save.


30 In the Save As dialog, enter Placing AC Units Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your
choice, and click Save.

In this exercise, you added 2 rooftop AC units to the design. You created 2 section views and used the Move and the
Align tools to relocate the AC units to the roof surface. In the next exercise, you connect the AC units to the high
pressure primary supply air ductwork.

Completing the Supply Air Systems


In this exercise, you complete the supply air systems that you began in previous exercises. First, you draw the duct to
physically connect AC units to the high pressure primary supply air ductwork. Then, you create the systems to logically
connect the VAV boxes to the AC units.
Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Completing Supply Air Systems.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.

Modify the 3D Mech view

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views, and double-click
3D Mech to make the view active.
2 Select the section box, and drag the center drag handle up to move the crop boundary past the roof.

Completing the Supply Air Systems | 105


The entire building including the AC units display.

If you like, you can drag the bottom set of drag handles up above the level 1 system to hide that system.
Remember that, if you do this, you will need to reset this boundary to validate the level 1 supply air system
later.

3 On the View toolbar, click (Dynamically Modify View).


4 Use the Spin button on the Dynamic View dialog, and while pressing the middle mouse button, drag the
mouse to spin the model as shown.

TIP You can also press Shift-middle mouse button, and drag the mouse to spin the model.

Next, you tile the Roof Mech and the 3D Mech views so that you can work on and validate your system
design simultaneously.

Tile the views

5 With the 3D Mech view active, click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows.
This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. Note that if this
option is unavailable, the active view is the only open window.

106 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


6 In the Project Browser, under Mechanical, double-click Roof Mech to make it the active view.
7 Enter WT to tile both windows.

TIP When tiling 2 views, the active view is tiled to the left.

8 Zoom the view in both windows as shown.

You are ready to create the duct riser for the level 2 supply air system.

Draw the supply duct riser from the AC Unit to the level 2 plenum space

9 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct.


10 In the Type Selector, select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps.
11 In the Roof Mech view, place the cursor over the center of the level 2 AC unit (lower unit) supply duct
connection, the connector snap displays.

12 Click to specify the duct riser start point.


13 Move the cursor up to begin drawing duct and press Spacebar to match the duct size and offset to the AC
supply connection size and offset.

TIP When drawing duct, press the Spacebar after you specify your start point and move the cursor to begin
drawing duct. This automatically specifies the duct diameter or width and height, and offset parameter to match
that of the selected start point object. If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short, you did not
begin drawing duct before pressing Spacebar You should always verify the duct type in the Type Selector.

14 On the Options Bar, do the following:

■ Enter 1700 for W: (width), and 500 for H: (height).


This specifies the proper dimensions for the duct.

■ Verify that Auto Connect is selected.


■ Enter -750 for Offset, and press Tab.

Completing the Supply Air Systems | 107


The -750mm offset creates the supply duct riser from the Roof reference level down into the level 2 plenum
space and places the riser at the same level as the level 2 supply air system, 2900mm. Notice that the duct
riser is offset from the Roof reference level and not from the roof surface which is the location of the AC
unit.

IMPORTANT When setting offset parameters for system components, Revit MEP offsets the selected component
from the reference level and not its location. If the 2 are different, connections are automatically created. Note
that Auto Connect must be selected on the Options Bar.

15 Move the cursor up, and after listing dimensions display, enter 1050 and press Enter to specify the end
point.

The duct riser is drawn down from the AC unit to 2900mm from level 2, and then the duct continues
horizontally for 1050mm.

Notice that a green supply duct riser symbol displays to indicate that a supply duct riser exists.

16 Click Modify on the Design Bar.


17 Validate the duct riser geometry in the 3D Mech view.

108 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


Notice that the mitered elbow fitting is automatically inserted.

18 Close the Roof Mech view.


You now switch to the 2 - Mech view to more accurately draw the duct in order to connect the primary
supply duct to the duct riser.

Connect the primary duct to the duct riser

19 In the Project Browser, double-click 2 - Mech to make it the active view.


20 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to tile the 2 views, and zoom in on the duct riser in the 2 - Mech view.

TIP When zooming or reorienting a view that uses Medium or Fine for Detail Level, you may experience
performance issues depending on the size and complexity of the system geometry. On the View Control Bar,
change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe to improve performance. This allows you to continue to use the
2-line display. You can also specify the Detail Level to Coarse for viewing a single line display.

Notice that only the duct riser displays. This is because the AC unit is beyond the top view range of the 2
- Mech view. You can change the Top view parameter to see the AC unit, but for this exercise you only
need to see the riser. You can also validate the duct riser geometry in the 3D Mech view.

Completing the Supply Air Systems | 109


21 Zoom out the view to show the duct riser and the left primary duct segment.

The horizontal primary duct segment needs to be removed as it was an approximate location and it is no
longer needed.

22 In the 2 Mech view, select the horizontal primary segment, and while pressing CTRL, select the adjoining
elbow.
The selected items display in red.

23 Press DELETE to delete the selected duct segment and elbow.

24 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct.


25 In the Type Selector, select Round Duct : Taps.
26 On the Options Bar, do the following:

■ For D: (diameter), select 450.


■ Verify that Auto connect is selected.
■ For Offset, verify that 2900 is specified.

27 Place the cursor over the left edge of the duct riser, and after the mid point snap displays, click to specify
the start point.

110 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


28 Move the cursor over the primary, and after the centerline snap displays, click to specify the end point.

The left primary is connected to the AC unit.

29 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool.


30 Validate the geometry in the 3D Mech view.

Completing the Supply Air Systems | 111


Next, you connect the right primary duct to the AC unit.

31 Spin the 3D Mech view around and zoom as shown to validate the right primary connection.

You will also use this view to validate endcap placement.

32 In the 2 - Mech view, pan the view to the right to show the duct riser and the right primary segment.

33 Select the right primary duct, and place the cursor over the end connector.

112 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


34 Drag the connector to right, and past the Mechanical/Electrical room wall.
Notice that the Draw tool opens (pencil icon) as you drag the duct and closes after you release the mouse
button to specify the end point.

35 Select the primary duct.

36 On the Edit toolbar, click (Create Similar).

NOTE When drawing duct either by using Duct draw tool on the Design Bar, or by right-clicking a connector,
you should always verify that the duct type is correct in the Type Selector. However, if you use the Create Similar

tool, , then all connector parameters and the type of the selected object are matched. This eliminates
the need to verify the type in the Type Selector each time you create duct.

37 Place the cursor over the end of the primary, and after the connector snap displays, click and draw the
primary to the left over the wall, and after the centerline snap displays, click to specify the duct segment
end point.

Completing the Supply Air Systems | 113


38 Draw the primary down 1000mm, and click to specify the end point.

39 Draw the primary to the edge of the AC duct riser, and click to specify the segment end point.

40 The primary duct is created and connected to the riser.

114 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


41 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Create Similar tool.
42 Validate the geometry in the 3D Mech view.

You physically connected the primary duct to the AC unit. However, you still need to check connectivity
to make certain that all duct and duct fittings are connected.

Check connectivity

43 In the 2 - Mech view, place the cursor over the duct riser and press Tab twice.

Completing the Supply Air Systems | 115


The entire primary supply air duct run including the VAV box connections highlight indicating that they
are connected. You may want to zoom out to see the entire primary duct run.
You now need to add endcaps to the left primary and to the duct riser to close the ductwork.

Add endcaps

44 In the 2 - Mech view, zoom in on the duct riser.


45 On the Mechanical Tab of the Design Bar, click Duct Fitting.
46 In the Type Selector, select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard.
Notice that the endcap snap follows the cursor.

47 Place your cursor over the top edge, after the endcap snap aligns to the duct edge and the centerline snap
displays, click to add the endcap.

116 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


48 With the Duct Fitting tool open, move the view to the left to show the end of the primary where you
deleted the duct segment and elbow.
49 In the Type Selector., select M_Round Duct Endcap : M_Standard.

TIP It is a best practice to zoom in close for accurate endcap placement. The endcap snap aligns with the duct
edge to indicate proper placement.

50 Place the cursor over the end of the primary duct segment and after the endcap snap aligns and the centerline
snaps displays, click to add the endcap.

51 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool.

Verify endcap placement

52 Place the cursor over the primary duct round endcap to verify endcap placement.

Completing the Supply Air Systems | 117


A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the endcap. Additionally
endcap edges display enabling you identify the endcap.

53 In the 3D Mech view, use the same method to validate the endcap geometry.

54 Using the 2 views, verify the duct riser endcap, and then validate its geometry.
55 Press Tab to check connectivity.
You physically connected the AC unit to the level 2 VAV boxes by drawing ductwork. Next, you finish the
level 2 supply air system by creating a system to logically connect the level 2 VAV boxes to the AC unit.

Create the high pressure supply air system.

56 With the 2 views tiled, click in the 2 - Mech view to make it active, and enter ZF to zoom the view to fit
the window.
57 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner, drag the cursor to the lower right corner
to draw a pick box around the entire level 2 floor plan.

118 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


Notice that all of the selected elements highlight.

58 On the Options Bar, click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements.
59 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, and then select Mechanical Equipment, and click OK.
All level 2 VAV boxes are selected. This is because they are the only mechanical equipment on level 2. You
can verify the selected VAV boxes in the 3D Mech view. Remember that when drawing a pick box or using
cross-picking (right to left dragging) all elements visible in the view range of the current view are selected.
In this case, only the level 2 VAV boxes are within the 2 - Mech view range.

60 On the Options Bar, click (Create Supply Air System) to create a supply air system and assign the
selected VAV boxes to it.

61 Click (Select Equipment for System) to assign the AC unit to the system.
62 Click the 3D Mech view title bar to make the window active, and select the level 2 AC unit.

Completing the Supply Air Systems | 119


You just created the high pressure primary supply air system to logically connect the level 2 VAV boxes to
the rooftop AC unit.

63 Press Esc or click in the drawing area to deactivate the Create Supply Air System tool.

IMPORTANT Although you can draw duct to physically connect system components, all system components
must be logically connected by a system. Remember that systems can be created before or after you draw
ductwork, or even without ductwork. However, ductwork must exist for Revit MEP to perform system calculations
such as airflow and pressure. These calculations are used during duct sizing and can be viewed using the System
Inspector.

Validate the primary supply air system

64 Press F9 to open the System Browser.


65 In the System Browser, expand Mechanical, Supply Air, and notice that the rooftop AC unit is listed
66 Expand M_Rooftop AC Unit 15 -25 Ton - Bottom Return Connection : M_15 Ton to display the Mechanical
Supply Air 24 system listing.
This is the system that you just created.

67 Expand Mechanical Supply Air 24 to view the VAV boxes.

IMPORTANT The system components (air terminals and VAV box) that you assigned to a system are organized
in a hierarchy from upstream (parent) to downstream (child). In the Unassigned folder, notice that only level 1
VAV boxes are listed in the Default Supply Air category. This is because you have assigned all level 2 VAV supply
air connectors to the secondary and primary supply air systems. After you assign the level 1 system components
to a primary supply air system, all supply air system components will be assigned and the Default Supply Air
category will be empty.

68 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 24, and click Select.

120 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


The new level 2 primary supply air system highlights in red.

Next, you inspect the system.

Inspect the primary supply air system

69 In the System Browser, right-click Mechanical Supply Air 24, and click Inspect.

IMPORTANT Another way to select a system is to select any duct segment, duct fitting, diffuser, or mechanical
equipment that has been assigned to a system. You can then use system tools from the Options Bar. Ductwork
must exist to access the System Inspector. If you select a system component that has been assigned to multiple
systems such as an AC unit or a VAV box, the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select the system to
inspect.

70 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Inspect.


The System Inspector tool opens.

71 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Inspect.


72 Click a blank space in the 2 - Mech drawing area to make the view active.
73 Move the cursor over the primary supply air system duct run to inspect the air flow and pressure within
the duct.
Remember that you can click to place a temporary inspection flag in the view enabling you to compare
inspection information.

74 Make the 3D Mech view active and continue to inspect the primary supply air system.
75 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Inspector to deactivate the tool.
76 You have completed the level 2 high pressure primary supply air system. Next, you complete the level 1
primary supply air system.

Complete the level 1 supply air system

77 Using the methods that you learned in this exercise, complete the level 1 primary supply air system to the
following specifications:

■ In the Roof Mechanical view, draw the supply duct riser using Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows /
Taps and specify a 1700mm width, and a 500mm height.
■ Specify the offset to -4400mm. This offset routes the duct through the level 2 Mechanical/Electrical
room and into the level 1 plenum space terminating at the same level as the level 1 supply air system,
2900mm.
■ Click the supply connector, move the cursor down, and enter 1050mm, and press Enter to specify the
duct end point. Verify the duct riser geometry in the 3D Mech view.

Completing the Supply Air Systems | 121


This is the opposite of what you did with the level 2 AC unit. This is because the location of the supply
and return connections are reversed due to rotating the AC units at placement. Notice that the duct
riser passes through level 2 as confirmed by the green supply riser symbol in the 2 -Mech view.

■ Close the Roof Mech view and the 2 - Mech view (if open), open the 1 - Mech view, and tile it to the
left of the 3D Mech view.
■ In the 1 - Mech view, select the left primary horizontal duct segment and elbow, and drag them down
to align with the centerline of the right primary duct. Watch for the centerline snap as shown.

122 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


■ Connect the primary to the AC. Instead of drawing duct, select the left primary duct segment, and
drag the end connector over the left edge of the duct riser to open the Draw tool. The edge snap displays
when the connector is over the edge.

■ Drag the right primary duct connector to the right edge of the AC duct riser, and after the edge
highlights, release the mouse button.
The level 1 primary duct run is connected to the AC unit.

■ In the 1 - Mech view, add an endcap on the end of the duct riser. Use M_Rectangular Duct Endcap :
M_Standard, and remember to zoom the view.
■ Use Tab to check duct connectivity, and validate the duct geometry in the 3D Mech view.

Completing the Supply Air Systems | 123


■ Create a system for the level 1 primary supply air system, and assign the VAV boxes and the AC unit
to it.
■ Validate the system using the System Browser, and inspect the system with the System Inspector.
The completed level 1 primary supply air system is as shown.

78 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save.


79 In the Save As dialog, enter Completing Supply Air Systems Training for File name, navigate to the
folder of your choice, and click Save.

In this exercise, you connected the level 1 and level 2 high pressure primary supply air duct runs to separate rooftop
AC units. Using tiled windows, you drew the AC duct risers and then you physically connected each AC unit to its
respective primary duct run. You then created 2 systems to logically connect the AC units to their VAV boxes, and
validated these logical connections. These systems allow Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure
on the primary supply air systems. You have completed the high and low pressure (primary and secondary) supply air
systems for the building. In the next exercise, you check the systems in your project.

Checking Air Systems


Revit MEP uses both the duct geometry and logical system to perform calculations such as airflow and pressure, and
for duct sizing. Because both the logical (system) and physical (ductwork) connections play a vital role in the overall
systems design, you need to validate them. In this exercise, you use the Check Duct Systems tool to immediately check
these connections for all systems throughout your project, and quickly target those systems that need attention.

124 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Checking Air Systems.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.

Perform a systems check

1 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Check Duct Systems.
Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (duct) connections of each system throughout
the project. Warnings report that the Default Exhaust Air and Default Return Air systems (for levels 1 and
2) and are not empty. These warnings direct you to check the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. As
you view the warnings, Revit MEP lists the system components that are associated with each warning.
Notice that no warnings refer to the supply air systems indicating that they are valid.

NOTE The Check Duct Systems warnings contain a system type and a description. These warnings can refer to
both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic duct) or logical connection issues (such
as an improperly assigned system) in a system. Remember that after you create ductwork to physically connect
a system, the duct is now associated with that system. The duct geometry is used for system airflow and pressure
calculations, and for duct sizing. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are
checked. Ductwork that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked.

IMPORTANT The most common Check Duct Systems warning is the “default system is not empty” warning.
As you learned when placing air terminals and VAV boxes, all system components must be assigned to a system
immediately after placement. If you place air terminals and VAV boxes without assigning them to a system, Revit
MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. The default system
is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them, thus
assigning the components to a system. After you assign the system components to a system, Revit MEP places
them in their assigned systems folder and removes them from the Unassigned folder. After you have assigned
all system components for the project to their systems, the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Duct
Systems will no longer display “not empty” warnings. Note that a system component may be listed in both its
assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. This occurs because the assigned system component can be
connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors), and you have not assigned the component
to the other systems. For example, you assigned a VAV to a supply air system but the same VAV has a return air
and another supply air connector that you have not assigned to system. In the System Browser, the VAV is listed
in the assigned system and associated with the Default Return Air system in the Unassigned folder.

These Check Duct System warnings refer to different systems that you have yet to design. So, you can click
in the drawing area to close the message window and continue designing other systems. However, as a
tutorial exercise, you open the System Browser to view the unassigned system components in the Unassigned
folder. Then, you confirm that the assigned system components are in their proper systems.

Use the System Browser to confirm duct system assignments

2 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser.


3 Expand the Unassigned folder and notice that both Default Return Air and Default Exhaust Air systems
are listed.
4 Expand Default Return Air and notice the air terminals and mechanical equipment that were automatically
assigned to the Default Return Air system.
5 Right-click Default Return Air, and click Select to view all of the unassigned system components.

Checking Air Systems | 125


The red lines represent the default logical connection.

TIP If you have multiple views open, you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between
views, otherwise click Close.

6 Using the same methods, confirm the unassigned system components in the Default Exhaust Air system.
You confirmed all of the unassigned default systems in the Unassigned systems folder. You now confirm
the systems that you created.

7 Collapse the Unassigned folder and expand the Mechanical systems folder.
8 Right-click Supply Air, and click Expand All to view all systems that you created including their assigned
diffusers (air terminals) and mechanical equipment.
Notice that each system contains a system type and an assigned number, such as Mechanical Supply Air
3.

9 Right-click a system, and click Select Press to view it and its assigned system components.
You have validated both the unassigned and the assigned system components and their systems.

10 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save.


11 In the Save As dialog, enter Checking Air Systems Training for File name, navigate to the folder of
your choice, and click Save.

In this exercise, you used the Check Duct Systems tool and the System Browser to validate the supply air systems that
you created. You also confirmed that the air terminals and mechanical equipment for the return and exhaust air systems
were unassigned as they were located in their respective default systems in the System Browser and “not empty” warnings
were generated by Check Duct Systems. Depending on your air systems design, you may need to assign these system
components to their proper systems. You have completed the supply air systems for the building. To view the completed
mechanical systems for this tutorial including the supply air system, open the m Completed Mechanical Systems.rvt
file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. In the next lesson, you design a hydronic piping
system for the building.

Designing Piping Systems


As with designing air systems, designing piping systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. You
will use many of the same methods and practices that you learned while designing the air systems. In this lesson, you
create hydronic piping systems. You begin your piping systems design by placing fin-tube radiators in rooms and adding
a boiler. Then, you create the systems and pipe runs to logically and physically connect the system components. You
continue designing by resolving pipe interference, placing a circulator pump, and inspecting the piping system.

126 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete the air systems part of this tutorial before creating hydronic piping
systems. After completing the air systems lesson, you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use
to design the hydronic piping systems.

Creating Piping Views


In this exercise, you begin designing the level 2 hydronic piping systems for the building. The hydronic piping systems
consist of wall mounted hydronic fin-tube radiators, a boiler, circulator pump, pipes, and the systems to logically
connect the system components. First, you create new views in which to design the piping system.
Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Creating Piping Views.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.

Create the level 2 piping floor plan view

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, right-click 2 -
Mech, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
A new view called Copy of 2 - Mech is created and becomes the active view.

2 In the Project Browser, right-click Copy of 2 - Mech, and click Rename.


3 In the Rename View dialog, enter 2 - Piping for Name, and click OK.

Modify the view properties

4 With the 2 - Piping view selected in the Project Browser, click (Properties) to modify the view
properties.
5 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, do the following:

■ Verify that Mechanical is specified for Discipline.


■ Delete HVAC and enter Piping for Sub-Discipline.
■ Click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides.

6 In the Visibility Graphics dialog, click the Annotation Categories tab, and under Visibility, clear Grids.
This hides the grid lines to make it easier to place the fin-tube radiators.

7 Click OK.
Next, you change the view range.

8 In the Element Properties dialog, scroll down to the Extents category, and click Edit for View Range.
9 In the View Range dialog, under Primary Range do the following:

■ For Top, verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected, and enter 950mm for Offset.
■ Enter 950 for Cut plane Offset.
■ For Bottom, verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected, and enter -3500mm for Offset.
■ Under View Depth, for Level, verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected, and enter -3500 for
Offset.

This specifies the top view range above the radiators on level 2 and a bottom view range below the return
connection of the boiler on level 1. This allows you locate the boiler and connect to it from one view.

Creating Piping Views | 127


NOTE When entering a value, you do not need to type measurement symbols, just enter the value, and press
Tab. For example, you can enter 2600 and press Tab for 2600mm.

10 Click OK twice.
The 2 - Piping view displays all architectural elements in halftone and it displays the level 1 air systems.
Also notice that 2 - Piping is now located under Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser.

11 You use this view to create the pipe run that services level 2. You can use the level 1 ductwork as a reference
to avoid interference with the level 2 pipe run. However, the pipe run will be located near the outer walls,
and the vertical pipe run from the boiler will be routed in the Mechanical /Electrical room. So the pipe will
not interfere with the duct. Considering this, you can hide the level 1 duct and system components to
make it easier to view the pipe run.
Next you create a series of filters to hide the level 1 duct and system components. You can then use these
filters to hide or show objects in other views.

Create and define filters

12 In the 2 - Piping view, click in the drawing area to make the view active, and enter VG.
13 In the Visibility Graphics dialog, click the Filters tab.
On the Filters tab, you can add and activate filters. Notice that some predefined filters are listed under
Name.

14 Click Edit/New.

IMPORTANT You can create and define filters in the Filters dialog. Notice that filters are already created and
listed under Filters. These system filters show or hide certain system elements that share the same system type.
You could use the system filters to filter some duct and duct fittings, however, they will not filter all system
elements needed. So, it will be best to create filters. You can use the system filters for tasks such as color-coding
your systems. In this lesson, the system filters are not used.

15 In the Filters dialog, under Filters, click (New).


16 Enter VAV Boxes for Name, and click OK.
17 Under Categories, select Mechanical Equipment.
18 Under Filter Rules, do the following:

■ Select Family Name for Filter by, and verify that equals is selected.

128 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


■ Select M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV for the family name.
■ Verify that none is selected for And.
■ Click Apply.

IMPORTANT You can filter by many types of criteria, such as family name, type name, system type, or even a
description that you define. You can create filters that are either general or specific in scope depending on the
filter criteria. Note that if you are filtering multiple categories or multiple types in one category, you must select
filter criteria that is common and shared by all selected components that you want to filter. A quick way to

determine common filter criteria is to draw a pick box around all components in a view, and click on the
Options Bar to view certain components. Then you can view the common filter criteria from the Element Properties
dialog. Note that if at least one type parameter is different amongst the selected components, then no type
parameter will display in the Type Properties dialog. However, common (shared) instance parameters will display
even if other instance parameters are different (the different instance parameters do not display). Depending on
the filter criteria, you may want to select each component type separately.

The new VAV Boxes filter is listed in the Filters list. This filter will hide all parallel fan powered VAVs in
the view after it is added and activated.
Next, you create a filter to hide all 3 types of air terminals. To do this, you need a define common filter
criteria.

19 In the Filters dialog, under Filters, click .


20 Enter Air Terminals for Name, and click OK.
21 Under Categories, click Air Terminals.
22 Under Filter Rules, select Description for Filter by, and verify that equals is selected.
You do not have common filter criteria for the supply, return, and exhaust air terminals but they all have
a Description type parameter. So, you create a description as the common filter criteria.

NOTE The Description type parameter is applied to all components of that type. This is different from the
Comment instance parameter which only affects the selected component (or instance).

23 Enter Air Terminal for the description, and click OK twice.


Next, you need to assign the new description to all 3 air terminal types that you use in the project.

24 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Air Terminal.


25 In the Type Selector, select M_Exhaust Air Grill : M_600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection.

26 On the Options Bar, click (Properties).


27 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit / New.
28 In the Type Properties dialog, under Identity Data, enter Air Terminal for Description.
29 Click Apply.
This adds a description for all Exhaust Air Grill air terminals of the type M_600 x 600 Face 300 x 300
Connection. It also creates common criteria that associates all of these exhaust air terminal types to the
Air Terminal filter.

NOTE When entering filter criteria and assigning it to a family, you must spell both verbatim, otherwise the filter
will not work. This is the same rule for using formulae.

Creating Piping Views | 129


Next, you add a description for the supply air diffusers.

30 In the Type Properties dialog, do the following:

■ For Family, select M_Rectangular Diffuser - Round Connection.


■ For Type, select M_600x600 - 200 Neck.

31 Under Identity Data, click in the Value column for Description, and select Air Terminal, and click Apply.
Because you already entered the description, you can select it.

32 Repeat the method that you learned to add a description to the return air diffusers.
Remember to click Apply.

33 Click OK twice.
34 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Air Terminal tool.

NOTE If you drew a pick box and filtered to select all air terminals, you will not see the Description type parameter.
This is because the selected supply, return, and exhaust air terminals have at least one different type parameter.
Remember, if differences exist in the selected elements, then the type parameters will not display. By selecting
each air terminal type separately, you can view the Description type parameter and identify it as common to all
air terminal types.

Next, you continue to create and define the filters.

35 Click in the 2 - Piping view to make it active, and enter VG.


36 In the Visibility Graphics dialog, click the Filters tab.
37 On the Filters tab, click Edit/New.
38 Using the methods that you just learned, create the following new filters according to the specifications,
and remember to click Apply in the Filters dialog after you define each filter to create it:

■ Supply Air - Duct Fittings. Category: Duct Fittings; Filter by: System Type, verify that equals is
selected, and enter Supply Air for system type name.
To filter multiple duct fitting types, you need a common filter criteria. All duct fittings in your project
have a System Type instance parameter defined as Supply Air in the element properties. So, you filter
duct fittings by system type.

■ Flex Ducts - Round. Category: Flex Ducts; Filter by: Family Name, verify that equals is selected, and
select Flex Duct Round for the family name.
■ Round Ducts. Category: Ducts; Filter by: Family Name, verify that equals is selected, and select Round
Duct for the family name.
Next, you have 2 types of rectangular duct. You want to view only the rectangular duct with mitered
elbows because this the duct riser which is in the Mechanical /Electrical rooms and you want to avoid
it when routing the pipe from the boiler. So, you specify a family and a type name.

■ Rectangular Ducts Radius Elbows/Taps. Category: Ducts, Filter by: Family Name, verify that
equals is selected, and select Rectangular Duct for the family name; And: Type Name, verify that equals
is selected, and select Radius Elbows / Taps for the type name.
■ Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. Category: Ducts, Filter by: Family Name, verify that
equals is selected, and select Rectangular Duct for the family name; And: Type Name, verify that equals
is selected, and select Mitered Elbows / Taps for the type name.

Remember that you must click Apply after defining each filter and before defining the next one in order
to create the filter. If you did not click Apply, you need to define the filter again.

39 Click OK.

130 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


You defined and created all of the filters that you will need to create the hydronic piping system. Notice
that the Filters tab in the Visibility Graphics dialog does not list the new filters even though you created
them. This is because you have not added them. Next, you add and activate the filters.

Add and activate filters

40 In the Visibility Graphics dialog, click Add.


41 In the Add Filters dialog, select all of the filters that you created, and click OK.
The new filters are listed on the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. Notice that you have visibility
controls similar to visibility categories on other Visibility Graphics dialog tabs.
Next, you activate the filters.

42 Under Visibility, clear all check boxes except for Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps.
You used this duct to create the duct riser. You will use the duct riser as a reference to avoid interfering
with it when routing the pipe run from the boiler.

43 Click OK.
All filtered components hide from view except for the duct riser in the Mechanical/Electrical room.

TIP Filters allow you hide geometry making visibility clearer. It also improves viewing performance because
geometry that would normally be regenerated is hidden. You can also set the Detail Level to Wireframe to increase
viewing performance.

Next, you create the level 1 piping view in order to place the boiler.

Create the level 1 piping view

44 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, right-click 1 -
Mech, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
A new view called Copy of 1 - Mech is created and becomes the active view.

45 In the Project Browser, right-click Copy of 1 - Mech, and click Rename.


46 Enter 1 - Piping for Name, and click OK.
You now define the view properties.

47 Right-click in the drawing area, and click View Properties.


48 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, do the following:

■ Verify that Mechanical is specified for Discipline.

Creating Piping Views | 131


■ Select Piping for Sub-Discipline.
■ Click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides.

49 In the Visibility Graphics dialog, click the Annotation Categories tab, and under Visibility, clear Grids.
50 Click OK.
You do not need to use filters to place the boiler. Next, you change the view range.

51 In the Element Properties dialog, scroll down to the Extents category, and click Edit for View Range.
52 In the View Range dialog, under Primary Range, verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected and that
3000 is specified for Top Offset.
53 Click OK twice.
The 1 - Piping view displays the new view settings. Unlike the 2 - Piping view, this view only displays ducts
and pipes on its level. The 3000mm top offset prevents the level 2 pipes (except for the boiler pipe
connection), ducts, and fin-tub radiators from displaying. You use this view to place the boiler that services
level 2, and to create the level 1 piping system.

As you create the pipe runs, you will want to validate the geometry. Next, you create the 3D piping view
to be able to validate this geometry.

Create the 3D Piping view

54 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views, right-click 3D Mech,
and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
The new view is created using the view properties from the 3D Mech view, such as halftone architecture.

55 In the Project Browser, right-click Copy of 3D Mech, and click Rename.


56 Enter 3D Piping for Name, and click OK.
57 Right-click in the drawing area, and click View Properties.
58 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, do the following:

■ Verify that Mechanical is selected for Discipline.


■ Select Piping for Sub-Discipline.
■ Click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides.
You need to use the filters that you created earlier so that you can view only the pipes and the level 1
duct riser. If you turn off ducts visibility, you will be unable to view the duct riser.

59 In the Visibility Graphics dialog, click the Filters tab.

132 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


60 On the Filters tab, click Add.
61 In the Add Filters dialog, select all of the filters that you created, and click OK.
The selected filters are listed on the Filters tab.

62 Under Visibility, clear all check boxes except for Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps.
You used this duct to create the duct riser. You want to view it to avoid interfering with it when routing
the pipe run from the boiler.

63 Click OK.
64 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, clear Section Box to turn it off.
65 Click OK.

The duct risers and AC units display in the view. The AC units display because you did not create a filter
to hide them. Notice that the duct fittings are filtered. This is fine because you are using the riser as a
reference to avoid interference with the boiler piping.

66 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save.


67 In the Save As dialog, enter Creating Piping Views Training for File name, navigate to the folder of
your choice, and click Save.

In this exercise, you created and modified 2 floor plans and a 3D view. You also created filters to display certain system
components. In the next exercise, you place the radiators and a boiler.

Placing Radiators and a Boiler


In this exercise, you place the fin-tube radiators on level 2 and the boiler on level 1 that services the level 2 radiators.
Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Placing Radiators and Boiler.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
2 - Piping to make it the active view.
2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.
3 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Mechanical Equipment.

NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Piping.

4 In the Type Selector, select M_Hydronic Fin-Tube Radiator : M_25 NPT.

Placing Radiators and a Boiler | 133


5 Move the cursor over a wall and notice that an outline of the radiator and listening dimensions display
only if the cursor is over the wall.
This is because the fin-tube radiator is a wall-hosted family and can only be placed on a wall.

6 Zoom in on Office 6 located in the upper-left corner of the floor plan.

TIP Although room tags were not copied when you created this view, you can identify a room by placing the
cursor over the room component. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar)
confirm the room name and number.

7 Place the cursor over the top exterior wall, and center a fin-tube radiator under the upper-right window as
shown.

8 Click to place the radiator, and notice that the connectors and temporary dimensions display.

9 Continue placing radiators centered under all windows on level 2 as shown, except for the windows on
the radius wall.

134 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


You may need to move the Section 1 head and tail to place the Office 6 upper-left radiator. If so, drag the
section tail. Do not delete the section as you will reuse it later in this lesson.

TIP Remember to zoom the view to accurately place the radiators.

10 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Mechanical Equipment tool.
Next, you modify the radiator flow rate.

Modify radiator flow rate

11 In the drawing area, right-click a radiator, and click Select All Instances.
All level 2 radiators display in red.

NOTE Note that Select All Instances selects all components of the same type in the entire model. If the same
type of component exists on another level, and you do not want to include it, then it would be better to use
other selection methods such as drawing a pick box.

12 On the Options Bar, click .


13 In the Element Properties dialog, under Mechanical Loads, for Flow, verify that 1.25 L/s is specified for all
of the selected radiators.

IMPORTANT If you select multiple objects and then view their properties, the parameters that display are
common to all of the selected objects. If parameters are blank, then these are different across the selected objects.

Your design specification recommends a flow rate of 0.25 L/s for all fin-tube radiators in the building. The
existing radiator flow rate needs to be changed.

14 Enter .25 for Flow, and click OK.


The flow rate changes for all radiators on level 2. You selected all instances of the level 2 radiators because
Flow is an instance parameter and must be applied to each instance that you want to modify. Next, you
place the boiler.

Place the boiler

15 In the Project Browser, double-click 1 - Piping to make this the active view.
The boiler that services the level 2 radiators will be located on level 1.

Placing Radiators and a Boiler | 135


16 Enter ZR, and sketch a zoom region around Mechanical/Electrical room.

17 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Mechanical Equipment, and select M_Boiler : M_Standard from
the Type Selector.
18 Move the cursor to the right of the duct riser, watch the listening dimensions, and click to place the boiler
1200mm from the right vertical wall and 400mm from the horizontal wall in Open 1 as shown.

Notice that the connectors and temporary dimensions display after you place the boiler. You can filter the
air terminals to make it easier to see the dimensions.

19 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Mechanical Equipment tool.


Next, you verify the boiler flow rate.

20 In the drawing area, right-click the boiler, and click Element Properties.
21 In the Element Properties dialog, under Type Parameters, verify that 14.50 L/s is set for Max Flow.
The boiler maximum flow rate complies with the design specification.

136 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


22 Click OK.
23 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save.
24 In the Save As dialog, enter Placing Radiators and Boiler Training for File name, navigate to the
folder of your choice, and click Save.

In this exercise, you placed wall mounted fin-tube radiators on level 2, and the boiler that services those radiators on
level 1. You also modified the radiator flow rate and verified the boiler flow rate so that they complied with design
specifications. In the next exercise, you create the systems to logically connect the system components.

Creating the Piping Systems


In this exercise, you create the supply and return piping systems. A system is the logical connection between system
components such as fin-tube radiators and a boiler. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses
including flow and pressure. You create piping systems by placing mechanical equipment and other system components,
and then create the logical connection between these system components. After creating the logical connection, you
then create pipes to physically connect the system components. This is the recommended workflow or best practice
for systems creation. During this exercise, you also use the System Browser to confirm your systems.

IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. Unlike
logical connections (systems), physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. You can create pipes to
connect system components but without a corresponding system, analyses cannot be performed. It is not a pipe system but
only a physical connection.

Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Creating Piping Systems.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
2 - Piping to make it the active view.
2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window.

Explore the System Browser

3 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click System Browser.

TIP You can also press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. If the
System Browser does not respond, click in the drawing area to make it active, then press F9.

4 Expand the Unassigned folder, and expand the Default Hydronic Supply and the Default Hydronic Return
systems to view the level 2 radiators and the boiler that you placed in the building.

IMPORTANT In the System Browser, all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according
to the system that you assigned to them. You assign a system component (mechanical equipment, and so on)
to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning
a system component to an existing system. Notice that all of the mechanical equipment that you added are
located under Default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. This occurred because each system component
must be assigned to a system after it is placed. So, after you placed the radiators and boiler, Revit MEP immediately
assigned them to the Default Hydronic Supply and Default Hydronic Return system category located in the
Unassigned folder. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to their proper system.
As you assign radiators to systems, the assigned radiators move from the Unassigned folder to their respective
assigned system folder. Thus, if all system components are assigned, each Default system category would not
contain any system components and would be considered empty. The System Browser is a powerful tool that
allows you to validate and confirm systems.

Creating the Piping Systems | 137


Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems.

Create the supply hydronic piping system

5 Select a fin-tube radiator, right-click, and click Select All Instances.


All level 2 radiators display in red.

6 On the Options Bar, click (Create Hydronic Supply System).

Notice that after you click , the hydronic supply system is immediately created and listed in the
System Browser along with the fin-tube radiators that were assigned to it.

7 On the Options Bar, click (Select Equipment for System), and select the boiler to assign it to the
supply system.

Notice that you can select only valid system components, all other components are unavailable.

138 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


The supply system that logically connects the radiators to the boiler displays in red. This display indicates
that the new system is selected. It does not indicate a pipe layout path.

TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears, place the cursor over a radiator or the
boiler, press Tab, and select the system. You can also right-click the Hydronic Supply 1 listing in the System
Browser, and click Select to select the system.

IMPORTANT The new system named Hydronic Supply 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic
Supply in the Piping folder. The organization is from upstream, the boiler (the parent) to downstream, the radiator
(the child) with the connecting system between them. Notice that the Default Hydronic Supply category no
longer displays. This indicates that you have assigned all hydronic supply system components in the model. Thus,
the Default Hydronic Supply system is empty and does not display.

Next, you create the return piping system.

Create the return hydronic piping system

8 Select a radiator, right-click, and click Select All Instances to select all level 2 radiators.
Remember that the only radiators that exist in the project are on level 2. So, Select All Instances is an
appropriate selection tool.

9 On the Options Bar, click (Create Hydronic Return System) to create the hydronic return system
and assign the selected fin-tube radiators to it.

Notice that is does not display. This is because the selected components already have a hydronic
supply system assigned to them.

10 On the Options Bar, click , and select the boiler to assign it to the return system.

Creating the Piping Systems | 139


11 The return system displays in red

TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area, and cleared from the Options Bar, select one of the
radiators that you added to the system to display this tool and the other Options Bar system tools.

Confirm and validate the systems

12 In the System Browser, expand Piping, and notice that Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return systems
categories are listed.
13 Right-click each category, and click Expand to view the boilers and the Hydronic Supply 1 and Hydronic
Return 1 system listings.
These listings represent the systems that you just created.

14 Expand Hydronic Supply 1 to view the radiators.


You can now view the supply system hierarchy: Hydronic Supply 1 logically connects the boiler (parent)
with the radiators (children).

15 Right-click Hydronic Supply 1, and click Select.


The hydronic supply system highlights in red indicating the logical connection.

IMPORTANT Although you can draw pipe to create the physical pipe connections, you must create a system
for Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. Remember that systems can be created before
or after pipe, or even without pipe being drawn.

16 Repeat this method to validate the Hydronic Return System logical connection.
17 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save.
18 In the Save As dialog, enter Creating Piping Systems Training for File name, navigate to the folder
of your choice, and click Save.

In this exercise, you created the supply and return piping systems to logically connect the radiators and boiler. You
learned how the System Browser organizes system components and systems, and you used the System Browser to
confirm and validate the newly created systems. Now that you logically connected the piping system components, in
the next exercise, you create the level 2 pipe runs to physically connect the system components.

140 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


Creating Pipe Runs
In this exercise, you design 2 pipe layouts and then create the supply and return pipe runs based on these layouts. The
pipe runs physically connect the level 2 radiators. In a later exercise, you connect the boiler to the pipe runs.
Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Creating Pipe Runs.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
2 - Piping to make it the active view.

Create the level 2 supply pipe layout

2 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner, drag the cursor to the lower right corner
to draw a pick box around the entire floor plan.
Notice that all components that are in the 2 - Piping view range highlight.

3 On the Options Bar, click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements.
4 In the Filter box, click Check None, and then select Mechanical Equipment, and click OK.

Creating Pipe Runs | 141


The level 2 radiators and the level 1 boiler are selected (and display in red). This occurs because when you
draw a pick box to select components, you are selecting all components within the view range of the active
view. (You can see the level 1 boiler in the 2 - Piping view)

TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering, you can place the cursor over a radiator, press Tab to
highlight the system and select it. Then, you can click Layout Path on the Options Bar.

5 On the Options Bar, click Layout Path.


The Layout Path tool and the Select a System dialog open. Notice that the radiators, the boiler, the return
system that logically connects the components display in red. You can click each system in the Select a
System dialog to view it.

IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout and the selected system components are
already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors), then the Select a
System dialog will open. You will need to select a system to create the layout. You can select each system in the
dialog to view it.

6 In the Select a System dialog, select Hydronic Supply 1.


The system displays in red.

7 Click OK.

142 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


The Layout Path tool activates providing various layout tools.

8 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar, verify that Solutions is selected.
9 On the Options Bar, do the following:

■ Select Perimeter for Solution Type.


You want the pipes to run along the perimeter of the radiators.

NOTE The Perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of
the selected system components. It does not reference the architecture.

■ Click (Next Solution), and select solution 5.


You can also view all possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys on your
keyboard.
The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green.

■ Verify that 0.00° is specified for Slope.


This option slopes the entire pipe layout.

■ Enter 300 for Inset.


The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. Using
this inset, you create the supply pipe run 300mm from the radiator pipe connections (not from the
outside wall).

NOTE Notice that the Perimeter layout solution inset modifies the layout path. Later in this exercise, you
modify the layout segments that are tangent to the radius wall.

Next, you specify the pipe conversion settings that you use to convert the layout path to a pipe run.

10 On the Options Bar, click Settings.


11 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog, verify that Main is selected.
12 Under System Type: Hydronic Supply do the following:

■ Verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected for Pipe Type.


■ Enter -375mm for Offset.

Creating Pipe Runs | 143


This negative offset elevation places the pipe main at 3275mm in the level 1 plenum space. Remember
that you are working in the level 2 piping view.

13 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog, select Branch.
14 Under System Type: Hydronic Supply, do the following:

■ Verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected for Pipe Type.


■ Enter -375 for Offset.

IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the
main, and other obstacles. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes, duct, structural beams, or
architecture.

15 Click OK.

NOTE Configuring the pipe conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them
during your project. You can also configure these settings by clicking Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of
the Design Bar (or Settings ➤ Mechanical Settings). For more information, refer to Help.

After configuring the pipe conversion settings, you now modify the layout path.

Modify the level 2 supply pipe layout

16 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.


You now modify the layout paths that are tangent to the radius wall. The layout path is located under the
radiators.

17 In the drawing area, zoom the view, and select the lower layout path main that is tangent to the radius
wall.

144 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


A drag control displays.

18 Using the drag control, drag the main to the right at approximately the same inset as layout path.

Creating Pipe Runs | 145


19 Repeat the process to modify the upper layout path tangent to the radius wall.

20 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Layout.
Ignore the no auto-route solution warning. You will address the cause of this warning later in this exercise.
The supply pipe run (main and branches) is created and all required pipe fittings are automatically inserted.
This pipe run physically connects the supply side (supply connectors) of the system components.

Notice that the pipes are not listed in the System Browser. This is because the System Browser lists system
components and systems. Pipes are a physical not a logical connection, and is not part of the system. For
example, you can delete pipes and pipe fittings and the system remains unaffected.

IMPORTANT Errors may occur while attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or
during sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that the pipe usually has insufficient space to be created,
or offset elevations are incorrect. Either relocate the system components, select a different layout solution, or
manually modify the pipe. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification.

146 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


Change the geometry display

21 Enter ZR and draw a zoom region around the Office 6.

Notice that the pipes and symbolic fittings display in single line. Also notice that a rise/drop symbol displays
indicating the pipe riser. Some pipes are hidden causing a gap. This is caused by the hidden line setting.

IMPORTANT Creating Hydronic Piping Systems uses a hidden (haloed) line display. If a pipe is hidden by an
object, a gap displays indicating the hidden geometry. To turn off hidden lines, click Mechanical Settings on the
Piping tab of the Design Bar (or click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings). In the Mechanical Settings dialog,
select Hidden Line and specify the inside and outside gap to 0. The Hidden Line mechanical setting is not to be
confused with the Hidden Lines Model Graphics Style located on the View Control Bar.

22 On the View Control Bar (located at the lower left of the drawing area), select Fine for Detail Level.
The pipe geometry displays in 2-line enabling you to better see it.

Creating Pipe Runs | 147


23 Zoom the view and notice that the symbolic fittings and rise/drop symbol have been replaced by fitting
geometry and a green pipe riser symbol.

You use the 2-line display to design the piping system.

TIP You can easily change the pipe geometry representation by changing the Detail Level. On the View Control
Bar, select Coarse for single line display, Medium for 2-line duct display, or Fine for 2-line pipe display. If you
experience slower viewing performance while using the higher detail settings, change the Model Graphics Style
to Wireframe and/or turn off component visibility in the Visibility Graphics dialog.

Next, you modify the pipe run so that it better fits in with the design. The design requires 2 zones. So, you
will need 2 pipes connecting the boiler to the supply pipe run. A single pipe does not conform to the
hydronic piping design. Instead of moving the pipe, it is easier to delete the pipe and fittings and draw a
new one later. The deletion also divides the pipe run into left and right sides. Additionally, the pipe run
needs to be changed to a 25mm diameter.

Modify the pipe run

24 Zoom in on the pipe connecting the boiler to the supply pipe run.
25 Place the cursor over the pipe, and press TAB twice to highlight the pipe and the adjacent pipe fittings, and
click to select them.
The selected pipe and pipe fittings display in red.

148 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


26 Press Delete to delete the selection.

Remember that although the physical connection from the boiler to the radiators has been deleted, the
logical connection (or system) is still intact. Next, you modify the supply pipe run diameter.

27 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.


28 Place the cursor over the left side of the supply pipe run (left of the split that occurred after deleting the
boiler connecting pipe), and press TAB twice to highlight the pipe run (main and branches but not the
radiators), and click to select it.

29 On the Options Bar, select 25mm for D: (diameter), and click Modify on the Design Bar.

Creating Pipe Runs | 149


The diameter of the main and branches change to 25mm.

30 Repeat this method to change the right side of the supply pipe run to the same diameter.

NOTE It is important to recognize that changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is
not sizing. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) and sizes the pipe based on a series of
parameters and calculations.

31 Verify the diameter changes by pressing TAB twice to highlight, the pipe run and click to select each side
of the pipe run.
The diameter on the Options Bar displays as 25mm indicating that all pipe for the selected pipe run have
been modified to the specified diameter. If the pipes had different diameters, the diameter would not
display. Next, you check to make certain that the pipe run is physically connected to the radiators.

Check connectivity

32 Right-click in the view and click Zoom to Fit from the context menu.
33 Place the cursor over the right side of the supply pipe run and after it highlights, press Tab 3 times.
All radiators and pipe highlight indicating that they are physically connected.

IMPORTANT When pipes and fittings are connected, you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a
segment of pipe so that it highlights and then press Tab. The first time you press Tab, the branch to which the
pipe is connected highlights. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected pipe and pipe
fittings up to the first piece of connected equipment. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of
connected pipes, fittings, and equipment. If the entire network does not highlight, then you know that a
disconnect exists. This disconnect will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. You can repair the
connection by dragging the pipe segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging
it back again to reconnect, or you may need to convert a fitting and draw pipe. Typically the disconnect results
from not having sufficient room to make the connection.

150 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


After the pipe run and radiators are highlighted, you can click to select them. This allows you to better see
disconnects.

34 Repeat this method to check the connectivity of the left supply pipe run.

Notice that the lower-left radiator did not highlight or display in red indicating that it is disconnected.
This disconnect caused the no auto-route solution warning message to display after creating the piping
layout. You need to correct the disconnect.

Correct a piping disconnect

35 Zoom in on the radiator in Office 8 located in the lower-left corner.

Creating Pipe Runs | 151


Notice that the branch did not connect to the main when the pipe run was created. You need to correct
this disconnect by converting an elbow fitting to a tee and then drawing pipe to connect to the tee fitting.

36 Zoom in on the upper-right elbow, and select it.

Notice that 2 plus signs and 2 connectors display. These plus signs are fitting conversion controls. Each
control converts the elbow fitting into a tee fittings but with either a vertical or horizontal orientation.
You may need to zoom the view closer to better see the fitting conversion controls.

IMPORTANT Fitting conversion controls display as plus or minus signs that are located near a selected pipe
fitting. These controls convert the selected fitting to the next possible fitting for the piping context. Fitting control
locations indicate the orientation of the fitting connection.

37 Click the plus sign located to the left.

152 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


The elbow converts to a tee with a horizontal orientation.

38 Click the tee fitting.


A minus sign displays. This fitting conversion control allows you to return to the previous fitting.

TIP If you place the cursor over a fitting conversion control, a tooltip displays indicating the next possible fitting.

39 Click the minus sign to convert back to the elbow fitting.


40 Click the elbow fitting, and click the right plus sign.

Creating Pipe Runs | 153


The elbow converts to a tee with a vertical orientation.

You can now draw the pipe to connect the radiator to the supply pipe run.

Draw pipe to correct disconnects

41 Zoom out the view to display the disconnected pipe segment and the tee fitting.

42 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Pipe.


The Draw tool activates enabling you to create pipe. Notice that the cursor changes to a pencil to indicate
that the Draw tool is active.

43 In the Type Selector, select Pipe Types : Standard.


44 Place the cursor over the end of the tee fitting, and after the fitting end point snap displays, click to specify
the pipe segment start point.

154 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


TIP When using the Draw tool to create pipe, you specify a start point then move the cursor to create the pipe
segment, and then specify an end point. If drawing contiguous segments, the end point of current segment will
be the start point of the next segment.

45 Move the cursor down toward the tee to begin drawing the pipe, and press Spacebar to match the offset
(-375) and diameter (25mm) to that of the selected tee connector.

TIP When drawing pipe, you can press the Spacebar after you specify your start point and begin drawing. This
automatically specifies the pipe diameter and offset (elevation) to match that of the selected start point object.
If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short, you did not begin drawing before pressing Spacebar
Note that although the diameter and offset are specified automatically, you should always verify the pipe type
in the Type Selector.

46 Continue drawing the pipe segment down toward the tee fitting, and after the connector snap displays,
click to specify the segment end point.

NOTE When drawing pipe, use the connector snap, , to locate a connector and create the connection.
If you do not use the connector snap, a connection may not occur. If you pause briefly, a tooltip appears confirming
the connector. Remember to always check connectivity after drawing the pipe segment.

Creating Pipe Runs | 155


The pipe segment is created connecting the radiator to the supply pipe run.

47 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool.


48 Place the cursor over the pipe segment, and press TAB twice to check connectivity.
The pipe branch including the tee fitting highlight indicating that they are physically connected.

Next, you validate the pipe geometry.

Validate the pipe geometry

49 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views, and double-click
3D Piping to make it the active view.
50 On the View Options Bar, specify the Detail Level to Fine to display the pipes in 2-line.

51 On the View toolbar, click (Dynamically Modify View).


52 In the Dynamic View dialog, use the Zoom, Scroll, and Spin buttons to verify that the level 2 supply pipe
run geometry is as you expected.

156 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


Next, you create the return pipe run.

Create the level 2 return pipe run

53 Using the methods that you learned to create the supply pipe run, create the level 2 return pipe run
according to the following specifications:

■ In the 2 - Piping view, create a layout for the Hydronic Return 1 system.
■ Select Perimeter solution 3.
■ Enter 600 for Inset.
■ Verify that 0.00° is specified for Slope.
■ For pipe conversion settings, verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected, and enter -525mm for both
the main and branch offsets.
This places the pipes at a 3125mm elevation in the level 1 plenum space.

■ In the Layout Path tool, modify the 2 layout path mains that are tangent to the radius wall to
approximately the same inset as the other sides of the return layout path.
■ Delete the pipe and the 2 fittings that connect the boiler to the return pipe run. The deleted pipe
divides the return pipe run into left and right sides.
■ Change the diameter of each return pipe run side to 25mm. Remember, do not select the radiators
when selecting the return pipe runs.
■ Check connectivity and inspect the corner connections for disconnects.
■ Use the same method to correct any disconnects.
■ Validate the pipe geometry using the 3D Piping view.

Creating Pipe Runs | 157


The level 2 return pipe run is as shown.

54 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save.


55 In the Save As dialog, enter Creating Pipe Runs Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your
choice, and click Save.

In this exercise, you used the Layout Path tool to design the supply and return pipe layouts. You then converted these
layouts to create the supply and return pipe runs that physically connect the radiators. You also modified the pipe runs
so that they were a better fit with the systems design. You checked connectivity, converted fittings, corrected disconnects,
and validated the pipe geometry in the 3D view. In the next exercise, you resolve interference issues with the new pipe
runs.

Resolving Pipe Interference


The supply and return pipe runs that you created seem to interfere with the 2 staircases in the building. In this exercise,
you create new views to confirm this interference and then modify the pipe run to resolve it.
Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Resolving Pipe Interference.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.

158 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
2 - Piping to make it the active view.
Notice that the supply and return pipe runs seem to interfere with the 2 staircases.

Resolve pipe interference with the lower staircase

2 Right-click in the drawing area, click Zoom in Region, and draw a zoom region around the right stairwell.

You need to create a section view to confirm pipe interference.

Create a section view to confirm interference

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Section.


Adding a section view is a 2-click process. The first click specifies the section head, and the second click
specifies the section tail. After you add the section, you can flip the view direction or modify the extents
of the view.

4 Place the cursor over the left wall of the room that is below the stairwell (Conference Room 31), and click
to specify the section head location.

Resolving Pipe Interference | 159


5 Move the cursor to the right and click just past the exterior wall of the building to specify the section tail.

A new section view named Section 4 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???.

6 Use the drag handles to modify the clip planes so that you capture the pipe run and the stairwell.

160 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


NOTE Make certain that the clip planes do not capture the pipe branch above.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


The section head and tail display, similar to the level heads in the elevation view.

8 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section), right-click Section 4, and
click Properties.
9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Piping for Sub Discipline, and click OK.
The section relocates under Piping.

10 Double-click the section head to open the Section 4 view.


All section heads link directly to their corresponding section view. You can also open the section view
from the Project Browser under Sections.

11 On the View Control Bar, select Fine for Detail Level, and Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style.
The geometry displays with shading and outlined edges.

12 Draw a zoom region around the staircase.

Resolving Pipe Interference | 161


The section view confirms that the pipe runs do interfere with the right staircase.

TIP Sections are very useful in visualizing and validating your designs. They offer immediate accessibility to all
floors and areas. You will usually create many sections to both inspect and modify pipe runs, mechanical equipment
placement, and other aspects of your systems design.

Next, you modify the pipe runs around the staircase.

Modify the pipe runs around the staircase

13 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 - Piping to make it the active view.
14 Zoom in on the stairwell.
15 Click the return pipe segment that is interfering with the stairs, and after the connectors display, place the
cursor over the top connector.

162 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


These connectors connect to the tee fittings. The tees connect the radiator return branches to the return
pipe run.

16 Zoom in on the top pipe connector to view the tee fitting.


17 Drag the top pipe connector down and notice that the cursor changes to a pencil to indicate that the Draw
tool is active.

18 Drag the pipe connector up to the tee fitting, and after the fitting end point snap displays, release the
mouse button to reconnect it.

This is another way to use the Draw tool to create pipe.

Resolving Pipe Interference | 163


NOTE When modifying pipe, always connect to pipe segments, fittings, or mechanical equipment after a snap
displays. Usually a connector snap displays but other snaps may display such as an end point snap. Remember
to always check connectivity after connecting.

19 Zoom out, and select the return pipe segment again.


20 Drag the top pipe segment connector down to 3000mm above the bottom pipe segment connector as
shown.

You drag the pipe segment instead of splitting it because you will convert the vertical tee fitting to a
horizontal tee fitting. If you split the pipe, a small pipe segment will be created that will need to be removed.
Next, you split the supply pipe segment.

21 On the Edit toolbar, click (Split).


The cursor changes to a knife to indicate that the Split tool is open.

22 Place the cursor over the supply pipe run above the stairwell.
23 Watch the listening dimensions, and click to split the pipe at 2160mm from the supply pipe segment
connector above.
You may need to zoom the view to get the correct snap dimensions.

164 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


Zoom the split and notice that a line displays across the pipe. This indicates that a pipe fitting was
automatically inserted at the split. You can place your cursor over the fitting and a tooltip and the Status
Bar confirm the pipe fitting. Zoom out the view.

24 With the Split tool open, move the cursor down, and split the supply pipe segment 1400mm from the
bottom pipe segment connector.

25 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Split tool.


26 Select the pipe segment that is over the staircase, and press Delete to delete it.
Notice that the fittings that were inserted at the splits have been deleted.

Next, you convert a tee fitting, and draw the pipe around the stairs.

27 Zoom in the return tee fitting above the stairs.

Resolving Pipe Interference | 165


28 Using the fitting conversion methods that you learned in the previous lesson, convert the tee fitting from
a vertical orientation to a tee fitting with a horizontal orientation.

Notice that the return pipe is hidden under the supply pipe due to the hidden (haloed) line mechanical
setting.

29 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Pipe to open the Draw tool.
30 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected.
31 Place the cursor over the end of the return tee fitting that you just converted, and after the end point
connector snap displays, click to specify the start point for the first pipe segment.

32 Zoom out the view, and move the cursor to the left, and press Spacebar to automatically specify the pipe
diameter and offset to that of the pipe run.
33 Draw the pipe 4000mm to the left, and click to specify the pipe segment end point and specify the start
point for the second pipe segment.

166 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


34 Draw the pipe down, and after a snap displays aligning with end of the return pipe run, click to specify
the end point and the start point of the third segment.

NOTE When drawing pipe, always make certain that you provide sufficient space for segment and fitting
geometry, especially when connecting to mechanical equipment. Consider that pipe geometry may be larger
and additional fittings may be inserted after performing sizing.

35 Draw the pipe to the return pipe run on the right, and after the connector snap displays, click to specify
the segment end point.

Resolving Pipe Interference | 167


The return pipe run is connected as shown.

36 Press Esc to deactivate the Draw tool.


37 Select the supply pipe segment above the stairs to display its connectors.
38 Right-click the lower connector, and click Draw Pipe from the context menu.

This activates the Draw tool, and automatically matches the pipe diameter and offset of the selected pipe.

168 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


39 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected.

NOTE If you right-click a connector and click Draw Pipe on the context menu, the pipe diameter, or width and
height, and offset automatically match that of the selected connector. However, you should always verify the
pipe type in the Type Selector.

40 Using the pipe drawing methods that you learned, draw the supply pipe run around the stairs as shown.

Move a pipe segment to correct a routing issue

41 Zoom on the top horizontal pipe segment.


Notice that the pipe segment is routed in the stairwell wall. This needs to be corrected.

42 Click the pipe segment to select it.

43 On the Edit toolbar, click (Move).

IMPORTANT Using the Move tool is a 2-click process. First, specify the reference or start point of the object
that you want to move. Second, specify the move destination or end point.

44 Place the cursor over the pipe segment and after the centerline snap displays, click to specify the move
start point.

Resolving Pipe Interference | 169


45 Move the cursor up, and after the listening dimensions appear, enter100, and press ENTER to specify the
move end point.
This moves the pipe segment up 100mm away from the wall but still allowing space for sizing.

Notice that the adjacent pipe segments and fittings parametrically adjust to the move but the rest of the
pipe run and the radiators remain unchanged.

46 Place the cursor over each pipe run and press TAB twice to check connectivity.
Each pipe run and their respective tee fittings highlight indicating that they are physically connected.
The interference has been resolved. Next, you confirm and resolve pipe interference with the left staircase.

Resolve pipe interference with the upper staircase

47 Click the Section 1 tail (located on the upper-left of the building).

170 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


The section displays in red.

48 Drag Section 1 to the left of the stairwell, and adjust the view clip planes as shown.

Although this section was used for air systems, you reuse it to confirm pipe interference with the stairs
instead of creating a new section.

NOTE If you use a section view to check pipe interference, you must adjust the section view clip planes to capture
only the stairs and not the pipes beyond the stairs. Otherwise, you may get a false positive result.

49 Press ESC, and double-click the section head to open the section view.
50 On the View Control Bar, select Fine for Detail Level.
51 Zoom in on the staircase and notice that the pipes do interfere with the stairs.

52 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 - Piping to make it the active view.
53 Zoom in on the stairwell.

54 On the Edit toolbar, click (Split).


55 Move the cursor to the left of the stairs and over the supply pipe, watch the listening dimensions, and split
the supply pipe at 3600mm from its left connector.
56 Use the same procedure to split the return pipe run at 1500mm from its left connector.
57 Using the methods that you learned, modify the supply and return pipe segments as shown.

Resolving Pipe Interference | 171


You can either drag the pipe segments to the right past the stairs or split and delete them.

58 Again, using the methods that you learned, draw the supply and return pipe segments as shown.
Remember to watch for connector snaps.

172 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


59 The level 2 supply and return pipe runs are as shown.

IMPORTANT You have learned 3 different methods to create pipe using the Draw tool. You can click Pipe from
the Design Bar and press Spacebar to match the diameter (or width and height), and offset elevation to that of
the selected pipe connector. You can right-click a connector and click Draw Pipe from the context menu. You
can also drag a pipe connector to modify a segment. Using these 2 methods, the start point, diameter (or width
and height), and offset are automatically specified. Another method to create pipe is to select the pipe to create,

and click (Create Similar) on the Edit toolbar. Using Create Similar, the pipe type is also matched.
Remember that after you create pipe, always: (1) Provide sufficient space for segment and fitting geometry, (2)
Connect to a snap, preferably a connector snap, (3) Verify the pipe type in the Type Selector (not necessary with
Create Similar), and (4) Check connectivity after making a connection.

60 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save.


61 In the Save As dialog, enter Resolving Pipe Interference Training for File name, navigate to the folder
of your choice, and click Save.

In this exercise, you used section views to confirm pipe interference with the stairs. Then, you used the Split, Draw,
and Move tools to modify the pipes that interfered with the stairs, and rerouted pipes to resolve the interference. In
the next exercise, you connect the boiler to the pipe runs.

Connecting the Boiler


In this exercise, you connect the boiler to the level 2 supply and return pipe runs. You also tile 2 views to simultaneously
create the pipe connections and validate the pipe geometry.
Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Connecting Boiler.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views, and double-click
3D Piping to make it the active view.

Tile the views

2 With the 3D Piping view active, click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows.

Connecting the Boiler | 173


This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. Note that if this
option is unavailable, the active view is the only open window.

3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
2 - Piping to make it the active view.
4 Enter WT to tile both windows.

TIP When tiling 2 views, the active view is tiled to the left.

5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the boiler and the pipe runs as shown.

You will design in the 2 - Piping view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D Piping view. You are ready
to connect the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs.

Connect the boiler to the supply pipe run

6 Zoom in on the split supply and return pipe runs located above the boiler.

Remember that these pipe runs split as a result of deleting the pipe that connected the boiler to the pipe
runs.

7 Click each pipe segment and drag the connectors to adjust the pipe segments to provide ample space to
connected the boiler connector pipes as shown.

174 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


8 Zoom in on the boiler.
9 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Pipe.
10 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected.
11 Place the cursor over the supply connection on the boiler, and after the connector snap displays, click to
specify the first pipe segment start point.

12 Draw the pipe to the left, and press Spacebar to match the pipe diameter and the offset elevation to that of
the boiler connector.
Notice that the boiler connector offset is at -2176.8mm. This negative offset is based on level 2 because
you are designing in the level 2 view.

13 On the Options Bar, do the following:

■ Verify that 80mm is specified for D: (diameter)


■ Verify that Auto Connect is selected.
■ Enter -1500 for Offset.
This offset places the horizontal pipe segment at 2150mm from level 1.

■ Verify that Angle is cleared.

14 Move the cursor to the left, watch the listening dimensions, and click to specify the pipe segment end
point at 460mm from the boiler connection.

Connecting the Boiler | 175


A green pipe riser symbol displays to indicate a pipe riser.

TIP If the exact dimension snap increment does not display, zoom the view and try again. You can also add a
dimension snap increment in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps). Remember to always use a
semi-colon (;) to separate snap increments.

15 Draw the pipe up to 900mm, and click to specify the end point.

In a later exercise, you will place a circulator pump on this pipe segment.

TIP When drawing pipe, after listening dimensions display, you can enter a dimension and press Enter instead
of drawing to the preferred dimension.

16 On the Options Bar, enter -375 for Offset.


This creates a pipe segment at the same offset as the supply pipe run, 3275mm from level 1.

TIP After entering a value in Options Bar, you may need to press TAB to make the drawing area active.

17 Draw the pipe segment straight up toward the supply pipe run, and after the centerline and intersection
snaps display, click to specify the pipe segment end point.

176 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


The boiler supply connector pipe is created.

18 Click Modify on the Design Bar.


19 Zoom in on the left supply pipe run segment and the boiler connector pipe.
20 Click the left supply pipe run segment to display the connectors.
21 Drag the right connector toward the boiler connector pipe, and after the connector snap displays, release
the mouse button to connect to it.

Connecting the Boiler | 177


The boiler is connected to the left supply pipe run.

22 Place the cursor over the boiler connector pipe and press Tab.
The connector pipe and the left supply pipe run segment highlight indicating that they are physically
connected.

23 Validate the geometry in the 3D Piping view.

178 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


Next, you connect the boiler to the right supply pipe run.

24 With the windows tiled, click in the 3D Piping view to make it active.
25 Zoom in on the elbow fitting above the boiler, and click it.

26 Using the fitting conversion method that you learned, convert the elbow to a tee fitting with a horizontal
orientation.

27 In the 3D Piping view, click the tee to display the connectors.


28 Click in the 2 - Piping view to make it active.
Notice that the fitting is selected in the floor plan view and remains selected in the 3D view.

29 Zoom in on the tee, right-click the right connector, and click Draw Pipe from the context menu.

Connecting the Boiler | 179


The pipe diameter and offset are specified to that of the selected connector, and the start point is
automatically specified.

30 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected.


31 On the Options Bar, do the following:

■ Verify that Auto Connect is selected.


■ Verify that -1500 is specified for Offset.
■ Verify that Angle is cleared.

32 Draw the pipe 600mm to the right and click to specify the segment end point.
33 Draw the pipe up, and after listening dimensions display, enter 900 and press Enter.
This creates a 900mm pipe segment. In a later exercise, you will place a circulator pump on this segment.

34 On the Options Bar, enter -375 for Offset.


35 With the Draw tool activated, draw the pipe segment straight up toward the supply pipe run, and after the
intersection and centerline snaps display, click to specify the end point.

36 Press ESC twice to deactivate the Draw tool.


37 Using the same method that you used to connect the left supply pipe run, connect the right supply pipe
run.

180 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


The right supply pipe run is connected to the boiler.

38 Check connectivity.

39 Validate the pipe geometry.

Connecting the Boiler | 181


Next, you connect the boiler to the return pipe run.

Connect the boiler to the return pipe run

40 With the windows tiled, and the 2 - Piping the active view, zoom in on the boiler.
41 Select the boiler, and right-click the return connector, and click Draw Pipe.

42 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected.


43 On the Options Bar, verify that 80mm is specified for D: (diameter), and that Auto Connect is selected.
Notice that the return connection is at an offset elevation of -3396mm from level 2. This places the return
connection 250mm above level 1. Next, you draw a 150mm pipe segment at this elevation and then create
a pipe riser.

44 Move the cursor up, and enter 150 and press Enter.
45 On the Options Bar, enter -525 for Offset.
This places the next pipe segment at an elevation of 3125mm from level 1.

46 Draw the pipe up from the boiler 600mm, and click to specify the end point.

182 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


Next, you draw the return pipe to the left. As you draw, the left return pipe is routed under the supply
pipe. It is important that Auto Connect is not selected. This routing situation provides an opportunity to
learn more about the Auto Connect behavior. Make certain that the 2 - Piping and 3D Piping views are
tiled to clearly view the Auto Connect behavior.

47 On the Options Bar, verify that Auto Connect is selected.

IMPORTANT Auto Connect allows you to connect an object that you are drawing to an object that is located
on a different level or plane. If Auto Connect is selected and your selection point overlaps an object on a different
level or plane, an automatic connection is made. If Auto Connect is not selected, the connection is not made.
Auto Connect is available on the Options Bar only when the Draw tool is active.

48 Draw a pipe segment to the left and under the supply pipe, and after the intersection and centerline snaps
display, click to specify the end point.

Connecting the Boiler | 183


Notice that a green pipe riser symbol displays in the floor plan view, and the pipe is automatically connected
to the supply pipe above. You see it clearly in the 3D view.

49 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Draw tool.


50 Press CTRL+Z to undo the connection and return to the pipe segment.

51 Select the return pipe segment, and right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe.
52 On the Options Bar, clear Auto Connect.
53 Again, draw the pipe to the left and under the supply pipe, and after the intersection and centerline snaps
display, click to specify the end point.

184 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


Notice that this time the pipe did not connect to the supply pipe above and a green pipe riser symbol did
not display.

In the floor plan view, notice that part of the return pipe is hidden as it passes under the supply pipe. This
is caused by the hidden (haloed) line mechanical setting.

IMPORTANT Creating Hydronic Piping Systems uses a hidden (haloed) line display. If a pipe is hidden by an
object, a gap displays indicating the hidden geometry. To turn off hidden lines, click Mechanical Settings on the
Piping tab of the Design Bar (or click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings). In the Mechanical Settings dialog,
select Hidden Line, and specify the inside and outside gap to 0. The Hidden Line mechanical setting is not to be
confused with the Hidden Lines Model Graphics Style located on the View Control Bar.

54 Press ESC twice to deactivate the Draw tool.

TIP When drawing pipe, press ESC to deactivate the tool. On an open pipe segment or run, press it once to stop
drawing the current object, and twice to deactivate the Draw tool. If the pipe segment or run is closed, press
ESC once to deactivate the Draw tool.

You now have a better understanding of the Auto Connect. Next, you finish connecting the boiler to both
return pipe runs.

55 Select the return pipe segment, right-click the left connector and click Draw Pipe.
56 Draw the pipe to the left, and after pipe segment aligns with end of the left return pipe run located above,
click the specify the end point.

Connecting the Boiler | 185


57 Draw the pipe up toward the return pipe run, and after the connector snap displays, click to connect to
the left return pipe run.

The boiler is connected to the left side of the return pipe run.

58 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool.


59 Zoom in on the boiler, and click the elbow fitting on the return pipe above the boiler to display the fitting
conversion controls.
60 Using the fitting conversion methods that you learned, convert the elbow to a tee with a horizontal
orientation.

186 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


61 Select the tee fitting, right-click the right connector, and click Draw Pipe.
62 Draw the pipe 300mm to the right, and click to specify the end point.

63 Draw the pipe toward the return pipe run, and after the intersection and centerline snaps display, click to
specify the end point.

Connecting the Boiler | 187


64 Using the method that you learned, drag the right return pipe segment and connect it to the boiler connector
pipe.

The boiler is connected to the right side of the return pipe run. Remember that hidden lines display when
the pipe display is obstructed.

65 Click Modify on the Design Bar.

Check connectivity and validate pipe geometry

66 Place the cursor over the return pipe before the tee fitting, and press TAB 3 times to check connectivity for
both sides of the return pipe.
The return pipes highlight indicating that they are physically connected.

188 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


67 Validate the return pipe geometry in the 3D Piping view.

Next, you create a section view to verify the clearance between the return pipe riser and the boiler.

68 Using the section view creation method that you learned, draw a section view, and adjust the view as
shown.

Connecting the Boiler | 189


69 Click Modify on the Design Bar.
70 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections, double-click Section 5
to open the Section 5 view.
You can also double-click the section head to open the section view.

71 Right-click in the drawing area, click View Properties.


72 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Piping for Sub-Discipline, and click OK.
This locates the Section 5 view under Piping in the Project Browser and removes the ??? label.

73 On the View Control Bar, click Fine for Detail Level, and click Shading with Edges for Model Graphics
Style.

74 Zoom on the boiler return pipe to validate the pipe geometry and check the clearance between the pipe
riser and the boiler.

190 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


75 Close the Section 5 view but keep the 2 tiled views open.
Next, you align the boiler return connector pipes with the supply connector pipes.

Align the boiler supply and return connector pipes.

76 With the 2 - Piping and the 3D Piping views tiled, in the 2 - Piping view, zoom in on the boiler and supply
and return connector pipes.

77 On the Tools toolbar, click (Align).


If the Tools toolbar is not available, click Window menu ➤ Toolbar ➤ Tools.

IMPORTANT Using the Align tool is a 2-click process. First, select the reference point where you want to align,
and then you select the point to align.

78 Place the cursor over the left supply pipe, and after highlights, click to specify the alignment reference
point.

Connecting the Boiler | 191


NOTE Make certain to click the supply pipe and not the return.

79 Move the cursor over the left return pipe, and after the centerline highlights, click to specify the point to
align.

192 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


The left return pipe is aligned with the left supply pipe. Notice that the return pipe parametrically adjusts.

80 Using the alignment method you just learned, align the right return pipe with the right supply pipe.

81 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Align tool.

Connecting the Boiler | 193


The aligned return pipes are as shown. Notice that the return pipe runs also parametrically adjusted. This
is because they are connected to the return boiler connector pipes that we aligned.

82 Place the cursor below the tee fitting, and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity.

83 Validate the geometry in the 3D Piping view.

194 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


The boiler is physically connected to the radiators and the hydronic piping system is now a closed loop.

84 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save.


85 In the Save As dialog, enter Connecting the Boiler Training for File name, navigate to the folder of
your choice, and click Save.

In this exercise, connected the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. You used the Split tool to create 2 separate
supply and return pipe runs. You then drew pipes that had different offset elevations to connect the boiler to the supply
and return pipe runs. You worked in 2 tiled views enabling you to design and validate geometry simultaneously. It also
allowed you to better understand the Auto Connect behavior. Finally, you used the Align tool to align the return pipes
to the supply pipes. In the next exercise, you size the supply and return piping runs.

Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods


You created the level 2 supply and return pipe runs to physically connect the boiler to the radiators. Next, you size the
pipe runs using both Friction and Velocity sizing methods.
Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Pipe Sizing - Friction & Velocity.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
2 - Piping to make it the active view.
2 Place the cursor over the boiler, and after it highlights, press Tab 4 times to highlight both the supply and
return pipe runs including the radiators and the boiler, and click to select them.

Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods | 195


The selected pipe runs and mechanical equipment display in red.

3 On the Options Bar, click Sizing.

IMPORTANT Remember that the Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. It does not
report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run.

4 In the Pipe Sizing dialog, do the following:

■ Under Sizing Method, select Friction, and enter 250.00 Pa/m.


■ Select And, and enter 2.5 m/s for Velocity.
■ Under Constraints, select Match Connector Size for Branch Sizing, and that Restrict Size is cleared.
Match Connector Size matches the pipe to the connector size of the mechanical equipment to which
the branch is connected.

■ Click OK.

The sized pipe runs are sized.

IMPORTANT Errors may occur while attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or
during sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that the pipe usually has insufficient space to be created.
Either relocate the system components, select a different layout solution, or manually modify the pipe. Remember
to always check pipe connectivity after modification.

5 Zoom in and confirm the pipe sizing.

196 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


Notice that the branch sizing used the size information from the connector on the fin-tube radiator and
not from the connector on the main pipe. This is because you selected Match Connector Size for branch
sizing.

6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views, and double-click
3D Piping to make it the active view.
7 Validate the sized pipe geometry.

8 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save.


9 In the Save As dialog, enter Pipe Sizing - Friction & Velocity Training for File name, navigate to the
folder of your choice, and click Save.

In this exercise, you sized the supply and return pipe runs using both the Friction and Velocity sizing methods. You
also specified branch sizing that was different than the main pipe sizing. In the next exercise, you place the circulator
pumps for the supply pipe runs.

Placing Circulator Pumps


In this exercise, you place 2 in-line circulator pumps on the hydronic supply pipe runs that you sized.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 197


Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Placing Circulator Pumps.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views, and double-click
3D Piping to make it the active view.

Tile the views

2 With the 3D Piping view active, click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows.
This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. Note that if this
option is unavailable, the active view is the only open window.

3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
2 - Piping to make it the active view.
4 Enter WT to tile both windows.

TIP When tiling 2 views, the active view is tiled to the left.

5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the boiler and connecting pipes as shown.

You place the pumps in the 2 - Piping view and validate the geometry and rotate the pumps in the 3D
Piping view.

Place in-line circulator pumps

6 In the 2 - Piping view, zoom in on the boiler and the 2 supply pipes to the left and right of the boiler.

198 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


7 On the Edit toolbar, click (Split).
8 Watch the listening dimensions, and make 2 splits on the left pipe 160mm from the upper and the lower
elbow fittings as shown.
Notice that a pipe fitting is automatically inserted at each split. You can place your cursor over one and a
tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the fitting.

9 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Split tool.


10 Click the pipe segment between the 2 splits.
The selected pipe segment displays in red.

11 Press Delete to delete the pipe segment.


Notice that the pipe fittings that were automatically inserted are also deleted.

12 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Mechanical Equipment.


13 In the Type Selector, select M_In-line Circulator : M_Standard.
14 Place the cursor over to the left of the pipe opening, and press Spacebar to rotate the pump.
15 Move the cursor over the pipe opening, and after the centerline snap displays, click to place the circulator
pump.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 199


TIP If you want to reposition the circulator pump, drag the pump away from the pipe, and then move it over
the pipe opening, and watch for the centerline snaps. You can also use the Move tool for precise placement.

16 Press ESC twice.


17 In the 3D Piping view, notice that the pump is not located near the selection point.

200 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


Actually, the pump is on the selection point but at the default offset elevation. You need to specify the
pump offset.

18 In the 2 - Piping view, click the pump.


The selected pump displays in red.

19 On the Options Bar, click .


You can also right-click the pump, and select Element Properties.

20 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, enter -1500 for Offset.
This is the offset elevation of the horizontal pipe on which you are placing the pump.

TIP To quickly view the pipe offset value, click the pipe segment. The offset appears on the Options Bar and in
the drawing area. You can also open the Element Properties dialog to view the offset.

21 Click OK.
The circulator pump is placed at the same offset as the horizontal pipe segment.

If the pump remains selected, click in the drawing area to clear the selection. Next, you connect the pump.

TIP Sometimes a selected object remains selected (displays in red) after an action upon it has finished. To clear
the selection, you can click in the drawing area, click Modify on the Design Bar, or press ESC.

22 In the 2 - Piping view, click the upper pipe segment to display the connectors.
23 Drag the pipe connector down toward the pump, and after the connector snap displays, release the mouse
button to connect the pipe to the pump.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 201


Notice that the necessary pipe fittings are automatically inserted. Also notice that the modified pipe segment
remains selected after connecting to the pump.

24 Press ESC to clear the selection.


25 Repeat this method to connect the lower pipe segment to the pump above.

After connecting the pump, you need to check connectivity.

26 Place the cursor over the pump, and press TAB.

202 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


The pump and the pipe segments highlight indicating that they are physically connected.

27 Using the methods that you just learned, connect the circulator pump the services the right side of the
supply pipe, and check connectivity.
Make certain that you align the right pump to the left.

Next, you rotate the pumps so that the motor is located as the top.

28 With the 2 - Piping and the 3D Piping views tiled, click in the 3D Piping view to make it active.
29 Adjust the view so that both circulator pumps are in the view.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 203


30 Click the left pump to display rotation controls.

31 Click the rotation control on the right.


The pump rotates 90 degrees to the right.

32 Using the method that you just learned, rotate the right pump so that motor is at the top.

204 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


The in-line circulator pumps are rotated.

Assign the pumps to the supply system

33 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click System Browser.


You can also press F9.

34 In the System Browser, do the following:

■ Expand the Unassigned folder.


■ Expand the Piping folder, right-click Hydronic Supply and click Expand All to view all of the system
components assigned to Hydronic Supply 1 system.

Notice that the 2 circulator pumps are in the Unassigned folder. As you learned in previous exercises, you
must assign all system components (mechanical equipment, and so on) that you placed to a system.
Immediately after placement, Revit MEP associates the unassigned components with a default system in
order to perform calculations. These unassigned components are located in the Unassigned folder in the
System Browser. After you assign the components to a system, they move to their respective system folder.
You need to assign the 2 circulator pumps to the hydronic supply system.

35 In the 3D Piping view, select the left supply pipe riser.

System tools display on the Options Bar.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 205


TIP You can select any system component or piping that has been assigned to a system to access system tools
on the Options Bar.

36 On the Options Bar, click (Edit System).


The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools.

NOTE Do not click . You use this tool to add mechanical equipment that is located upstream in a
system, such as VAV boxes, boilers and AC units. If you use this tool, the boiler will be considered unassigned
and it will move to the Unassigned folder.

37 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar, click Add To System.
System components that were not assigned for this system are grayed out. Notice that the cursor changes
to indicate that Add To System is active.

38 Click the left and right circulator pumps to add them to the supply hydronic system.

Notice that the pumps moved from the Unassigned folder in the System Browser to the Hydronic Supply
1 system listing in the Piping folder. This indicates that the pumps have been assigned to the supply
hydronic system. They are now logically connected to the boiler and radiators.

39 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar, click Finish System.
40 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save.
41 In the Save As dialog, enter Placing Circulator Pumps Training for File name, navigate to the folder
of your choice, and click Save.

In this exercise, you used tiled floor plan and 3D views to place 2 in-line circulator pumps for the hydronic supply
piping system. You used the Split tool to open the pipe segments to accommodate the pumps and then you connected
the pumps. You rotated the pumps in 2 different ways by pressing the Spacebar, and by clicking the rotation controls.
Finally, you assigned the circulator pumps to the supply hydronic system and confirmed the assignments in the System
Browser. In the next exercise, you inspect the hydronic piping systems for flow and pressure.

Inspecting Piping Systems


In this exercise, you use the System Inspector to inspect the level 2 hydronic piping system. The System Inspector is a
unique tool enabling you to inspect each piping system for flow, pressure, and pressure loss by placing the cursor over
a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. Using the System Inspector, you can immediately
target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them.

206 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Inspecting Piping Systems.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
2 - Piping to make it the active view.
2 Right-click in the view, click Zoom in Region from the context menu.
3 Draw a zoom on the boiler in the Mechanical/Electrical room.
You will inspect the hydronic supply system.

4 Select the boiler.


System tools appear on the Options Bar. You select the boiler because you assigned it to the hydronic
supply system.

NOTE To select a system, select any pipe segment, fitting, mechanical equipment, and so on that you have
assigned to a system. System tools display on the Options Bar.

5 On the Options Bar, click (Inspect).


6 In the Select a System dialog, select Hydronic Supply 1, and click OK.
The System Inspector tab opens providing inspection tools on the Design Bar.

IMPORTANT If you select a system component that has been assigned to multiple systems such as a boiler, the
Select System dialog opens enabling you to select the system to inspect. You can click a system in the dialog
and the system highlights in red enabling you to preview it.

7 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Inspect.

NOTE You can also use System Inspector from within the System Browser. Right-click a system from the System
Browser, and click Inspect from the context menu. After the System Inspector activates, click Inspect from the
System Inspector tab on the Design Bar.

8 Place the cursor over the boiler to inspect system information pertaining to the boiler.
The boiler highlights and an inspection flag dynamically reports the section number, flow, and pressure
information including pressure loss. A tooltip also displays this system information. Arrows display on the
pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system.

Inspecting Piping Systems | 207


IMPORTANT As you inspect a system, remember that all information is color coded according to pressure. Red
information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction, also known as the critical
path.

As you inspect, notice that the assigned system components highlight and can be inspected but you cannot
inspect system components that have not been assigned to the selected system.
Next, you inspect 2 areas of the selected piping system to compare system information.

Compare system information

9 Place the cursor over the left pipe segment above the pump, and click to temporarily place the inspection
flag on the segment.
10 Move the cursor over the right pipe segment above the pump to compare the flow and pressure information
with that of the left pipe segment.

208 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


11 Click to place the current inspection flag and close the prior one.
12 Move the cursor over one of the circulation pumps, click and compare its information with that of the
right pipe segment.
13 Click in the view to close the current inspection flag.
You can also inspect systems in a 3D view.

14 With the System Inspector activated and the Hydronic Supply 1 system selected, double-click the 3D Piping
view, and inspect a fin-tube radiator.

Continue to use this method to inspect and compare inspection information for system components and
pipe across the selected Hydronic Supply 1 system. Remember that you can switch between the floor plan
and 3D views without closing the System Inspector.

15 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Inspector to deactivate the System Inspector.
16 Using the methods that you learned, use the System Inspector and inspect the return piping systems in
the project.

NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe, the selected system components
and pipe must be logically and physically connected. The pipe and the system components must be connected
to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection).

17 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save.


18 In the Save As dialog, enter Inspecting Piping Systems Training for File name, navigate to the folder
of your choice, and click Save.

In this exercise, you used the System Inspector to inspect the flow direction, flow, and pressure information for the
hydronic supply system in the project. You noticed that flow and pressure information is specific to the selected system
component, and that all system information is color-coded for either the main or the branch. You also compared system
information across a system. In the next exercise, you check the piping systems.

Checking Piping Systems


Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure, and for pipe
sizing. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design,
you need to validate them. In this exercise, you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to immediately check these connections
for all systems throughout your project, and quickly target those systems that need attention.

Checking Piping Systems | 209


Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Checking Piping Systems.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.

Perform a systems check

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, double-click the
2 - Piping to make it the active view.
2 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Check Pipe Systems.
Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system
throughout the project. A message appears indicating the no warning were found. The piping system is
logically and physically valid.
However, check system warnings may occur. As a tutorial exercise, you check the air systems to view check
systems warnings.

NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Piping.

3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Check Duct Systems.
Warnings display. Notice that these warnings indicate that the default systems are “not empty.”

4 NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. These warnings can refer to both
physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an
improperly assigned system). Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system, the pipe is
now associated with that system. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations, and for pipe
sizing. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. Pipe that is associated
with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked.

IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is the “default system is not empty” warning. As you
learned when placing fin-tube radiators, all system components must be assigned to a system immediately after
placement. If you place radiators without assigning them to a system, Revit MEP creates a default system and
assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder
until you select the system components and create a system for them, thus assigning the components to a system.
After you assign the system components to a system, Revit MEP places them in their assigned systems folder and
removes them from the Unassigned folder. After you have assigned all system components for the project to
their systems, the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display “not empty”
warnings. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder.
This occurs because the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different
system connectors), and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. For example, you
assigned a fin-tube radiator to a supply hydronic system but the same radiator has a return system connector
that you have not assigned to a system. In the System Browser, the fin-tube radiator is listed in the assigned
system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Return system in the Unassigned folder.

Next, you open the System Browser to view the unassigned air system components and the associated
default air systems. Then, you confirm the validity of the assigned piping system components and systems.
Next, you confirm the system component assignments.

Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments

5 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser.

TIP You can press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. If the System
Browser does not respond, click in the drawing area to make it active, then press F9.

210 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


Because you assigned all piping components, you will check the unassigned air system components to
learn how to use the System Browser to confirm default system assignments.

6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, double-click 2 -
Mech to make it the active view.
7 Expand the Unassigned folder and notice that both Default Return Air and Default Exhaust Air systems
are listed.
8 Expand Default Return Air and notice the air terminals and mechanical equipment that were automatically
assigned to the Default Return Air system.
9 Right-click Default Return Air, and click Show to view all of the unassigned system components.
The red lines represent the default logical connection.

TIP If you have multiple views open, you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between
views, otherwise, click Close.

10 Using the same methods, confirm the unassigned system components in the Default Exhaust Air system.
Now that you confirmed all of the unassigned component for the default air systems, you confirm the
piping system assignments.

11 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 - Piping to make it the active view.
12 In the System Browser, collapse the Unassigned folder and expand the Piping folder.
13 Right-click Hydronic Supply, and click Expand All.
The supply system that you created, Hydronic Supply 1 is listed along with the boiler, fin-tube radiators
and the circulator pumps that you assigned to this system. Notice that the system contains a system type
and an assigned number.

Checking Piping Systems | 211


14 Right-click Hydronic Supply 1, and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components.

15 Using the methods that you learned, confirm the system and the system assignments for the hydronic
return system.
You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems.

16 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save.


17 In the Save As dialog, enter Checking Piping Systems Training for File name, navigate to the folder
of your choice, and click Save.

In this exercise, you used the Check Pipe Systems tool and the System Browser to validate the level 2 supply and return
hydronic piping systems that you created. You also confirmed that the air terminals and mechanical equipment for
the return and exhaust air systems were unassigned as they were located in their respective default systems in the
System Browser and “not empty” warnings were generated by Check Duct Systems. Depending on your air systems
design, you may need to assign these system components to their proper systems. The piping system that you designed
did not return any check system warnings; it is a valid system without problems. You have completed the level 2 piping
systems for the building. To view the completed mechanical systems for the tutorial including the level 2 hydronic
piping system, open the m Completed Mechanical Systems.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder under
Training Files.
For additional practice, use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 hydronic piping system. Design the
system in the 1 - Piping view and filter the visibility of objects as needed. Use the same piping system components that
you used for level 2. For pipe offset, specify 2975mm for the supply and 2825mm for the return pipe offset elevation.
In the lesson, you created a hydronic piping system consisting of a supply and return pipe runs, circulator pumps, a
boiler, and fin-tube radiators. You validated rigid pipe connections and geometry using floor plan, 3D, and section
views. You inspected the logical systems using System Inspector and the System Browser. Finally, you checked the
logical and physical connections for the system using Check Pipe Systems. This completes the Designing Piping Systems
lesson.
In this tutorial, you created a supply air system and a hydronic piping system, Each was a completely different mechanical
system that consisted of different system components however, the creation and modification methods remained the
same. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical duct or pipe connections and creating logical
systems. The completed mechanical systems are included in the m Completed Mechanical Systems.rvt file located in
the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new mechanical
systems. Explore different system designs, parametrically modify those designs, and see the results dynamically in views
and design documents. This is the power BIM (Building Information Modeling). This is the future of systems
designing—Revit MEP 2008.

212 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems


Electrical Systems
3
In this tutorial, you learn to create electrical systems within the architectural

model of a building project. The building contains a variety of spaces where you

will design lighting and power systems. The first lesson consists of exercises that

prepare your project for the types of systems that you will design in the following

lesson.

The datasets that you use to complete these exercises are located in the Training

Files directory. You can search the Training Files ➤ Metric directory to verify that

the datasets have been downloaded. If the tutorial datasets are not present, go to

http://www.autodesk.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.

NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially; each
exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. After finishing each
exercise, you can choose to save your work. However, it is highly recommended that
you always begin an exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. This
dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training
session.

213
Planning Electrical Systems
In this lesson you specify electrical settings, load the families containing the electrical components that will make up
your electrical system, and prepare the electrical views that you will need to design the electrical system for your project.

Preparing the Electrical Plan


In this exercise you define the basic parameters for your electrical system, create views for the power and lighting
systems at each level in the building, apply templates to your views, and select the component families that you will
use in the plan.
The electrical settings determine the voltages, wiring, distribution systems, and demand factors that are applied in the
design.
By creating views that are specific to the electrical system you will be able to design, analyze, and modify your lighting
and electrical systems in later exercises. The lighting and power plans are created by copying and renaming architectural
views, then applying the appropriate template to each plan. You will create the following views for Level 1 and Level 2:

■ Power plans where you will place electrical devices and equipment and design power circuits.
■ Electrical Ceiling Plans where you will place lighting fixtures.
■ Lighting Plans where you will design lighting circuits.

Revit MEP provides families of common electrical components that you place in your power and lighting plans. You
load the families that comprise the specific components that will be used in your electrical system. As you develop
more advanced skills working with Revit MEP, you can customize components and expand the library of electrical
families.
All of Revit MEP’s electrical (and mechanical) components are designed with connectors. Connectors allow Revit MEP
to maintain information about the systems that you create, and make it possible for Revit MEP to perform calculations
to assist you with your design. It is important that the connectors associated with components that you place in a view
are within the View Range or level offset. For example, the connectors for the ceiling-hosted lighting fixtures that you
will place in rooms are above the ceiling level. For this reason, the Limit Offset, in the Element Properties dialog for
Rooms, has been set to 2300 mm for the building used with these exercises. This allows the illuminance of the lighting
fixtures to be considered when calculating required lighting levels.
Dataset:

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Electrical Views.rvt.

Specify Electrical Settings


1 Electrical settings let you specify the voltages, power distribution systems, wiring, and demand factors that
you will use in your project. Later, as you place components and create circuits in your electrical plan,
Revit MEP checks to assure that those components are compatible with voltages and distribution systems
that you specify here.
Click Settings menu ➤ Electrical Settings.
2 In the Electrical Settings dialog, in the left pane, expand Wiring.
3 Click Wiring Types, and in the right pane, and click Add.
4 Specify the following parameters for this wire type as follows:

Parameter Value

Name CU-THWN

Material Copper

Temperature Rating 75

214 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems


Parameter Value

Insulation THWN

Max Size 500

Neutral Multiplier 1.0

Neutral Required selected

Neutral Size Hot Conductor

Conduit Type Steel

5 In the tree view, click Voltage Definitions.


6 The Voltage Definitions table is where you specify a range of voltages that will be used with your Voltage
Definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages
that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. For example, many components intended for use
in a 120V circuit are rated anywhere from 110V to 130V. Regardless of the Name value for a voltage
definition, the numeric value in the Value column is the actual voltage used for calculations involving this
definition.
Verify that voltage definitions have been specified with the following parameters:

Name Value Minimum Maximum

120 120.00 V 110.00 V 130.00 V

208 208.00 V 200.00 V 220.00 V

277 277.00 V 260.00 V 280.00 V

480 480.00 V 460.00 V 490.00 V

Preparing the Electrical Plan | 215


Voltage definitions can be deleted only if they are not currently in use with any distribution system.

NOTE Revit MEP does not prevent specifying unfeasible voltage values. For example, you could specify a
distribution system with a L-L Voltage value of 120 and an L-G Voltage value of 480, even though this is physically
impossible.

7 In left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog, click Distribution Systems.


8 In the right pane, verify that distribution systems have been specified with the following parameters:

Name Phase Configuration Wires L-L L-G

120/208 Wye Three Wye 4 208 120

480/277 Wye Three Wye 4 480 277

Distribution systems can be deleted only if they are not currently assigned to any devices.

NOTE Although it is possible to specify a distribution system with a Configuration value of Delta and a Wire
value of 4, this type of system (High, Red, or Wild leg) is currently not supported in Revit MEP because there is
no way to specify the high leg voltage.

9 Click Demand Factors.

216 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems


Demand factors let you adjust the rating of the main service for a building based on the expectation that,
at any given time, only a portion of the electrical equipment will be drawing at its full rated load. You can
specify one or more Demand Factors, applying different Demand Factors to Lighting, Power, HVAC, or
Other systems in your project based on their load. The particular system for which Demand Factors are
applied is selected from the Load Classification drop-down list.

■ More Than specifies the lower limit of a range of loads.


■ Less Than specifies the upper limit of a range of loads.
■ Demand Factor (%) specifies the anticipated a percentage of full rated load that will exist at any given
time for the specified range.

You can Split the default range to create several load ranges for a particular system and apply a different
demand factor to each range. For example, you can specify the following parameters for a building lighting
system:

More Than Less Than Demand Factor

3,000VA 100%

3,000VA 10,000VA 50%

10,000VA 30%

The settings in this example apply a 100% demand factor to loads less than 3000VA, a 50% demand factor
to loads between 3000VA and 10,000VA, and a 30% demand factor for loads greater than 10,000VA.
For this exercise, leave the default settings as shown here.

10 Click OK.

Create views for your electrical plans

11 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans,
right-click Level 1, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
A new view called Copy of Level 1 is created.

12 Right-click Copy of Level 1, and click Rename.


13 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter 1-Power, and click OK.
14 Using the same method, create another copy of level 1, and rename it 1-Lighting. Create 2 copies of the
level 2 floor plan, and rename them as follows:

■ 2-Power
■ 2-Lighting

Preparing the Electrical Plan | 217


Create views for your electrical ceiling plans

Ceiling grid patterns (only visible in ceiling plans) let you correctly lay out lighting fixtures. In the following steps you
will create a ceiling plan for each level by copying and renaming the ceiling plans that the architect has already created.

15 In the Project Browser, expand Ceiling Plans, right-click Level 1, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate
with Detailing.
16 Right-click Copy of Level 1, and click Rename.
17 In the Rename View dialog, enter 1-Ceiling Elec for Name, and click OK.
18 Repeat the previous 3 steps to create a 2-Ceiling Elec ceiling plan.
Now that you have created views specifically for electrical information, you need to apply settings, which are available
from view templates.

View templates let you easily control view properties. The Power Plan, Lighting Plan, and Electrical Ceiling templates
that you will apply to your new views control the visibility of component categories, the view discipline, and the view
range.

Apply templates to views

Each of the templates that you will apply to your new views specify Electrical for the view discipline, which places the
view under the Electrical branch in the project browser, and causes the architectural components to be dimmed in the
view. The templates also specify the sub-discipline for each view, which further defines their position in the project
browser.

19 In the Project Browser, right-click 1-Lighting, and click Apply View Template.
20 In the Select View Template dialog, click Lighting Plan, and click OK.

TIP The Select View Template dialog can also be accessed from the View menu.

The 1-Lighting view is placed under a newly created Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans branch in the project browser.

21 In the Project Browser, right-click 1-Power, and click Apply View Template.
22 In the Select View Template dialog, select Power Plan from the list of templates, and click OK.
The 1-Power view is placed under a newly created Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans branch in the project browser.

23 In the Project Browser, right-click 1-Ceiling Elec, and click Apply View Template.
24 In the Select View Template dialog, select Electrical Ceiling from the list of templates, and click OK.
The 1-Ceiling Elec view is placed under a newly created Electrical ➤ Ceiling ➤ Ceiling Plans branch in the project
browser.

25 Using the same method, apply the Lighting Plan template to the 2-Lighting view, apply the Power Plan
template to 2-Power, and apply the Electrical Ceiling Plan template to the 2-Ceiling Elec view.

Load component families

26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.


27 In the Open dialog, expand Electrical ➤ Devices.
28 While pressing Ctrl, select the following families:

■ M_Lighting Switches.rfa
■ M_Receptacle.rfa

29 Click Open.
30 In the Project Browser, expand Families.

218 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems


Notice that an Electrical Fixtures ➤ M_Receptacle folder containing receptacles has been added to the
families currently available for your design. A Lighting Devices ➤ M_Lighting Switches folder, containing
several switch types, has also been added under Lighting Device.

31 Using the same method, reopen the Electrical folder, and load the following electrical families from the
Equipment folder:

■ M_480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers.rfa


■ M_480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard - Surface.rfa
■ M_208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard - Surface.rfa

32 Open the Electrical folder again and load the M_Troffer Corner Insert.rfa electrical family from the Lighting
Fixtures folder.
As you loaded each of the component families, they were added to the Families in the Project Browser.

33 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
34 Click File menu ➤ Close.

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

35 Proceed to the next exercise, “Defining Required Lighting Levels” on page 219.

In this exercise, you prepared views specifically for your power and lighting plans, selected components for your
electrical systems, and established the parameters for your wiring, voltages, distribution systems, and demand factors.

Defining Required Lighting Levels


In this exercise you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building. Particular
lighting levels are generally specified for different types of rooms (offices, restrooms, conference rooms, and so on).
You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your
new parameter to the various types of rooms in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance
parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the
type of room and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes to the Required Lighting
Level.
Later, in the Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels exercise, you will use the new parameter
again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you
place in the plan.
Open the provided dataset, as described below.
Dataset:

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Defining Lighting Levels.rvt.

Before you can specify a lighting requirement for the rooms within your project, you must first create a parameter that
will hold the value for the lighting requirement.

Create a Required Lighting Level parameter


1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters.
2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add.
3 In the Parameter Properties dialog:

■ Verify that Project parameter is selected for Parameter Type.


■ Under Parameter Data, enter Required Lighting Level for Name.

Defining Required Lighting Levels | 219


■ For Discipline, select Electrical.
■ For Type, select Illuminance.
■ For Group, select Electrical-Lighting.
■ Select Instance.
■ Under Categories, select Rooms.

4 Click OK twice.
The new Required Lighting Level parameter is added to the list in the Project Parameters dialog and is now
an instance parameter for Rooms under Electrical-Lighting in the Room Element Properties dialog.
The new parameter you have just created applies to all rooms in the project. To verify this, you can look
at the properties for one of the rooms.

Verify the new parameter

5 In the Project Browser, double-click 1-Lighting to make it the active view.


6 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan, move the cursor over the room in the upper-left corner, and
when the cross-hairs display, click to select the room.

7 On the Options Bar, click (Properties).


In the Element Properties dialog, your new Required Lighting Level parameter is now listed under Instance
Parameters in the Electrical - Lighting category.
You could use your new parameter to enter a Required Lighting Level value in the Element Properties dialog
for each room. However, there are many rooms in this project that have similar lighting requirements, and
it is more efficient to create a key schedule and use it to assign Required Lighting Level values based on
room type.

8 Click Cancel.

Create a key schedule

9 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities.


10 In the New Schedule dialog:

■ Select Rooms for Category.


■ For Name, enter Room Lighting Requirements.
This name will appear as the title for the resulting schedule.

■ Click Schedule keys.

220 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems


■ For Key Name, enter Lighting Levels.
Lighting Levels is added as a new instance parameter for the Room component. The value that you
specify for each Key Name in the schedule will be used to determine the required lighting level for
each room type.

■ Click OK.

NOTE Schedules can be used as a design interface (Key schedule) as well as a documentation tool (Schedule
building components). You determine the type of schedule by clicking Schedule building components or Schedule
keys in the New Schedule dialog when creating a new Schedule/Quantities view.

11 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, select Required Lighting Level from the Available fields
list, and click Add to add this field to the Scheduled fields (in order) list.
12 Click OK.
The key schedule displays in the drawing area.

13 Drag column borders horizontally to the desired column width.

Enter lighting level requirements in the key schedule

14 On the Options Bar, click New 7 times to add 7 rows in the key schedule, one for each type of room in the
building.
The new rows are added with 1 through 7 as the default Key Names.
Enter a room type in the Key Name column and a corresponding lighting level in the Required Lighting
Level column for the different types of rooms in the project, according to the values in the following table:

Room Type Lighting Level (lx)

Private Office 325

Open Office 540

Lounge 270

Restroom 325

Conference 375

Mech/Elec 215

Stair/Circulation 215

When completed, the Key Schedule should looks like this:

Defining Required Lighting Levels | 221


TIP Your entries are automatically sorted alphabetically by Key Name. You can change the sort keys for the
schedule. In the Project Browser, right-click in the Room Lighting Requirements schedule, click Properties and,
in the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters edit the Sort/Grouping parameter.

Assign room keys to the rooms in the project

15 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans,
double-click the Level 1 floor plan to make it the active view.

NOTE Generally, the Level 1 floor plan would be thought of as the architect’s view. In a worksharing environment,
this view might well be part of a workset checked out by the architect, and other users would not be able to
perform operations covered in this exercise. For tutorial purposes, assume you would have full access to this
view.

16 Zoom in on the large open area in the center of the floor plan.
17 Move the cursor over the room until a cross-hair displays, then right-click, and click Element Properties.
18 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, scroll down to the Identity Data category,
and for Lighting Level parameter, click , and select Open Office.
19 Scroll up to the Electrical - Lighting category, and notice that the value for Required Lighting Level is now
540 lx, the value that you entered for this room type in the key schedule. The value is grayed out and
cannot be edited because you associated this parameter with the Key Name specified by the Room Lighting
Requirements key schedule.
20 Click OK.
21 Using the same method, continue applying Lighting Level keys to the remaining rooms in the project
according to the following table:

TIP You can select multiple rooms of the same type and set the Lighting Level parameter from the same Element
Properties dialog. While pressing Ctrl, select multiple rooms of the same type (for example, Office), then right-click
one of the selections, and click Element Properties to open the Element Properties for the selected rooms.

Level Number Name Key Name

Level 1 1 Open 1 Open Office

Level 1 3 Office Private Office

Level 1 4 Office Private Office

Level 1 5 Office Private Office

Level 1 9 Office Private Office

Level 1 10 Office Private Office

Level 1 11 Office Private Office

Level 1 12 Office Private Office

Level 1 13 Office Private Office

Level 1 14 Office Private Office

Level 1 15 Stairwell Stair/Circulation

Level 1 16 Office Private Office

Level 1 17 Office Private Office

Level 1 18 Office Private Office

222 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems


Level Number Name Key Name

Level 1 19 Rest Room (Men) Restroom

Level 1 20 Rest Room (Ladies) Restroom

Level 1 21 Mechanical/Electrical Mech/Elec

Level 2 2 Open 2 Open Office

Level 2 6 Office Private Office

Level 2 7 Office Private Office

Level 2 8 Office Private Office

Level 2 22 Rest Room (Men) Restroom

Level 2 23 Rest Room (Ladies) Restroom

Level 2 24 Mechanical / Electrical Mech/Elec

Level 2 25 Lounge Lounge

Level 2 26 Office Private Office

Level 2 27 Office Private Office

Level 2 28 Office Private Office

Level 2 29 Office Private Office

Level 2 30 Stairwell Stair/Circulation

Level 2 31 Conference Room Conference

Level 2 32 Office Private Office

Level 2 33 Office Private Office

22 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
23 Click File menu ➤ Close.

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

24 Proceed to the next exercise, “Assigning Room Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels” on page
223.

In this exercise you created a new project parameter and used it in a key schedule to specify a parameter value (Required
Lighting Level) for the rooms in your project. You can use a key schedule to specify more than one parameter for a
component, if required. For example, you could create a key schedule named Room Variables, and select both Required
Lighting Level and Temperature as parameters. Now the key schedule will have one column for Required Lighting Level
and another for Temperature where you can specify values according to room type. Consequently, selecting a room
type for your new Room Variables parameter in a room’s Element Properties dialog will specify values for both parameters
according to the key schedule.

Assigning Room Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels


Revit MEP lets you add color fills to rooms based on specific room parameters. Room color fills can be helpful as a
design tool and as a design communications document. In this exercise you will create a room color fill using the
lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Room color fills can be used with any parameter that exists
on the room components.
Open the provided dataset, as described below.

Assigning Room Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels | 223


Dataset:

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Room Color Fills.rvt.

Activate color fill


1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans,
double-click the Level 1 floor plan to make it the active view.
2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes.

3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog, select Rooms for Category, and click (Duplicate).
4 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting, and click OK.
5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels.
6 For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.
7 Click OK.
8 On the Drafting tab on the Design Bar, click Color Scheme Legend, and place it in the drawing.
9 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog, select Required Lighting , and click OK.
10 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog, for the Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK.
11 Right-click the color scheme legend, and click Element Properties.
12 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
13 In the Type Properties dialog, specify the following Type Parameters:

■ Under Graphics, select Show Title.


■ Under Title Text, select Underline.

14 Click OK twice.
15 Drag the color scheme legend preview to the lower-left corner of the plan.
The color scheme for the Level 1 floor plan should now look something like the image below.

224 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems


16 Make the Level 2 floor plan the active view.
17 Using the same method, activate the color scheme as you did for Level 1.
Notice that the color scheme you created is still in effect. This is because the color scheme is a type within
the project. You can have more than one color scheme in the project, but only one per plan.

18 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
19 Click File menu ➤ Close.

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

20 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels” on page 225.

Color fill plans can be useful as design documents and as communication documents to show other team members
design intent while the project is in the design phases. Color fills can be applied for any parameter that already exists
for rooms, or for any parameter that you want to create for a room (such as the Required Lighting Level parameter you
created in the previous exercise).

Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels


In this exercise you create a room lighting analysis schedule that you will use as a check document rather than as a
construction document. Your schedule will compare the actual lighting levels in each room against the required lighting
levels that you specified in the Defining Required Lighting Levels exercise. As you place lighting fixtures in the spaces
in your project, you will refer to the schedule to assure that the lighting level falls within the +/- 55 lx range specified
in the schedule.
Open the provided dataset, as described below.
Dataset:

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Room Schedule Lighting Requirements.rvt.

Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels | 225


Create room lighting analysis schedule
1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities.
2 In the New Schedule dialog:

■ Under Category, select Rooms.


■ For Name, enter Room Lighting Analysis
■ Verify that Schedule building components is selected.
■ Click OK.

3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, scroll down the Available fields list, double-click the
following fields to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list:

■ Number
■ Name
■ Required Lighting Level
■ Average Estimated Illumination
■ Ceiling Reflectance
■ Wall Reflectance
■ Floor Reflectance
■ Lighting Calculation Workplane

Create a new schedule parameter

4 In the middle of the Schedule Properties dialog, click Calculated Value.


5 In the Calculated Value dialog:

■ For Name, enter Lighting Delta.


■ For Discipline, select Electrical.
■ For Type, select Illuminance.
■ For Formula, enter Average Estimated Illumination - Required Lighting Level.

NOTE Formulas are case sensitive

6 Click OK.
The Lighting Delta parameter is added to the Scheduled fields list.

7 On the Sorting/Grouping tab:

■ For Sort by, select Number.


■ Verify that Ascending is selected.
■ Verify that Itemize every instance is selected.

8 On the Formatting tab, under fields, select Lighting Delta.


9 Click Conditional Format.
10 In the Conditional Formatting dialog:

■ For Field, select Lighting Delta.


■ For Test, select Not Between.
■ For Value, enter -55 lx and 55 lx in the text boxes.

226 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems


11 Click the Background Color chip.
12 In the Color dialog, under Basic colors, click the red color chip.
13 Click OK twice.
14 On the Formatting tab, under Fields, select Ceiling Reflectance, and click Field Format.
15 In the Format dialog:

■ Clear Use default settings.


■ For Units, verify that Fixed is selected.
■ For Rounding, select 2 decimal places.

16 Click OK.
17 Using the same method, specify rounding to 2 decimal places for the Wall Reflectance and Floor Reflectance
fields.
18 Click OK.

19 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
20 Click File menu ➤ Close.

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

21 Proceed to the next lesson, “Designing the Electrical System” on page 228.

The schedule that you have just created shows the Average Estimated Illumination level for all of the rooms as 0. This
is because you have not yet added lighting fixtures to any of the rooms. You can also see that the Lighting Delta has
been calculated for each room, and in every case the Lighting Delta field is red. This is because the value is not within
the range that you specified in the Conditional Formatting dialog.
In this exercise, you created a schedule that you will refer to as you add lighting fixtures to the project. The schedule
will be used to check the actual design against the design requirements that were specified in a previous exercise. This
type of schedule can be useful as a method for checking design components in the project.

Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels | 227


Designing the Electrical System
In this lesson you use the views and schedules that you created in Lesson 1 to place electrical devices, electrical equipment,
and lighting fixtures throughout your building project. Once the equipment is in place, you will create power and
lighting circuits, and make connections to electrical equipment.

Adding Lighting Fixtures


In this exercise you add lighting fixtures throughout your project. As you select and place lighting fixtures, the key
schedule that you created in the previous lesson serves as a tool to verify that the design meets each room’s lighting
requirement.
Open the provided dataset, as described below.
Dataset:

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Adding Lighting Fixtures.rvt.

Place the initial lighting fixture


1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules, and double-click Room Lighting Analysis to open the schedule
created in the previous lesson.
2 Right click in the Required Lighting Level column, and click Hide Column(s) to hide that column.
3 Repeat the previous step to hide the Ceiling Reflectance, Wall Reflectance, Floor Reflectance, and Lighting
Calculation Workplane columns.
Only the Number, Name, Average Estimated Lighting, and Lighting Delta columns should remain visible
in the schedule.

NOTE Right-click a heading, and click Unhide All Columns to restore the hidden columns.

4 On the Windows menu, click Close Hidden Windows.


5 Resize the view containing the schedule to show only the 4 remaining columns.
6 In the Project Browser, under Ceiling Plans, double-click 1-Ceiling Elec to make it the active view.
You need to add lighting fixtures in a ceiling plan because you want to align the lighting fixtures to the
ceiling grid, and the ceiling grid is not visible in a floor plan view.

7 On the Windows menu, click Tile, and arrange the windows as shown.

228 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems


8 In the 1-Ceiling Elec view, zoom in to the upper-left corner of the plan.
9 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Light Fixture.
10 In the Type Selector, select M_Troffer Corner Insert : M_600x1200 3 Lamp, and move the cursor into the
ceiling plan view.

NOTE A preview of the lighting fixture is not displayed until you move the cursor over a ceiling. You cannot
place this type of lighting fixture in a non-ceiling location.

11 With the cursor in the room in the upper-left corner of the plan, click to place the lighting fixture in the
ceiling as shown.
It is not necessary to align the lighting fixture to the grid in this step. In the next step you will use the
Move command to snap the fixture to a ceiling grid intersection.

12 Click Modify.

13 Zoom in on the lighting fixture, select it, and on the Toolbar, click (Move).
14 Move the cursor over the lower-left corner of the lighting fixture, and when Endpoint displays, click to
specify the start point.

Adding Lighting Fixtures | 229


15 Move the cursor over an intersection of the ceiling grid lines where you want to place the fixture, and click
when Intersection displays.

In the Room Lighting Analysis Schedule, the Lighting Delta for room 3 is changed from -325 lx to -118 lx,
closer to the required +/- 55 lx.
The current line weight settings for the lighting fixture and ceiling grid make it difficult to distinguish the
outline of the lighting fixture from the ceiling grid lines. Adjusting the line weight for the lighting fixtures
will make it easier to place the remaining lighting fixtures.

Change line weight to adjust lighting fixture visibility

16 Right-click anywhere on the view background, and click View Properties.


17 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides.
18 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides for Reflected Ceiling Plan: 1-Ceiling Elec
dialog, scroll down to Lighting Fixtures, click in the Projection/Surface-Lines column, and click Override.
19 In the Line Graphics dialog, under Lines, for Weight, select 5.
20 Click OK 3 times.

230 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems


The fixture you placed now displays as shown.

Copy and place additional lighting fixtures

21 Select the lighting fixture, and on the Toolbar, click (Copy).


22 On the Options Bar, select Multiple.
This will let you place multiple copies of the lighting fixture after selecting a start point.

23 Select the lower-left Endpoint of the lighting fixture as the start point, and then select ceiling grid
intersections as the destination move endpoints to place 5 copies of this fixture in the 3 offices in the upper
left area of the level 1, as shown.

Check the illumination levels against the Room Lighting Analysis schedule

24 Check the Average Estimated Illumination and Lighting Delta in the Room Lighting Analysis schedule.

Adding Lighting Fixtures | 231


The Average Estimated Illumination for rooms 3, 4 and 5 is now nearer the required lighting level target
of 325 lx, but is still not within the +/- 55 lx range, so the Lighting Delta column remains red for these
rooms.

To adjust the illumination level downward, you decide to replace one of the 3-lamp fixtures in each room
with a 2-lamp fixture.

NOTE Average Estimated Illumination levels are calculated using the lumen method for lighting calculations.
Point by point analysis is not currently supported.

Change lighting fixture type

25 In the 1-Ceiling Elec, select one of the lighting fixtures in each room, and in the Type Selector, select
M_Troffer Corner Insert : M_600x1200 2Lamp.

TIP You can select multiple components by pressing Ctrl while selecting components in a drawing. If you select
a component inadvertently, press Shift while clicking the component to remove it as a selection.

26 Again, check the Average Estimated Illumination and Lighting Delta in the Room Lighting Analysis schedule,
and verify that the lighting levels are now within the specified range.

The Average Estimated Illumination is now within the +/- 55 lx range.

You can perform the following steps to complete this exercise, placing lighting fixtures in the remaining Level 1 and
Level 2 spaces or you can close this dataset, and go on to the next exercise. The lighting fixtures are all placed in the
next dataset.

27 Using the same method, continue placing 2-lamp and 3-lamp lighting fixtures in the remaining spaces in
the 1-Ceiling Elec and 2-Ceiling Elec views. Use the Room Lighting Analysis schedule to determine when
the lighting levels are within the specified range.
When you are finished, only the Mechanical/Electrical rooms (without ceilings) will have a red background
in the Room Lighting Analysis schedule. Completed lighting layouts for Level 1 and Level 2 are shown
below along with the Room Lighting Analysis schedule.

232 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems


Level 1

NOTE Ceiling grids were not added to the Mechanical/Electrical rooms; therefore, you cannot add lighting
fixtures to these rooms.

Level 2

Adding Lighting Fixtures | 233


28 In the Room Lighting Analysis schedule, right-click one of the headings, and click Unhide All Columns.

With the exception of the 2 Mechanical/Electrical rooms, your Lighting Delta column for all of the rooms
should be white.

29 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
30 Click File menu ➤ Close.

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

31 Proceed to the next exercise, “Placing Lighting Switches” on page 234.

In this exercise, you learned how to place lighting fixtures in ceiling plans, and how to verify the lighting layout using
the schedule that you created as a design tool in “Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels” on
page 225.

Placing Lighting Switches


In this exercise you add switches for the lighting fixtures in your project. The procedure for placing switches is the
same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP.
Open the provided dataset, as described below.
Dataset:

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Placing Switches.rvt.

Place switches in rooms


1 In the Project Browser, double-click 1-Lighting to make it the active view.
2 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device.
3 In the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Single Pole.

4 On the Options Bar, verify that (Place on Vertical Face) is selected.


5 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the building and move the cursor along the right wall of room 3.

234 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems


Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host, it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall.

6 Position the switch preview on the interior wall of the room as shown, and click to place the switch.

7 Continue placing switches of this type in the remaining rooms in the 1-Lighting view as shown.

Level 1

8 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device, and in the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches :
M_Three Way.
9 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan, and place a 3-way switch on the open office side of the upper
restroom wall as shown.

Placing Lighting Switches | 235


10 Zoom in on the stairwell at the lower-right corner of the plan, and place one 3-way switch on the wall
inside the stairwell near the door to the open office, and place another 3-way switch on the wall of the
open office outside of the stairwell, as shown.

11 In the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Four Way.


12 Place a 4-way switch near the exit door on the right side of the stairwell as shown.

236 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems


13 In the open office area, place a 4-way switch near each end of the curved wall as shown.

14 In the Project Browser, double-click 2-Lighting to make it the active view.


15 In the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Three Way, and place a switch on the open office
wall near the stairwell in the upper-left corner of the plan as shown.

Placing Lighting Switches | 237


16 Zoom in on the stairwell at the lower-right corner of the plan, and place a 3-way switch on the wall inside
the stairwell near the door to the open office, and place another 3-way switch on the wall of the open
office outside of the stairwell, as shown.

17 You can perform the following steps to complete this exercise, placing lighting switches in the remaining
Level 1 and Level 2 spaces or you can close this dataset, and go on to the next exercise. The lighting switches
are all placed in the next dataset.
On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device, in the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Single
Pole, and place single pole switches in second-floor offices and restrooms as shown.

238 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems


Level 2

18 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
19 Click File menu ➤ Close.

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

20 Proceed to the next exercise, “ Placing Power Receptacles” on page 239.

Placing Power Receptacles


In this exercise you will be placing receptacles that will be hosted by architectural components in the project. The
process is similar to placing switches as you did in the previous exercise.
Open the provided dataset, as described below.
Dataset:

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Placing Receptacles.rvt.

Place wall-hosted receptacles

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
1-Power to make it the active view.
2 Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the view.
3 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device.
4 In the Type Selector, select M_Receptacle : M_Standard.

Placing Power Receptacles | 239


5 On the Options Bar, verify that (Place on Vertical Face) is selected.
6 In the left side of the plan, place receptacles along the walls in the offices as shown.

7 Continue placing receptacles throughout the offices on Level 1 and Level 2 approximately as shown,
including the wall-based receptacles in the open office areas.

240 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems


1-Power

2-Power

Placing Power Receptacles | 241


Place floor-hosted receptacles

8 In the Project Browser, double-click 1-Power.


9 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device.
10 In the Type Selector, select M_Receptacle : M_Standard.

11 On the Options Bar, click (Place on Work Plane), and verify that Level : Level 1 is selected for Plane.

NOTE You can select a work plane from the Plane drop-down list on the Options Bar. The current level is selected
by default.

12 Zoom in on the upper-right corner of the Open Office, and place a receptacle on the floor as shown.

When placing a receptacle on a workplane, its connector is located below the level of the workplane. Just
as it was for ceiling hosted lighting fixtures, it is important that the connector be within the Room to allow
Revit MEP to maintain information about the electrical system and perform calculations for spaces in your
design. In the next steps, you will flip the workplane of the receptacle to locate the connector above the
workplane. Then you will create copies of the flipped receptacle to place the remaining floor-based
receptacles.

13 Select the receptacle and click (Flip WorkPlane) to locate the connector above the workplane (within
the room).

14 On the Toolbar, click (Copy).


15 On the Options Bar, select Multiple.
This will let you place multiple copies of the receptacle after selecting a start point.

16 Select an Endpoint on the receptacle as the start point, and then place 3 copies of the receptacle in the
upper right area of the first floor, as shown.

242 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems


17 Draw a pick box around the four floor-based receptacles, click , select Multiple on the Options Bar
and using the previous procedure, place 3 copies of the flipped receptacles throughout the Level 1 open
office, as shown.

18 Using the same procedure, place receptacles on the floor of the open office in 2-Power as shown.

TIP You can select all of the floor hosted receptacles in the 1-Power view, then copy and paste them in the
2-Power view. Select all 1-Power floor receptacles, click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard, open 2-Power, and
click Edit ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Current View.

19 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
20 Click File menu ➤ Close.

Placing Power Receptacles | 243


NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports” on page 244.

In this exercise you placed wall-hosted receptacles on the walls and floor-hosted receptacles on the floor. It is good to
be familiar with this concept of placing hosted components, because it is quite common in Revit MEP.

Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports


In this exercise you will create a consumption usage report for power and lighting in this project. With the introduction
of local energy codes, the amount of electricity consumed by different systems within the building is becoming
increasingly important to the design. When the HVAC designer asks what the wattage/SF amounts are for different
spaces, you can refer to this report rather than having to measure rooms and count fixtures.
Open the provided dataset, as described below.
Dataset:

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Usage Reports.rvt.

1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities.


2 In the New Schedule dialog, scroll down the Category list, and select Rooms.
3 Verify that Schedule building components is selected, and for Name, enter Power & Lighting Usage.
4 Click OK.
5 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, select and add the following
fields to the Scheduled fields (in order) list in the order shown:

■ Number
■ Name
■ Area
■ Actual Lighting Load
■ Actual Power Load
■ Actual Lighting Load/Area
■ Actual Power Load/Area

6 Click OK.
A schedule is created similar to the one shown.

244 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems


7 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
8 Click File menu ➤ Close.

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

9 Proceed to the next exercise, “Placing Electrical Equipment” on page 245.

In this exercise you created a schedule that can be used as input for the HVAC engineers or as input for energy analysis
and code review. The information in this schedule was produced using the data that you entered into the model.

Placing Electrical Equipment


In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. Although the connections
between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans, you need to create logical connections to define the
topology. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical equipment. You start at the low voltage
panels (L-1 and L-2), and work toward the higher voltage, main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP).

Open the provided dataset, as described below.


Dataset:

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

Placing Electrical Equipment | 245


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Placing Electrical Equipment.rvt.

Add a panel
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
1-Power.
2 Zoom in on the Mechanical/Electrical room between the 2 restrooms.
3 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Electrical Equipment.
4 In the Type Selector, select M_480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard - Surface : M_250A, and click
to place the panel as shown.

5 On the Design Bar, click Modify and select the panel you just placed.
6 On the Options Bar, for Distribution Sys, select 480/277 Wye.

TIP The Distribution System Types parameter is also accessible in the Element Properties dialog. Right-click the
panel, click Element Properties, scroll down the Instance Parameters and, under Electrical - Loads, select 480/277
Wye for Distribution System Types.

Name the new panel

7 With the panel still selected, click .


8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, scroll down to the Electrical - Loads category,
and for Panel Name, enter MDP to indicate Main Distribution Panel.
This will be where the primary electrical service enters the building.

9 Click OK.

Add a transformer

10 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, select Electrical Equipment.


11 In the Type Selector, select M_480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers : M_45kVA, and place the transformer
in the Mechanical/Electrical room to the right of the panel as shown.

246 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems


12 Click Modify
13 Select the transformer, and on the Options Bar, for Distribution Sys, select 480/277 Wye.

14 On the Options Bar, click .


Since this is a transformer, you must also specify a Secondary Distribution System parameter.

15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, scroll down to the Electrical - Loads category,
and specify the following:

■ For Secondary Distribution System, select 120/208 Wye.


■ For Panel Name, enter T1.

16 Click OK.

Add another panel

17 On the Design Bar, select Electrical Equipment.


18 In the Type Selector, select M_208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard - Surface : M_100A, and place
the panel to the right of the transformer.

19 Click Modify.
20 Select the panel you just placed, and on the Options Bar, for Distribution Sys, select 120/208 Wye.

21 On the Options Bar, click .


22 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, scroll down to the Electrical - Loads category,
and for Panel Name, enter L-1.
23 Click OK.

Placing Electrical Equipment | 247


Add panels and a transformer to second floor

24 Using the same method, add the following components in the Mechanical/Electrical room in the 2-Power
view:

■ M_480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard - Surface : M_250A named H-2
■ M_480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers: M_45kVA named T2
■ M_208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard - Surface : M_100A named L-2

NOTE Remember to select the appropriate Distribution System Types parameter values for each equipment
component, including the Secondary Distribution System for T2.

Create logical circuits between equipment

25 In the 2-Power view, select panel L-2.

26 On the Options Bar, click (Create Power Circuit).


A Bounding Box displays as a dashed box surrounding the components that make up the circuit.

27 Click (Select Panel).


In this case you are going to select something other than the panel, because the circuit on the mains of
this panel is connected to a transformer rather than to another panel.

28 On the Options Bar, select T2 for Panel to establish the connection between the L-2 panel and T2 transformer.
The Bounding Box expands to enclose the transformer and panel L-2 and you will see temporary circuit
indicating that the panel has been connected to the transformer.

29 Select the transformer T2, and click .

30 On the Options Bar, click , and select panel H-2 for Panel. The temporary circuit displays as shown.

248 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems


31 Close all open views except 1-Power and 2-Power
32 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to display both views in the drawing area.
33 Zoom in on each view and scroll as necessary to display the Level 1 and Level 2 Mechanical/Electrical
rooms side-by-side.

34 In the 2-Power view, select the H-2 panel, and on the Options Bar, click .

35 On the Option Bar, click .


36 Click anywhere in 1-Power view to make it the active view, and select the MDP panel.
The temporary circuit is displayed as shown, indicating that a connection has been made between H-2 and
MDP.

A circuit is created between H-2 and MDP.

37 Close the 2-Power view, and maximize the 1-Power view to make it easier to work with.

38 On the Options Bar, select the L-1 panel, and click .

39 Click , and select the T1 transformer as the panel.

Placing Electrical Equipment | 249


40 Select the T1 transformer, and click .

41 On the Options Bar, click , and select the MDP panel.

42 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
43 Click File menu ➤ Close.

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

44 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Power Circuitry” on page 250.

In this exercise you placed the electrical distribution equipment required for the project. You also defined how the
pieces of electrical equipment are connected by creating logical connections between the different pieces of equipment.

Creating Power Circuitry


In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). Circuits are used for power, lighting,
and data systems. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between
different components in the system.
Open the provided dataset, as described below.
Dataset:

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Power Circuitry.rvt.

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
1-Power to make it the active view.

250 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems


2 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan.
Creating an electrical circuit to connect the devices (receptacles) in this view is similar to creating the
electrical circuits in the previous exercise. The difference here is that you will have several components in
the circuit.

3 While pressing Ctrl, select all the receptacles in the corner room.

4 On the Options Bar, click .


Temporary circuits are display as dashed lines between the components to indicate the interconnection
of the devices that you selected for this circuit.

The generate wiring controls ( ) let you create permanent wiring for the circuit. For now, leave the
circuit as a temporary logical circuit. You will add permanent wiring in a later exercise.

5 Select one of the receptacles in the corner room, and observe that the information displayed indicates the
number of poles (#1), load (180 VA), and voltage (120 V).
A question mark is displayed for this receptacle because no Label has been specified in the Type Properties
for this particular receptacle type.

Creating Power Circuitry | 251


Revit MEP will only let you make a connection between compatible components. You cannot connect
components having a different number of poles or a different voltage specified for the distribution system
types.

6 Click Modify.
7 Move the cursor over one of the receptacles in the corner room so that it is highlighted, press Tab, and click
to select the circuit again.

8 On the Options Bar, click (Select a Panel for the Circuit), and select panel L-1 as the panel for this
circuit.

NOTE You can click a panel in the drawing area or select the panel name from the drop-down list on the Options
Bar. The drop-down list on the Option Bar lists only those panels that are compatible with the circuit’s distribution
system and have an available circuit.

9 Highlight one of the receptacles in the room, and press Tab.

10 Click to select the circuit and all of the devices on the circuit.

252 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems


11 On the Options Bar, click (Edit Circuit).
The Edit Circuit tab is activated on the Design Bar. When editing a circuit, all but the components in the
circuit are dimmed, making it easy to identify the components that are part of the circuit group.

12 On the Edit Circuit tab on the Design Bar, select Circuit Properties.
In the Element Properties dialog for this circuit, notice that most of the Instance Parameter values are
grayed out. They cannot be edited because they are calculated according to the components in the circuit.
The Voltage value for the circuit is 120V because all the receptacles and the panel in the circuit are 120V
components. The editable parameters include Wire Type and Rating will be discussed in a later exercise.
In the next 2 steps you will see how parameters interact as Revit MEP calculates values for the circuit.

13 Scroll down to the Wire Size parameter.


The currently specified values are 1-#12, 1-#12, 1-#12, which are the wire sizes for the load, neutral, and
ground wiring, respectively for this circuit. These values are calculated based on the Rating and Voltage
Drop values.

14 Scroll back up to the Rating parameter, change the value from 20A to 50A, and then scroll back down to
Wire Size.
Notice that the Wire Size values have changed to 1-#6, 1-#6, 1-#10.

15 Click Cancel to close the Element Properties dialog and cancel your changes.
16 On the Design Bar, click Cancel Circuit.
17 Continue selecting receptacles, creating power circuits, and assigning them to panel L-1 on a room-by-room
basis for all of the offices around the perimeter of the building.

18 Select the receptacle in the stair well, click , click , and select panel L-1.
Panel L-1 is not listed on the drop-down list. If you select L-1 in the drawing, Revit MEP displays a warning
message indicating that adding this circuit group exceeds the number of available slots on panel L-1.

19 Close the warning message.

Add additional slots to panel

20 Right-click panel L-1, and click Element Properties.


21 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, scroll down to the Electrical - Loads category,
and change the value for Max #1 Pole Breakers from 12 to 18.
22 Click OK.
You should now be able to create the circuit for the stairwell, and add it to panel L-1.

23 Select the receptacle in the stairwell again, click , and select panel L-1.
The circuit is created.

Creating Power Circuitry | 253


24 After circuits have been created and assigned for all of the individual offices, zoom in to the upper part of
the large open office, and select the 4 floor-mounted receptacles as shown.

25 On the Options Bar, click , click , and then select panel L-1.

26 Continue creating circuits, as previously described, for the remaining groups of 4 floor-hosted receptacles.

NOTE Do not create a circuit for the 5 wall-hosted receptacles on the walls in the large open area at this time.
These will be connected in a later exercise.

27 Using the same procedures, create circuits in the 2-Power view and assign them to panel L-2.

NOTE Do not create a circuit for the 5 wall-hosted receptacles on the walls in the large open area of Level 2 at
this time. These will be connected in a later exercise.

28 Double-click 1-Power to make it the active view.

29 Select the L-1 panel, and on the Options Bar, click (Edit Circuits on Panel).

254 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems


In the Edit Circuits dialog, notice that circuit descriptions have been automatically created based on
information from the devices themselves. Notice also that all the circuits have been assigned to a location
on the panel. Although this panel is currently capable of supporting 18 circuits, you have assigned only
17.

30 Click OK.
31 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
32 Click File menu ➤ Close.

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

33 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires” on page 255.

In this exercise you learned how to create circuit groups (circuits) and assign the circuits to panels. You also learned
how voltage definitions and distribution systems determine the kinds of electrical systems that you can define for your
project. Finally, you learned how to add slots to a panel to accommodate circuits.

Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires


In this exercise you become more familiar with the wiring settings, then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the
circuits are created. Adding wiring to a project is optional. As you saw in the previous exercise, you can create circuits
and maintain the information associated with them without adding wiring to the project.
Open the provided dataset, as described below.
Dataset:

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires.rvt.

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting, and double-click 1-Lighting to
make it the active view.
2 Zoom out so that the entire plan is visible.
3 Draw a pick box around the plan to select everything.

Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 255


4 On the Options Bar, click (Filter).
5 In the Filter dialog, click Check None to clear all the check boxes, re-select Lighting Devices and Lighting
Fixtures, and click OK.
Only the lighting fixtures and switches on Level 1 should now be selected, as shown.

6 On the Options Bar, click .


This should generate a Warning message indicating that the load for the circuit exceeds 80% of the defined
rating (20A).

7 Close the message window and, click (Undo) to undo the circuit creation.
8 Select all the light fixtures and switches in the large open office (Open 1) as shown.

256 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems


9 On the Options Bar, click , click , and then select panel MDP as the panel for the circuit.

10 On the Options Bar, click .


This changes the temporary wiring graphics into permanent wiring graphics as shown.

When creating wires, as in this step, you can choose to create either arc or chamfered wiring. Arc wiring
is sometimes used to indicate wiring that is concealed within walls, ceilings, or floors. Chamfered wiring
can be used to indicate wiring that is exposed.

Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 257


In this step, you created arc type wiring. Later, when you create wiring manually, you can specify splined
wiring. Splined wiring is similar to arc, but with an additional vertex. You can add or remove vertices from
wires by right-clicking the wire and clicking Insert Vertex or Delete Vertex.
Tick marks (the short lines that intersect a wire run) indicate the number and type of conductors (load,
neutral, ground) in the wire run. The meaning for each tick mark varies according to the style of the tick
mark selected on the Wiring panel in the Electrical Settings dialog.
In the next steps, you add a conductor in the wiring path between the 3-way and 4-way switches to allow
switching the lights on or off from any of the switches in the open office area.

Adjust the number of conductors in a path between switches

11 Select the 4-way switch at the left end of the curved wall, move the cursor to highlight the 4-way switch
at the right end of the curved wall, press Tab, and click the switch to select the switches, lighting fixtures,
and wire segments on the path between the 2 switches.

12 On the Options Bar, click .


13 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Wires, and click OK.
Only the wire segments are selected in the path between the switches.

14 On the Options Bar, click .


15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, for Hot Conductors, enter 2, and click OK.

Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the wire segments on the path between the switches (2 hot
conductors, one neutral conductor, and one ground conductor).

16 Using the same method, add a hot conductor to the wire segments between the remaining switches in the
large room and between the 2 switches in the Level 1 stairwell.

NOTE The Hot Conductors parameter value will be blank if the path being selected contains wire segments with
a combination of both 1 and 2 specified as the value for Hot Conductors. When this occurs, enter 2 as the value,
and click OK.

17 Create lighting circuits for the private offices, restrooms and stairwell on Level 1, and assign the circuits
to panel MDP.
The wiring layout should look similar to the following:

258 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems


18 For more practice, continue performing the steps in this exercise using the procedures and tools described
previously to create another lighting circuit for the rest of the lighting fixtures and switches on the 1-Lighting
view, then creating lighting circuits in 2-Lighting.
Otherwise, close the dataset and go on to the next exercise, “Creating Switch Systems” on page 260.

19 Create a lighting circuit for the open area on Level 2, assign the circuit to panel H-2.
20 Create lighting circuits and wiring for the private offices, lounge, conference room, and restrooms in the
2-Lighting view, and assign the circuits to panel H-2.

NOTE Do not include the two lighting fixtures and 3-way switch in the stairwell in either circuit. These will be
connected in a later exercise.

The wiring layout should look similar to the following:

Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 259


21 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
22 Click File menu ➤ Close.

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

23 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Switch Systems” on page 260.

In this exercise you learned how to create lighting circuitry and used the basic methods for adding and editing wires.
You also learned about the settings that control how Revit MEP performs wire sizing. You also saw that the Revit MEP
warns you when you try to put too much load on a circuit, but does not prevent you from doing so.

Creating Switch Systems


You create switch systems to specify switches that control groups of lighting fixtures in a project. In this exercise you
will create switch systems on Level 1 and Level 2, assign lighting fixtures to switches, and specify switch IDs for switches.
After creating the switch systems on Level 1, you will create a room schedule with an embedded schedule listing switch
IDs, fixtures, and panel information.
Open the provided dataset, as described below.
Dataset:

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Switch Systems.rvt.

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
1-Lighting to make it the active view.
2 Select all the lighting fixtures in the large open office (Open 1).

3 On the Options Bar, click (Create Switch System).

260 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems


4 Click (Select Switch for System), and click the 4-way switch at the left end of the curved wall to
designate the switch controlling the fixtures.

After creating the switch system, you decide to assign several fixtures to a different switch in the large open
area.

5 On the Options Bar, click (Edit Switch System).


The Edit Switch System tab is activated on the Design Bar.

6 On the Edit Switch System tab, click Remove From System, and on the Options Bar, select Multiple.
The Options Bar provides the following information about the currently selected switch system.

■ Switch ID: the identifier for the switch that is currently assigned to the system.
■ Number of Fixtures: the number of components in the system (excluding the switch).

With Multiple selected on the Options Bar, you can use a pick box to select several fixtures. When you
have selected as many fixtures as you want, click Finish to confirm your selections.

7 Draw a pick box around the 6 lighting fixtures to the left of the restrooms.

Creating Switch Systems | 261


8 On the Options Bar, click Finish.
The Number of Fixtures field now displays 26 fixtures remaining in the system.

9 Click Switch Properties.


10 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Properties, for Switch ID, enter Main Entrance - West,
and click OK.
11 On the Edit Switch System tab, click Finish System.
12 Select the 6 lighting fixtures to the left of the restrooms.

13 On the Options Bar, click .

14 Click .
15 On the Edit Switch System tab, click Select Switch, and select the switch on the wall outside the ladies’
restroom.

16 Click Switch Properties.


17 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Properties, for Switch ID, enter North Stairwell - 1st
Floor, and click OK.
18 On the Edit Switch System tab, click Finish System.
19 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan, select both lighting fixtures in the corner office, and on the

Options Bar, click .

20 Click , and click the single-pole switch on the right wall of the office to designate the switch
controlling the fixtures in the office.

262 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems


21 Using the same method, create switch systems for the remaining private offices, stairwell, and restrooms
in the 1-Lighting view.

Create a switch system schedule

22 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities.


23 In the New Schedule dialog:

■ Under Category, select Rooms.


■ For Name, enter Switch Systems.
■ Verify that Schedule building components is selected.
■ Click OK.

24 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, scroll down the Available fields list, double-click the
following fields—in the order shown—to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list:

■ Number
■ Name

25 On the Sorting/Grouping tab:

■ For Sort by, select Number.


■ Verify that Ascending is selected.
■ Verify that Itemize every instance is selected.

26 On the Formatting tab, select Number from the Fields list, and for Heading, enter Room Number.
27 On the Embedded Schedule tab:

■ Select Embedded Schedule


■ Under Categories, select Lighting Fixtures
■ Click Embedded Schedule Properties.

28 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, scroll down the Available fields list, double-click the
following fields—in the order shown—to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list:

■ Switch Id
■ Type
■ Panel
■ Circuit Number

29 Click OK twice.

Creating Switch Systems | 263


The Switch System schedule displays in the drawing area, and is added to the Project Browser under
Schedules/Quantities. The embedded lighting fixture content is arranged so that the information about a
switch system displays below the room containing that system.

30 For more practice, continue creating switch systems in the 2-Lighting view. Create separate systems for the
lounge, restrooms, conference room, and private offices. Create a system for all the lighting fixtures in the
large open area and assign them to the switch near the east stairwell. Specify Open Area - 2nd Floor for the
switch ID.
The Switch Systems schedule is automatically updated as you specify switch IDs or make changes to the
lighting.
Otherwise, close the dataset and go on to the next exercise, “Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs” on page
264.

31 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
32 Click File menu ➤ Close.

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

33 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs” on page 264.

Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs


In this exercise you will see how Revit MEP deals with wiring runs that contain more than a single circuit. You will
design the power wiring for the 3 offices in the upper-left portion of 1-Power view to serve as an example of the
multi-circuit wiring run.
Open the provided dataset, as described below.
Dataset:

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.

264 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems


■ Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Multi-Circuit Wiring.rvt.

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
1-Power to make it the active view.
2 Zoom in on the room at the upper-left corner of the plan.
3 In the corner room, move the cursor over one of the receptacles to highlight it, press Tab to highlight the
entire circuit, and click to select the circuit and all of the components connected to it.

4 On the Options Bar, click to generate arc type wiring for the selected circuit.

5 Using the same method, generate permanent wiring for the circuits in the remaining rooms along the left
side of the plan.

6 Select the home runs that extend out into the open office from the 2 upper rooms, and delete both home
runs.
7 Adjust the view so that the 2 upper rooms are visible.
8 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Wire.

9 On the Options Bar, verify that (Arced Wire) is selected.

Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 265


10 Click the connector for the receptacle on the east wall of the top room to specify the start point for the
wire.

11 Click in the open space near the door for the room to specify the second point for the wire, as shown.

12 Click the connector for the receptacle on the east wall of the middle room to specify the endpoint for the
wire.

266 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems


NOTE When neither of the 2 groups of components on the circuit has a free home run, Revit MEP temporarily
assigns a direction to the home run. The direction will be corrected, if necessary, when the wiring is completed.

13 Adjust the view so that the 2 lower rooms are visible, and using the same method, create wiring between
receptacles in the 2 lower rooms.
When completed, your layout should look similar to the following:

Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 267


Home run arrows are used to indicate that a wiring run is returning to a panel. Multi-circuit wiring runs
appear with multiple arrows on the home run. As wiring runs are collected into a multi-circuit wiring run,
the number of tick marks is increased to show the increase in the number of hot conductors. In the previous
steps, as each room was added to the wiring run, the number of tick marks and home run arrows is increased
such that the final home run has 3 home run arrows and 5 tick marks (3 hot conductors, a shared neutral,
and a shared safety ground).

14 Click Modify.

Adjust the home run routing

15 Select the home run extending from the lower room, and notice the vertex controls at each end of the wire
and another in the center.

16 Drag the center vertex to the left so that it is closer to the receptacle in the lower room as shown.

17 Right click the wire run, select Insert Vertex, drag the new vertex along the wire run to a point midway
between the other vertex and the connector, and click.
18 Drag the vertex at the end of the home run toward the lower restroom, and drag the new vertex up and
to the left to arrange the wire run so that it looks similar to the following image.

268 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems


Vertices let you route wires in your project views. The wire behaves like a spline, adjusting its shape according
to the vertex location.

19 For additional practice, you can continue creating permanent wiring for the circuits in the 1-Power and
2-Power views, or you can close this dataset and go on to the next exercise. Examples of completed plans
are provided below for reference.

Completed 1-Power

Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 269


Completed 2-Power

20 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
21 Click File menu ➤ Close.

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

22 Proceed to the next exercise, “Checking Your Design ” on page 270.

In this exercise, you created wiring runs from the circuits that you created in a previous exercise and combined these
to form multi-circuit wiring runs. You also learned how to adjust the layout of wiring runs and interpret tick marks
and home run arrows.

Checking Your Design


In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises.
The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. You also learn
to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected.
Open the provided dataset, as described below.
Dataset:

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Checking Your Design.rvt.

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
1-Power to make it the active view.
2 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the drawing so that the corner room is visible.
3 Click Window menu ➤ Systems Browser.
The System Browser is displayed to right of the drawing area.

270 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems


4 Click and hold the Title Bar of the System Browser, drag it to the bottom of the drawing area, and when
the preview expands to the width of the window, release the mouse button.
5 Resize the columns in the System Browser until all of the columns are visible without scrolling.
6 Right-click in a column heading in the System Browser, and click View ➤ Electrical to limit the information
displayed to the electrical discipline.
7 In the System Browser, expand Power ➤ L-1 ➤ circuit 1.
The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to
panel L-1. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 1, each with a load of 180VA. The System Browser also
provides the name and number of the room in which the devices are located.

8 In the System Browser, right-click one of the devices under circuit 1, and click Select.

The device you selected in the System Browser is also selected in 1-Power.

Resolve unassigned electrical components

9 In the System Browser, collapse Power, and expand Unassigned.

This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. The list includes the main
distribution panel (MDP), a 3-way switch and 2 lighting fixtures in the Level 2 stairwell, 5 receptacles in
the open area of Level 1, and 5 receptacles in the open area of Level 2.

Checking Your Design | 271


10 Open the 1-Lighting and 2-Lighting views and close any windows.
11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to display both these views in the drawing area.
12 Zoom in on the stairwells in both lighting plans as shown.

The lighting fixtures and 3-way switch in the 2-Lighting view have not yet been connected. You need to
add the switch and lighting fixtures in the upper level to the same circuit as the switches and lighting
fixtures in the lower level.

Add Level 2 components to the existing Level 1 lighting circuit.

13 In the 1-Lighting view, select one of the lighting fixtures in the stairwell, and on the Options Bar, click

.
14 On the Edit Circuits tab on the Design Bar, click Add to Circuit.
15 Click the title bar of the 2-Lighting view, and select both lighting fixtures and the 3-way switch in the
Level 2 stairwell.
16 Click Finish Circuit.

In the System Browser, the 2 lighting fixtures and 3-way switch have been moved from the Unassigned
folder to Power ➤ MDP ➤ Circuit 2.

17 Highlight one of the lighting fixtures in the Level 2 stairwell, press Tab, click to select the circuit, and on

the Options Bar, click to create permanent wiring.

272 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems


Add a Hot Conductor to the wiring for the stairwell lighting circuit.

18 In the 1-Lighting view, select the 3-way switch in the stairwell, click the title bar of the 2-Lighting view,
highlight the 3-way switch in the Level 2 stairwell, press Tab, and click to select all of the components in
the path between the 2 switches.

19 On the Options Bar, click .


20 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Wires, and click OK.
Only the wire segments are selected in the path between the switches.

21 Click .
22 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, for Hot Conductors, enter 2, and click OK.

In the System Browser, the only remaining unassigned components should be the MDP and the receptacles
in the 2 open areas.

Assign remaining receptacles to circuits

23 In the Project Browser, double-click 1-Power to make it the active view, arrange the view so that the System
Browser and the 5 unassigned receptacles are visible.
24 In the drawing area, select the unassigned receptacles in the open area.

25 On the Options Bar, click to create a power circuit for these receptacles.

Checking Your Design | 273


26 On the Options Bar, click , and in the Mechanical/Electrical room, select panel L-1.

27 Click to create permanent wiring.

28 Using the same method, create a power circuit for the 5 unassigned receptacles in Open 2 in the 2-Power
view.
The MDP panel is now the only component listed in the Unassigned category.

Check Circuits

29 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar, click Check Circuits.


30 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector.

274 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems


31 Click to view details of the warning.
32 Expand the warning categories until you can see that the piece of equipment that is not connected is the
MDP panel.

This warning refers to the feed from the outside power service and can be ignored.

33 Close the Warning dialog.


34 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
35 Click File menu ➤ Close.

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

36 Proceed to the next exercise, “Defining Circuit Loads” on page 275.

In this exercise, you learned how to use the System Browser to examine electrical components in your project and
resolve unassigned and unnamed circuits. You also learned how to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the
circuits in your project were connected.

Defining Circuit Loads


In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels, then you examine the loads presented
at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. Finally, you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for
handling the loads on those circuits.
Open the provided dataset, as described below.
Dataset:

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Defining Circuit Loads.rvt.

Defining Circuit Loads | 275


Balance circuit loads
1 Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. This will
reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. Balancing
loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source.
In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
2-Power.
2 In the Mechanical/Electrical room, select panel L-2.

3 On the Options Bar, click .

Examination of the loads on Phase A, B, and C shows a slight imbalance with the heaviest load on Phase
B (4860 VA), while Phase A provides 4500 VA, and Phase C provides 4140 VA.

4 In the Edit Circuits dialog, click Rebalance Loads.

276 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems


After re-balancing loads, the distribution is shifted, but the overall load on the three phases remains the
same. Had there been a greater imbalance, the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve
better balance.

5 Select panel H-2, and on the Options Bar, click .


6 Click Rebalance Loads to adjust the loads on panel H-2.
7 In the Project Browser, double-click 1-Power.
8 Repeat the previous procedures to balance the loads on the Level 1 panels, L-1 and MDP.

Adjust circuit breaker sizes

9 Select panel MDP, and on the Options Bar, click .


The MDP panel feeds the lighting circuits for Level 1, the H-2 panel, and the T1 transformer. After the
loads are balanced, the values for circuits 1 and 3 are the load presented by the lighting circuits on Level
1 (5664 VA). Circuits 2, 4, and 6 feed transformer T1, a load of 12780 VA, and circuits 7, 9, and 11 feed
panel H-2, a load of 18844 VA. Although the load from panel H-2 is approximately a 40 A load at 480V,
H-2 is a 100A panel. Therefore, the rating for the breaker feeding panel H-2 should be increased to 100 A.

NOTE If you have continued to save and use your own dataset throughout these tutorials, you may see different
values for the loads. This is because you may have selected a different mix of lighting fixtures to attain the required
lighting levels.

The values on the right side shows the load presented by transformer T1 (12780 VA). Transformer T1 was
specified as a 45kVA transformer but, the load connected to it is less than 15kVA. Therefore, you can use
a 30kVA transformer, which will require a 40A circuit breaker.

10 In the Edit Circuits dialog, for panel H-2, enter 100A for the Trip value, and for T1, enter 40A for the Trip
value.

The lighting circuits connected to MDP are already specified as 20A circuits, so no further changes are
required.

11 Click OK.
12 In 1-Power view, in the Mechanical/Electrical room, select the T1 transformer.
13 In the Type Selector, select M_480-120-208V Phase Dry Type Transformer: M_30kVA.

Defining Circuit Loads | 277


14 In the Error dialog, click Disconnect.
The transformer is now rated at 30kVA, but must be reconnected to the power circuits.

15 In the Mechanical/Electrical room, select panel L-1, on the Options Bar, click , and select T1 from
the drop-down list on the Options Bar.
Now that you have specified transformer T1 as a 30kVA transformer and restored it to the circuit, you
should verify that the wire sizes for panel L-1 is set correctly.

Verify/adjust wire sizes

16 Right-click panel L-1, and click Element Properties.


17 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, scroll down to the Electrical-Loads category,
and notice that the current value for Mains is 100.00A.
100.00A is the correct size panel for a 30kVA transformer.

18 Click OK.

19 With panel L-1 selected, on the Options Bar, click (Circuit Properties).
20 In the Element Properties dialog for the circuit, scroll down and verify that the current value for the Wire
Size parameter is 3-#12, 1-#12, 1-#12.
21 Under Electrical-Loads, enter 100A for Rating.
Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating.

22 Scroll down, and click the value for the Wire Size parameter.
Notice that it changes to 3-#3, 1-#3, 1-#8.

23 Click OK.
24 In the Project Browser, double-click 2-Power to make it the active view.

25 In the Mechanical/Electrical room, select panel H-2, and on the Options Bar, click .
Similar to the situation you observed for transformer T1, the load presented by T2 is less than 14kVA and
you decide to change the transformer from 45kVA to 30kVA, which will require a 40A circuit breaker.

26 In the Edit Circuits dialog, for transformer T2, enter 40A for the Trip value.

278 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems


27 Click OK.
28 In the 2-Power view, in the Mechanical/Electrical room, select the T2 transformer.
29 In the Type Selector, selectM_480-120-208V Phase Dry Type Transformer: M_30kVA.
30 In the Error dialog, click Disconnect.
The transformer is now rated at 30kVA, but must be reconnected to the power circuits.

31 In the Mechanical/Electrical room, select panel L-2, , and on the Options Bar, select T2.
Now that you have set transformer T2 to be a 30kVA transformer and restored it to the circuit, you should
verify that the size of panel L-2 is set correctly.

32 Right click panel L-2 and click Element Properties.


33 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, scroll down to the Electrical-Loads, and verify
that the current value for Mains is 100.00A.
34 Click OK.

Size the service entrance conductors

35 In the Project Browser, double-click 1-Power to make it the active view.

36 With the MDP panel selected, click .


A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit
you are creating.

37 Close the Warning.

38 On the Options Bar, .


39 In the Element Properties dialog for the circuit, under Electrical Loads, enter 225A for the Rating parameter.
Notice that the value for the Wire Size parameter changes appropriately.
40 You can save the open file if you wish.
41 Click File menu ➤ Close.

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

This completes the Electrical Tutorial.

Defining Circuit Loads | 279


280 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems
Plumbing Systems
4
In this tutorial, you create the plumbing systems for the second floor men’s room

in an office building, including plumbing fixtures, hot and cold water piping,

and sanitary piping. As you create the plumbing system, you follow a series of

lessons and exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for

Revit MEP 2008. By following this workflow, you learn system design best practices

while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems designing more efficient.

The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design plumbing systems using Revit

MEP 2008. At the end of this tutorial, you will understand the process,

methodology, and specific techniques for designing plumbing systems.

The datasets that you use to complete these exercises are located in the Training

Files directory. You can search the Training Files ➤ Metric directory to verify that

the datasets have been downloaded. If the tutorial datasets are not present, go to

http://www.autodesk.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.

NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially; each
exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. After finishing each
exercise, you can choose to save your work. However, it is highly recommended that
you always begin an exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. This
dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training
session.

281
Planning Plumbing Systems
Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project; planning is critical to a successful design. In
this lesson, you plan each system by loading the fixtures and fittings that you will need to design the plumbing system.

Preparing the Plumbing Plan


Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. You load the
families of components that comprise your plumbing systems. As you develop more advanced skills working with Revit
MEP, you can customize components and expand the library of plumbing families.
Dataset:

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Loading Plumbing Families.rvt.

Load plumbing component families


1 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.
2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
3 Expand Metric ➤ Plumbing.
4 While pressing Ctrl select the following files:

■ M_Floor-Mounted Flush Valve Water Closet.rfa


■ M_Wall Hung Urinal.rfa

5 Click Open.
6 In the Project Browser, expand Families ➤ Plumbing Fixtures.
Notice that 2 folders have been added to the families currently available for your design: M_Toilet - Wall
Mounted Flush Valve and Wall Hung Urinal.

Load piping component families

7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.


8 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
9 Expand Metric ➤ Plumbing.
10 While pressing Ctrl select the following files:

■ M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend.rfa


■ M_Pipe Glued Short Reducing Sanitary Tee.rfa

11 Click Open.
The selected component families are loaded into the project. All of the loaded families, are added under
Families in the Project Browser.

12 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
13 Click File menu ➤ Close.

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

14 Proceed to the next exercise, “Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems” on page 283.

282 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems


Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems
In this exercise, you create new PVC pipe types and specify the default fittings that will be used with them.
Dataset:

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Configuring Plumbing Pipe Systems.rvt.

1 In the Project Browser, expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types.


2 Right-click PVC, and click Duplicate.
3 Right-click PVC 2, click Rename, enter PVC Sanitary for the new name, and press Enter.

Create new pipe types and specify default pipe fittings

4 Right-click PVC Sanitary, and click Properties.


5 In the Type Properties dialog, under Mechanical, do the following:

■ For Elbow, select M_Pipe PVC Bend: M_Standard


■ For Preferred Junction Type, select Tee
■ For Tee, select M_Pipe Glued Short Sanitary Tee: Standard
■ For Tap, select None
■ For Cross, select M_Pipe Glued PVC Cross: Standard
■ For Transition, select M_Pipe PVC Transition Eccentric: M_Standard
■ For Union, select M_Pipe PVC Coupling: M_Standard

6 In the Project Browser, right-click PVC Sanitary, click Duplicate.


7 Rename the new pipe type, PVC Sanitary Vent.
8 Right-click PVC Sanitary Vent, and click Properties.
9 In the Type Properties dialog, under Mechanical, do the following:

■ For Elbow, select M_Pipe PVC Bend: M_Standard


■ For Preferred Junction Type, select Tee
■ For Tee, select M_Pipe Vent Tee: M_Standard
■ For Tap, select None
■ For Cross, select M_Pipe Glued PVC Cross: M_Standard
■ For Transition, select M_Pipe PVC Transition Eccentric: M_Standard
■ For Union, select M_Pipe PVC Coupling: M_Standard

10 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
11 Click File menu ➤ Close.

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

12 Proceed to the next exercise, “Add Plumbing Fixtures” on page 284.

Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems | 283


Designing Plumbing Systems
Designing plumbing systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward process. In this lesson, you add plumbing fixtures to
physically connect them with piping. You then modify the piping. Finally, you create systems to logically connect the
fixtures.

Add Plumbing Fixtures


In this exercise, you add 2 toilets, 3 urinals, 3 sinks, and a floor drain to the second floor men’s room.
Dataset:

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Adding Plumbing Fixtures.rvt.

Place floor-mounted toilets


1 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Plumbing to
make it the active view.
2 Enter the keyboard shortcut, ZR (Zoom Region), and draw a left-to-right pick box around the second floor
men’s room.

The men’s room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls, 3 wall-mounted urinals, and 3 sinks.

3 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar, click Plumbing Fixture.


4 Select Floor-Mounted Flush Valve Water Closet : Standard in the Type Selector.

5 On the Options Bar verify that (Place on Work Plane) is selected.

284 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems


6 Move the cursor over the upper-right corner of the men’s room, and when the preview of the toilet is 160
from the upper wall and 400 from the right wall, click to place the toilet.

7 Move the cursor into the stall to the left, and when the preview of the toilet is 160 from the upper wall
and 460 from the right wall, click to place the toilet.

Place wall-mounted urinals

8 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar, click Plumbing Fixture.

9 Select Wall Hung Urinal : Standard in the Type Selector, and on the Options Bar, verify that (Place on
Vertical Face) is selected.
10 Move the cursor over the upper-left corner of the men’s room, and when the preview of the urinal is 500
from the left wall, click to place the toilet.

Add Plumbing Fixtures | 285


11 Place a second urinal near the wall of the leftmost toilet stall, as shown and place a third urinal between
the other 2 urinals. (The placement is not critical. You will use the Dimension tool to space them evenly
along the wall.)

12 Click Modify.
13 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.

14 On the Options Bar, verify that (Aligned) is selected, Wall centerlines is selected for Prefer, and Individual
References is selected for Pick.
15 Click the centerline of the left wall, move the cursor over the center of the leftmost urinal, and click.
16 Move the cursor down, and click to place the dimension annotation.
17 Using the same method, place a dimension annotation for the rightmost toilet.
18 Working from left to right, click the centerline of each urinal, move the cursor up, and click to place the
dimension annotation.

286 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems


19 Select the rightmost urinal, click the value for the blue dimension, and enter 500.
The urinal is placed 500 from the wall of the toilet stall.

Select the dimension annotation above the urinals, and click the blue (Equal Control) above the
dimension values to space the urinals evenly along the wall.

20 Press Delete to remove the dimension from the drawing, and click Unconstrain in the warning dialog.
21 While pressing Ctrl, select the 2 remaining dimension annotations, and press Delete.

Place sinks

22 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar, click Plumbing Fixture, and in the Type Selector, select Sink -
Single Island : Public.

23 On the Options click (Place on Work Plane), and for Plane, select Pick.
24 In the Work Plane dialog, under Specify a new Work Plane, select Pick a plane, and click OK.
25 In the drawing area, select the counter top.
26 Move the cursor over the counter top in the lower-right corner of the men’s room, and press the Space Bar
twice to rotate the sink into the proper orientation.

Add Plumbing Fixtures | 287


27 Place the sink 560 from the left wall and 460 from the lower wall.

28 Place a second sink near the right wall, and place a third sink between the other 2 sinks as shown. (The
placement is not critical.

29 Click Modify.
30 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.
31 Using the same method you used to evenly space the urinals, specify the distance between the rightmost
sink and the right wall as 560, equalize the space between sinks, and then delete the dimension annotations.

288 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems


Place the floor drain

32 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar, click Plumbing Fixture, and in the Type selector, select M_Round
Floor Drain : 125.

33 On the Options click (Place on Work Plane), and for Plane, select Level : Level 2.
34 Move the cursor to a point where the walls for the toilet stalls meet, as shown, and click to place the floor
drain.

35 Click Modify.
36 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
37 Click File menu ➤ Close.

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

38 Proceed to the next exercise, “Begin Creating the Sanitary System ” on page 289.

Begin Creating the Sanitary System


This is the first of 3 exercises that will guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing
system. In this exercise, you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets, urinals, and floor drain. You then use
Revit MEP‘s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet.
Dataset:

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Starting the Sanitary Piping System.rvt.

Prepare for sanitary piping


1 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Plumbing to
make it the active view.
Because most of the piping for the sanitary system will be placed below the floor level, you need to adjust
the view depth to make the piping visible in the view.

2 Right-click in the drawing area, and click View Properties.


3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, scroll down to View Range, and click Edit.

Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 289


4 In the View Range dialog, under Primary Range, specify -1500 for Bottom Offset, and under View Depth,
specify -1500 for Level Offset.
5 Click OK twice.
6 On the View Control Bar, specify Fine for Detail Level, and Wireframe for Model Graphics Style.
The fine setting displays 2-line piping and plumbing components, while coarse and medium display
plumbing components as 1-line symbols.

Specify mechanical settings for piping

7 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar, click Mechanical Settings.


8 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog, expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, and click Main.
9 In the right panel, select Sanitary from the System Type list.
10 In the table:

■ For Pipe Type, specify Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary


■ For Offset, specify -300

11 In the left panel, click Branch, and select Sanitary from the System Type list.
12 In the table:

■ For Pipe Type, specify Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary


■ For Offset, specify -300

13 Click OK.

Create the sanitary plumbing system

14 When you are creating systems the System Browser can help you identify components that have not been
added to a system.
Click Window ➤ System Browser.

TIP You can also access the system browser using the F9 keyboard shortcut.

15 Click the title bar for the browser, and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area.
16 Right-click in the system browser table, click View ➤ Piping.
17 Expand the Unassigned folder, and notice that all of the plumbing fixtures are currently unassigned.
18 Zoom in on the chase near the top-right corner of the second floor men’s room.
19 On the Mechanical tab on the Design Bar, click Mechanical Equipment, and in the Type Selector, select
Pipe Sanitary Outlet : Standard.

NOTE If you do not find the sanitary outlet among any of the families included with Revit MEP, you can copy
the sanitary outlet from this tutorial into your other projects.

20 Move the cursor over the chase, and click to place the sanitary outlet approximately as shown.
21 Click Modify.

290 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems


The sanitary outlet is added to the Unassigned folder in the system browser.

22 The elevation of the sanitary outlet with relation to the other components in the system is critical. The
elevation will be specified as -1200, low enough to allow sloping the sanitary piping in the system.
Right-click the sanitary outlet in the view, and click Element Properties.
23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, enter -1200 for Offset, and click OK.
24 Zoom in on the men’s room, and draw a left-to-right pick box around the urinals, toilets, and floor drain,
as shown.

25 On the Options Bar, click (Create Sanitary System).


The urinals, toilets and the floor drain are moved from the Unassigned folder to the newly created
Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 1 folder in the System Browser.

26 On the Options bar, click (Select Equipment for System), and click the sanitary outlet in the drawing
area.

Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 291


The sanitary outlet is added to Sanitary 1 in the System Browser and the sanitary piping system is previewed
in the view.

27 On the Options Bar, click Layout Path.


The Layout Paths tab is activated on the Design Bar.

28 Click Solutions, and on the Options Bar, enter 1.00 for Slope.
29 Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type.

Up to 6 piping layout solutions are suggested on the Options Bar. You can click (Previous) and
(Next Solution), as needed, to view them. The layout preview displays the main piping as blue lines and
the branch piping as green lines. For more information on Layout Path solutions, see Layout Paths.

30 Select solution 1 of 6, and on the Design Bar, click Modify.

31 Select the horizontal branch segment above the leftmost urinal, and use the (Parallel Movement
Control) control to drag the segment into the middle of the chase above the urinals, as shown.

292 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems


32 Select the horizontal main segment above the rightmost urinals and toilets, and drag it into the chase, in
line with the branch segment.

33 Click Finish Solution.

Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 293


34 Examine the piping that was automatically placed using the Layout Path tools, checking for the proper
connectivity, slope, and orientation of fittings:

■ Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures, and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. The first tab
highlights the fixture and the branch. The second tab highlights the fixture, branch and the fixture
connecting it to the main segment. The third tab should highlight the entire system.
■ Select each pipe segment in the system, and check the slope control. The slope control for every segment
should indicate that the slope is toward the sanitary outlet, as shown.

■ Examine the sanitary tees to assure proper orientation. When fittings are reversed, select the fitting

and click (Flip) to reorient it.

294 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems


35 In the Project Browser, expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Plumbing.
36 It is easier to work with Revit MEP components if model categories from other disciplines are hidden in
the view.
Enter the keyboard shortcut, VG (Visibility/Graphics).
37 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click Show categories from all disciplines, and on the Model Categories
tab clear the following categories:

■ Casework
■ Ceilings
■ Columns
■ Curtain Panels
■ Curtain Systems
■ Curtain Wall Mullions
■ Doors
■ Floors
■ Lines
■ Railings
■ Roofs
■ Shaft Openings
■ Stairs
■ Walls
■ Windows

38 Click OK.
39 On the View Control Bar, specify Fine for Detail Level, and Hidden Line for Model Graphics Style.

Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 295


40 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
41 Click File menu ➤ Close.

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

42 Proceed to the next exercise, “Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System” on page 296 to continue creating
the sanitary system.

Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System


In this exercise you continue with the work from the last exercise, adding the sinks in the men’s room, and creating
the piping that connects them to the sanitary system.
Dataset:

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Connecting Sink Drain Lines.rvt.

1 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Plumbing to
make it the active view.
2 Zoom in on the piping to the right of the men’s room.
3 Select the sanitary elbow to the right of the rightmost toilet, and click the plus sign below the fitting to
upgrade the fitting to a tee.

296 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems


4 Select the tee, right-click the connector on the open leg, and click Draw Pipe.

5 Verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector, and on the Options Bar, click Options.
6 In the Layout Options dialog, enter 1.00 for Slope Angle, enter 1000 for Slope Run, and click OK.
7 Drag the preview of the pipe down parallel to the wall, press the Space Bar once, enter 3950, and press Enter.
When you press the space bar, the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the
fitting. Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool,
which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. Pressing Return completes the
dimensioning.

8 Click Modify.
If you select the pipe, you can verify that the slope has been applied in the correct direction: toward the
sanitary outlet.

9 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar, click Pipe Fitting, and select M_Pipe Glued Reducing DWV Wye
: Standard in the Type Selector.
10 Move the cursor over the open end of the pipe, and when the extension snap displays, click to place the
fitting.

Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 297


11 Select the fitting, click the size for the wye leg, enter 50, and press Enter.
12 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar, click Pipe Fitting, and select M_Pipe PVC Plug : M_Standard in
the Type Selector.
13 Move the cursor over the straight leg of the reducing wye, and when the extension snap displays, click to
place the fitting.

14 Using the method learned earlier, highlight the wye, and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity.
15 Select the wye fitting, right click the connector on the open leg, and click Draw Pipe.
16 Verify that the Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector, and on the Options Bar, click
Options.
17 In the Layout Options dialog, verify that the slope is specified as 1.00 for Slope Angle, and click OK.
18 Drag the end of the pipe to the left and down toward the centerline of the wall below the sinks, press the
Space Bar once so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting, and when the wall centerline
snap displays, click to specify the end of the pipe.

298 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems


19 Continue this section of pipe by dragging the preview along the centerline of the wall, and when the snap
for the center point of the middle sink displays, click to specify the end of the pipe.

20 On the Options Bar, enter 150 for Offset, click Apply, and click Modify.
Changing the Offset while drawing pipe creates a vertical segment. In this case, the vertical pipe extends
150 above the level of the floor.

21 In the Project Browser, expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views and double-click 3D Plumbing to view the piping
just added.

Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 299


If necessary, clear unwanted components from the 3D view using the Visibility/Graphics dialog as described
in the previous exercise.

22 In the 3D view, check the slope and connectivity for the added piping as described previously.
23 Zoom in on the vertical segment behind the middle sink.
24 On the Plumbing tab, click Pipe Fitting, and in the Type Selector select M_Pipe Glued Double DWV Wye
: Standard.
25 Move the cursor near the open end of the vertical pipe, and when the Extension snap displays and the end
is outlined in blue, press Space, and click to place the fitting.

The double wye is added to the vertical segment as shown above.

26 Select the double wye fitting, and on the Options Bar, specify 200 for Offset.

Add pipe stubs to the double wye

27 Zoom in on the double wye.


In the next steps you add 2 short pipe segments to the double wye. This is best done by carefully following
these steps.

28 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar, click Pipe.


29 Click the connector snap on the right leg, press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation
of the fitting, and on the Options Bar, click Options.
30 In the Layout Options dialog, enter 45.00 for Slope Angle, and click OK.
31 Drag the pipe to the right, and when Horizontal and Extension displays, click to specify the end of the
pipe.

32 Click Modify.

300 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems


This adds a short segment of pipe from the wye, an elbow, and another segment of pipe.

33 Select the elbow and horizontal pipe segment just added, and press Delete, leaving only the short pipe
segment connected to the double wye.
34 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar, click Pipe again.
35 Click the connector snap on the left leg, press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation
of the fitting, and on the Options Bar, click Options.
36 In the Layout Options dialog, verify that 45.00 for Slope Angle is specified, and click OK.
37 Drag the pipe to the left, and when Horizontal and Extension displays, click to specify the end of the pipe.

38 Click Modify.
39 Select the elbow and horizontal pipe segment just added, and press Delete, leaving only the short pipe
segment connected to the double wye.

40 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar, click Pipe again.


41 Move the cursor over the center leg of the fitting, click the connector snap.
42 On the Options Bar, specify 400 for Offset, and click Apply.
43 Click Modify.
44 In the Project Browser, expand Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Plumbing.
45 Zoom to a level that lets you view all 3 sinks, and select the leftmost sink.
46 Right-click the connector for the sink drain, and click Draw Pipe.

Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 301


47 Drag the pipe preview a short distance from the drain, press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size
and elevation of the sink drain, and on the Options Bar, click Options.
48 In the Layout Options dialog, specify 0.00 for Slope Angle, and click OK.
49 On the Options Bar, specify 450 for Offset, drag the pipe preview down to a point between the sink and
the wall, and click to specify the end of the pipe.

50 Click Modify.
51 Select Pipe again, and use the same method to connect drain pipes to the other 2 sinks.

52 In the Project Browser, expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D Plumbing.


53 Zoom in to a level that allows you to view all 3 sinks and the double wye fitting.

54 While pressing Ctrl, select the 3 short segments of pipe connected to the double wye, and on the Options
Bar, specify 40 mm for Size.

302 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems


Using Routing Solutions to finish the sanitary piping

55 While pressing Ctrl, select the short pipe connected to the right leg of the double wye and the horizontal
pipe from the drain of the rightmost sink.
56 On the Options Bar, click Routing Solutions.

Routing Solution tools are activated on the Options Bar that let you (Add Control Points) or (Remove
Control Points), and select a proposed solution. You use the plus and minus buttons to add vertex controls

to pipe segments. Transitions and fittings are automatically added to maintain connections. You use

(Previous) and (Next) buttons to cycle through the up to 6 proposed solutions.

57 Select solution 3 of 3, and click Finish to create piping for that solution.
58 While pressing Ctrl, select the short pipe connected to the center leg of the double wye and the horizontal
pipe from the drain of the middle sink, and on the Options Bar, click Routing Solutions.
59 Select solution 2 of 2, and click Finish to create piping for the middle sink.
60 Using the same method, select the pipe connected to the left leg and create the piping by selecting solution
3 of 3.
61 Click Finish to create piping for the third sink.

Specify slope for the sink sanitary piping

62 Draw a right-to-left pick box to select the elbow and adjoining 2 pipes between the double wye and the
sink drain for the rightmost sink as shown.

63 On the Options Bar, click (Slope) to activate the slope tools on the Options Bar.

Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 303


64 Enter 1.00 for Slope, click (Pick Aligning Element) to toggle the reference end for the slope, such
that the arrow is pointing away from the double wye fitting, and click Finish.

The arrow points away from the reference end of the slope. You could have entered a negative value for

slope and clicked to specify the end closest to the sink as the reference (with the arrow pointing
toward the double wye).

65 Using the same method, specify the slope for the piping for the remaining sinks.
66 In the System Browser, expand Sanitary ➤ M_Pipe Sanitary Outlet : M_Standard, right-click Sanitary 1, and
click Select.

67 On the Options Bar, click (Edit System).


68 On the Design Bar, click Add to System.
69 One at a time, select all 3 sinks, and click Finish System.
The sinks are added to the Sanitary 1 system in the System Browser.
With the piping created and the slope and connectivity properly defined, you can make minor adjustments
to the system. You can move fixtures by dragging, modifying offset values, or by using the arrow keys on
your keyboard.

Make minor adjustments to the sanitary system

70 Zoom in and select the double wye fitting for the sink drains, and press the up arrow on your keyboard
twice.
The fitting moves up and at the same time the piping attached to its legs automatically adjusts and maintains
connectivity. The amount of adjustment with each keystroke depends is proportional to the zoom level.
When zoomed in close, there is a smaller movement.

71 Press the down arrow on the keyboard twice to return the fitting to its original location.
When the piping was created for the sink drains, M_Pipe PVC Bend : M_Standard components were used
because the shorter size of this fitting works well with the automated Routing Solutions. Now that the
routing is completed, you can change these to the more commonly used M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend :
Standard.

72 While pressing Ctrl, select the 2 bends connecting the 45-degree legs of the double-wye to the horizontal
pipe segments, and in the Type Selector, select M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend : Standard.

304 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems


73 Select the 2 elbows in the section of piping between the double wye fitting and the reducing sanitary wye,
and select M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend : Standard in the Type Selector.

74 Using the method learned earlier, highlight the leftmost sink, and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity.
(After the third tab, the entire system should be highlighted.)

75 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save As; otherwise, skip the next 2 steps.
76 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
77 Click File menu ➤ Close.

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 305


78 Proceed to the next exercise, “Refining the Sanitary Stack” on page 306 to continue creating the sanitary
system.

Refining the Sanitary Stack


In this exercise you continue with the work on the sanitary system, adjusting the sanitary stack.
Dataset:

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Refining Waste Stack Connection.rvt.

1 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Plumbing to
make it the active view.
2 Zoom in on the elbow at the upper end of the vertical pipe connected to the sanitary outlet, and select the
horizontal pipe.
3 Click the pipe’s connector snap at the elbow, and carefully drag it away from the elbow, while maintaining
the same angle.

4 Select the upper elbow, and press Delete.

5 Zoom in on the sanitary outlet, select it and on the toolbar, click (Move).
6 Click on the sanitary outlet to specify a start point for the move as shown.

7 Drag the preview approximately 200 along the horizontal line away from the elbow, and click to specify
the endpoint for the move as shown.

306 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems


8 Select the elbow and vertical pipe segment, and on the Options Bar, specify 150 for D (diameter).

Add a reducing wye to the stack

9 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar, click Pipe Fitting, and select M_Pipe Glued Reducing DWV Wye
: Standard.
10 Move the cursor over the center of the open end of the vertical pipe, and when the Extension snap displays,
press the Space Bar once (so that the fitting assumes the elevation of the end of the pipe), and click to place
the fitting.

Refining the Sanitary Stack | 307


11 Click Modify.
The wye is added to the vertical segment.

If necessary, select the wye, and click to rotate the 45 degree leg until it is pointing toward the sanitary
piping.
12 Select the wye, click the value for the 45 degree leg, enter 100 to change its size, and press Enter.

Create a Section view to complete the stack connections

13 Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans, double-click 2 - Plumbing, and zoom
in on the sanitary outlet.
14 On the View tab on the Design Bar, click Section, draw a section to the right of the sanitary outlet as shown,
and click Modify.

308 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems


15 Double-click the section view symbol in the drawing area to open the new section view.
16 On the View Control Bar, for Detail Level, specify Fine.
17 Zoom in, and select the reducing wye fitting.
18 On the Options Bar, enter -750 for Offset, and press Enter.
This places the wye at a level that will allow creating a routing solution that will not change the slope of
the main segment.

19 In the Project Browser, double-click 3D - Plumbing.


20 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar, click Pipe.
21 Click the connector on the 45 degree leg, press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation
of the fitting, and on the Options Bar, click Options.
22 In the Layout Options dialog, enter 45.00 for Slope Angle, and click OK.
23 Drag the pipe to the left and down, parallel to the main segment of pipe from the toilets, and when Vertical
and Extension displays, and click to specify the end of the pipe.

Refining the Sanitary Stack | 309


24 Click Modify.
This adds a short segment of pipe (from the wye), an elbow, and another segment of pipe.

25 Select the elbow and horizontal pipe segment just added, and press Delete, leaving only the short pipe
segment connected to the wye.

26 While pressing Ctrl, select the short pipe segment and the main pipe, and on the Options Bar, click Routing
Solutions.
27 Select solution 2 of 2, and click Finish to create piping for that solution.

310 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems


28 Select the elbow created by the routing solution tool, and in the Type Selector select M_Pipe Glued DWV
Bend : Standard.
29 On the Plumbing tab, click Pipe.
30 Move the cursor over the open leg of the reducing wye, and click the connector snap.
31 On the Options Bar, specify 1200 for Offset, and click Apply.
32 Click Modify.
33 Check slope and connectivity as described previously.

34 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
35 Click File menu ➤ Close.

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

Refining the Sanitary Stack | 311


36 Proceed to the next exercise, “Refining the Urinal Lines” on page 312 to continue creating the plumbing
system.

Refining the Urinal Lines


The waste piping from the urinal extends down through floor directly beneath the urinals before connecting to the
sanitary main piping. In this exercise you change the routing for the waste piping from the urinals, running it inside
the wall, then down to connect with the sanitary main.
Dataset:

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Refining Urinal Waste Lines.rvt.

1 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Plumbing to
make it the active view.
2 Zoom in on the piping behind the urinals, and draw a left-to-right pick box around the piping above the
urinals as shown. (If necessary, use the Filter tool to select only piping.)

3 Press Delete.

4 Select the pipe connected to the wye above the leftmost toilet, click the connector snap, and drag it to the
right to a point midway between the toilet and urinal.

312 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems


The next 4 steps draw a series of pipe segments, starting at the level of the original pipe, then placing a
vertical segment and continuing the run at 300, and finally connecting to the sanitary drain on the left
urinal.

5 Right-click the connector at the open end of the shortened pipe, click Draw Pipe, press the Space Bar so that
the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe.
6 On the Options Bar, verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector, and click Options.
7 In the Layout Options dialog, specify 1.00 for Slope Angle.
8 On the Options Bar, specify 50 for D (diameter), drag the preview to the left approximately 200, and click
to specify the end of the pipe.
9 On the Options Bar, enter 300 for Offset, and move the cursor along the center line of the chase, to a point
in line with the center of the leftmost urinal, and when the snap displays, click once to specify the end of
the pipe.

10 Drag the preview over the urinal drain, press Tab until the Sanitary connection displays on the status bar
at the bottom of the window, click to specify the end of the pipe at the sanitary drain connector.

11 Click Modify.
12 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D- Plumbing to make
it the active view, and click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast.

Refining the Urinal Lines | 313


13 Click the new pipe segments and check the slope.

Connect the remaining urinals

14 In the Project Browser, double-click 2- Plumbing, and zoom in on the urinals.


15 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar, click Pipe.
16 Move the cursor over the intersection of the branch pipe above the middle urinal and the centerline snap
for the urinal.

17 Click to specify the start of the pipe, press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation
properties of the existing pipe, and on the Options Bar, click Options.
18 In the Layout Options dialog, verify that the slope is specified as 1.00 for Slope Angle, and click OK.
19 Drag the preview down to the sanitary connector on the middle urinal, and click to specify the end of the
pipe at the sanitary drain connector.
20 Click Modify.
21 Right-click the section of pipe that you just added, and click Create Similar.
22 Move the cursor over the intersection of the branch pipe and the centerline snap for the rightmost urinal.
23 Click to specify the start of the pipe, drag the preview down to the sanitary connector on the urinal, and
click to specify the end of the pipe at the sanitary drain connector.

24 Click Modify.
25 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D- Plumbing to make
it the active view, and check the slope and connectivity as described previously.

314 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems


Resize pipes

26 In the Project Browser, double-click 2 - Plumbing to make it the active view.


27 Zoom in on the piping above the urinals, and draw a left-to-right pick box around only the main piping
(including the short 100 mm segment) as shown.

28 On the Options Bar, specify 80 for D (diameter).

In the next steps you will change the elbow behind the left urinal to a tee to create the cleanout. However,
you cannot upgrade an elbow to a tee unless all of the connections are the same size. So, first you must
temporarily resize the pipe to the urinal.

Add a cleanout

29 Select the pipe between the 80 elbow and the left urinal, and on the Options Bar, specify 80 for D (diameter).

Refining the Urinal Lines | 315


30 Select the elbow, and click the + control on the left to add a leg for the cleanout.
31 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar, click Pipe Fitting, and in the Type Selector, select M_Pipe PVC
Plug : M_Standard.
32 Move the cursor over the open connector on the sanitary tee above the leftmost urinal, and when the
extension snap displays, click to place the plug on the tee.
33 Select the pipe to the urinal again, and on the Options Bar, specify 50 for D.

Redefine fittings

34 Select the 3 sanitary tees behind the urinals, and in the Type Selector, select M_Pipe Glued Short Reducing
Sanitary Tee : Standard.

This eliminates the need for transitions between the pipes and the tees.

35 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D- Plumbing to make
it the active view, and zoom in on the area between the toilet and the leftmost urinal.
36 Select the vertical pipe, and drag it to a point midway between the 2 sanitary tees.

This will provide the space required to change the short elbows to the DWV Bends that allow better sanitary
waste flow.
Select the elbows at each end of the vertical pipe, and select M_Pipe PVC DVW Bend : Standard.

316 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems


37 Click Modify.
38 Check slope and connectivity as described previously.

39 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
40 Click File menu ➤ Close.

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

41 Proceed to the next exercise, “Adding Vents to the System” on page 317 to continue creating the plumbing
system.

Adding Vents to the System


In this exercise you finish the work on the sanitary system, adding the vent piping at several points in the waste piping.

Adding Vents to the System | 317


Dataset:

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Creating Sanitary Vent Piping.rvt.

1 In the Project Browser, expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views and double-click 3D Plumbing to view the piping
just added.
If necessary, clear unwanted components from the 3D view using the Visibility/Graphics dialog as described
previously.

2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast, and zoom in on the area between the toilets and the urinals.
3 Select the elbow at the upper end of the vertical pipe segment, and click the + control above it to change
the fitting to a tee.
4 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar, click Pipe, and in the Type Selector, select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary
Vent.
5 Click the connector at the upper end of the tee to specify the start of the pipe.
6 On the Options Bar, click Options.
7 In the Layout Options dialog, specify 0.00 for Slope Angle, and click OK.
8 On the Options Bar, specify 50 for D (diameter), and specify 2700 for Offset.

NOTE You must move the cursor into the drawing area for the new offset value to be recognized.

9 Click Apply.

10 Click Modify.

Create additional vents

11 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar, click Pipe, and verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent is selected
in the Type Selector.

318 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems


12 On the Options Bar, specify 50 for D (diameter), click a point midway between the tees connecting the
first toilet and floor drain to specify the start of the pipe.

13 On the Options Bar, specify 2700 for Offset, and click Apply.
14 Click Modify.
15 Using the same method, place another vent between the two rightmost urinals, as shown.

16 If either of the tees that were added need to be reoriented according to the slope of the piping, use the Flip
control to make the adjustment.

Adding Vents to the System | 319


Connect the individual vents

17 Select the vertical vent between the 2 rightmost urinals, right-click the connector at the open end, click
Draw Pipe.
18 Press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the vent pipe.
19 Drag the pipe preview toward the middle vent, and click the connector at the open end of the middle vent
to specify the endpoint for the pipe.

An elbow is automatically placed at the joint.

20 Select the elbow at the top of the middle vent pipe, and click the + control above it to change the elbow
to a tee.

21 On the Plumbing tab of the Design Bar, click Pipe, and in the Type Selector, select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary
Vent.
22 Click the connector at the open leg of the tee to specify a starting point for the pipe.
23 On the Options Bar, specify 3000 for Offset, click Apply, and click Modify.
A short section of pipe is added to the tee.

24 Select the tee and click the plus symbol to its left to change the tee to a cross.
25 Select the leftmost vent, right click the connector, and click Draw Pipe.
26 Drag the pipe preview a short distance, and press Space.
27 Continue dragging the preview to the open connector on the tee at the upper end of the middle vent, and
click to specify the end point.

320 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems


28 Click Modify.

Add a vent to the sinks

29 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast, and zoom in on the area of the double wye behind the sinks.
30 Select the elbow above the double wye for the drain section to the middle sink, and click the + control
above the elbow to change it to a tee.
31 While pressing Ctrl, select the tee and the short pipe segment that connects it to the double wye, and on
the Options Bar, specify 50 for D (diameter).
32 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar, click Pipe, and verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent is selected
in the Type Selector.
33 Click the connector at the upper end of the tee to specify the start of the pipe.
34 On the Options Bar, specify 50 for D (diameter), and specify 2700 for Offset, click Apply.

Adding Vents to the System | 321


35 Click Modify.
36 Select the vent, right-click the connector at the open end, click Draw Pipe, and press the Space Bar so that
the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the vent pipe.
37 Drag the pipe preview, while maintaining a 90 degree angle, toward the horizontal vent segment between
the toilets and urinals, and click the snap at the horizontal vent pipe to specify the endpoint for the pipe.

A tee is automatically inserted at the joint.

38 Highlight any component in the system and press Tab 3 times to check the connectivity of the system as
described previously.
39 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
40 Click File menu ➤ Close.

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

41 Proceed to the next exercise, “Create the Cold Water System” on page 323 to continue creating the plumbing
system.

322 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems


Create the Cold Water System
In this exercise you create the cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the
system.
Dataset:

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Creating Cold Water Piping.rvt.

Create new pipe types and specify default pipe fittings


1 In the Project Browser, expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types, right-click Standard, and click Duplicate.
2 Repeat the previous step to create another copy of Standard.
3 Right-click Standard 2, click Rename, enter Cold Water for the new name, and press Enter.
4 Right-click Standard 3, click Rename, enter Hot Water for the new name, and press Enter.
5 Right-click Cold Water, and click Properties.
6 In the Type Properties dialog, in the Type Parameters under Mechanical, verify that the following default
fittings are specified:

■ For Elbow, specify M_Pipe Elbow : M_Standard


■ For Preferred Junction Type, specify Tee
■ For Tee, specify M_Pipe Tee: M_Standard
■ For Tap, specify None
■ For Cross, specify M_Pipe Cross: M_Standard
■ For Transition, specify M_Pipe Transition Eccentric: M_Standard
■ For Union, specify M_Pipe Straight Coupling: M_Standard

Specify Mechanical Settings for the cold and hot water systems

7 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar, click Mechanical Settings.


8 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog, expand Piping ➤ Conversion, click Main, and in the
right pane, select Domestic Cold Water from the System Type list.
9 In the table, specify Pipe Types : Cold Water for Pipe Type and 2600 for Offset.
10 In the left pane, click Branch, in the right pane, select Domestic Cold Water from the System Type list,
and specify Pipe Types : Cold Water for Pipe Type and 2600 for Offset.
11 In the left pane, click Main, and in the right pane, select Domestic Hot Water from the System Type list.
12 In the table, specify Pipe Types : Hot Water for Pipe Type and 2550 for Offset.
13 In the left panel, click Branch, in the right pane, select Domestic Hot Water from the System Type list, and
specify Pipe Types : Hot Water for Pipe Type and 2550 for Offset.
You now have the cold water piping at 2600 and the hot water piping at 2550, which avoids potential
obstructions and conflicts between systems.

Create the cold water system

14 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Plumbing to
make it the active view.
15 Press F9 to open the System Browser, click the title bar for the browser and dock it by dragging it to the
bottom of the drawing area.
16 Right-click a table heading in the system browser, click View ➤ Piping.

Create the Cold Water System | 323


17 Draw a left-to-right pick box around all of the plumbing fixtures in the men’s room, and on the Options

Bar click (Filter).


18 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, then select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK.
19 While pressing Shift, click the floor drain.
The floor drain has neither a hot or cold water connector, and as long as there is a fixture without a common
connector type, the Options Bar will not have active tools for creating a system.

20 On the Options Bar, click (Create Domestic Cold Water System).


The Domestic Cold Water folder is added in the system browser and all of the fixtures have been added to
the Domestic Cold Water 1 system.

Create piping for the cold water system

21 Zoom in on the area below the sinks.


22 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar, click Pipe, and in the Type Selector, select Pipe Types : Cold Water.
23 On the Options Bar, click Options.
24 In the Layout Options dialog, verify that the slope is specified as 0.00 for Slope Angle, and click OK.
25 Move the cursor over the cold water connector on the leftmost sink, click to specify the starting point for
the pipe, and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector.
26 On the Options Bar, specify 750 for Offset, click a point between the sink and the wall to specify the
endpoint for the pipe.
27 Drag the preview to the right until the snap for the cold water connector for the rightmost sink displays,
and click to specify the end the segment.
28 Move the preview up to the cold water connector on the sink, and click to end the run as shown.

29 Click Modify.

30 Select the middle sink in the view, and on the Options Bar, click (Connect Into).
31 In the Select Connector dialog, select the domestic cold water connector, and click the cold water pipe
behind the sinks.

324 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems


A segment of pipe is added connecting the sink to the cold water system.

32 On the Plumbing tab, click Pipe.


33 Move the cursor over the cold water pipe at a point between the 2 rightmost sinks.
34 Click to specify the starting point for the pipe as shown, drag the preview to the center of the wall behind
the sinks, and click to end that segment.
35 On the Options Bar, specify 2600 for Offset, drag the preview up and into the mechanical room above the
men’s room, and click to specify an endpoint for the pipe.

36 Click Modify.
37 Zoom in on the area above the toilets, and verify that the cold water pipe is not obstructed by the vertical
vent. (If necessary, select the cold water pipe, and use the keyboard left arrow to move the pipe to the left.)
38 Zoom in on the area between the toilets.
39 On the Plumbing tab, click Pipe.
40 Move the cursor over a point on the cold water pipe just above the wall, click the snap on the cold water
pipe, and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe.
41 Drag the preview to the left, and at a point near the vent that rises between the toilets and urinals, click
to specify the end of the pipe.
42 On the Options Bar, specify 600 for Offset, and click Apply.

Create the Cold Water System | 325


43 Click Modify.
44 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D- Plumbing, and click
View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast.

45 Zoom in on the area behind the toilets, select the rightmost toilet.

46 On the Options Bar click (Connect Into), and then click the vertical cold water pipe.
Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector.

47 Select the elbow behind the toilet, and click the + control to change it to a tee.
48 On the Plumbing tab, click Pipe.

326 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems


49 Click the open connector on the tee, and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation
of the fixture.
50 Drag the preview to the left, and click to specify the endpoint behind the left toilet as shown.

51 Click Modify.

52 Select the leftmost toilet, and on the Options Bar click , and click the horizontal cold water pipe
that you added to the tee.
Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector.

53 Select the rightmost urinal, and on the Options Bar click , and click the vertical cold water pipe.
Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector.

54 Use the same method to connect the remaining urinals to the horizontal cold water pipe.

Create the Cold Water System | 327


All of the cold water piping is in place. The final steps in this exercise will adjust the size of several sections
of the piping.

Adjust cold water pipe sizes

55 On the toolbar, click (Dynamic Modify View) or enter the keyboard shortcut, F8.
56 While pressing Shift, drag the cursor to spin the 3D Plumbing view to allow selecting the main cold water
piping from the mechanical room, and then select the horizontal segments as shown.

57 On the Options Bar, specify 50 for D (diameter).


58 Select the cold water branch piping from the main, feeding the toilets (including the tees, but leaving the
branch to the urinals as is), as shown.

328 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems


59 On the Options Bar, specify 40 for D (diameter).
60 Spin the 3D Plumbing view as needed to see the piping behind the sinks.
61 Select the main and branch pipe segments as shown (including the tee behind the middle sink).

62 On the Options Bar, specify 20 for D (diameter).


63 Highlight a segment of cold water pipe in the system and press Tab to check the connectivity of the system
as described previously.
64 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
65 Click File menu ➤ Close.

Create the Cold Water System | 329


NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

66 Proceed to the next exercise, “Create the Hot Water System” on page 330.

Create the Hot Water System


In this exercise you add a water heater, create the hot water system, and add piping to connect the sinks in the men’s
room to the system.
Dataset:

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Creating Hot Water Piping.rvt.

Create the hot water system


1 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans, double-click 2 - Plumbing, and
zoom in on the sinks.
2 Press F9 to open the System Browser, click the title bar for the browser, and dock it by dragging it to the
bottom of the drawing area.
3 Right-click a table heading in the System Browser, and click View ➤ Piping.

4 Draw a left-to-right pick box around the 3 sinks in the men’s room, and on the Options Bar, click
(Filter).
5 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK.

6 On the Options Bar, click (Create Domestic Hot Water System).


The Domestic Hot Water folder is added in the system browser and all of the fixtures have been added to
the Domestic Hot Water 1 system.

Add a water heater to the hot and cold water systems

7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.


8 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
9 Expand Metric ➤ Plumbing.
10 Double-click M_Water Heater.rfa.
11 Zoom in on the mechanical room above the men’s room.
12 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar, click Plumbing Fixture, and in the Type Selector, select M_Water
Heater : 40Gallon.
13 Move the water heater preview into the mechanical room, to the left of the main cold water pipe, press
the Space Bar 3 times to orient the water heater with the electrical connections to the left, and click to place
the water heater as shown.

330 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems


14 In the System Browser, expand Domestic Hot Water, right-click Domestic Hot Water 1, and click Select.

15 On the Options Bar, click (Edit System).


The Edit System tab is activated on the Design Bar.

16 On the Edit System tab, click Add to System, select the water heater in the view, and click Finish System.
17 In the System Browser, expand Domestic Cold Water, right-click Domestic Cold Water 1, and click Select.

18 On the Options Bar, click (Edit System).


19 On the Edit System tab, click Add to System, select the water heater in the view, and click Finish System.

20 Select the water heater in the view, and on the Options Bar, click (Connect Into).
21 In the Select Connector dialog, select Connector 2 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 20, and click the main
cold water pipe.

A segment of pipe is added connecting the water heater to the cold water system.

22 Select the open end of the main cold water pipe, right-click the connector, click Draw Pipe, and add 2
segments extending the main cold water piping into the chase.

Create the Hot Water System | 331


23 On the Plumbing tab, click Pipe, and in the Type Selector, select Pipe Types : Hot Water.
24 Move the cursor over the water heater, click when the hot water connector displays, and press the Space
Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector.

25 On the Options Bar, specify 2550 for Offset.


26 Specify an end point for the pipe between the water heater and the cold water pipe to the right, and then
drag the pipe preview down to a point to the right and just above the middle sink.

27 Click Modify.
28 On the Plumbing tab, click Pipe, and in the Type Selector, select Pipe Types : Hot Water.
29 Move the cursor over the hot water connector on the leftmost sink, click to specify the starting point for
the pipe, and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector.
30 On the Options Bar, specify 800 for Offset.

332 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems


31 Click a point between the cold water piping and the wall to specify the endpoint for the pipe, drag the
preview to the right until the snap below the hot water connector for the rightmost sink displays, and click
to specify the end of the segment.
32 Move the preview up to the hot water connector on the sink and click to end the run as shown.

33 Click Modify.

34 Select the middle sink in the view, and on the Options Bar, click (Connect Into), and click the hot
water pipe below the sinks.

In this case, the Select Connector dialog was not displayed because the only possible connection was to
the hot water system.

35 Select the hot water piping from the water heater.


36 Right-click the open connector, click Draw Pipe, and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size
and elevation of the connector.
37 Drag the preview down into the center of the wall below the sinks, and click to end that segment.
38 On the Options Bar, specify 800 for Offset, click Apply.
39 Click Modify.
40 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D- Plumbing, click
View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast, and zoom in on the area behind the sinks.

Create the Hot Water System | 333


41 On the Plumbing tab, click Pipe, click the connector at the open end of the vertical hot water pipe, press
the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector.
42 While maintaining a 90 degree angle, drag the preview to the piping connecting the hot water connectors
for the sinks, and click.

43 Click Modify.
44 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans, double-click 2 - Plumbing.
45 Highlight a fixture in the view, press Tab 3 times to check connectivity as described previously.
46 You can save the open file if you wish.
47 Click File menu ➤ Close.

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

This concludes the tutorial for plumbing systems.

334 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems


Fire Protection Systems
5
In this tutorial, you design a wet and dry fire protection system for an office

building. As you create the systems, you follow a series of exercises that teach the

recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2008. By following the

recommended workflow, you learn the best practices for designing systems with

Revit MEP.

The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a fire protection system using

Revit MEP 2008. At the end of this tutorial, you will understand the process,

methodology, and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems.

NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially; each
exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. After finishing each
exercise, you can choose to save your work. However, it is highly recommended that
you always begin an exercise by opening the provided dataset. This dataset includes
the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The
datasets that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric
directory. You can search this directory to verify that the datasets have been
downloaded. If the tutorial datasets are not present, go to
http://www.autodesk.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.

335
Designing Fire Protection Systems
Designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward process. In this lesson, you will create both wet and
dry fire protection systems for the second floor of an office building. You begin each fire protection system design by
placing sprinklers in the rooms. Then, you create a system to logically connect the sprinklers, and finally, you create
piping to physically connect the sprinklers. During the fire protection design process, you create views and pipe types,
manually modify the pipes and fittings, insert fittings, create schedules, and size and tag the pipes.

Starting the Fire Protection Project


In this exercise, you begin work on the project that contains both the wet and dry fire protection systems. You create
views and pipe types, and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically
connect the sprinklers. You will also draw the supply pipe for the fire protection systems.
Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Starting the Fire Protection Project.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder.

Create new views

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, right-click the
view named 2 - Mech, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
A new view called Copy of 2 - Mech is created and becomes the active view. This view is based on the 2 -
Mech view properties.

TIP Working in different views for each discipline allows you to view only the system components for that
discipline and makes system design more efficient.

2 In the Project Browser, right-click Copy of 2 - Mech, and click Rename.


3 Enter 2 - Fire Prot for Name, and click OK.
Next, you modify the view properties.

4 With the 2 - Fire Prot view active, right-click in the drawing area, and click View Properties.
5 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, do the following:

■ For Discipline, verify that Mechanical is selected.


■ For Sub-Discipline, enter Fire Protection.

6 Click OK.
This new sub-discipline creates a Fire Protection view category in the Project Browser. Notice that the 2 -
Fire Prot view is now relocated under Fire Protection.

TIP After you enter a discipline or sub-discipline for the first time, you can then select that discipline or
sub-discipline from the list.

7 Using the method that you just learned, do the following:

■ Create a level 1 floor plan view based on 1-Mech view, naming it 1 - Fire Prot.
■ Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Ceiling Plans, and create a new ceiling plan view
based on the 2 - Ceiling Mech view, naming it 2 - Ceiling Fire Prot.
■ Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views, and create a new 3D view based on
the 3D HVAC view, naming it 3D Fire Prot.

336 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


Remember to specify Fire Protection for sub-discipline so that all views will be listed under Fire Protection
in the Project Browser.

8 In the Project Browser, double-click the HVAC listing to collapse it because you will no longer use those
views in this lesson.
Next, you create 2 new pipe types for the wet and dry systems.

Create new pipe types

9 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar, click Pipe.

NOTE If the Fire Protection tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Fire
Protection.

10 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected.

11 On the Options Bar, click (Properties).


12 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
13 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate.
14 For Name, enter Fire Protection Wet, and click OK.
The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. Next, you modify the pipe type properties.

15 In the Type Properties dialog, under Mechanical, for Material, select Carbon Steel.
Next, you create a pipe type based on the new pipe type that you created.

16 With the Type Properties dialog open, click Duplicate, and enter Fire Protection Dry for the new pipe
type name, and click OK.
Notice that the new dry pipe type inherits the same type properties from the wet pipe type, including the
new material property.

17 Click OK twice to create the new wet and dry pipe types.
18 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet and Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry are
listed.

NOTE You can also create, modify, or verify pipe types from the Project Browser. In the Project Browser, expand
Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types, right-click a pipe type and use the context menu.

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

TIP When you click Modify, the command in progress terminates. You can also press Esc.

Next, you need to configure the pipe conversion settings.

Configure pipe conversion settings

20 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar, click Mechanical Settings.
You can also click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings.

21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog, under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, select Main.
22 For System Type, select Fire Protection Wet.
The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display.

23 Under System Type, do the following:

■ For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet.

Starting the Fire Protection Project | 337


■ For Offset, verify that 2750 is selected.
This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2750 mm above the referenced level for the views. Level
2 is the referenced level for the views that you will be designing in. So, the pipe main will be offset
from level 2. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches.

24 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog, select Branch.


25 For System Type, select Fire Protection Wet.
26 Under System Type, do the following:

■ For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet.


■ For Offset, verify that 2750 is specified.
This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2750 mm above the referenced level for the views.

IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main
and other obstacles. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes, duct, structural beams, or architecture.

27 Click OK.

NOTE Conversion settings are mechanical settings that are used when you convert the pipe layout path to
physical piping. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. However,
you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. Configuring the
Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. You can
also configure these settings by clicking Settings on the Options Bar when the Layout Path tool is open. For more
information, refer to Help.

Next, you begin the design by drawing the supply pipe for the fire protection systems.

Draw the supply pipe

28 In the Project Browser, double-click the 1 - Fire Prot floor plan view to make it active.
29 Enter ZR, and sketch a zoom region around Stairwell 30 (located in the lower-right corner of the building).
Notice that the cursor changes to a magnifying glass indicating that the Zoom tool is active.

TIP If a view does not contain room tags, you can easily identify a room by placing the cursor over the room
component (indicated by 2 diagonal intersecting lines). The room name and number display in a tooltip and on
the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar).

338 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


30 On the View toolbar, click (Thin Lines) to display the geometry in thin lines.
Thin Lines allows you to view the true thickness of lines relative to the zoom of the view. This line thickness
is used for plotting purposes giving the effect of line weights.

NOTE The Thin Lines display is not saved during your design session. You will need to reactivate it, if you reopen
Revit MEP.

31 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar, click Pipe.


32 In the Type Selector, select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet.
33 On the Options Bar, do the following:

■ For D, select 150 mm.


■ For Offset, enter 0.

NOTE You can press Tab after specifying the Offset to confirm the value.

34 Place the cursor in the lower-left corner of the stairwell, and click in the approximate area to specify the
pipe start point.

35 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 6400, and click Apply to specify the pipe end point.
The new pipe displays.

Starting the Fire Protection Project | 339


TIP When entering a value, you do not need to type measurement symbols, just enter the value, and press Tab.
For example, you can enter 2600 and press Tab for 2600 mm.

Next, you verify the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

36 In the Project Browser, double-click the 3D Fire Prot view.


37 On the View Control Bar (located at the lower-left of the drawing area), select Fine for Detail Level, and
Shading w/ Edges for Model Graphics Style.
The pipe geometry displays in 2 line and shaded allowing you to better see it. Notice that the supply pipe
extends from the floor in level 1 into level 2.

38 On the View toolbar, click (Dynamically Modify View).


39 In the Dynamic View dialog, use the Zoom, Scroll, and Spin buttons to verify that the supply pipe geometry
is as you expected.
40 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save.
41 In the Save As dialog, enter Starting the Fire Protection Project Training for File name, navigate
to the folder of your choice, and click Save.

IMPORTANT After finishing each exercise, you can choose to save your work. However, it is highly recommended
that you always begin each exercise by opening the dataset provided. This dataset includes the work from the
previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.

In this exercise, you created new views and modified view properties. You then created 2 new pipe types for the wet
and dry fire protection systems and modified their type properties. The conversion settings for both wet and dry fire
protection systems were also configured. Finally, you drew the supply pipe for fire protection systems. In the next
exercise, you place the wet system sprinklers and create a schedule.

Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers


In this exercise, you place the fire protection wet system sprinklers in the ceilings of the rooms. First, you create a
schedule to identify the required number of sprinklers per room. Then, using this information, you place the sprinklers.
As you place the sprinklers, you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling
plan.

340 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Placing Sprinklers.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder.

1 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities.

Define a schedule type

2 In the New Schedule dialog, do the following:

■ Under Category, select Rooms.


Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added.

■ Verify that Schedule building components is selected.


■ Click OK.

Define columns

3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Area, and click Add.
This adds the Area field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. Scheduled fields display
as columns in the schedule.

4 While pressing Ctrl, select the following fields from the Available fields list:

■ Level
■ Name
■ Number

5 Click Add to add the fields to the Scheduled fields list.


To remove a field, select it, and click Remove.

6 Select a field, and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows:

■ Number
■ Name
■ Level
■ Area

Next, you create a calculated value parameter to indicate the minimum number of sprinklers required per
room. This information is based on the project specification and the fire protection codes.

Create a calculated value parameter

7 Click Calculated Value.


8 In the Calculated Value dialog, do the following:

■ For Name, enter Min. Sprinklers.


■ Verify that Formula is selected.
■ For Discipline, verify that Common is selected.
■ For Type, verify that Number is selected.
■ For Formula, enter Area/12.1.
The fire protection code requires one sprinkler for every 12.1 square meters.

Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 341


NOTE You must enter the formula verbatim, including spaces.

9 Click OK.
The Min. Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). This
calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine which rooms meet the sprinkler design
and code requirements.

Organize the data

10 On the Filter tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, do the following:

■ For Filter by, select Level.


■ Verify that equals is selected.
■ Under Level, select Level 2.
■ For And, verify that (none) is selected.

11 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, do the following:

■ For Sort by, select Number.


■ Verify that Ascending is selected.
■ For Then by, verify that (none) is selected.
■ Verify that Grand totals is cleared and Itemize every instance is selected.

12 On the Formatting tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, do the following:

■ Under Fields, select Min. Sprinklers.


■ For Field formatting, click Field Format.

13 In the Format dialog, do the following:

■ Clear Use default settings.


■ For Units, select Fixed.
■ For Rounding, select 2 decimal places.
■ Click OK twice.

A new view called Room Schedule opens and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser.
Notice that only the data for the level 2 rooms displays, sorted according to room number. You can refer
to the minimum number of sprinklers per room data as you place sprinklers in order to satisfy the design
and code requirements. Although you rounded the data to one decimal place, you will want to round all
decimals up to the next whole number.

IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. You can
change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. Each change is dynamic and immediately
propagates throughout your project as if you had used the Element Properties dialog. This is because you are
modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the central
concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

Next, you place the wet system sprinklers in the level 2 rooms.

Place a sprinkler

14 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Ceiling Plans, and
double-click 2- Ceiling Fire Prot to make it the active view.
15 Enter ZR, and sketch a zoom region around Office 6 (located in the upper-left corner of the building).

342 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


Next, you draw 2 reference lines to help you accurately place the sprinklers in the center of the ceiling
tiles.

16 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar, click Lines.


17 In the Work Plane dialog, under Specify a new Work Plane, click Name, and specify Level : Level 2.
This specifies Level 2 as the work plane for the reference lines.

18 Click OK.
19 On the Options Bar, do the following:

■ In the Type Selector, verify that Lines is selected.


■ For Plane, verify that Level : Level 2 is selected.
■ Verify that Chain and Radius are cleared.

■ Verify that (Draw) and (Line) are selected.

20 Place the cursor at the ceiling grid intersection as shown, and after the intersection snap displays, click to
specify the line start point.

21 Draw the line diagonally to the opposite grid intersection, and after the intersection snap displays, click
to specify the line end point.

Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 343


The line is created. However, a warning displays indicating that the line is not visible in the ceiling plan
view. You need to specify an underlay for this view to display the reference lines.

22 With the Lines tool active, right-click in the drawing area, and click View Properties.
23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Underlay, select Level 2.
24 Click OK.
The line displays.

Notice that the Lines tool remains active.

25 Using the same method, draw a second diagonal line that intersects the first at the center of the ceiling
tile.

344 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


26 Press ESC twice to deactivate the Line tool.
27 Zoom in on the lines to verify them.

Next, you place a sprinkler.

28 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar, click Sprinkler.


29 In the Type Selector, select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Plane_Hosted : 15mm Pendent.

30 On the Options Bar, click (Place on Face) to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face.
31 With the view zoomed, place the cursor over the intersection of the 2 lines, and after the mid point snap
displays, click to place the sprinkler.

Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 345


32 Click Modify on the Design Bar.
The sprinkler is centered in the ceiling tile.

You use this sprinkler to place the other sprinklers. Next, you delete the reference lines.

NOTE When placing sprinklers, snap to the ceiling grid intersections rather than entering placement dimensions.
Grid snapping ensures accurate placement in the ceiling tiles.

Next, you delete the reference lines.

33 While pressing CTRL, click both reference lines, and then press Delete.
34 Right-click in the drawing area, and click View Properties.
35 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Underlay, select None, and click OK.
This removes the Level 2 underlay from the ceiling plan view. The underlay was used only to display the
reference lines. Next, you continue placing sprinklers.

Continue placing sprinklers

36 In the drawing area, select the sprinkler that you placed.


The selected sprinkler displays in red.

37 On the Edit toolbar, click (Copy).

346 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. Also the cursor changes indicating that the
Copy tool is open.

TIP Using the Copy tool is a 2-click process. First specify the start point on the element that you want to copy
and then specify the end point (or destination). You can also enter CO to activate the Copy tool.

38 On the Options Bar, verify that Constrain and Multiple are cleared, and that Copy is selected.
39 Zoom out so that the entire Office 6 ceiling grid is visible.
40 Select the upper-left corner of the ceiling grid, and after the intersection snap displays, click to specify the
copy start point.

41 Move the cursor diagonally to the lower-right as shown, and after the intersection snap displays, click to
specify the copy end point.
Notice that the copy selection border follows the cursor, and listening dimensions display to aid in
placement.

A copy of the sprinkler is immediately placed after you specify the end point.

Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 347


TIP If you have difficulty displaying an intersection snap because of other snaps interfering, you can enter SI to
override all other snaps and display only intersection snaps. Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make
a selection. You can also deactivate snaps in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps).

Next, you copy and array sprinklers in Office 7.

Copy and array sprinklers

42 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window.


43 Enter ZR, and sketch a zoom region around Office 7 (located immediately below Office 6).
44 Select the lower-right sprinkler in Office 6.

45 On the Edit toolbar, click (Copy).


46 On the Options Bar, verify that Copy is selected, and select Multiple.
This allows you to place multiple copies of an object without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement.

47 In Office 6, place the cursor over the upper-left ceiling grid intersection immediately above the sprinkler
that you selected, and after the intersection snap displays, click to specify the copy start point.

348 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


48 Move the cursor down and to the right into Office 7, and after the intersection snap displays, specify the
copy end point for the first sprinkler.

Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 349


49 Move the cursor directly down, and after the intersection snap displays, specify the copy end point for the
second sprinkler.

350 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


The sprinklers are placed.

50 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


Next, you array the other Office 7 sprinklers. Rather than copy and place the rest of the sprinklers, you can
use the Array tool to finish the job. Furthermore, because all of the sprinklers in Office 7 are equally spaced,
it is an ideal situation to use an array.

51 While pressing CTRL, select the 2 sprinklers that you placed in Office 7.

52 On the Edit toolbar, click (Array).


A border displays around the 2 sprinklers.

TIP You can also enter AR to activate the Array tool.

53 On the Options Bar, do the following:

■ Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array.


■ Clear Group And Associate.
■ Verify that 2 is specified for Number (of arrays).
■ For Move To, select Last.
■ Verify that Constrain is cleared.

NOTE Similar to the Move or Copy tool, creating an array is a 2-step process. You first specify an array start
point, then you move the cursor to the second or last location (if you have more than 2 arrays), to specify array
end point.

Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 351


54 Move the cursor over the upper-left ceiling grid intersection directly above the upper Office 7 sprinkler,
and after the intersection snap displays, click to specify the array start point.

55 Move the cursor to the left along the same horizontal ceiling grid, and after the intersection snap displays,
click to specify the array end point as shown.
Notice that an outline follows the cursor to aid in placement.

352 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


The Office 7 sprinklers are placed.

Next, you place sprinklers in Office 8.

56 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window.

Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 353


57 Starting outside the upper-left corner of the building, drag the cursor to the lower-right, and draw a pick
box around Office 6.

Notice that all elements in the 2 - Ceiling Fire Prot view range are selected.

58 On the Options Bar, click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements.
59 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Sprinklers, and click OK.

354 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


The Office 6 sprinklers are selected.

IMPORTANT When selecting components either by drawing a pick box (drag left to right), by cross-picking
(drag right to left), or by selecting individual components, you are selecting all components that are visible in
the active view (within the view range). If the selection contains an unwanted component, you can clear it by
filtering, or by pressing SHIFT and selecting the component.

60 On the Edit toolbar, click (Copy).


Notice that a border around the selected sprinklers displays indicating the copy selection.

61 On the Options Bar, clear Multiple.


62 Using the mouse scroll wheel, adjust the view so that you can see both Office 6 and Office 8.
63 Place the cursor in the center of the selection border, and after the mid point snap displays, click to specify
the copy start point.

Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 355


64 Move the cursor directly down along the same vertical ceiling grid and into the center of Office 8, and
after the mid point snap displays, click to specify the copy end point.

NOTE If you have difficulty locating the mid point snap, enter SM to override all other snaps and display only
mid point snaps.

356 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


You have now placed the sprinklers for the 3 offices.

Next, you place sprinklers in the large common space, Open 2.

Create multiple sprinkler arrays

65 Zoom to show Office 8 and the part of the adjacent common area, Open 2.
66 Select the lower-right Office 8 sprinkler.
You copy this sprinkler to Open 2 and use it to create a sprinkler array.

67 On the Edit toolbar, click (Copy).


68 On the Options Bar, verify that Multiple is cleared.
69 Specify the copy start point at the upper-left ceiling grid intersection directly above the sprinkler.
Remember to watch for the intersection snap.

70 Move the cursor to the right into Open 2 as shown, and after the intersection snap displays, click to specify
the copy end point at the ceiling grid intersection.

Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 357


The Office 8 sprinkler is copied to Open 2.

Next, you array this sprinkler to place multiple sprinklers in the lower section of Open 2. You could copy
sprinklers, but creating an array is quicker.

71 Select the sprinkler that you copied.

72 On the Edit toolbar, click (Array).


73 On the Options Bar, do the following:

■ Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array.


■ Verify that Group And Associate is cleared.
■ For Number, enter 6 for the number of arrays.
■ For Move To, select 2nd.
■ Verify that Constrain is cleared.

74 Specify the ceiling grid intersection to the upper-right of the sprinkler as the array start point.

358 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


75 Move the cursor along the same horizontal ceiling grid to the right, and after the intersection snap displays,
click to specify the array end point as shown.

The array is created. Zoom out to display the array. Notice that 4 arrays were created after the end point.
This is because 2nd was selected for Move To on the Options Bar. This indicated that the specified end
point would be the placement location for the second array.

IMPORTANT When specifying array start and end points make certain that the array is placed accurately. Any
misplacement has a multiplier effect as the array propagates. If you make a mistake placing the array, undo the
step and try again. For more information about arrays, refer to Help.

Next, you create multiple arrays based on this array.

76 While pressing CTRL, select all Open 2 sprinklers except for the far left sprinkler.

Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 359


If you need to remove an object from a selection, select the object to remove while pressing SHIFT.

77 On the Edit toolbar, click (Array).


78 On the Options Bar, do the following:

■ Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array.


■ Verify that Group And Associate is cleared.
■ For Number, enter 4 for number of arrays.
■ For Move To, verify that 2nd is selected.
■ Verify that Constrain is cleared.

79 Specify the array start point at the ceiling grid intersection directly to the upper-left of the left sprinkler
that is within the array selection.

80 Move the cursor directly down along the same vertical ceiling grid, and after the intersection snap displays,
click to specify end point for the second array.

360 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


The arrays are created, and an error message displays informing you that 3 sprinklers do not lie on the host
face (ceiling tiles). Notice that 3 sprinklers are located outside of the building. You need to remove these
sprinklers to resolve the errors.

81 In the Revit MEP 2008 dialog, click Delete Element(s) to delete the 3 sprinklers.
Sprinkler placement for the lower section of Open 2 is complete

Next, you place sprinklers in the Mechanical/Electrical room. Because this room does not have a ceiling,
you will use non-hosted sprinklers. However, first, you need to load them in the project.

Load a new sprinkler family

82 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.


83 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
84 Open the M_Sprinkler-Upright-Non_Hosted.rfa file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection folder.
The sprinkler family loads into the project.

IMPORTANT A family contains one or more family types (different sizes, and so on) in the RFA (Revit Family)
file. These family types can be selected in the Type Selector or under Families in the Project Browser. Families are
loaded and saved in the current project (dataset). To modify a family type, select an instance of the family type
in the drawing area, click Edit Family on the Options Bar, and then to edit the family in the Family Editor.

Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 361


Place non-hosted sprinklers

85 With the 2-Ceiling Fire Prot view active, enter ZR, and sketch a zoom region around the
Mechanical/Electrical 24 room (located between the Men’s and the Ladies’ rooms).
86 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar, click Sprinkler.
87 In the Type Selector, select M_Sprinkler-Upright-Non_Hosted : 15mm Upright.
88 In the Mechanical/Electrical 24 room, move the cursor toward the right wall, and using the listening
dimensions for reference, click to place a sprinkler 1200 mm from the center of the right wall.

A warning may display informing you that the sprinkler is not visible in the ceiling plan view. You address
this warning after placing the other sprinkler.

89 Move the cursor near the left wall, and notice that the temporary dimensions reference the right wall.
90 Press the Spacebar to change the listening dimension reference to the left wall, and click to place a sprinkler
1200 mm from the center of the left wall.
You can also use the Mirror tool to place the left sprinkler by drawing a mirror axis at the mid point of the
top and bottom walls of the Mechanical/Electrical room.

Notice that the Mechanical/Electrical room sprinklers do not display. This occurred because the sprinkler
offset elevations are beyond the view range of the active ceiling view. Next, you change the sprinkler offsets.

91 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click 2 - Fire Prot to make it the active view.
92 Zoom in on the Mechanical/Electrical room, and while pressing CTRL, select both sprinklers.

93 On the Options Bar, click (Properties).


You can also right-click, and click Element Properties from the context menu.

94 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 2900 mm, and click OK.
This specifies the elevation for the selected sprinklers.

95 In the Project Browser, double-click 2 - Ceiling Fire Prot, and notice that the sprinklers display in the
Mechanical/Electrical room.

362 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


Complete the level 2 sprinkler placement

96 Using the placement methods that you have learned, complete the level 2 sprinkler placement according
to the following criteria and floor plan:

■ Refer to the room schedule to verify the required number of sprinklers for each room. Remember to
always round decimals up to the next whole number.
■ Use sprinkler type: M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Plane_Hosted : 15mm Pendent for all rooms.

■ Remember to click to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face.

NOTE When placing sprinklers, snap to the ceiling grid intersections rather than entering placement dimensions.
Grid snapping ensures accurate placement.

97 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save.


98 In the Save As dialog, enter Placing Sprinklers Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your
choice, and click Save.

In this exercise, you created a room schedule to calculate the minimum number of sprinklers required for each room
based on the building specifications and the fire protection code. You placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement

Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 363


methods and loaded a new sprinkler family into the project. In the next exercise, you connect the sprinklers both
logically by creating a system, and physically with piping.

Connecting the Sprinklers


In this exercise, you create a system and piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. A system is the logical
connection between system components such as sprinklers. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various
analyses including flow and pressure. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers, and then creating the
logical connection between these system components. After creating the logical connection, you then create pipes to
physically connect the system components (piping is not considered a system). This is the recommended workflow or
best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. During this exercise, you also convert and place pipe fittings, modify
pipe branches, and use the System Browser to confirm your systems.

IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. Unlike
logical connections (systems), physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. However, piping is
necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing.

Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Connecting Sprinklers.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder.

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click 2 - Fire Prot to make it the active view.
2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window.

Explore the System Browser

3 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar, click System Browser.

TIP You can also press F9 (or click Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. If
the System Browser does not respond, click in the drawing area to make it active, then press F9.

4 Expand the Unassigned folder, and expand the Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2
sprinklers that you placed in the building.

IMPORTANT In the System Browser, all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according
to the system that you assigned to them. You assign a system component (such as mechanical equipment,
sprinklers, and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system
components or by assigning a system component to an existing system. All system components that you place
are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. This occurs because each system
component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. So, after
you placed the sprinklers, Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Fire Protection Wet system
category located in the Unassigned folder. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them
to their proper system. As you assign sprinklers to systems, the assigned sprinklers move from the Unassigned
folder to their respective assigned system folder. Thus, if all system components are assigned, a Default system
category would not contain any system components; it would be considered empty. Empty Default system
categories do not display in the System Browser. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate
and confirm systems.

Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems.

Connect sprinklers with a system

5 Draw a pick box (from left to right) around the lower half of the building as shown.

364 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


Make certain to include the lower sprinklers in Office 8 and Office 28. You select only half of the sprinklers
on level 2 because it makes connecting the sprinklers more manageable, and provides more layout path
solutions to choose from when creating pipes.

Notice that all elements within the 2 - Ceiling Fire Prot view range are selected.

6 On the Options Bar, click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements.
7 In the Filter box, click Check None, select Sprinklers, and click OK.

Connecting the Sprinklers | 365


All sprinklers in the lower half of the building are selected and display in red.

Notice that system tools display on the Options Bar.

8 On the Options Bar, click (Create Fire Protection Wet System) to create a fire protection wet system,
and assign the selected sprinklers to it.

Notice that after you click , the system is immediately created and listed in the System Browser. The
wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red. Note that this display indicates that the
new system is selected. It does not indicate a pipe layout path.

IMPORTANT The new system named Fire Protection Wet 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Fire
Protection Wet in the Piping folder. All sprinklers in the system are listed under the system connecting them.
Notice that the Default Fire Protection Wet system category no longer contains these sprinklers because you
have assigned them to a system. After you assign the remaining sprinklers, the default system category will not
contain any sprinklers, and will be considered empty.

Now that the sprinklers are logically connected, you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the
system.

366 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


Confirm and validate the system

9 In the System Browser, expand Piping, right-click Fire Protection Wet, and click Expand to view the Fire
Protection Wet 1 system listing.
This listing represent the system that you just created.

10 Double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the sprinklers.
You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects
the sprinklers.

11 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1, and click Select.


The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red indicating the logical connection.

IMPORTANT Although you can draw pipe to create the physical pipe connections, you must create a system
for Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. Remember that systems can be created before
or after creating pipe is drawn.

Next, you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers.

Connect the sprinklers with piping

12 With the Fire Protection Wet 1 system selected, click Layout Path on the Options Bar.
The Layout Path tools are provided on the Design Bar and Options Bar.

TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears, place the cursor over a sprinkler, press
Tab, and select the system. You can also right-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 listing in the System Browser, and
click Select to select the system.

NOTE You do not need to select a system or have system components connected to a system to access the
Layout Path tool. After placing a system component, you can a system component to access the Layout Path on
the Options Bar.

13 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar, verify that Solutions is selected.
14 On the Options Bar, do the following:

■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type.

■ Click (Next Solution), and select solution 2.


You can also view possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys.
You want the Network layout solution because it connects the sprinklers to a central main. The main
will connect to the supply pipe in the stairwell. The layout path solution displays with the main in
blue and the branch in green.

Connecting the Sprinklers | 367


Next, you verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. You use pipe
conversion settings to convert the layout path to physical piping.

15 On the Options Bar, click Settings.


16 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog, verify that Main is selected.
17 Under System Type: Fire Protection Wet, do the following:

■ For Pipe Type, verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection Wet is selected.
■ For Offset, verify that 2750.0 is specified.
This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2750 mm above level 2.

18 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog, select Branch.
19 Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch.

IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main
and other obstacles. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes, duct, structural beams, or architecture.

20 Click OK.
Next, you modify the layout path.

Modify the layout path

21 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.


You now modify the vertical main layout that will be the main pipe.

22 Zoom in on the vertical main.


23 Select the vertical layout path segment.
A drag control displays.

368 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


24 Using the drag control, drag the main to the left as shown.

25 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Layout.

Connecting the Sprinklers | 369


The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. Notice that all of the fittings required to connect
the pipes to the system components are automatically inserted. This pipe run physically connects the wet
system sprinklers for the lower half of level 2.

Notice that the pipes are not listed in the System Browser. This is because they constitute a physical rather
than a logical connection, and are not part of the system. You can delete pipes and pipe fittings, and the
system remains.

IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or
pipe sizing. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create the pipe, or
that offset elevations are incorrect. Either relocate the system components, select a different layout solution, or
manually modify the pipe. Always check pipe connectivity after modification.

Next, you modify the pipe run to consolidate the branch lines and simplify the design.

Modify the pipe runs

26 In the Project Browser, under Fire Protection ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D Fire Prot to make it the active
view.
Notice that the cursor snaps to various building elements in the 3D view. You hide these elements to allow
you to easily snap to the sprinklers and the pipe.

27 Enter VG.

370 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


28 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility Graphics Overrides dialog, do the following:

■ Select Show categories from all disciplines.


■ Under Visibility, clear Casework, Ceilings, Doors, Floors, Lines, Railings, Roofs, Rooms, Stairs, Walls,
and Windows.

29 Click OK.
The building elements are hidden.

30 Zoom in and place the cursor over the branch pipe that services the Office 8 sprinkler, and after it highlights,
press TAB to highlight the branch pipe and sprinkler, and click to select them.
The selected pipe and sprinkler display in red.

31 With the pipe and sprinkler selected, enter ZR, and draw a zoom region around the Office 8 sprinkler.

Connecting the Sprinklers | 371


32 While pressing SHIFT, select the sprinkler to remove it from the selection.

33 Press Delete to delete the selected elements.

Remember that although the physical (pipe) connection to the sprinkler has been deleted, the logical
(system) connection is still intact.

34 Enter ZF, to zoom out the view to fit the window.


35 Enter ZR, and draw a zoom region around the Open 2 sprinkler (located to the lower-right of the Office 8
sprinkler. The Office 8 sprinkler is shown circled).

372 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


Next, you convert the elbow fitting at the end of the branch in order to connect the Office 8 sprinkler to
it.

Convert a fitting

36 Select the elbow fitting at the end of the branch above the sprinkler.

Notice that 2 plus signs display. These are fitting conversion controls which allow you to convert the elbow
fitting to a tee fitting in either a vertical or horizontal orientation.
You may need to zoom in closer to better see the fitting conversion controls.

IMPORTANT Fitting conversion controls display as plus or minus signs that are located near a selected pipe
fitting. These controls convert the fitting to the next possible fitting type for the piping context. Fitting control
locations indicate the orientation of the fitting connection.

37 Click the plus sign on the right.

Connecting the Sprinklers | 373


The elbow converts to a tee with a vertical orientation.

38 Select the tee fitting.


A minus sign displays. This fitting conversion control allows you to return to the previous fitting.

374 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


TIP If you place the cursor over a fitting conversion control, a tooltip displays indicating the next possible fitting.

39 Click the minus sign to convert the tee back to the elbow fitting.

40 Select the elbow fitting, and click the left plus sign.

Connecting the Sprinklers | 375


The elbow converts to a tee with a horizontal orientation.

Next, you draw the pipe to connect the Office 8 sprinkler to the branch.

Connect the Office 8 sprinkler

41 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar, click Pipe.


42 Place the cursor over the open end of the tee fitting, and after the end point snap displays, click to specify
the pipe start point.

NOTE You must place the cursor over the connector to connect to pipe, pipe fittings, or equipments. When
drawing pipe, use the connector snap, , to quickly and accurately locate a connector. If you pause briefly, a
tooltip appears confirming the connector. When connecting pipe to some elements, such as pipe fittings and
equipment in a 3D view, use the end point snap, , if a connector snap does not display.

43 Using the mouse scroll wheel, zoom out the view so that the tee fitting and the Office 8 sprinkler are visible.
44 Begin to draw the pipe diagonally to the upper-left pipe along the same axis as the existing pipe and toward
the Office 8 sprinkler.
Notice that the pipe diameter is larger than the existing pipe.

376 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


45 Press the Spacebar to match the pipe diameter and offset values to those of the tee fitting.
46 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is selected.

TIP When drawing pipe, press the Spacebar after you specify the start point and move the cursor to begin drawing
pipe. This automatically sets the pipe diameter or width and height, and the offset parameter to match those of
the selected connector. If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short, you pressed Spacebar before
you began drawing pipe. Note that the Spacebar does not automatically specify the pipe type. You should always
verify the pipe type from the Type Selector on the Options Bar.

47 Continue to draw the pipe, and as the listening dimensions display, enter 300 and press Enter to specify
the length of the pipe segment.

Connecting the Sprinklers | 377


The pipe segment is created.

48 Click Modify on the Design Bar.


49 Select the Office 8 sprinkler.

50 On the Options Bar, click (Connect Into), and select the pipe segment that you just drew.
The sprinkler connects into the pipe. Notice that all pipe fittings are automatically added.

Next, you check the connectivity of the pipe branch to make certain everything is connected and validate
the pipe geometry.

Check connectivity and validate geometry

51 In the 3D view, place the cursor over the pipe branch that you modified, and after the pipe segment
highlights, press Tab 3 times.

378 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


The pipe branch including the sprinklers and the pipe fittings highlight, indicating that they are physically
connected.

52 Using the same method, check the connectivity in the 2 -Fire Prot floor plan view.

IMPORTANT Understanding TAB behavior is very important when designing piping systems in Revit MEP. When
pipes and fittings are connected, you can check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of pipe so
that it highlights and then press Tab. The first time you press Tab, the branch to which the pipe is connected
highlights. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected pipe and pipe fittings up to the
first piece of connected equipment. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected pipes,
fittings, and equipment. If the entire network does not highlight, then you know that a disconnect exists. This
disconnect will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. You can repair the connection by dragging
the pipe segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect,
or you can use the Trim (Extend) tool, or you may need to convert a fitting and draw pipe. Typically a disconnect
results from not having sufficient room to make a connection. To use the TAB behavior for selecting highlighted
objects, press TAB the required number of times, and after the objects highlight, click to select them.

After the pipe run and sprinklers highlight, you can click to select them. The lower section of the pipe run
displays in red, allowing you to better see the connections. Next, you validate the piping geometry.

53 In the 3D Fire Prot view, zoom in on the pipe and fittings, and verify that the physical pipe geometry is
as expected.

Connecting the Sprinklers | 379


Continue pipe branch modification

54 In the Project Browser, under Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans, double-click 2 - Fire Prot to make it the active
view.
55 Zoom the view and draw a pick box (drag left to right) around the upper-right pipe branch (include fittings
and sprinkler) that services Office 28.

56 On the Options Bar, click .


57 In the Filter dialog, clear Sprinklers, and click OK.
This clears the Office 28 sprinkler from the selection.

58 Place the cursor over the selected pipe run, and after it highlights, right-click, and click Delete.
The pipe branch and fittings are deleted.

380 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


59 Place the cursor over the upper-left Office 29 sprinkler, and after it highlights, press TAB twice to highlight
the pipe branch, including the pipe fittings and the upper 2 Office 29 sprinklers.

60 Click to select the branch.


61 With the branch selected, place the cursor over the lower-left Office 29 sprinkler, and after it highlights,
press TAB twice to highlight the pipe branch, including the pipe fittings and lower Office 29 sprinklers.
62 While pressing CTRL, select the highlighted pipe branch.
Both selected branches display in red.

63 On the Options Bar, click .


64 In the Filter dialog, clear Sprinklers, and click OK.

Connecting the Sprinklers | 381


This clears the Office 29 sprinklers from the selection.

65 Press Delete to delete the 2 pipe branches including the pipe fittings. Next, you need to delete the pipes
connected to the upper-right Open 2 sprinklers.

66 Draw a pick box around the 2 upper-right sprinklers in Open 2.

67 On the Options Bar, click .


68 In the Filter dialog, clear Sprinklers, and click OK.
Notice that only the pipes and pipe fittings are selected.

69 Press Delete to delete the pipes and pipe fittings.


Next, you draw pipe to connect a sprinkler.

382 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


70 In Open 2, select the upper-right pipe branch to display the pipe segment connector.
71 Right-click the connector located on the right end of the pipe, and click Draw Pipe.

72 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is selected in the Type Selector.
All other pipe properties match those of the selected connector.

73 Zoom the view, and draw the pipe to the right toward the upper-right Office 29 sprinkler, and after the
centerline snap displays, click to specify the first pipe segment end point.

74 Draw the pipe down toward the sprinkler, and after the connector snap displays over the sprinkler, click
to connect to the sprinkler.

75 Press ESC to exit the Draw tool.

Connecting the Sprinklers | 383


The upper-right Office 29 sprinkler is connected.

Next, you connect 2 more office sprinklers to the branch.

76 Select the lower Office 28 sprinkler (located above Office 29).

77 On the Options Bar, click (Connect Into), and select the pipe segment that you just drew.
The sprinkler connects into the pipe and all pipe fittings are automatically added.

78 Using the same method, connect the upper-left Office 29 sprinkler.


The Office 28 and Office 29 sprinklers are connected to the branch.

Next, you check connectivity.

79 Place the cursor over the horizontal pipe branch, and press TAB twice.

384 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


The entire pipe branch highlights, including sprinklers and pipe fittings. This indicates that the branch
and office sprinklers are connected.

However, notice that the 2 sprinklers in Open 2 do not highlight. These sprinklers are not physically
connected. You need to connect these sprinklers.

80 Use to connect each of the Open 2 sprinklers to the branch.


81 Check connectivity.
The branch including the Open 2 and office sprinklers highlight indicating that they are physically
connected.

82 Using the pipe branch modification methods that you learned, connect the 2 lower Office 29 sprinklers
to the pipe branch located on the left.
Remember to delete the end pipe segment before drawing pipe.

Next, you make additional pipe modifications.

Modify the pipe main

83 Place the cursor over the branch that services the lower Office 29 sprinklers, and after it highlights, press
TAB twice, and then click to select the highlighted objects.

Connecting the Sprinklers | 385


The connected main, branch, and sprinklers display in red. Notice that the highlighting stops at 2 areas
along the main pipe. This indicates 2 disconnects.

These disconnects resulted from deleting the 2 tee fittings that connected the branches to the main. These
branches were deleted during branch consolidation. You need to resolve the disconnects.

TIP After using TAB to check connectivity, you can click to select all highlighted objects. The highlighted objects
display in red, making them easier to view. If you move the cursor, the connection continues to display for easy
reference.

84 Enter ZR, and draw a zoom region around both disconnects.

85 Select the upper pipe segment to display the 2 pipe connectors.

86 Drag the lower pipe connector down over the end of the lower pipe segment, and after the connector snap
displays, release the mouse button to connect the 2 pipe segments.

386 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


TIP When dragging a pipe connector, notice that cursor changes to a pencil indicating that the Draw tool is
active.

87 Zoom in on the lower disconnect.


Instead of dragging the pipe connector, you use the Trim tool to resolve the disconnect.

88 On the Options Bar, click (Trim/Extend).


You can also enter TR to activate the Trim/Extend tool. Notice that the cursor changes indicating that the
Trim/Extend tool is active.

NOTE Trim/Extend is a 2-click process. First, select the object as the trim/extend start point, then select the
object as the trim/extend end point. Trim/Extend is especially useful in modifying pipe and duct, or in resolving
disconnects. As always, use TAB to check connectivity after making any modifications to pipe.

89 Select the pipe segment above the disconnect as the extend start point.

90 Select the pipe segment below the disconnect as the extend end point.

Connecting the Sprinklers | 387


The 2 pipe segments connect.

91 Click Modify on the Design Bar.


92 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window.
93 Check connectivity.
The main and branches highlight, indicating that they are connected.

Next, you tile 2 views and modify the lower end of the pipe run.

388 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


Work in 2 views simultaneously

94 In the 2 -Fire Prot view, enter ZR, and draw a zoom region around the elbow fitting at the lower end of
the main, including the sprinkler to the right.

Next, you tile 2 views to work in them simultaneously.

95 With the 2 - Fire Prot view active, click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows.
This closes all windows previously opened during the current design session. Note that if this option is
unavailable, the active view is the only open window.

96 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ 3D views, and
double-click 3D Fire Prot to make it the active view.
97 Click Windows menu ➤ Floor Plan : 2 - Fire Prot to make it the active view.
98 Enter WT to tile both windows.

TIP When you tile 2 views, the active view is tiled to the left.

99 Adjust the view in both windows to view the elbow fitting and the left sprinkler as shown.
You will work in the floor plan view and validate the geometry in the 3D view.

Notice that all pipe fittings display in their symbolic representation when you are viewing pipes in coarse
or medium (single line) Detail Level.

Connecting the Sprinklers | 389


NOTE When you are viewing pipes in single line display (coarse or medium Detail Level), all pipe fittings display
in their symbolic form. This symbolic representation is exaggerated and is larger than the actual fitting size. When
snapping to fittings in single line Detail Level, it is important to remember that the fitting connectors are located
in the actual location of the fitting and not in the end of the symbolic representation. You should always zoom
in on the fitting when working with a fitting, especially when symbolic fittings are displayed. Changing the Detail
Level to Fine (2 line) will display the fittings in their actual size. If you experience slower viewing performance
while using the higher detail settings, you can change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe or turn off
component visibility or filter objects in the Visibility Graphics dialog.

100 In the 2 - Fire Prot view, select the elbow, and using the fitting conversion method that you learned earlier,
convert the elbow to a tee with a vertical orientation.
Remember to zoom the view to better see the fitting conversion controls.

Next, you place an endcap on the tee. This endcap will provide pipeline cleanout access. First, you change
the view detail level to display pipes in 2 line.

101 On the View Control Bar located at the lower left of the drawing area, select Fine for Detail Level.
The pipe geometry displays in 2 line.

102 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar, click Pipe Fitting.
103 In the Type Selector, select M_Pipe Endcap : M_Standard.
104 Zoom in on the tee.
105 Move the cursor over the end of the open end of the tee fitting, and after the mid point snap displays, click
to place the endcap.

390 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


106 Click Modify on the Design Bar.
107 Place the cursor over the endcap, and after it highlights, press TAB once.
The endcap and tee fittings highlight indicating that they are connected.

108 In the 3D Fire Prot view, validate the endcap geometry.

Connecting the Sprinklers | 391


109 In the 2 - Fire Prot view, use the View Control Bar to change the view detail level to Medium.
The pipes and fittings display in single line. Notice that the endcap displays as centered in the tee fitting.
As stated earlier in this exercise, in single line display, all fittings and other elements are represented in
their symbolic form. However, their connectors are located in their actual location. So, this tee fitting
endcap is connected to the tee connector.

Next, you modify the sprinkler branch connection.

110 Adjust the floor plan and 3D views to view the sprinkler that is located to the right of the tee and endcap.
111 In the 3D Fire Prot view, draw a pick box around the sprinkler and the connecting pipe branch.
The sprinkler, pipe, and pipe fittings display in red.

112 On the Options Bar, click .


113 In the Filter dialog, clear Sprinklers, and click OK.
You can also select the sprinkler while pressing SHIFT to clear it from the selection.

114 Press Delete to delete the pipes and pipe fittings.

392 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


115 Select the sprinkler.

116 On the Options Bar, click , and select the right pipe segment above the sprinkler.
The sprinkler connects into the pipe, and all pipe fittings are automatically added.

You need to resolve the disconnect.

117 In the 2 - Fire Prot view, zoom in and select the left pipe segment.

118 Drag the right pipe segment connector to the right, and after the connector snap displays, release the
mouse button to reconnect the pipe branch.

Connecting the Sprinklers | 393


Note that the end of the right pipe segment (and its connector) might be located in the symbolic fitting.
You can also snap to the end point of the tee fitting to connect the pipe. Watch for the end point snap as
you drag the pipe segment.

You resolved the disconnect. You can validate the geometry in the 3D view.

You will check connectivity later in this exercise. Next, you remove the pipe above Server Room 32.

Remove a pipe segment

119 In the 2 - Fire Prot view, zoom out and locate the pipe segment that is above Server Room 32 (located to
the left of Conference Room 31).
The dry fire protection system will service the server room. However, notice that the wet pipe segment is
located over this room. You need to remove this pipe segment to follow good design practice.

120 Select the pipe segment that is above Server Room 32, and press Delete.

394 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


You will reconnect the Conference Room 31 sprinklers when you later finish this pipe run. Next, you need
to convert a sprinkler tee fitting to an elbow in order to close the pipe connection.

121 Enter ZR, and draw a zoom region around the sprinkler that you recently modified.

122 Using the conversion methods that you learned, convert the tee to an elbow.
Remember to zoom the view to locate the fitting conversion control.

This closes the left pipe segment end. You will close the right end when you finish modifying the lower
section of the wet system pipe run.

123 Zoom out, and check connectivity.

Connecting the Sprinklers | 395


Notice that the lower conference room sprinklers are not connected. You connect these after you validate
the pipe geometry.

124 In the 3D view, validate the pipe geometry.

Next, you connect the lower conference room sprinklers.

Finish modifying the lower section of the pipe run

125 Using the methods that you learned, finish consolidating the branches that service Conference Room 31
(located at the lower-right corner of the building) as shown.

396 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


Remember to resolve disconnects, check connectivity, and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

126 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window.


Next, you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current
wet system to logically connect them, and then you create piping to physically connect them.

Connect the upper section of the level 2 wet system

127 If the windows are tiled, close the 3D Fire Prot view, and maximize the 2 - Fire Prot view.
128 In the 2 - Fire Prot view, select a pipe segment, fitting, or sprinkler that is connected to the current wet
system.
Notice that system tools display on the Options Bar.

IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers, air terminals, radiators, mechanical equipment, and so on)
are logically connected by a system, and pipe or duct is created, you can select the pipe or duct, or a system
component to display system tools on the Options Bar. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection).

129 Click (Edit System) to edit the selected system.


The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools. Notice that the
Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name, system equipment, and number of elements
in the system.

NOTE Do not click (Select Equipment for System). You use this tool to add mechanical equipment that
is located upstream in a system, such as VAV boxes, boilers, and AC units.

130 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar, click Add To System.
131 On the Options Bar, do the following:

■ For System Name, verify that Fire Protection Wet 1 is specified.


■ For System Equipment, verify that None is specified.
■ For Number of Elements, verify that 30 is specified.
■ Select Multiple.

Connecting the Sprinklers | 397


This information reports that there are 30 sprinklers currently connected to the wet system. You are going
to select multiple elements to include into the wet system. Notice that system components that are not
connected to the Fire Protection Wet 1 system display as an underlay (they are grayed out).

132 Place the cursor outside Office 6 in the upper-left corner of the building.
Notice that the cursor has changed to indicate that Add To System is active.

133 Draw a pick box from upper-left to lower-right around all of the sprinklers that need to be connected.
Do not worry about including sprinklers that are already connected. You cannot select them.

The selected sprinklers display in red.

134 On the Options Bar, click Finish.


The sprinklers in the upper half of the building are assigned to the Fire Protection Wet 1 and no longer
display as an underlay. Notice that the Options Bar now reports that there are 66 Number of Elements
(sprinklers) in the system. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in
the System Browser.

135 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar, click Finish System.

398 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


Confirm the level 2 wet system

136 In the 2 _Fire Prot view, place the cursor over a newly added sprinkler, and press TAB once to confirm the
upper half of the system.

Notice that the upper section of the system connects to the lower section.

137 With the cursor over the sprinkler, press TAB twice to confirm the entire system.

Next, you confirm the system in the System Browser.

138 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar, click System Browser.
139 Under Systems, expand Piping, right-click Fire Protection Wet, and click Expand All.
Notice that all of the sprinklers have been assigned to the Fire Protection Wet 1 system. Also notice that
the Unassigned folder is not listed. This is because you assigned all of the sprinklers that you had placed
to a system.

140 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1, and click Select.

Connecting the Sprinklers | 399


The logical connection displays in red confirming the level 2 wet system.

The newly added sprinklers are logically connected. Next, you physically connect these sprinklers with
piping.

NOTE Remember that when you confirm systems, you are confirming the logical connection between system
elements, not piping which is the physical connection.

Create piping for upper section of the wet system

141 Click Modify on the Design Bar, and select a newly added sprinkler.

TIP You do not need to select a system or have system elements (such as sprinklers) logically connected to a
system to access the Layout Path tool. After placing system components, select any system component to access
Layout Path on the Options Bar.

142 Click Layout Path on the Options Bar.


The Layout Path tool activates.

143 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar, verify that Solutions is selected.
144 On the Options Bar, do the following:

■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type.

■ Click , and select solution 5.

400 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. The selected solution
is consistent with the design of the existing pipe run, as there is a vertical main and horizontal branches.

Notice that the main connects to the open end of the cross fitting. Next, you verify the pipe conversion
settings that you use to convert the layout path to a physical pipe run.

145 On the Options Bar, click Settings.


You now verify the conversion settings that you specified in an earlier exercise.

146 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog, verify that Main is selected.
147 Under System Type: Fire Protection Wet, do the following:

■ For Pipe Type, verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection Wet is selected.
■ For Offset, verify that 2750.0 is specified.
This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2750 mm above level 2.

148 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog, select Branch.
149 Verify that the pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch as for Main.
150 Click OK.
151 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Layout.

Connecting the Sprinklers | 401


The fire protection pipe geometry (main and branches) is created. This pipe run physically connects the
upper wet system sprinklers to the lower wet system sprinklers at the cross fitting.

If a No auto-route solution found warning displays after you create the pipe run, this is because the pipe
run (most likely the main) is disconnected. You will resolve these disconnects when you consolidate the
branches.
Next, you complete the pipe run.

Complete the level 2 wet system pipe run

152 Using the methods that you learned on the lower pipe run, modify the upper pipe run to consolidate the
branches and simplify the piping design according to the following criteria and floor plan:

■ Use Pipe Type : Fire Protection Wet.


■ Use M_Pipe Endcap : M_Standard, and place an endcap on the cross fitting at the top end of the main.

Remember to resolve disconnects, check connectivity, and validate the geometry.

402 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


You have completed the level 2 fire protection wet system.

153 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save.
154 In the Save As dialog, enter Connecting the Sprinklers Training for File name, navigate to the folder
of your choice, and click Save.

In this exercise, you created a system to logically connect the sprinklers. You confirmed the system and the assigned
sprinklers in the System Browser. After creating the system, you created piping to physically connect the sprinklers.
Connectivity was checked, and pipe geometry was confirmed in the 3D view. You also converted pipe fittings and
placed endcap fittings. Finally, you used various methods to modify pipe segments to bring the system design more in
line with the specifications. In the next exercise, you create the dry fire protection system.

Creating the Fire Protection Dry System


In this exercise, you create a dry fire protection system for Server Room 32. The pipes in this system do not contain
water until a valve opens enabling water flow through the pipes to the sprinklers in order to extinguish the fire. The
dry system prevents any water discharge onto sensitive computer equipment. As with the wet system, you create the
dry system by placing sprinklers, and then you create a system and piping to logically and physically connect the
sprinklers.
Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Creating the Dry System.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder.

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click 2 - Ceiling Fire Prot to make the view active.

Place sprinklers

2 Enter ZR, and draw a zoom region around Server Room 32.

3 Select the lower sprinkler in Office 33.

4 On the Edit toolbar, click (Copy).


Notice that a border around the selected sprinklers displays indicating the copy selection.

TIP You can also enter CO to activate the Copy tool.

Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 403


5 On the Options Bar, do the following:

■ Verify that Constrain is cleared.


■ Verify that Copy is selected.
■ Select Multiple to place multiple sprinkler copies in the ceiling.

6 Move the cursor to the upper-left corner directly above the sprinkler, and after the ceiling grid intersection
snap displays, click to specify the copy start point.

7 Move the cursor to the right along the same horizontal ceiling grid and into the Server Room 32, and after
the ceiling grid intersection snap displays, click to specify the copy end point for the first sprinkler.

8 Move the cursor diagonally to the upper-left, and after the intersection snap displays, click to specify the
copy end point for the second sprinkler.

404 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


9 Click Modify.
The sprinklers are placed in the ceiling.

TIP If you have difficulty displaying an intersection snap because of other snaps interfering, you can enter SI to
override all other snaps and display only intersection snaps. Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make
a selection. You can also turn off snaps in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps).

Next, you change the sprinkler type.

10 While pressing CTRL, select both Server Room 32 sprinklers.


11 In the Type Selector, select M_Sprinkler-Dry_Pendent-Plane_Hosted : 15mm Dry Pendent.
Next, you create the dry system to logically connect the 2 sprinklers.

Create the dry system

12 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar, click System Browser.
The System Browser opens.

13 Under Systems, Expand Unassigned to view the 2 dry sprinklers that you placed.
14 In the drawing area, while pressing CTRL, select both sprinklers.

Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 405


15 On the Options Bar, click (Create Fire Protection Dry System) to create the dry system and assign
the sprinklers to it.

Notice that after you click , the dry system is immediately created and listed in the System Browser.
The dry system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red.
Remember that this display indicates that the new system is selected. It does not indicate a pipe layout
path.

IMPORTANT The new system named Fire Protection Dry 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Fire
Protection Dry in the Piping folder. All sprinklers in the system are listed under the system connecting them.
Notice that the Default Fire Protection Dry system category no longer displays. This indicates that you have
assigned all of the dry sprinklers to a system, and the Default Fire Protection Dry system category is considered
empty.

The sprinklers are logically connected. Next, you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system.

Confirm and validate the system

16 In the System Browser, expand Piping ➤ Fire Protection Dry.


17 Right-click the Fire Protection Dry 1 system category, and click Select
The selected system displays in red.

18 Expand Fire Protection Dry 1, and for each sprinkler, right-click, and click Select.
Each selected sprinkler displays in red. In the System Browser, you can view system information including
flow, sprinkler size, and so on. You have confirmed and validated the system. Next, you create the pipe
run to physically connect the sprinklers.

Create the dry system pipe run

19 In the Project Browser, double-click 2 - Fire Prot to make it the active view.
20 Zoom in on Server Room 32.
21 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar, click Pipe.
22 In the Type Selector, select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry.
23 On the Options Bar, do the following:

■ For D: (diameter), verify that 15mm is selected.


■ Verify that Auto Connect is selected.
■ For Offset, verify that 2750.0 is specified.

24 On the Options Bar, click Options.


25 In the Layout Options dialog, for Slope Angle, enter 0.15, and click OK.
This creates a slight slope for the dry system pipe run.

26 Place the cursor outside Office 33 and over the vertical main pipe that services the wet system, and after
the intersection snap displays, click to specify the start point for the first pipe segment.

406 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


27 Draw the pipe run to the right, and connect to the lower sprinkler as shown.
Watch for the centerline and connector snaps.

28 Press ESC to exit the Draw tool.


Notice that the pipe passed over but did not connect to the upper Server Room 32 sprinkler. You can
confirm this in the 3D Fire Prot view or by checking connectivity. Next, you connect the upper sprinkler
to the pipe.

29 Select the unconnected Server Room 32 sprinkler.

30 On the Options Bar, click , and select the pipe segment above the sprinkler.

Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 407


The sprinkler connects into the pipe, and all pipe fittings are automatically added.

31 Zoom the view, and select each pipe segment to verify the slope.
Notice that the slope displays next to the slope control. You can click the slope control to change the slope
direction. To follow good design practice, the pipe is sloped toward the main for drainage purposes.
Next, you check connectivity and validate the pipe geometry.

Check connectivity and validate pipe geometry

32 In the Project Browser, under Fire Protection, expand 3D views, and double-click 3D Fire Prot.
33 Zoom in on Server Room 32.
34 Place the cursor over a pipe segment, and press TAB 3 times.
The dry system pipe run and the wet system pipe run highlight, indicating that they are connected.

35 Zoom in on the pipe to validate that the pipe geometry is as expected.


Next, you connect the fire protection system pipe run to the supply pipe.

36 Select the vertical main pipe.

37 On the Edit toolbar, click (Create Similar).


38 On the Options Bar, click Options.

408 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


39 In the Layout Options dialog, for Slope Angle, enter 0, and click OK.
This clears the slope. Notice that you did not need to verify the pipe type because Create Similar matches
the connector parameters and the type of the selected object. In this case, the pipe type and other properties
match the vertical main that you selected.

IMPORTANT When drawing pipe either by using the Pipe draw tool on the Design Bar, or by right-clicking a
connector, always verify that the pipe type is correct in the Type Selector. However, if you use the Create Similar

tool, , then all connector parameters and the type of the selected object are matched. This eliminates the
need to verify the type in the Type Selector each time you create pipe.

40 Zoom in on the supply pipe located in Stairwell 30.


41 Using the methods that you learned when consolidating branches, draw the pipe to the left and connect
it to the main as shown.
42 Check connectivity, and in the 3D view validate the pipe geometry.
You have completed the dry fire protection system.

43 In the Save As dialog, enter Creating the Dry System Training for File name, navigate to the folder
of your choice, and click Save.

In this exercise, you created the fire protection dry system that services Server Room 32. First, you placed dry system
sprinklers. Then, you created the dry system and a pipe run to logically and physically connect the sprinklers. After
the system was completed, you connected the fire protection pipe run to the supply pipe that provides water to the
fire protection system. Additionally, you confirmed the systems in the System Browser, checked pipe connectivity, and
validated the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

Modifying Pipe Diameters


In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications.
Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the
number of level 2 sprinklers.
Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Modifying Pipe Diameters.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder.

1 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities.

Define a schedule type

2 In the New Schedule dialog, do the following:

■ Under Category, select Sprinklers.


Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added.

■ Verify that Schedule building components is selected.


■ Click OK.

Define columns

3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Count, and click Add.
This adds the Count field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. Scheduled fields display
as columns in the schedule.

4 Under Available fields, select Family and Type, and click Add to add the field to the list.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 409


If you need to remove a field from the list, select it, and click Remove.

5 Select a field, and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows:

■ Count
■ Family and Type

Next, you specify how the data will be organized in the schedule.

Organize the data

6 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, do the following:

■ For Sort by, select Family and Type.


■ Verify that Ascending is selected.
■ For Then by, verify that (none) is selected.
■ Select Grand totals, and clear Itemize every instance.
■ Click OK twice.

A new view called Sprinkler Schedule opens and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project
Browser. Notice that only the data for the level 2 sprinklers displays, and that it is sorted according to
family and type. You may need to drag the column dividers to modify the column width. There is a grand
total of 68 sprinklers on level 2. You can refer to this sprinkler total as you modify the pipe diameters in
order to satisfy the design and code requirements.
Next, you tile the floor plan and 3D views.

Tile the views

7 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ 3D views, and
double-click 3D Fire Prot to make the view active.
8 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows.
This closes all windows previously opened during the current design session. Note that this option is not
available if the active view is the only open window.

9 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click 2- Fire Prot to make the view active.
10 Enter WT to tile both windows.

TIP When you tile 2 views, the active view is tiled to the left.

11 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown.

You will work mainly in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. Next, you
modify the pipe diameters.

410 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height,
or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit
MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters
and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change
of diameter, width, or height.

Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run

12 In the 2- Fire Prot view, starting at the upper-left corner of the building, draw a pick box around the entire
level 2 fire protection pipe run.

13 On the Options Bar, click .


14 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK.
This selects the entire level 2 pipe run.

15 Click in the 3D Fire Prot view to make it active, and while pressing SHIFT, select the supply pipe in the
stairwell to remove it from the selection.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 411


16 On the Options Bar, For D: (diameter), select 25mm.
All pipes and pipe fittings change to a 25mm diameter except for the supply pipe. You changed the diameter
for the pipe run because the majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and the
design specifications require a 25mm diameter for these pipes.

17 Select any pipe segment and verify the 25mm diameter on the Options Bar.
18 Place the cursor over a pipe segment, and press TAB twice.
The entire fire protection pipe run highlights, verifying that it is connected.

Next, you modify the diameter the main.

Modify the diameter of the main

19 In the 2 -Fire Prot view, draw a narrow pick box around the main pipe.

412 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


NOTE Do not include branch pipe segments. If branch segments are selected, you can SHIFT-select to remove
them from the selection.

The selected main pipe displays in red.

20 With the main selected, while pressing CTRL, draw a pick box around the horizontal main, the pipe fittings,
and the supply pipe.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 413


You want to maintain the original supply pipe diameter, so you need to exclude the supply pipe.

21 Click in a blank space in the 3D Fire Prot view to make it active.


22 In the 3D view, while pressing SHIFT, select the supply pipe to remove it from the selection.

23 On the Options Bar, for D:, select 100mm.


The diameter of the fire protection main changes.

24 In the 3D view, select the supply pipe, and on the Options Bar, verify that the diameter is 150mm.
25 Validate the pipe run geometry, especially around the pipe fittings.

414 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


Modify the diameter of branch pipes

26 Click in the 2 - Fire Prot view to make it active.


27 Enter ZR, and draw a zoom region around the lower 3 rooms in the building.

Notice that some branch pipe segments service more than 2 sprinklers. You need to change the diameters
of these segments to conform to the code requirements.

28 Select the first pipe segment that services Conference Room 31 and directly connects to the main.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 415


This pipe segment services 6 sprinklers (4 in the office and conference room, and 2 in the open space). The
specifications requires a diameter of 50mm for this pipe segment.

29 On the Options Bar, for D:, select 50mm.


The pipe diameter is modified.

30 Select the next pipe segment to the right.


This segment services 5 sprinklers.

31 On the Options Bar, for D:, select 40mm.


Next, you continue to modify the pipe branch.

32 Place the cursor over the pipe segment that connects the conference room sprinklers to the Open 2 sprinkler,
press TAB twice to highlight the pipe segments and fittings, and click to select them.
The pipe segments including the elbow and 2 tee fittings display in red. You can verify this selection in
the 3D view.

33 On the Options Bar, for D:, select 40mm to comply with the design criteria.
The rest of this pipe branch services 2 sprinklers. The 25mm pipe diameter complies with the design criteria.
Later in this exercise, you will complete the branch diameter modification. Next, you tag some of the pipes
enabling you to identify their diameters.

Tag the pipes

34 In the 2 - Fire Prot view, zoom in on the branch that you modified.
35 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category.
36 On the Options Bar, do the following:

■ Verify that Horizontal is selected.


■ Clear Leader.
■ Click Tags.

37 In the Tag dialog, under Category, for Pipes, verify that M_Pipe Size Tag is loaded.
38 Click OK.
39 Place the cursor over the left pipe segment that connects the conference room branch to the main, and
after the segment highlights, click to place the tag.
Notice that an outline of the tag displays and follows the cursor for accurate placement.

416 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed.

Next, you place a tag and include a leader line.

40 On the Options Bar, select Leader.


41 Place a tag on the supply pipe in the stairwell.

42 Click the tag to display end controls (blue dots) and horizontal controls (arrows).
43 Drag the horizontal control to the upper-left to relocate the tag.

Next, you finish modifying the pipe run diameters, and finish placing the pipe tags.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 417


Complete pipe diameter modification and tag placement

44 Using the methods that you learned in this exercise, finish modifying pipe run diameters according to the
following criteria, and finish tagging the pipes.

Sprinklers Serviced Pipe Diameter

1, 2 25mm

3 32mm

4, 5 40mm

6-10 50mm

45 In the Save As dialog, enter Modifying Pipe Diameter Training for File name, navigate to the folder
of your choice, and click Save.

In this exercise, you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. The pipe
run now complies with the design criteria. You learned the difference between pipe sizing and manually changing the
diameter of a pipe. Finally, you tagged the pipes, allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters.
In the lesson, you created a wet and a dry fire protection system consisting of sprinklers and piping. You validated rigid
pipe connections and geometry using a floor plan and the 3D view. Finally, you confirmed the logical systems using
the System Browser. This completes the Designing Fire Protection Systems lesson.
For additional practice, use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet and dry systems.
Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2.
In this tutorial, you created a wet and a dry fire protection system. Although the creation and modification methods
remained the same, each system was completely different. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical
pipe connections and creating logical systems, and sizing as opposed to manually modifying a pipe diameter. The
completed fire protection system is included in the m Completed Fire Protection System.rvt file located in the
Metric ➤ Fire Protection folder under Training Files. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection
systems. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP.

418 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems


Documenting Your
Projects 2
In this section of the tutorials, you learn to create construction documentation

in Revit MEP 2008. We wish to thank BNIM Architects, a Kansas city based

architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use

for the tutorial datasets in this section.

Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District, the Freighthouse Flats

project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new

urban luxury loft living spaces. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the

existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors, lofty

ceilings, balconies, and a roof garden. As the building is slated to receive historic

tax credits, the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. The

additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include

a 4th floor penthouse, exterior fire stairs, and north facing balconies for the 2nd

and 3rd floor units.

419
NOTE For training purposes, slight modifications to the building design have been made.

420 | Chapter 6 Documenting Your Projects


Adding Views and Sheets
to a Project 6
In this tutorial, you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse

Flats project. You learn to:

■ Create new project views, including plan, elevation, section, and detail views
■ Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans
■ Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation
effects
■ Create projects sheets that contain project views

421
Creating Views
In this lesson, you learn how to create views from a building model. You learn how to create new views from existing
views, how to create section and elevation views, and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views.

Duplicating Plan Views


In this exercise, you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the
copied views. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. You also
duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan.

Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan

Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan

Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

422 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views.rvt.

Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan


1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
2 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename.
3 In the Rename View dialog, enter Level 1 Furniture Plan, and click OK.
4 In the Project Browser, double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan.

Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan

5 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, select Level 2.


6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
7 In the Project Browser, right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename.
8 In the Rename View dialog, enter Level 2 Furniture Plan, and click OK.
9 In the Project Browser, double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan.

Duplicating Plan Views | 423


Duplicate a view and change the scale as required

10 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
11 Under Floor Plans, right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename.
12 In the Rename View dialog, enter Vicinity Plan, and click OK.
13 In the Project Browser, double-click Vicinity Plan.

14 On the View Control Bar, click the current scale, and click 1: 1000.
Next, hide the display of the elevation markers in the view.

15 Select the body of the south elevation marker.

424 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project


16 Right-click, and click Hide in view ➤ Category.
All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden.

17 Click File menu ➤ Save As.


18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.rvt.

Creating Elevation and Section Views


In this exercise, you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model.

Creating Elevation and Section Views | 425


South East elevation view

Section view

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.rvt.

Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan


1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.
2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Elevation.
3 In the Type Selector, select Elevation: Building Elevation.
4 On the Options Bar, for Scale, select1:100.
5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker.

NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry.

426 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project


Modify the elevation extents

6 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed.
7 Select and move the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of
the building.

8 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Rename and view the new elevation

9 In the Project Browser, under Elevations (Building Elevation), right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename.
10 In the Rename View dialog, enter South East, and click OK.
11 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South East.

Creating Elevation and Section Views | 427


Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan

12 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
13 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Section.
14 In the Type Selector, select Section: Building Section.
15 On the Options Bar, for Scale, select 1:100.
16 Draw a section line through the building:

■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3.

■ Move the cursor down, and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2
and 3.

Modify the section line

17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through
the building.

428 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project


18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents, and move them to just outside of the
left side of the building.

19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section
head to the section line endpoint.

20 Add a jog to the section line:

■ On the Options Bar, click Split Segment.


■ Click the midpoint of the section line, drag it to the right until it cuts through the stair, and click to
place it.

Creating Elevation and Section Views | 429


21 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

View the new section

22 In the Project Browser, expand Sections (Building Section), and double-click Section 1.
23 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium.

24 Select gridline F, select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble, and drag the top segment
of gridline F to the right.

430 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project


25 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
26 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Creating Callout Views


In this exercise, you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. To create each view, you draw a
callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of the each new callout view.

Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan

Resulting callout view - Enlarged Stair Plan

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.rvt.

Creating Callout Views | 431


Create a floor plan callout
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.
2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Callout.
3 In the Type Selector, select Floor Plan.
4 On the Options Bar, for Scale, select 1:50.
5 Draw the callout around the large stair in the center of the plan:

■ Specify a point to the upper-right of the stair.

■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair, and specify a point to complete the callout.

6 Modify the callout leader:

■ On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the callout boundary.
■ Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head, and move it to the left side of the
callout boundary.

432 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project


■ Select the middle grip, and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans, right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename.
9 In the Rename View dialog, enter Enlarged Stair Plan, and click OK.

Open the callout view

10 Double-click the callout head.


The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays.

Creating Callout Views | 433


Create a detail view callout

11 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Building Sections), double-click Section 1.


12 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Callout.
13 In the Type Selector, select Detail View: Detail.
14 On the Options Bar, for Scale, select 1:50.
15 Create the callout:

■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building, and specify a point above and to the right of the roof
overhang.

■ Move the cursor diagonally down, and specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang.

434 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project


16 Modify the callout leader as shown.

17 In the Project Browser, expand Detail Views (Details), and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename.
18 In the Rename View dialog, enter Roof Overhang Detail, and click OK.

Open the detail callout view

19 In the Project Browser, under Detail Views (Details), double-click Roof Overhang Detail.

Creating Callout Views | 435


20 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Modifying View Tag Appearance


In this exercise, you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. You change
the appearance of the section mark head, the elevation markers, and the callout head and boundary that you placed
in previous exercises.

Existing stair callout head and boundary

436 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project


Modified stair callout head and boundary

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.rvt.

Modify the section mark head


1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.
2 Click File menu ➤ Open.
3 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, open Metric\Families\Annotations, select
Custom-Section Head.rfa, and click Open.
The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays.

4 On the Design Bar, click Load into Project.


5 In the Load into Projects dialog, select the current project, clear any others, and click OK.
The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project, and can be applied to the section line.

6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags.


7 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate.
8 In the Name dialog, enter Section Head – Custom, Section Tail – Filled, and click OK.
9 In the Type Properties dialog, for Section Head, select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open, and
click OK.

10 On the floor plan, select the section line, and click .


11 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
12 For Section Tag, select Section Head - Custom, Section Tail - Filled, and click OK twice.

Modify the line weight of the section line and mark

13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.


14 In the Object Styles dialog, click the Annotation Objects tab.
15 Under Category, scroll to Section Line.

Modifying View Tag Appearance | 437


16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field, and select 3.
17 Under Category, scroll to Section Marks.
18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field, and select 2.
19 Click OK.
On the floor plan, notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line.

Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers

20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags.


21 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate.
22 In the Name dialog, enter 12.5mm Square, and click OK.
23 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics:

■ For Shape, select Square.


■ For Line Weight, select 3.
■ For Dimensions ➤ Width, enter 12.5 mm.
■ Click OK.

24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing, and on the Options Bar, click .
25 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
26 In the Type Properties dialog, for Elevation Tag, select 12.5mm Square.
27 Click OK twice.
On the floor plan, notice the square elevation markers that display.

Modify the callout head

28 Click File menu ➤ Open.


29 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, open Metric\Families\Annotations, select
Custom-Callout Head.rfa, and click Open.
The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays.

30 On the Design Bar, click Load into Project.


31 In the Load into Projects dialog, select the current project, clear all others, and click OK.
32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags.

438 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project


33 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate.
34 In the Name dialog, enter , Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radiusand click OK.
35 In the Type Properties dialog:

■ For Callout Head, select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head.


■ For Corner Radius, enter 6 mm.
■ Click OK.

36 In the drawing, select the callout, and on the Options Bar, click .
37 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
38 In the Type Properties dialog, for Callout Tag, select , Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius.
39 Click OK twice.
40 Press ESC.
The custom callout head displays on the floor plan.

Modify the callout boundary

41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.


42 In the Objects Styles dialog, click the Annotation Objects tab.
43 Under Category, scroll down to Callout Boundary.
44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field, and select 7.
45 For Line Pattern, select Dash.
46 Under Category, expand Callout Boundary.
47 Select Callout Leader Line.
48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field, and select 4.
49 Click OK.
The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan.

Modifying View Tag Appearance | 439


50 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views


In this lesson, you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. You learn to
create view templates, view regions, filters, masking regions, and visual overrides.

Creating a View Template


In this exercise, you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. To accomplish this, you create a
view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings, and apply it to multiple elevation views. View
templates provide and easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings.

Presentation view

Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG.rvt.

Set a crop region for the view


1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, and double-click East.

2 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view.
The crop region displays as red, and features blue triangular grips and break marks.

440 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project


3 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown.

4 On the Design Bar, click Modify to hide the crop region grips and display it as black.
5 On the View Toolbar, click Zoom to Fit.

6 On the Project Browser, under Elevations, right-click East, and click Properties.
7 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, clear Crop Region Visible.
8 Click OK.

Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing

9 On the View Control bar, click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium.


10 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.
11 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog, under Visibility, clear Entourage.
12 Click the Annotation Categories tab.
13 Under Visibility, clear:

■ Callouts
■ Elevations
■ Grids
■ Levels
■ Sections

Creating a View Template | 441


14 Click OK.
Callouts, elevation markers, grids, levels, and section lines are now hidden in the view.

15 On the View Control bar, click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On.

16 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, right-click East, and click Create View Template From View.
17 In the New View Template dialog, enter Black and White Presentation Elevation, and click OK.
18 In the View Templates dialog, click OK.
19 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North.

20 In the Project Browser, right-click North, and click Apply View Template.
21 In the Select View Template dialog, select Black and White Presentation Elevation, click Apply, and click
OK.
The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view.

442 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project


22 Click File menu ➤ Save As.
23 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.rvt.

View Range and Plan Regions


In this exercise, you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building
Penthouse and Roof Plan. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan,
and the exterior area on the south side of the building, as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the
views.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.rvt.

Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan


1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Penthouse.

2 In the Project Browser, select Penthouse, right-click, and click Properties.


3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, for View Range, click Edit.
4 In the View Range dialog:

■ Under Primary Range, for Bottom, select Level Below (Level 4).
■ Under View Depth, for Level, select Level Below (Level 4).
■ Click OK twice.

NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view.

View Range and Plan Regions | 443


Adjust the view range of the Roof plan

5 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Roof Plan.

6 In the Project Browser, select Roof Plan, right-click, and click Properties.
7 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, for View Range, click Edit.
8 In the View Range dialog:

■ Under Primary Range, for Bottom, select Level 4.


■ Under View Depth, for Level, select Level 4.
■ Click OK twice.

444 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project


Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building

9 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Plan Region.

NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan
Region.

10 On the Design Bar, click Lines.

11 On the Options Bar, click (Rectangle).


12 Sketch a plan region:

■ In the left corner of the building, select the left endpoint of the outer wall.
■ Move you cursor diagonally, and select the endpoint the gridline shown below.

13 On the Design Bar, click Region Property.


14 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, for View Range, click Edit.
15 In the View Range dialog:

■ Under Primary Range, for Bottom, select Unlimited.


■ Under View Depth, for Level, select Unlimited.
■ Click OK twice.

16 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.


17 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

View Range and Plan Regions | 445


18 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Using Filters to Control Visibility


In this exercise, you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. You use a filter to
quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters, in this case, the fire rating of the walls. After
you apply the filter, the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.rvt.

1 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.
3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Filters tab.
4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click Edit/New.

5 In the Filters dialog, under Filters, click (New).


6 In the Filter Name dialog, enter Rated Walls, and click OK.
7 In the Filters dialog, under Categories, select Walls.
8 Under Filter Rules:

■ For Filter by, select Fire Rating.

446 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project


■ Select contains.
■ Enter Hr.

9 Click OK.
10 On the Filter tab, click Add.
11 Select Rated Walls, and click OK.
12 On the Filter tab, for Rated Walls, under Projection/Surface, click Override under Patterns.
13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog, for Color, click No Override.
14 In the Color dialog, under Basic colors, select the red color, and click OK.
15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog, for Pattern, select Solid Fill.
16 Click OK.
17 Using the same method, apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well.
18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog, click OK.

19 Remove the filter:

■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.


■ On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog, click Remove, and click OK.

The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the
drawing at any time, but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well.

20 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Masking Portions of a View


In this exercise, you obscure or ''wipe out'' geometry in portions of a view. To accomplish this, you use masking regions
that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide.

Masking Portions of a View | 447


Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view

Unit plan view with upper corners masked

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.rvt.

1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
2 Select Copy of Level 1, right-click, and click Rename.
3 In the Rename View dialog, enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1, and click OK.
4 On the View Control Bar, click Show Crop Region.
5 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit.
6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left, as shown.

448 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project


7 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit.
8 Select the crop region, and adjust the view again until it displays as shown.

9 On the View Control Bar, click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region.

Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown

10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Masking Region.


11 In the Type Selector, select Invisible lines.

NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region.

12 On the Options Bar, click (Rectangle).


13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown.

Masking Portions of a View | 449


14 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan.

16 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Working with Visual Overrides


In this exercise, you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan, and apply
different visual overrides to create presentation effects. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the
display of certain elements on the presentation plan.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.rvt.

1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1, and click Duplicate
View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing.

450 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project


NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view.

2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1, right-click, and click Rename.
3 In the Rename View dialog, enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1, and click OK.
4 On the View Control Bar, click the current scale, and click 1: 50.

Create poche for walls

5 Select the diagonal bottom wall, right-click, and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category.
6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog, under Visibility, select Walls.
7 Under Cut, click in the Patterns field, and click Override.
8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog, under Pattern Overrides, for Color, click No Override.
9 On the left side of the Color dialog, click black, and click OK.
10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog, for Pattern, select Solid fill.
11 Click OK twice.

Working with Visual Overrides | 451


Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view.

12 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.
14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog, under Visibility, clear Floors.
15 Click the Annotation Categories tab.
16 Under Visibility, clear Grids, and click OK.

Hide elements in the view by category

17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown.

452 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project


18 Right-click, and click Hide in View ➤ Category.

19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown.

Working with Visual Overrides | 453


20 Right-click, and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category.
By using the previous method to make the selection, the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category
of the object (Furniture) selected by default.

21 Under Projection/Surface, under Lines, click Override.


22 In the Line Graphics dialog, for Color, click No Override.
23 In the Color dialog, click a purple color, and click OK.
24 In the Line Graphics dialog, for Pattern, select Dash.
25 Click OK twice.

Modify visibility and graphics by element

26 On the floor plan, select the sofa, right-click, and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element.
27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog, click Projection Lines.
28 For Color, click By Category Override.
29 In the Color dialog, select a bright green color, and click OK twice.

454 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project


30 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Reveal hidden elements in a view

31 On the View Control Bar, click .


The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. The hidden crop
region is also revealed.

32 Select one of the lamps, right-click, and click Unhide in view ➤ Category.

33 On the View Control Bar, click .

Working with Visual Overrides | 455


34 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project


In this lesson, you learn how to create sheets within a Revit MEP project, how to add views to the sheets, and how to
make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet.

Creating Drawing Sheets


In this exercise, you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks.

Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats- Creating Sheets.rvt.

Create a project sheet


1 On View tab of the Design Bar, click Sheet.

TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar, right-click, and click View.

2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, select A0 metric, and click OK.

456 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project


A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet.

The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. The text fields
in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters
with the appropriate text fields.

NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every
time the project file is saved.

3 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all).


The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 - Unnamed.

Change the sheet name and number

4 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the title block.

5 When the title block highlights, on the Options Bar, click (Properties).
6 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data:

■ For Sheet Name, enter Site Plan.


■ For Sheet Number, enter A101.

Creating Drawing Sheets | 457


■ Click OK.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block.
Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project
Browser. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101.

Display additional project information in the sheet title block

9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information.


10 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Project Address, click Edit.
11 In the Edit Text dialog, enter the following address:

■ 123 Main Street


■ Anytown, MA 12345

12 Click OK.
13 In the Element Properties dialog, continue to add project information:

■ For Project Issue Date, enter 15 May, 2007.


■ For Project Status, enter For Approval.
■ For Client Name, enter J. Smith.
■ For Project Name, enter Freighthouse Flats.
■ For Project Number, enter 2007-1.

14 Click OK.
The new project information displays in the titleblock.

458 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project


Create a floor plan sheet

15 In the Project Browser, right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet.


16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, select A0 metric, and click OK.
17 In the Project Browser, select the new sheet name, right-click, and click Rename.
18 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter Floor Plan, and click OK.

Create additional sheets

19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps, create the following new project sheets:

■ A103 - Layout Plan


■ A104 - Elevations
■ A105 - Elevations
■ A106 - Elevations
■ A107 - Sections
■ A108 - Stairs

In the following exercise, you add views to these sheets.

20 Click File menu ➤ Save As.


21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.rvt, and click Save.

Adding Views to Sheets


In this exercise, you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise.
Dataset

■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating
Sheets_in_progress.rvt.

Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan
1 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A102 - Floor Plan.
2 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, select Level 1, and drag it to the sheet.
3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet, and
click to place the view.
The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet.

4 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Adding Views to Sheets | 459


The red border around the view no longer displays.

Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet

5 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A104 - Elevations.


6 In the Project Browser, under Elevations (Building Elevation), drag East to the upper-right corner of the
sheet, and click to place it.

7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet, align it with the East elevation, and click
to place it.
8 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

460 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project


Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet

9 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A107 - Sections.


10 Under Sections (Building Sections), drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet, and click
to place it.
11 Under Detail Views (Detail), drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the
sheet, and click to place it.
12 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Change the scale of the detail view

13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet, and on the Options Bar, click .
14 In the Element Properties dialog, for View Scale, select 1:5, and click OK.
15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view.
Notice the title bar also needs to be resized.

16 Select title bar, and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view.

Adding Views to Sheets | 461


NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar, zoom in to the grip, move the cursor over it,
and press TAB until it highlights.

Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views

17 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A108 - Stairs.


18 Under Floor Plans, drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet, and click to place it.
19 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

View updated annotation on referenced views

20 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.


21 Zoom to the stair callout.
Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet.

462 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project


22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers, and notice they also reference
the correct sheet numbers.
23 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View


In this exercise, you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its
views. In order to do this, you must first activate the view on the sheet, and then make changes and deactivate the
view.

Dataset

■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating
Sheets_in_progress.rvt.

Change the roof elevation


1 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A107 - Sections.

Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 463


2 Select the building section view, right-click, and click Activate View.
3 At the right end of the Roof level line, zoom in to the name and elevation of the level.
4 Double-click the Roof elevation height, enter 16700 mm, and press ENTER.
5 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

6 Right-click, and click Deactivate View.


7 In the Project Browser, under Elevations (Building Elevation), double-click North.
Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated.

8 Click File menu ➤ Save.

464 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project


Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet
In this exercise, you create a title sheet for your drawing set. After you create the sheet, you create a perspective view
of the building and place it on the sheet. You modify the view to hide the view title, as it is not necessary to display it
on the title sheet.
Dataset

■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating
Sheets_in_progress.rvt.

Create a new sheet


1 In the Project Browser, right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet.
2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, select A0 metric, and click OK.
3 In the Project Browser, select the new sheet name, right-click, and click Properties.
4 In the Element Properties dialog:

■ For Sheet Number, enter T.


■ For Sheet Name, enter Title Sheet.
■ Click OK.

Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet

5 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.


6 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Camera.
7 Place the camera as shown.

The camera view displays.

Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 465


8 On the Options Bar, click .
9 In the Element Properties dialog:

■ Under Extents, select Far Clip Active.


■ For Far Clip Offset, enter100000 mm.
■ Under Camera, for Eye Elevation, enter 18000 mm
■ For Target Elevation, enter 1500 mm.
■ Click OK.

10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building.
11 On the View Control Bar, click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on.
12 On the View Control Bar, click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region.

13 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click T - Title Sheet.


14 Under 3D Views, drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet, and click to place it in the center of the sheet.

466 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project


15 With the view selected, on the Options Bar, click Size.
16 In the Crop Region dialog:

■ Under Change, select Scale (locked proportions).


■ Under Model Crop Size, for Height, enter 635 mm.
■ Click Apply, and then click OK.

17 Reposition the view on the title sheet.

Remove the title bar on the view

18 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

19 Select the view on the sheet, and on the Options Bar, click .
20 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
21 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate.
22 In the Name dialog, enter Viewport/no title mark, and click OK.
23 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Show title, select No.
24 Click OK twice.
25 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
The title bar no longer displays on the sheet.

Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 467


26 Click File menu ➤ Save, and close the exercise file.

468 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project


Tagging and Scheduling
7
In this tutorial, you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans,

such as doors and windows. You also learn to create different types of schedules,

such as room and window schedules, in your Revit MEP 2008 projects.

469
Tagging Objects
In this lesson, you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit MEP. You learn how to

■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan


■ Tag doors and windows
■ Modify tag placement and mark text
■ Tag other objects, such as furniture

Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms


In this exercise, you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. Because of the open style floor plan, you
need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. The Room command with the Tag on placement
option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command.
Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects.rvt.

Add room separations


1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1.
2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan.

3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar, click Room Separation.
Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms.

NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Room
and Area.

470 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling


4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left, move the cursor to the right, and click the
opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area
of the drawing), as shown:

5 Use the same method to create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right,
as shown:

6 Use the same method to create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the
living area.

Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 471


7 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Load room tag annotation family

8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.


9 In the Tags dialog, click Load.
10 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room
Tag.rfa.
11 In the Tags dialog, click OK.

Tag rooms sequentially

12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar, click Room.
13 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on placement is selected.
14 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view, and click to place the room and tag.
The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged, and the rectangle contains the room tag.

15 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the room tag.
The room tag number displays in blue, indicating that it can be edited.

472 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling


16 Zoom in on the tag number, click it, enter U18-1, and press ENTER.

17 Click the room text label, enter Entry, and press ENTER.

18 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


19 Place another room and tag:

■ On the Design Bar, click Room.


■ Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged.
■ Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the
one that displays at the tip of the cursor.
■ Click to place the new room and tag.

Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 473


NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. Sequential letters are also
supported.

20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


21 Click the room text label, enter Kitchen, and press ENTER.
22 Use the same method to place rooms and tags, and edit the tags as shown (Toilet, Dining, and Living):

Hide the room separations

23 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

474 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling


24 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog, Model Categories tab, expand Lines, clear Room Separation,
and click OK.

Tag rooms on upper level

25 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2.
26 On the Design Bar, click Room Tag.
The rooms are already placed, but they need to be tagged.

27 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair), and moving clockwise, click to place a room tag in each of
the 5 rooms.
28 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

29 Click File menu ➤ Save As.


30 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt.

Tagging Doors and Windows


In this exercise, you learn how to place door and window tags. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how
to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows.
Dataset
Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging
Objects_in_progress.rvt.

Tag Level 1 doors


1 If necessary, in the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1.

Tagging Doors and Windows | 475


2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category.
3 On the Options Bar, clear Leader.
4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan:

■ Entry door
■ Kitchen pantry door
■ Pocket door in toilet
■ Closet door in dining room
■ Living room door

5 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


6 Click the door tag for the entry door, enter U18-1, and press ENTER.

7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left, and on the Options Bar, click (Properties).
8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identify Data, for Mark, enter U18-2, and click OK.

476 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling


9 Using one of the methods you just learned, rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room
tags.

10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right, and drag it down to center it in the doorway.

11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.

Tag Level 2 doors

12 In the Project Browser, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2.


13 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged.
14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, under Category, select Door Tags, and click OK.

Tagging Doors and Windows | 477


15 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway.
16 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown:

Place window tags

17 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

18 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.


19 In the Tags dialog, click Load.
20 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window
Tag.rfa.
21 Click OK.
22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged.
23 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, select Window, and click OK.

478 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling


24 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags.

25 Under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2.


26 On the View toolbar, Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit to see the entire drawing.
27 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged.
28 Select Window Tags, and click OK.
Window tags are placed in the Level 2 plan view.

29 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Tagging Other Objects


In this exercise, you learn how to tag furniture objects, and modify the tag placement and display.
Dataset
Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging
Objects_in_progress.rvt.

Add furniture tags


1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1.
2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category.
3 On the Options Bar, select Leader.
4 Select a dining room chair.
5 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes to load a tag.
6 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture
Tag.rfa.
7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags.

Tagging Other Objects | 479


8 Select the furniture in the living room.

9 Click Modify.

Modify tag placement

10 Zoom to the dining table.


Notice that the chair and table tags overlap.

11 Select the tag for the table, and drag it above the chair tag.
12 Click the elbow control, and drag it up to form an angled leader.

13 Optionally, modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs.
14 Click Modify.
15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1), and on the Options Bar, clear Leader.

480 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling


16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table, and on the Design Bar, click Modify.

Tag furniture on Level 2

17 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2.
18 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged, select M_Furniture tag : Standard, and click OK.
All furniture in the floor plan is tagged.

Change tag style

19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.

20 On the Options Bar, click (Filter Selection).

Tagging Other Objects | 481


21 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Furniture Tags, and click OK.
22 In the Type Selector, select Furniture Tag: Boxed, and click Modify.

23 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams


In this lesson, you learn to add schedules. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule
and room color diagram. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within
a schedule.

Creating a Window Schedule


In this exercise, you create a window schedule for the building model shown below.

482 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling


You begin by creating a window instance schedule; that is, a schedule that lists every window in the building.

You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building
model.

Next, you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Finally, you change the window instance schedule to
a type schedule, in which windows are listed by window type.

Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color
Diagrams.rvt.

Creating a Window Schedule | 483


Create a window schedule
1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities.

TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View.

3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Windows.


4 For Name, enter Building Window Schedule, and click OK.

Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule

5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab.


6 Under Available fields, select Comments and click Add.
The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields.

7 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule:

■ Count
■ Height
■ Level
■ Type Mark
■ Width

8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking
Move Up or Move Down.

9 Click OK.

484 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling


A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model.

Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model

10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark, and on the Options Bar, click Show.
If no open view shows the selected element, you are prompted to open one that does.

11 If the confirmation dialog displays, click OK to search through relevant views of the building model.
The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the
building model.

12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog, click Close.

NOTE By clicking Show, you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window.
However, in large building models with many views, this can be a time-consuming process.

13 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule to
redisplay the window instance schedule.

Group and sort the window schedule by type mark

14 In the drawing area, right-click the schedule, and click View Properties.
15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit.
16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, for Sort by, select Type Mark, and click OK
twice.

Creating a Window Schedule | 485


The window schedule is displayed, sorted by type mark.

Change type mark from the schedule

17 In the window schedule, change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A, and press ENTER.
18 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type.
The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted.

Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule

19 Right-click on the schedule, and click View Properties.


20 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit.
21 In the Schedule Properties dialog, clear Itemize every instance.
22 Click OK twice.
The window type schedule is displayed.

23 Change the Type Mark for the other window types, so that the types are sequentially named from A to H,
as shown:

24 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2.

486 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling


25 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed.

26 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color
Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule


In this lesson, you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. In this case,
you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head, jamb, and sill conditions for a
window can be found. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and, unlike shared parameters, you
cannot use them to tag objects.

Dataset
Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color
Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.

Create project parameters


1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule.
2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters.
3 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add to create the new parameter.
4 In the Parameter Properties dialog, specify the following:

■ Under Categories, select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category.
■ Under Parameter Data, for Name, enter Head Detail.
■ For Group parameter under, select Construction.
■ For Discipline, select Type.

5 Click OK.
The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog.

6 Use the same method to create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail.
7 In the Parameter Properties dialog, click OK.

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 487


Add project parameters to the schedule

8 In the Project Browser, right-click Building Window Schedule, and click Properties.
9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit.
10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select the following fields, and
click Add to add them to the schedule in order:

■ Head Detail
■ Jamb Detail
■ Sill Detail

11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list, so that they are listed before Comments.

12 Click OK twice.

Group headers in the schedule

13 In the schedule, select Head Detail, Jamb Detail, and Sill Detail.

TIP To select all 3 headers, click in the Head Detail header, and while pressing the left mouse button, move the
cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers.

14 On the Options Bar, click Group.


15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule, enter Window Details.

488 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling


16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. For example, under Type Mark
A, for Head Detail, enter 1/A107; for Jamb Detail, enter 2/A107; and for Sill Detail, enter 3/A107.

17 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter


In this exercise, you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit.
You then hide the column used for the filter, and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans.
Dataset
Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color
Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.

View Level 1 of the building


1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1.

Create a new door schedule for Unit 18

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities.


3 In the New Schedule dialog, specify the following:

■ Under Category, select Doors.


■ Under Name, enter Unit 18 - Door Schedule.
■ Verify Schedule building components is selected.
■ Verify the Phase is Phase 1.

4 Click OK.
5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab.
6 Under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:

■ Count
■ Family and Type
■ Head Height
■ Sill Height
■ Width
■ Mark

7 Click the Filter tab, and specify the following values for Filter by:

■ Select Mark in the first field.


■ Select contains in the second field.
■ Enter U18 in the third field.

This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with, and produces a schedule
that includes only the doors in Unit 18.

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 489


8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab, and specify the following options:

■ For Sort by, select Family and Type.


■ Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row).

9 Click the Formatting tab.


10 Under Fields, select Mark.
11 Under Field formatting, select Hidden Field, and click OK.
The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. The Mark field is used to filter the
entries in the schedule, but is not included as a column in the schedule.

Place the schedule on a sheet

12 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A102 - Unit 18.
13 In the Project Browser, click Unit 18 - Door Schedule, and drag it to the sheet.

14 Click to place the schedule in the upper-left corner of the sheet.


15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule.

490 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling


Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet

17 Select the door schedule on the sheet.


18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to
expand the column width.
The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions.

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


20 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Creating a Room Schedule


In this exercise, you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule
for the public spaces in the building.

NOTE In some cases in this tutorial, partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes.

Dataset
Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color
Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.

Create a room schedule


1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.
Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan.

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities.

TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View.

3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Rooms, and click OK.

Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule

4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Number, and click Add.
The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields.

5 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule in order:

■ Name
■ Level
■ Area

6 Click the Appearance tab.


7 To the right of Header text, select Bold to display the schedule headers in bold font.
8 Click OK.

Creating a Room Schedule | 491


NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. The bold header
is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet.

Add new rooms to the schedule

9 On the Options Bar, next to Rows, click New.


A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. The room Number is U17-9, and the Level and Area
values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan.

10 Edit the number to be 101.


11 Using the same method, add 5 more rooms.
The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially, 101-106.

12 Edit the room names in the schedule:

■ In the schedule, for room 101, for Name, enter Building Entry, and press ENTER.
■ For 102, enter Storage, and press ENTER.
■ For 103, enter Corridor, and press ENTER.
■ For 104, select Corridor.
■ For 105, select Storage.

492 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling


■ For 106, enter Stair, and press ENTER.

13 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Scheduling Rooms from a Program List


In this exercise, you add room separation lines, place rooms from a program list, and modify room names. You also
change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan.
Dataset
Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color
Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.

Specify style for room separation lines


1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.
2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.
3 Change the display of room separation lines:

■ In the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog, under Visibility/Graphics Overrides,
expand Lines.
■ For Room Separation, under Projection/Surface, click the Lines field.
■ In the Lines field, click Override.
■ In the Line Graphics dialog, click the Color field.
■ Under Custom colors, click the bright green swatch, and click OK.
■ For Weight, select 9, and click OK.

4 Click OK.

Add room separation lines

5 Zoom in to the center of the building.


6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar, click Room Separation.

Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 493


7 Click to add 2 room separation lines to the right side of the drawing in the corridor. First, draw the horizontal
line.

Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line.

8 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Place rooms from a program list

9 On the Design Bar, click Room.

494 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling


Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing.

10 On the Options Bar, for Room, select 101 Building Entry.


11 Click to place the room in the newly-defined entry area (lower-right).

12 On the Options Bar, for Room, select 102 Storage.


13 For Offset, enter 2400 mm.

Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 495


14 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry.

15 Use the same method to place the following rooms, as shown:

■ Place 103 in the space above room 101.


■ Place 104 in the space to the left of 103.
■ Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen.
■ Place 106 in the space with the stairs.

16 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Change the room bounding behavior of walls

17 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, double-click Room Schedule.


Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. These values will change after you change
the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas.

18 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1, and zoom in to the Corridor.

496 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling


19 While pressing CTRL, select the 3 small walls (in the 2 storage areas), as shown:

20 On the Options Bar, click (Properties).


21 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, clear Room Bounding, and click OK.
22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
23 In the Project Browser, double-click Room Schedule.
Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding
behavior of the walls.

Create key schedule

24 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities.


25 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Rooms.
26 Select Schedule keys, and click OK.
27 In the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, while pressing CTRL, select Base Finish, Floor Finish,
and Wall Finish, and click Add.
28 Click OK to create the new room style schedule.
The Room Style Schedule displays without data.

29 On the Options Bar, click New to add a new row.


30 For Key Name, enter Units, and for all 3 finishes, enter As Selected.

Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 497


31 Using the same method, add 2 more key names: Service and Public.

32 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, right-click Room Schedule, and click Properties.
33 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit.
34 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available fields, click Room Style, and click Add.
35 Click OK twice.
36 In the Project Browser, double-click Room Schedule.
The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule.

37 Under U17-8, for Room Style, select Units.

Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms

38 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.


39 On the View toolbar, Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit.
40 Draw a selection box around floor plan.

41 On the Options Bar, click (Filter Selection).


42 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Rooms, and click OK.
All rooms are selected in the floor plan.

498 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling


43 On the Options Bar, click (Properties).
44 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Room Style, select Units, and click OK.
45 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, double-click Room Schedule.
Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1.

46 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106:

■ For rooms 101, 103, 104, and 106, select Public.


■ For rooms 102 and 105, select Service.

All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. The Room Style specification will be used later to
determine color fill in a room color diagram.

47 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Creating a Room Color Diagram


In this exercise, you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan), and apply it to the
Level 1 view. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend.

Dataset
Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color
Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.

Create a room color scheme


1 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes.

3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog, click (Duplicate).


4 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Room Type, and click OK.
5 For Title, enter Room Type.
6 For Color, select Room Style.
7 Since you are creating a new color scheme, at the warning prompt, click OK.
8 Click OK.
9 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Level 1, and click Properties.
10 In the Element Properties dialog, click the Color Scheme field.
11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog, select Room Type, and click OK.

Creating a Room Color Diagram | 499


12 For Visibility/Graphics Overrides, click Edit.
13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog, expand Lines, and clear Room Separation, and click OK twice.

Add a color scheme legend

14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Color Scheme Legend.
A legend displays at the tip of the cursor.

15 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend.
16 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Change the fill colors applied to the rooms

17 In the drawing area, select the color legend.


18 On the Options Bar, click Edit Color Scheme.
19 In the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none), clear Visible.
20 In the Options panel at the bottom of the dialog, for Display Color Fill in, select Foreground.
21 In the second row of the table (Public), click the value in the Color column.
22 In the Color dialog, under Custom color, select blue, and click OK.

500 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling


23 Use the same method to change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray respectively.

24 Click OK.

Specify properties for the legend colors and title

25 With the legend still selected, on the Options Bar, click (Properties).
26 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
27 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Swatch Width, enter 25 mm.
28 Under Title Text, for Size, enter 5 mm, and click OK twice.

Creating a Room Color Diagram | 501


29 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

30 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Creating a Material Takeoff


In this exercise, you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. You learn to change the roof
family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. You then add formulas to the material
takeoff to produce cost estimates.
Dataset
Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color
Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.

Create a material takeoff


1 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D}.

2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building.

502 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling


3 While pressing CTRL, select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse.

4 In the Type Selector, select Basic Roof : Wood Joist - Insulation on Plywood Deck - EPDM.
5 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff.
7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog, under Category, select Roofs, and click OK.
8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog, under Available fields, click Family and Type,
and click Add.
9 Using the same method, add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields.
10 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab, and specify the following values:

■ For Sort by, select Family and Type.


■ For Then by, select Material: Description.
■ Select Grand totals.
■ Clear Itemize every instance.

11 Click the Formatting tab, and specify the following values:

■ Under Fields, select Material: Area.


■ Under Field formatting, select Calculate totals.

12 Click OK.
The Roof Materials Takeoff Schedule displays.

13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information.

Creating a Material Takeoff | 503


TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text.

Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost

14 In the Project Browser, right-click Roof Material Takeoff, and click Properties.
15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit.
16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog, under Available fields, click Material: Cost, and click Add.
17 Click Calculated Value.
18 In the Calculated Value dialog, for Name, enter Estimated Cost.
19 For Formula, enter Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2).
The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so the cost estimate value can be
calculated.

20 Click OK.
21 Click the Formatting tab, and under Fields, click Estimated Cost.
22 For Field formatting, select Calculate totals, and click OK twice.
23 In the Material Takeoff, for the Material: Cost field, enter the following values:

Material: Description Value

EPDM 16

Plywood 13.40

Rigid Insulation 50.80

Wood Joist 5.35

The Estimated cost is calculated.

24 In the Project Browser, right-click Roof Material Takeoff, and click Properties.

504 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling


25 In the Element Properties dialog, for Formatting, click Edit.
26 On the Formatting tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog, under Fields, click Estimated Cost.
27 Click Field Format, and specify the following:

■ Clear Use default settings.


■ For Units, select Fixed.
■ For Rounding, select 2 decimal places.

28 Click OK 3 times.

29 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Scheduling Shared Parameters


In this lesson, you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined
instance and type parameters, either within family components or within the project template. These shared parameters
can be added to any family, regardless of category, and are defined and stored in an external file, ensuring consistency
across families and projects. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit MEP multi-category schedules.
An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling
and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation
and covers the process of setting up shared parameters, adding the shared parameters to a family, creating a generic
tag to tag the family, and reporting the shared parameters.
In this lesson, you create an exiting plan for the building. You draw a travel path line, tag the line, and schedule the
total distance of each path. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this
specific information.

Creating a Shared Parameter File


In this exercise, you create a shared parameter file.
Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters.rvt.

Scheduling Shared Parameters | 505


1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1.

2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters.


3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, click Create.
4 In the left pane of the Save As dialog, click Training Files, for File name, enter
OfficeStandardsParameters.txt, and click Save.

NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects.

5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, under Groups, click New.


6 In the New Parameter Group dialog, for Name, enter Exiting, and click OK.
7 Under Parameters, click New.
8 In the Parameter Properties dialog, for Name, enter Path ID, and click OK.
9 Under Parameters, click New.
10 In the Parameter Properties dialog, for Name, enter Travel Distance, for Type of Parameter, select Length,
and click OK.
11 Click OK.
12 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared
Parameters_in_progress.rvt.

Adding Shared Parameters to a Family


In this exercise, you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. You then create a generic tag to tag the
family.
Dataset
Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared
Parameters_in_progress.rvt.

1 Click File menu ➤ Open.

506 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling


2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog, Click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel
Line.rfa.

3 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.


The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category.

4 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add.


5 In the Parameter Properties dialog, select Shared parameter, and click Select.
6 In the Shared Parameters dialog, verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected, and
click OK.
7 For Group parameter under, select Constraints.
8 Select Instance, and click OK.
9 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add.
10 Use the same method to add Travel Distance as a shared parameter, group it under Dimensions, and select
Instance.
11 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, for Travel Distance Formula, following the equals symbol
(=), enter Length.

12 Click Apply, and click OK.


13 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects.
If you have multiple projects open, the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project,
otherwise the family loads into the current project.

14 If necessary, in the Load into Projects dialog, select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress.rvt,


and click OK.

Create a tag using shared parameters

15 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol.

Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 507


16 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag.rft.
17 Select Generic Tag.rft, and click Open.
18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes.

19 On the Design Bar, click Label.


20 Click the intersection of the reference planes in the drawing window to display the Select Parameter dialog.
21 In the Select Parameter dialog, click Add.
22 In the Parameter Properties dialog, click Select.
23 In the Shared Parameters dialog, under Parameters, select Travel Distance, and click OK 3 times.

24 On the Design Bar, click Label.


25 Click above the intersection of the reference planes, and use the same method to select the Path ID
parameter.

26 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

508 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling


27 In the drawing window, select Path ID, and move it down, so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance.

28 Select the Note in the upper-left area of the drawing window, and press DELETE.

29 Click File ➤ Save As.


30 In the Save As dialog, for File Name, enter M_Travel Distance Tag.rfa, and click Save.
31 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects.
32 On the Load into Projects dialog, verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress.rvt is
selected, and click OK.
33 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Placing,Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters


In this exercise, you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. You then tag the travel lines
and give them a path ID. After the lines are tagged, you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting
plan for each path ID.
Dataset
Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared
Parameters_in_progress.rvt.

Create Level 1 exiting travel path


1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Exiting Plan - Level 1.

Placing,Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 509


2 Zoom in to the corridor.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Component.


4 On the Options Bar, select Chain.
5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown.

6 Move the cursor to the right, and click in the center of the corridor, above the exterior door as shown.

510 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling


7 Move the cursor down, through the door, and click outside of the building.

8 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category.
10 On the Options Bar, clear Leader.
11 Select each of the travel path lines.
12 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

13 While pressing CTRL, select the 2 dashed travel lines, and click (Properties).
14 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Path ID, enter 1-1, and click OK.

Create Level 2 exiting travel path

15 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double click Exiting Plan - Level 2.
16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Component.
17 On the Options Bar, verify that Chain is selected.

Placing,Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 511


18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan, move the cursor near
the right corner, and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown.

19 Move the cursor up through the door, and click.

20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


21 On the Design Bar, click Component.
22 Click at the center starting point, move the cursor to the left, and click above the door to the stair.

512 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling


23 Move the cursor down, and click in the stair.

24 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category.
26 Select each of the travel path lines.
27 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

28 While pressing CTRL, select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path, and click (Properties).
29 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Path ID, enter 2-1, and click OK.
30 Use the same method to specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2.

Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan

31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities.


32 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, verify that <Multi-Category> is selected.
33 For Name, enter Level 1 Exit Distance, and click OK.

Placing,Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 513


34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, while pressing CTRL, select Path
ID and Travel Distance, and click Add.
35 Click the Filter tab.
36 For Filter by, in the first field, select Path ID; in the second field, select contains; and in the third field,
enter 1-.
37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab.
38 For Sort by, select Path ID.
39 Clear Itemize every instance.
40 Click the Formatting tab.
41 Under Fields, select Travel Distance, and under Field formatting, select Calculate Totals.
42 Click OK.
The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays.

43 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, right-click Level 1 Exit Distance, and click Duplicate
View ➤ Duplicate.
44 In the Project Browser, right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance, and click Rename.
45 In the Rename View dialog, enter Level 2 Exit Distance, and click OK.
46 In the Project Browser, right-click Level 2 Exit Distance, and click Properties.
47 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Filter, click Edit.
48 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Filter by, in the third field, enter 2-, and click OK twice.
The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays.

49 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes


In this lesson, you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit MEP components.

Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions


In this exercise, you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly
descriptions of the scheduled walls.
Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format.rvt.

Create a wall schedule


1 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities.

TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click the Design Bar, and click View.

514 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling


2 In the New Schedules dialog, under Categories, select Walls, and click OK.
3 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab.
4 Under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:

■ Area
■ Volume
■ Width
■ Length
■ Assembly Code
■ Assembly Description

5 Click OK to complete the schedule.

Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project

6 In the Project Browser, expand Families\Walls\Basic Wall, right-click Generic - 152 mm, and click Properties.
7 In the Type Properties dialog, for Assembly Code, click the Value field, and click the browse button.
8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog, expand C - Interiors\C10 - Interior Construction\C1010 -
Partitions\C1010100 - Fixed Partitions, click C1010145 - Partitions - Drywall w/ Metal Stud, and click OK
twice.

Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 515


9 In the schedule, expand the Assembly Description column to see the description.

10 Close the exercise file.

Exporting Project Information with ODBC


In this lesson, you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible
database.

Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access


In this exercise, you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. The process that
you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database.
Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format.rvt.

1 On the File menu, click Export ➤ ODBC Database.


2 In the Select Data Source dialog, click the File Data Source tab.
3 Click New.
4 In the Create New Data Source dialog, select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb), and click Next.
5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN, and click Next.
6 Click Finish.
7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog, under Database, click Create.
8 In the New Database dialog, under Database Name, enter Revit_Project.mdb for Database Name.
9 Under Directories, select a location for the database file, and click OK to create the database.
10 When the confirmation displays, click OK in the dialog.
11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog, click OK.
12 Click OK in the remaining dialogs, and open the database in Microsoft Access.
Revit MEP creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the
element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. Additionally, tables
that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types.

516 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling


A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements, so that each table of elements includes an Id
column. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. For
example, instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type, and some
instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in.
In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category, a table is also created for each key schedule
in a project, as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit MEP exports. The exported columns
are the same as the columns in the key schedule, in addition to the Id column. Each key schedule gives
elements in its category a new parameter, which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule.
These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element.
One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly
Code. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. The table of types includes
an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table.

13 Close the exercise file.

Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 517


518 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling
Annotating and
Dimensioning 8
In this tutorial, you learn how to change the base elevation of a project, and how

to annotate and dimension your Revit MEP 2008 projects.

519
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project
In this lesson, you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project, as the base elevation of most projects is rarely
at 0 mm. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project,
or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. You accomplish this in Revit MEP by
defining levels as either project or shared levels.

Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project

520 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning


Relocating a Project
In this exercise, you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. After you define the building levels
as shared and relocate the project, the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.

Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt.

Relocating a Project | 521


Define Level 1 as a shared level
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South.
Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. The levels in the project are not shared, so changing the height
Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project.

2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red.

3 On the Options Bar, click (Properties).


4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated, you
must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. If you did that now, the parameter for all the levels in
the project would change. However, to better demonstrate how shared levels work, only the Elevation Base
parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time, and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1.

5 In the Type Properties dialog:

■ Click Duplicate.
■ In the Name dialog, enter8 mm Head - Shared Elevation, and click OK.
■ Under Constraints, for Elevation Base, select Shared.

6 Click OK twice.

Relocate the project

7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project.


8 Select the Level 1 line.
By selecting the Level 1 line, you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project.

9 Move the cursor above the elevation line, enter 10000 mm, and press ENTER.
By entering 10000 mm in this step, you specify the new location of the project.

10 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit.


The south elevation is displayed. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. The elevation of the other levels
remains the same.

522 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning


Define the remaining project levels as shared

11 Select the Loft level line.


12 In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation.
13 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration.

14 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North.


The changes in elevation have propagated to this view, as well as other views of the building model.

Relocating a Project | 523


15 Define the remaining levels as shared:

■ Press and hold CTRL, and select Levels 2-4, the Penthouse level, and the Roof Plan level.
■ In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation.
■ On the Design Bar, click Modify.
All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation.

524 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning


16 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name.
17 Proceed to the next lesson, “Dimensioning” on page 525.

Dimensioning
In this lesson, you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. In Revit
MEP, there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions display automatically when
you create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created, except when you sketch profiles
to complete families. In this case, permanent dimensions are created automatically, although you must turn on their
visibility to view them.

Creating Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit MEP to dimension and space planter
boxes on the north side of the building. You place linear, multi-segmented, radial, and angular dimensions, and learn
to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model.

Linear and multi-segmented dimensions

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt

Place an overall linear dimension


1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

Dimensioning | 525
2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension.
The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. By default, dimensions are aligned, snap to
wall centerlines, and are created by selecting individual reference points.

3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view, and when a green dashed line displays
along the left side of the curtain, select it.

4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view, and when a green dashed line
displays along the right side of the curtain wall, select it.

526 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning


5 Move the cursor above the view, and click to place the dimension.

6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension.
The lock displays as locked, indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls
without first unlocking the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained
in this way.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Place a multi-segmented dimension

8 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.

Creating Dimensions | 527


9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step, and move the cursor over the left
endpoint of the first planter to the right.
10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays, and select it.
11 Using the same method, select the right endpoint of the planter.

12
13 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall Faces.
14 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select its left exterior face.

15 Move the cursor to the right, and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters.
16 After you select the reference points on the final planter, select the right side of the curtain wall.
17 Move the cursor up, above the plan view of the building, but below the first dimension that you placed,
and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.

Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances

18 With the multi-segmented dimension selected, click to make all the dimension segments equal and
reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.

528 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning


19 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

Place a radial dimension with a Typ. suffix

20 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.

21 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.


22 On the Options Bar:

■ Click (Radial).
■ For Prefer, select Wall faces.

23 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights, and select it.
24 Move the cursor outside the wall, and specify a point to place the dimension.
25 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.

26 Select the radial dimension.


27 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right.

Creating Dimensions | 529


28 With the dimension still selected, on the Options Bar, click (Properties).
29 In the Element Properties dialog, for Suffix, enter Typ., and click OK.
30 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

Place an angular dimension

31 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension.


33 On the Options Bar:

■ Click (Angular).
■ For Prefer, verify Wall faces is selected.

34 Select the horizontal line.

530 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning


This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building.

35 Select the left exterior face of the planter.

36 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc, and click to place the dimension.
37 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

38 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions” on page 531.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions


In this exercise, you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor
plan of the building. When you dimension the wall, you select only the wall, instead of the wall and each individual
opening reference point. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls
with multiple openings.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 531


Automatic wall dimension

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt

Open the Level 3 floor plan view


1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3.
You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows.

Select automatic dimensioning options

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension.


3 On the Options Bar:

■ For Prefer, select Wall centerlines.


■ For Pick, select Entire Walls.
■ Click Options.

4 In the Automatic Dimension Options dialog:

■ Under Select References, select Openings, and select Widths.


■ Click OK.
These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings, and that the opening widths are
referenced in the overall dimension string.

532 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning


Place the dimension

5 Select the bottom exterior wall.

6 Move the cursor down below the plan view, and click to place the automatic dimension string.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

8 Proceed to the next exercise, “Controlling Witness Lines” on page 533.

Controlling Witness Lines


In this exercise, you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions, and learn how to change
the location of witness lines after you place dimensions.
When you place dimensions, you specify their origin on the Options Bar. However, in some cases, you may need to
override their settings on an instance basis. For example, for a multi-segmented dimension, you may want to locate
the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall, where the witness lines referring to interior walls
would be located on the centerline of each wall.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt

Override default dimension witness lines


1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension.

Controlling Witness Lines | 533


3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension.
4 On the Options Bar:

■ For Prefer, verify Wall centerlines is selected.


■ For Pick, select Individual References.

5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter.

6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights, and select it.

7 Using the same method, select the right edge of the planter, move the cursor down, and click to place the
dimension.

534 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning


8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension.
9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted, and select it.

10 Using the same method, select the bottom right endpoint.


11 Move the cursor down, and specify a point to place the dimension.

Controlling Witness Lines | 535


Dimension the partition walls to center lines

12 On the Basics tab, click Dimension.


13 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall centerlines.
14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan, and when the wall centerline
highlights, select it.

15 Moving the cursor to the right, select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls, and click
to place the dimension.
16 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall

17 Select the dimension that you just placed, and zoom in on the right end of the dimension.
18 Press and hold SHIFT, select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark, and drag the
dimension down the wall.

536 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning


19 Release SHIFT, select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap.

20 Release SHIFT, and click the blue middle grip until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition
wall.

21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan, and using the same methods, create a witness line
gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall.
22 On the Basics tab, click Modify.
23 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions” on
page 537.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions


In this exercise, you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify
its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. After you create the new family type, you change the

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 537


dimension tick mark, text font, and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office
standards.

Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt

Duplicate an existing dimension type


1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4, and select the lower dimension.

2 Click (Properties).
3 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
4 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate.
5 In the Name dialog, enter Office Standard, and click OK.

Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type

6 In the Type Properties dialog:

■ Under Graphics, for Tick Mark, select Arrow 30 Degree.


■ Under Text, for Text Size, enter 3.2 mm.
■ For Text Font, select CityBlueprint.

538 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning


NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. If CityBlueprint
does not display in the list, select another font.

■ Click OK twice.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify.


The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type.

8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select the bottom dimension.

9 In the Type Selector, select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard.


10 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 539


11 Using the same method, select the angular dimension on the planter, create a new angular dimension type,
and modify it to use the office standard parameters.

12 Proceed to the next lesson, “Creating Text Annotation” on page 540.

Creating Text Annotation


In this lesson, you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You create a new office standard text note
type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. You learn how to change the text font and size of text
notes, and how to add leaders to the text notes.

540 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning


Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan
In this exercise, you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt

Add a text note


1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to planter near grid line 5.

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Text.

3 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (None).


4 Move the cursor above grid line 4, but below the upper dimension string, and click and drag to create a
text box.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 541


5 In the text box, enter EXISTING BUILDING.

Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type

6 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

7 Select the text box, and click .


8 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New.
9 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate.
10 In the Name dialog box, enter 6 mm Arial Notes, and click OK.
11 Under Text, for Text Size, enter 6 mm, and click OK.
12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Arc Leaders, and click OK.
You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. If so, select
and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box.

542 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning


Create a text box with leaders

13 On the Design Bar, click Text.


14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4, and enter Planting Bed.
15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

16 Select the Planting Bed text box.


17 On the Options Bar:

■ Click (Add Right Arc Leader).


A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 543


■ Click (Add Left Arc Leader).
Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box.

Reposition the leaders

18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter.
19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter.
20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders, and click .
22 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
23 In the Type Properties dialog:

■ Click Rename.
■ In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Standard Notes, and click OK.
■ Under Text, for Text font, select CityBlueprint.
■ Under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow 30 Degree.
■ Click OK twice.

24 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

544 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning


Add another note using the Standard Note type

25 On the Design Bar, click Text.


26 In the Type Selector, select Text: Standard Notes.

27 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (Arc).


28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3.

29 Move the cursor up and to the right, over the Planting Bed text.
30 When green dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text, click to place the text box.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 545


31 Click in the text box, and enter 457 mm Conc. Wall.

32 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name.
33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

546 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning


Detailing
9
In this tutorial, you learn how to create details in Revit MEP 2008. You can detail

directly in a view of the building information model, using detail components to

represent materials like lumber, plywood, and metal studs. These components

display at the required scale. For a detail that you do not want to associate with

the model, like a standard door header condition, you use a separate drafting view

in which to create the detail. The "drafted" detail that you create is not

parametrically linked to the building model.

547
Creating a Detail from a Building Model
In this lesson, you detail the roof overhang of a project building.

In order to detail from the building model, you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. You define
that view by creating a callout view within a section view. In the callout view, you trace over the building model
geometry, add detail components, and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes.

Detailing the View


In this exercise, you detail the view of the roof edge. You load detail components, and use the model as an underlay
for the detail. After you add components, you add notes and dimensions to the detail view.
The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. They are also view specific, which
means that all detail components, as well as detail lines, region objects, and insulation objects, that you add to the
view are visible only in this view.
Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt.

548 | Chapter 9 Detailing


Display a detail view
1 In the upper left corner of the building model, double-click the detail callout head.
The roof overhang detail displays.

2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.


3 In the Element Properties dialog, for Graphics ➤ Display Model, select As underlay, and click OK.

Load and place a detail component

4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Detail Component.


5 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a Detail Items family.
6 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal.rfa,
and click Open.
7 In the drawing area, click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. Exact location is
not important.

8 Delete the component.


You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail.

Place a repeating detail

9 On the Design Bar, click Repeating Detail.

10 On the Options Bar, click .


11 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
12 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate.
13 In the Name dialog, enter Corrugated Metal Siding, and click OK.
14 In the Type Properties dialog, for Pattern ➤ Detail, select Corrugated Metal.
15 For Spacing, enter 406.5mm.
16 Click OK twice.
17 In the drawing area, click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point.

Detailing the View | 549


18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. Specify a point high enough so the
siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang.

NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents.

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


20 Move the component end point:

■ Select the corrugated metal component, and on the Edit toolbar, click (Move).
■ Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point.
■ Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point.

■ Click Modify.

21 Select the original instance of the corrugated metal component, and press DELETE.

Add lumber detail components

22 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component.


23 On the Options Bar, click Load.

550 | Chapter 9 Detailing


24 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div
06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section.rfa, and click Open.
25 In the Type Selector, verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected.
26 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration.

TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood.

Because you still have several components to load, you load them as a group from a single file.

Load components as a group

27 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group.


28 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog, click Training Files, navigate to Metric\Families\Detail
Components\m_Roof Edge Components.rvt, and click Open.
29 In the Duplicate Types dialog, click OK.
30 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component.
31 In the Type Selector, select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal.
32 To properly orient the component, press SPACEBAR 3 times.
33 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point.

34 In the Type Selector, select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal, and place it in the
detail view as shown.

Detailing the View | 551


Add wallboard detail component

35 In the Type Selector, select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm.


36 On the Options Bar, select Chain.
37 Place the wallboard component as shown.

38 Click Modify.
39 Select the horizontal segment, click the Flip instance arrows, and click Modify.
The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist.

NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification.

Add insulation

40 On the Design Bar, click Insulation.

552 | Chapter 9 Detailing


41 On the Options Bar:

■ For Width, enter 140mm.


■ For Offset, select to near side.

42 Place 2 segments of insulation, as shown.

43 Click Modify.
44 Move the upper segment:

■ Select the upper segment of insulation, and on the Edit toolbar, click (Move).
■ Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point.
■ Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point.

■ Click Modify.

Add lumber components

45 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component.


46 In the Type Selector, select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal.
47 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown.

Detailing the View | 553


48 In the Type Selector, select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm.
49 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component, as shown.

Add rigid insulation

50 In the Type Selector, select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm.


51 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed, and lock the component.

52 Click Modify.
53 Proceed to the next exercise, “Adding Detail Lines” on page 554.

Adding Detail Lines


In this exercise, you add lines to your detail. Like detail components, they are view specific, meaning they display only
in this view.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt.

Add detail lines


1 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines.
2 In the Type Selector, select Thin Lines.
3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of
the 50 x 200mm component.

4 Click Modify.
5 Select the vertical plywood component; drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component.

554 | Chapter 9 Detailing


Add offset lines

6 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines.


7 In the Type Selector, select Thin Lines.
8 On the Options Bar:

■ Click (Pick Lines).


■ For Offset, enter 10mm, and press ENTER.

9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist, as shown.
Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result.

10 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines.


11 In the Type Selector, select Medium Lines.
12 On the Options Bar:

■ Click (Pick Lines).


■ For Offset, enter 10mm, and press ENTER.

13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component, as shown.

Adding Detail Lines | 555


Draw detail lines

14 On the Options Bar, click (Draw), and clear Chain.


15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component, as shown.

16 On the Options Bar, select Chain, and draw the detail lines as shown.

17 Draw a horizontal line as shown.

18 In the Type Selector, select Thin Lines.


19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut; draw the detail lines
as shown.

556 | Chapter 9 Detailing


20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line.

Modify display properties

21 In the drawing area, select the Penthouse level line, right-click, and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.
22 In the Project Browser, under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail), right-click Roof Overhang Detail, and click
Properties.
23 In the Element Properties dialog, for Graphics ➤ Display Model, select Do not display, and click OK.
When you turn the display model off, the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in
this view. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added.

24 On the View Control Bar, click ➤ Hide Crop Region.

Add a vapor barrier

25 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines.


26 In the Type Selector, select Vapor Barrier.
27 On the Options Bar:

■ Click (Pick Lines).


■ For Offset, enter 10mm, and press ENTER.

28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard, and then select the interior edge of
the horizontal segment.

Adding Detail Lines | 557


29 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component.
30 In the Type Selector, select M_Break Line.
31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail.

TIP To rotate the break line as you place it, press SPACEBAR as necessary.

32 Click Modify.
33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask, select the
break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it.
34 Proceed to the next exercise, “Adding Text Notes” on page 558.

Adding Text Notes


In this exercise, you add text notes to complete the detail.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt.

Add text notes to the detail


1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Text.

558 | Chapter 9 Detailing


2 On the Options Bar, click (Arc) to create an arced leader.
3 Add the leaders and notes as shown:

■ Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow.


■ Click again to specify the location of the text box.
■ Enter the text.
■ Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command.

Add a dimension to the detail

4 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.


5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component, and click the left edge of the corrugated metal
component.

6 Click Modify.

7 Select the dimension line, and click (Properties).


8 In the Element Properties dialog, for Text ➤ Suffix, enter Typ., and click OK.

Adding Text Notes | 559


9 Click File menu ➤ Save, and save the exercise file.
10 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Detail Components” on page 560.

Creating Detail Components


In this exercise, you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text
notes.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt.

Create a duplicate drawing


1 In the Project Browser, under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail), click Roof Overhang Detail, right-click,
and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing.
2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail, right-click, and click Rename.
3 In the Rename View dialog, enter Roof Overhang Detail - Keynotes, and click OK.

Remove text notes

4 In the drawing area, select a text note, right-click, click Select All Instances, and press DELETE.

Convert detail lines to components

5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail; on the Options Bar, click (Filter Selection).
6 In the Filter dialog, clear Detail Items and Dimensions, and click OK.
The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote.

7 Click Modify.
8 Zoom in to the metal coping; while pressing CTRL, select all the coping linework.
You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment, pressing TAB, and selecting the chain.

560 | Chapter 9 Detailing


9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard.
10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.
11 In the left pane of the New dialog, click Training Files, navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail
Component.rft, and click Open.
12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard.
13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework.

14 Click Modify.
15 Use a window to select all linework; in the Type Selector, select Medium Lines.
16 Click Modify.
17 Click File menu ➤ Save As.
18 In the Save As dialog, navigate to your preferred location; for File name, enter Roof Edge, and click Save.

Add components to the detail

19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Load into Projects.
The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail, and the component can be placed in the
detail.

NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail - Keynotes view is not the open view, double-click it in the Project Browser.

20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Detail Component.


21 To place the component, click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping.
22 Click Modify.
23 Using a window, select the coping.
While pressing SHIFT, deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected.

24 On the Options Bar, click .


25 In the Filter dialog, clear Detail Items, and click OK.
The original linework remains selected.

Creating Detail Components | 561


26 Press DELETE.
The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing.

27 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component.


28 On the Options Bar, click Load.
29 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, navigate to Metric\Families\Detail
Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge.rfa, and click Open.
30 In the drawing area, click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component.
31 Using the same method used previously, delete the underlying linework.
32 Proceed to the next exercise, “Adding Keynotes” on page 562.

Adding Keynotes
In this exercise, you place keynotes on objects, and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated
with them.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt.

Add keynotes to components


1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Keynote ➤ Element.
2 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project.
3 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote
Tag.rfa, and click Open.
4 Add the tag:

■ In the drawing area, select the rigid insulation as the object to tag.
■ Click to place the leader arm.
■ Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag.
■ In the Keynotes dialog, navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210.B5, 63mm Rigid Insulation, and
click OK.

562 | Chapter 9 Detailing


5 Tag additional components:

■ For the plywood decking, use keynote 06160.D11, 19mm Plywood.


■ For the metal coping, use keynote 07645.C1, Roof Edge4.

6 Click Modify.

Assign keynote parameter to a component

7 In the drawing area, select the metal fascia with drip edge, and click (Properties).
8 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
9 In the Type Properties dialog, for Identity Data ➤ Keynote, click in the Value column.
10 In the Keynotes dialog, navigate to 07645.F1, FasciaProfile_1.
11 Click OK 3 times.
12 On the Design Bar, click Keynote ➤ Element.
13 Tag components:

■ Tag the metal fascia with drip edge.


Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties, the keynote is
automatically read when you place the tag.

■ For the 50 x 300, use keynote 06110.I1.


■ For the 50 x 200, use keynote 06110.G1.
■ For the 50 x 150, use keynote 06110.F1.
■ For the 19mm Plywood Siding, use keynote 06160.D11.
■ For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard, use keynote 09250.D1.

Adding Keynotes | 563


14 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component.
15 In the Type Selector, select Corrugated Metal.
16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating
component.
You do this in order to keynote the component; a repeating detail cannot be keynoted.

17 Keynote the component, using keynote 07460.A8, 22mm Corrugated Steel - 20 Ga.
18 Save the file.
19 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Line-based Detail Components” on page 564.

Creating Line-based Detail Components


In this exercise, you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt.

Create a detail component


1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.
2 In the left pane of the New dialog, click Training Files, navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail
Component line based.rft, and click Open.
3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Lines.
4 In the Type Selector, select Medium Lines.
5 In the drawing area, select the left end point of the reference line, and select the right end point.
6 Lock the line, and click Modify.
7 Click File menu ➤ Save As.
8 In the Save As dialog, navigate to your preferred location; for File name, enter m_Medium Line Detail
Component, and click Save.
9 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects.

Convert detail lines to components

10 In the drawing area, select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown.

564 | Chapter 9 Detailing


11 Press DELETE.
12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Detail Component.
The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote.

13 In the Type Selector, select Medium Line Detail Component.


14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line.
15 Click Modify.

16 Select the component, and click (Properties).


17 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
18 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate.
19 In the Name dialog, enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel.
20 Click OK 3 times.

Load line-based detail components

21 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component.


22 On the Options Bar, click Load.
23 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components.
24 While pressing CTRL, select m_Hidden Line Detail Component, m_Invisible Line Detail Component, and
m_Light Line Detail Component, and click Open.
25 Next, you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light, invisible, and hidden) used in
the view. You add the components to the project and keynote them.

Add light line components

26 Zoom to the roof overhang.


27 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component.
28 In the Type Selector, select m_Light Line Detail Component.
29 In the drawing area, click the end points at the top of the roof.
30 Click Modify.

31 Select the component, and click .


32 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
33 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate.
34 In the Name dialog, enter EPDM Membrane, and click OK.
35 In the Type Properties dialog, for Identity Data ➤ Keynote, click in the Value column.
36 In the Keynotes dialog, navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530.A1, Single-Ply Membrane Roofing.
37 Click OK 3 times.

Creating Line-based Detail Components | 565


38 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component.
39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang.

40 Click Modify.

41 Select the component just added, and click .


42 Using the same method used previously, name the component 50 x 200 Framing, and assign it keynote
06110.G1.
43 Zoom to the repeating component.
44 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component.
45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail, and click the lower end at the break line.
46 Click Modify.

47 Select the component, and click .


48 Using the same method used previously, name the component Air Barrier, and assign it keynote 07260.A5.

49 With the component selected, on the Edit toolbar, click (Move).


50 Move the air barrier to the right, against the 3/4" plywood.

Add a vapor barrier component

51 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component.


52 In the Type Selector, select m_Hidden Line Detail Component.
53 On the Options Bar, select Chain.
54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the
vapor barrier.

566 | Chapter 9 Detailing


55 Click Modify.
56 Delete both dashed detail lines, leaving the detail component lines.

57 Select the vertical hidden line component, and click .


58 Using the method used previously, name the component Vapor Barrier, and assign it keynote 07260.A4.

Add keynotes

59 Zoom to the drawing extents.


60 On the Design Bar, click Keynote ➤ Element.
61 In the drawing area, add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane, Air Barrier, 50 x 200 Framing, and Vapor
Barrier.

Creating Line-based Detail Components | 567


Create an invisible line component

62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component.rfa.


63 In the drawing area, select the component; in the Type Selector, select Invisible Lines.
64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component.rfa.
65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Load into Projects.
66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Detail Component.
67 In the drawing area, draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation.

68 Select the component, and click .


69 Using the method used previously, name the component Batt Insul., and assign it keynote 07210.A4.
70 In the drawing area, add a keynote for the component.
71 Save the file.
72 Proceed to the next exercise, “Modifying a Keynote Database” on page 568.

Modifying a Keynote Database


In this exercise, you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. You are then able to
assign the keynote to the component in the drawing.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt.

Add information to the text file


1 In Windows Explorer, navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC
2008\Training\Metric, and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes.txt.
The database file opens in a text editor.

2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit:

■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460.A9, and press ENTER.
■ Enter 07463.A1, and press TAB.
■ Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit, and press TAB.
■ Enter 07460.

3 In the text editor, click File menu ➤ Save, and close the text editor.

568 | Chapter 9 Detailing


Update keynote settings

4 In Revit MEP, click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting.


5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog, under Keynote Table, click Browse.
6 In the Select Keynote File dialog, navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes.txt, and click Open.
7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog, under Path Type, select Absolute, and click OK.

Work with keynotes

8 On the Design Bar, click Keynote ➤ Element.


9 In the drawing area, select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang); click to place the leader,
and click to place the note.
10 In the Keynotes dialog, navigate to 07463.A1, and click OK.
11 Click Modify.
12 Apply various keynote styles:

■ In the drawing area, select all the keynotes.


■ In the Type Selector, select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number.
Each keynote displays as a simple number.

■ Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text.


The descriptive text for each keynote displays.

■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type.

13 Click Modify.
14 Save the file.

Creating a Drafted Detail


In this lesson, you learn how to create a drafted detail. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly
based on building model geometry. These details do not update with changes to the building model, as there is no
parametric linkage to any building model components.
You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. You
can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit MEP or by importing details from an existing detail library.
After you create a drafting view, you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet.

Creating a Drafted Detail | 569


Importing a Detail into a Drafting View
In this exercise, you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. The detail that you import
is in DWG format.
Dataset
Use the dataset you used in a previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt.

Create a new drafting view


1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View.
2 In the New Drafting View dialog, for Scale, select 1 : 5, and click OK.

Import a complete detail in DWG format

3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats.


4 In the Import/Link dialog:

■ In the left pane, click Training Files.


■ Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail.dwg.
■ For Layer/Level Colors, select Black and white.
■ For Positioning ➤ Automatically place, select Center-to-center.
■ Click Open.

5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail.


The detail is imported as an import symbol.

6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail), right-click Drafting 1, and click
Rename.
7 In the Rename View dialog, enter EPDM Metal Coping, and click OK.
8 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Reference Callout” on page 570.

Creating a Reference Callout


In this exercise, you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that
you previously imported.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt.

Create the callout view


1 In the Project Browser, under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail), double-click Roof Overhang Detail to
open it in the drawing area.
2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Callout.
3 On the Options Bar, select Reference other view, and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping.

570 | Chapter 9 Detailing


4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping.

5 Click Modify.
6 Select the callout, and use the callout grips to move the callout head.

Modify detail view properties

7 In the Project Browser, right-click EPDM Metal Coping, and click Properties.
8 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
9 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename.
10 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Detail - No Reference, and click OK.
11 In the Type Properties dialog, for Graphics ➤ Reference Label, delete the existing value.
12 Click OK twice.
The callout head no longer displays a reference label.

Display the reference view

13 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and double-click the callout.


The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays.

Creating a Reference Callout | 571


Add the drafting view to a sheet

14 In the Project Browser, under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all), double-click A105 - Elev./Sect./Det.
15 Under Drafting Views (Detail - No Reference), drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet.
16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view.
17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail.
The callout is updated with the sheet information.

18 Save the file.


19 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Detail in the Drafting View” on page 572

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View


In this exercise, you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. There is no existing DWG file for this door
detail. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the
product, so you use Revit MEP tools to draft the detail.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt.

Create a drafting view


1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View.
2 In the New Drafting View dialog, for Name, enter Header @ Sliding Door, and click OK.
3 On the View Control Bar, verify that the scale is 1 : 5.

572 | Chapter 9 Detailing


Add a detail component

4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Detail Component.


5 In the Type Selector, select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal.
6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown.
Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it.

Create a filled region

7 On the Design Bar, click Filled Region.


You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board.

8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Region Properties.


9 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
10 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate.
11 In the Name dialog, enter Gyp. Board, and click OK.

12 In the Type Properties dialog, for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern, click .


13 In the Fill Patterns dialog, for Name, select Gypsum-Plaster.
14 Click OK 3 times.
15 Draw the region:

■ On the Options Bar, click .


■ Select the lower left corner of the 2x6 lumber as the start point.
■ Draw a rectangle as shown.

16 Select the left edge of the region, select the width dimension, and enter 20.5mm.
17 Click Modify.
18 While pressing CTRL, select the left and bottom edges of the region.
19 In the Type Selector, select Wide Lines.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 573


20 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Mirror the region

21 Select the filled region, and on the Edit toolbar, click (Mirror).

22 On the Options Bar, click (Draw).


23 Draw the mirror line:

■ Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point.


■ Move the cursor up, and click above the top of the region as the end point.

24 Select the mirrored region, and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150.

574 | Chapter 9 Detailing


25 Click Modify.

Add wood filled regions

26 On the Design Bar, click Filled Region.


27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Region Properties.
28 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
29 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate.
30 In the Name dialog, enter Wood - Finish, and click OK.

31 In the Type Properties dialog, for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern, click .


32 In the Fill Patterns dialog, for Name, select Wood - Finish.
33 Click OK 3 times.
34 Draw the region:

■ On the Options Bar, click .


■ Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point.
■ Draw a rectangle as shown; verify that the thickness is 19mm.

35 Select all the linework for the wood region; in the Type Selector, select Medium Lines.
36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150:

■ On the Tools toolbar, click (Align).


■ Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150, and select the right edge of the wood region.

37 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 575


38 On the Design Bar, click Filled Region.
39 In the Type Selector, select Medium Lines.

40 On the Options Bar, click .


41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region, sketch the new region as shown; verify that the width is
19mm and the height is 63.5mm.

42 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Add a reference plane

43 On the Design Bar, click Ref Plane.


44 On the Options Bar:

■ Click (Pick).
■ For Offset, enter 6mm, and press ENTER.

45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it.
You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it.

46 On the Tools toolbar, click (Align).

576 | Chapter 9 Detailing


47 Click the reference plane, and click the bottom of the gypsum board region.
48 Click Modify.

Add a door panel

49 On the Design Bar, click Filled Region.


50 On the Options Bar:

■ Click (Pick Lines).


■ For Offset, enter 10mm, and press ENTER.

51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region.


52 On the Options Bar:

■ Click (Draw).
■ For Offset, enter 0, and press ENTER.
■ Select Chain.

53 Draw the door panel outline:

■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line.


■ Move the cursor left 25mm, and click to select the point.
■ Move the cursor down 305mm, and click to select the point.
■ Move the cursor right 25mm, and click to select the point.

54 On the Tools toolbar, click (Trim/Extend).


55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch, and select the bottom horizontal line.
56 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 577


Add mounting/sliding hardware

57 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines.


58 In the Type Selector, select Medium Lines.
59 On the Options Bar:

■ Click (Pick Lines).


■ For Offset, enter 3mm, and press ENTER.

60 Select the left, top, and right edges of the door panel region.
61 Click Modify.
62 Select the left detail line, select the height dimension, enter 76.2mm, and press ENTER.
63 Repeat for the right detail line.

Add mounting/sliding hardware

64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Detail Component.


65 On the Options Bar, click Load.
66 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div
05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side.rfa, and click Open.
67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown.

578 | Chapter 9 Detailing


TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation.

68 Click Modify.
69 Select the bolt; drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line.

70 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component.


71 On the Options Bar, click Load.
72 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div
05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side.rfa, and click Open.
73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150.

NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail; use the images as
a guide.

74 Select the expansion bolt; drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the
50 x 150.

Add detail lines

75 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines.


76 In the Type Selector, select Wide Lines.
77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 579


78 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines.
79 In the Type Selector, select Thin Lines.

80 On the Options Bar, click .


81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown.

82 Select the rectangle, and on the Edit toolbar, click (Mirror).


83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection.
84 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines.

85 On the Options Bar, click .


86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown.

580 | Chapter 9 Detailing


87 Click Modify.
88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region; drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles
as shown.

89 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines.


90 In the Type Selector, select Medium Lines.
91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left, as shown.
Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 581


92 Select the line, and on the Edit toolbar, click (Mirror).
93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection.

94 Select the mirrored line on the right, select the length dimension, enter 3mm, and press ENTER.
95 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines.
96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line, draw a line up to the height of the other detail line.

97 On the Options Bar, click .


98 Click the end of the detail line on the left, and click to place the arc as shown.

582 | Chapter 9 Detailing


99 Click Modify.

Add two break lines

100 Zoom to the drawing extents.


101 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component.
102 In the Type Selector, select M_Break Line.
103 Add two break lines as shown.

TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements.

Add dimensions

104 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.


105 In the drawing area, select the left edge of the horizontal wood region, and select the right edge of the
adjoining vertical region.
106 Click to place the dimension, and click Modify.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 583


107 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.
108 In the Type Selector, select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2.5mm Arial.
109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown, and click Modify.

110 Select the dimension line; using the Drag Text grip, drag the text for the smaller dimension.

Add text notes to complete the detail

111 On the Design Bar, click Text.

112 In the Options Bar, click to create an arced leader.


113 In the drawing area, select the gypsum board region on the left, and click to place the text.
114 Enter Gyp. Board, and click Modify.

115 Select the note, and on the Options Bar, click (Add Right Arc Leader).
116 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region.

584 | Chapter 9 Detailing


117 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown.

118 On the Design Bar, click Modify to end the command.


119 Save the file.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 585


586 | Chapter 9 Detailing
Finishing the Sheets
10
In this tutorial, you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project

documentation, including:

■ Creating a note block containing typical construction notes


■ Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter
selections
■ Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction:
annotation legends and building component legends
■ Tracking and documenting revisions in the project
■ Importing resources from other applications, such as images and text into
project sheets

587
Using Note Blocks
In this lesson, you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building.

Creating a Note Block


In this exercise, you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the notes text. The
note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family.
Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats- Finishing-Sheets.rvt.

Load a generic annotation family


1 In the Project Browser, expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click East.

2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Symbol.


3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project.
4 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet
Keynote - Hexagon.rfa.
5 On the Options Bar, for Number of Leaders, enter 1.
6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


8 Drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door.

588 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets


9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown:

Create annotation marks for items requiring notes

10 With the tag selected, on the Options Bar, click (Properties).


11 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Text, enter Seal existing doors and insulate,
and click OK.

12 On the Edit toolbar, click (Copy).


13 Select the tag, and click above the tag to place a copy.

Creating a Note Block | 589


14 With the copy selected, on the Options Bar, click (Properties).
15 For Text, enter Repair existing door surround. Contact Historic Preservation District official
for specific requirements.
16 For Tag, enter B.
17 Click OK.
18 Use the same method to make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building.

19 On the toolbar, click (Mirror), and on the Options Bar, clear Copy.
20 Select the tag on the left, and click to create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward
the building, as shown:

NOTE To create a vertical mirror image, position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays,
and click.

590 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets


21 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
22 Optionally, using the table as a reference, and moving counter-clockwise, continue tagging the building
as shown in the following illustration:

Tag Text

A Seal existing doors and insulate.

B Repair existing door surround. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements.

C Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required.

D Clean and repair existing stone trim as required.

E Remove all existing windows. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation.

F Clean exterior brick wall. Tuckpoint as required.

G Clean existing concrete loading dock. Repair as required.

H Saw cut existing brick wall. Clean cut and repair wall as required.

Create, format, and place a note block on a sheet

23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block.


24 In the New Note Block dialog, for Note block name, enter Exterior Construction Notes, and click OK.
25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog:

■ On the Fields tab, under Available fields, select Tag, and click Add.
■ Select Text, and click Add.
■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Tag.

Creating a Note Block | 591


■ On the Formatting tab, for Heading, enter Mark, and for Alignment, select Center.
■ On the Appearance tab, For Header text, verify Arial in the first field, enter 6 mm in the second field,
and select Bold.

26 Click OK.
The Exterior Construction Notes block displays.

27 In the column header (text), enter Description.


28 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A103 - Elevations.
29 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, select Exterior Construction Notes, and drag it to the
sheet.

30 Click to place the block in the upper-left corner of the sheet, and drag the right column control to expand
the column to display the note text.
31 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
32 Zoom in to see the note block.

33 Click File menu ➤ Save As.


34 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt, and click Save.

592 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets


Using Drawing Lists
In this lesson, you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the
project.

Creating a Drawing List


In this exercise, you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-
Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt.

1 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click T - Title Sheet.

2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List.


3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog:

■ On the Fields tab, under Available fields, select Sheet Number, and click Add.
■ Select Sheet Name, and click Add.
■ On the Filter tab, for Filter by, in the first field, select Sheet Number, in the second field, select does
not equal, and in the third field, enter T.
■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Sheet Number.

4 Click OK.
The drawing list displays.

5 In the list title field, enter Sheet Index.


6 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click T - Title Sheet.
7 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, select Sheet Index, and drag it to the sheet.

Using Drawing Lists | 593


8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower-right corner, and expand the right column to accommodate the
text.

9 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


10 Zoom in to the drawing list.

11 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Using Legends
Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. The two
most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component
legends.
Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers and door tags that are paired with text that
identifies them. On construction documents, annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends.
Building component legends list and identify components such as walls, windows, doors, and door frames. On
construction documents, building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule, door frame
schedule, and so on).

NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit MEP
building model, and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block.

Creating a Symbol Legend


In this exercise, you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it using a text type you create by duplicating an
existing text type and modifying the type properties. Finally, you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets
for easy reference.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-
Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt.

Create a legend view


1 On the View menu, click New ➤ Legend.
2 In the New Legend View dialog, for Name, enter Typical Symbol Legend, and click OK.

594 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets


Add symbols to the legend

3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Symbol.


4 Add the following symbols to the legend view, selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the
legend as shown.

■ M_Section Head - Filled


■ Level Head - Circle
■ M_Door Tag
■ M_Window Tag
■ Sheet Keynote - Hexagon : Tag

Create a text type

5 On the Design Bar, click Text.


Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector, you create a text type with
the necessary size. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties.

6 On the Options bar, click .


7 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
8 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate, for Name, enter Legend Text, and click OK.
9 For Text Font, select Arial.
10 For Text Size, enter 3mm, and click OK twice.

Add text to the legend

11 In the Type Selector, verify that Text : Legend Text is selected, and click to the right of the first symbol to
specify the text start point.
12 Enter Detail Callout for the text note.
13 Working from the top down, enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend:

■ Level Indicator
■ Door Tag
■ Window Tag

Creating a Symbol Legend | 595


■ Sheet Keynote

Place the symbol legend on a sheet

14 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A101 - Site Plan/Floor Plan.
15 In the Project Browser, expand Legends, click Typical Symbol Legend, drag it to the lower-right corner of
the sheet, and click to place it.

16 In the Type Selector, select Viewport : No Titlemark.


17 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
The symbol legend is added to the project sheet.

18 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, double-click A102 - Unit 18.


19 In the Project Browser, click Typical Symbol Legend, drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet, and click
to place it.

596 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets


20 In the Type Selector, select Viewport : No Titlemark.
21 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required.

22 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Creating a Component Legend


In this exercise, you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. You use the text
type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component.
You then add the completed legend to a project sheet.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt.

Create a legend view


1 On the View menu, click New ➤ Legend.
2 In the New Legend View dialog, for Name, enter 4th Floor Wall Types.
3 For Scale, select1 : 50, and click OK.

Add components to the legend

4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Legend Component.


5 On the Options Bar, specify the following:

■ For Family, select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider.
■ For View, select Section.
■ For Host length, enter 900 mm, and press ENTER.

6 On the View Control Bar, select Medium for Detail Level.


7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall.
8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall.

Creating a Component Legend | 597


9 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
10 Select the second wall, and on the Options Bar, for Family, select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior.

Add titles to the legend components

11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Text.


12 In the Type Selector, verify that Text : Legend Text is selected.

598 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets


13 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click to add text without a leader.
14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text, and enter Wall Type 1 Patio
Divider.

NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line, for example to force a line break between ''Wall
Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider.''

15 Click below the lower wall and enter Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall.

Add text to the legend

16 On the Options bar, click to add text with a single-segment leader.


17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point.
18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point.
19 Enter the following text, pressing ENTER between component descriptions, and click Modify on the Design
Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking.
The text note with leader is added to the legend.

20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component.

Creating a Component Legend | 599


Place the legend on a sheet

21 In the Project Browser, right-click Sheets (all), and click New Sheet.
22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock.
23 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, select Level 4, and drag it to the new sheet.
24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet.

25 In the Project Browser, under Legends, select 4th Floor Wall Types, drag it onto the sheet, and click to place
it in the upper left corner of the sheet.

26 On the Design Bar, click Modify to end the command.


The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet.

Tile views in the drawing window

27 In the Project Browser, double-click 4th Floor Wall Types.


28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows.
29 In the project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 4.
30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile.
The open drawings are both visible, allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then
apply the type in the second drawing.

600 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets


Match a component type

31 On the Tools toolbar, click (Match Type).


32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view, select the Wall Type 2 component.
Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled, indicating that it captured the wall type properties.

33 In the floor plan view, enter ZR to zoom to a specific region.


34 Draw a rectangle around the lower-right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall.

The view zooms in to the patio divider wall.

Creating a Component Legend | 601


35 Select the patio divider wall.
36 On the View Control Bar, select Medium for Detail Level.
Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. The wall type in
the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend.

37 Optionally, click if you do not want to save the change to the wall type.
38 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Using Revision Tracking


Revit MEP provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. You can create a sequence of revisions, and
you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. You can use revision tags to notate
the revision clouds, and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet.

Setting Up a Revision Table


There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for
bid or after you have received a signed contract. These changes can be due to owner requests, contractor inquiries,
unanticipated changes in construction conditions, or changes in building material availability. In this exercise, you

602 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets


use the Revisions command to open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions.
Using the table, you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project, and you can add data such as release
date and description to each revision.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt.

Specify a revision numbering method


1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 4.

2 On the Settings menu, click Revisions.


3 In the Revisions dialog, verify that By Project is selected for Numbering Method.
When you use this option, the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the
Revisions dialog. For example, if the active revision is number 1, all tags and schedules display the numeral
1. If you select By Sheet, the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added
to a sheet.

Add a revision to the project

4 For Release Date, enter a date.


This is the date the revisions are sent out for review.

5 For Description, enter Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls.


In general, revision descriptions should be comprehensive, yet as concise as possible.

6 Verify that Issued is cleared.


When Issued is selected, the revision is locked and issued to the field.

7 Under Visible, verify that Cloud and Tag is selected.


If Visible is not selected, any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in
the view in which you create it. In most instances, you would turn off visibility only after a revision was
issued.

Setting Up a Revision Table | 603


8 Click OK.
9 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Sketching Revision Clouds


In this exercise, you make changes to the project floor plan, and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision
cloud. Revision clouds have read-only properties, including revision number and revision date, which are inherited
from the revision table you created for the project.
You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views, but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is
sketched. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt.

Modify a wall
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 4.
2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider.

3 Select the divider.

4 On the Edit toolbar, click (Move).


5 Select the partition, move the cursor up, and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall.

604 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets


6 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Add a revision cloud

7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Revision Cloud.


Revit MEP is now in sketch mode.

8 In the drawing area, click near the partition you moved, and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment
of the revision cloud.

9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment.


10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed.
11 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition.

Sketching Revision Clouds | 605


Modify revision cloud style

12 Select the revision cloud.


13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.
14 In the Object Styles dialog, click the Annotation Objects tab.
15 Under the Revision Clouds category, for Line Weight, select 6.
16 Click OK.

17 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Tagging Revision Clouds


In this exercise, you load a revision tag into the project, and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current
drawing. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you
set up the revision table in a previous exercise.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt.

Load a revision tag


1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 4.
2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud.
3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category.

606 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets


4 On the Options Bar, click Tags.
5 In the Tags dialog, scroll down to Revision Clouds.
Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds, you need to add one.

6 Click Load.
7 In the left pane of the dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision
Tag.rfa.
In the Tags dialog, notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds.

8 In the Tags dialog, click OK.

Tag a revision cloud

9 On the Options Bar, select Leader.


10 In the drawing area, position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left.
If the cursor is just inside the cloud, the tag is displayed inside the cloud.

11 Click to place the tag.


The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. The number is based on the numbering method you
specified when you set up the revision table. Because you chose to number by project, and because the
revision is the first in the project, the cloud is tagged as number 1.

12 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Working with Revisions


In this exercise, you create a sheet view in your project, on which you place a revised view. You then issue a revision,
which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. Because a real-world project can undergo
several revisions before it is completed, you create additional revisions in the revision table.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt.

Add a revised view to a sheet


1 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, double-click A107 - Unnamed.
2 Enter ZR and zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock.
The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule.
After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet, you prevent
further changes to the revision. You do this by issuing the revision.

Working with Revisions | 607


Issue a revision

3 On the Settings menu, click Revisions.


4 For the Sequence 1 revision, select Issued, and click OK.

NOTE After you issue a revision, you can no longer modify it. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in
the drawing area, nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds.

Create additional revisions

5 Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. You can continue to add revisions.
On the Settings menu, click Revisions.
6 In the Revisions dialog, under Add, click New.
A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table.

7 Enter the appropriate information for this revision.


8 If you want to hide issued revisions in the drawing, for Visible, select None for each issued revision.

608 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets


9 Click OK.
10 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Importing from Other Applications


In this lesson, you learn to import information from other applications, such as images, text, and spreadsheets, into a
project.

Importing Image Files


In this exercise, you import a logo image in JPG format into a project, and place it on a sheet.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt.

1 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, double-click T - Title Sheet.

2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image.


3 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\Freighthouse Logo.JPG.
4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo.

Importing from Other Applications | 609


5 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

6 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Importing Text Documents


In this exercise, you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on
a sheet.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt.

Create a text element on the title sheet


1 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, double-click T - Title Sheet
2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Text.

3 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click to add text without a leader.
4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet.

Copy the text

5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement.doc text file in another window.


6 Select the text.
7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy.

610 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets


Paste the text on the sheet

8 In the Revit MEP window, with the new text box still selected, click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard.
The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet.

9 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


10 Zoom in to view the pasted text.

NOTE Some formatting may be required once the text is placed in Revit MEP.

11 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Importing Spreadsheets
In this exercise, you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. The only
way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt.

1 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, double-click A102 - Unit 18.


2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet, Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures.xls.

NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. This process may vary from system to system.
This exercise demonstrates a common method.

3 In Microsoft Excel, click File menu ➤ Print.


4 Under Printer, for Name, select the document writer.
5 Click OK.
6 In the left pane of the Save As dialog, click Desktop, for File name, enter Fixture Schedule.mdi, and click
Save.
Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format, you could use a screen capture utility to save the
worksheet in BMP or JPG format. This step has been completed for you, and saved as Fixture Schedule.JPG.

7 In the Revit MEP window, click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image.


8 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\Fixture Schedule.JPG.
9 Click to place the image on the sheet.
10 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule.

Importing Spreadsheets | 611


12 Click File menu ➤ Save.

612 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets


Using Dependent Views
11
In this tutorial, you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary.

The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site, as well as a large

lab building.

The large floor plan, or footprint, for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted

sheet as one plan. To effectively document this project, you break up the plan

into sections, called dependent views.

613
Dependent view of lab building

Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms

Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes.

614 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views


| 615
Using Dependent Views in Documentation
In this lesson, you

■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation


■ Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views
■ Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project
■ Add dependent views to sheets for documentation

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views


In this exercise, you

■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view


■ Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split
■ Place dependent views on sheets
■ Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views
■ Apply dependent view specifications to other views

Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\ m_Dependent_Views.rvt

Create dependent views


1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2.

2 In the Project Browser, right-click Level 2, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.
The dependent view opens.

3 In the Project Browser, under Level 2, right-click Dependent on Level 2, and click Rename.
4 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter Level 2 - Aviary, and click OK.
5 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar, click Zoom To Fit.
6 In the drawing area, select the crop region.

616 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views


The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. The annotation
crop is the exterior crop region, and the model crop is the interior crop region.

7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out
the lab building.

8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up, confining the view to the upper-left area of the
drawing (the aviary).

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 617


9 On the View Control Bar, click (Hide Crop Region).

10 On the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit.


11 In the Project Browser, right-click Level 2, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.
12 In the Project Browser, right-click Dependent on Level 2, and click Rename.
13 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter Level 2 - Labs, and click OK.
14 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit.
15 Select the crop region.
16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs).

618 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views


17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes.
The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region.

18 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

19 On the View Control Bar, click (Hide Crop Region).

20 On the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit.

Add matchline to indicate split view

21 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2.


22 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Matchline.
Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 619


23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points:

■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. (Align with the
second column of lab cubicles.)

■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building.
■ Click above the left corner of the lab building.
■ Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary.
■ Move the cursor left about 4800 mm, and click.

24 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

620 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views


25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.
26 In the Object Styles dialog, click the Annotation Objects tab.
27 Under Matchline, for Line Weight, select 9.
28 For Line Pattern, select Double Dash, and click OK.

Create sheets and place dependent views

29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet.


30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock.
31 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets, right-click A101 - Unnamed, and click Rename.
32 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter Level 2 Aviary, and click OK.
33 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, click Level 2 - Aviary, and drag it onto the sheet.
34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 621


35 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
36 Use the same method to create another sheet, rename the sheet Level 2 Labs, and place the Level 2 - Labs
dependent view on the sheet.

Add reference annotations to sheets

37 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2.


38 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference.
You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views.

39 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 - Aviary is selected.
40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline.

622 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views


The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline.

41 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Floor Plan: Level 2 - Labs.
42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline.

43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the
matchline.

NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references.

44 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


45 On the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit.
46 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2 - Aviary.

47 On the View Control Bar, click (Show Crop Region).

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 623


48 Select the crop region, click the far right control, and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation
region so you can see the view reference.

NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. Notice that the view reference
for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view.

49 If, after modifying the annotation crop region, the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display, select the room tag
for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area, right-click, and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.

50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3), leaving 4 rooms visible in the view.

624 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views


51 On the View Control Bar, click (Hide Crop Region).

Apply dependent view settings to other plans

52 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Level 2, and click Apply Dependent Views.
After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view, you can apply the view and crop region
specifications to parallel views of the same scale.

53 In the Select Views dialog, select all views in the list, and click OK.
New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view, but are not placed on sheets.

54 In the Project Browser, expand Level 1, and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1.
55 On the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit.
Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1.

56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1.


57 On the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 625


Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views
In this exercise, you

■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view


■ Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split
■ Place dependent views on a sheet
■ Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views

Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\ m_Dependent_Views.rvt

Create dependent views


1 In the Project Browser, expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South Elevation.
The matchline is already placed in the view.

2 In the Project Browser, right-click South Elevation, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.
The dependent view opens.

3 In the Project Browser, expand South Elevation, right-click Dependent on South Elevation, and click
Rename.
4 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation - Left, and click OK.
5 In the drawing area, select the Crop Region.

626 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views


6 Select the inside crop region control on the right, and drag it toward the center of the view, cropping the
view to the aviary.

7 On the View Control Bar, click (Hide Crop Region).


8 In the Project Browser, right-click South Elevation, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.
9 In the Project Browser, right-click Dependent on South Elevation, and click Rename.
10 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation - Right, and click OK.
11 Select the crop region.
12 Select the inside crop region control on the left, and drag it toward the center of the drawing, cropping
the view to the lab building.

13 On the View Control Bar, click (Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet

14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet.


15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock.
16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename.
17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 627


18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet.
19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet.
21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation.
24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference.
25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected.
26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation.
27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

628 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views


28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right.
29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 629


NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from
the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop
controls to modify it.

630 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views


Viewing and Rendering
3

631
632 | Chapter 12 Viewing and Rendering
Viewing
12
In this tutorial, you learn to create and customize views of building information

models. You learn how to access and create building model views and how to

change the visibility of building components and annotations within views.

More specifically, you learn how to change the visibility of detail components,

how to control fill pattern colors, and how to use plan regions within floor plans

and reflected ceiling plans.

633
Viewing a Building Model
In this lesson, you learn to create and customize user-defined views of a building information model.

You create elevations, sections, and three-dimensional (3D) views, and learn how to control the visibility of building
components and annotations within views.

Exploring the Building Model


In this exercise, you learn how to access different views of the building model, including elevation and three-dimensional
views. You also learn how to control the visibility of different building components and annotations within building
model views.
Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Viewing_Exercise.rvt.

Open an elevation view of the building model


1 On the left side of the drawing area, locate the Project Browser.
The Project Browser is displayed by default between the Design Bar and the drawing area. The current file
name is displayed in the Project Browser title bar.

TIP If the Project Browser does not display, on the Standard toolbar, click .

2 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations, and double-click East.
A new view displays a wireframe view of the east elevation view of the building model. Both hidden lines
and window tags display in the east elevation view.

634 | Chapter 12 Viewing


Display the elevation view with hidden lines

3 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style, and click Hidden Line.
This hides the lines that show through to the exterior of the elevation view. The east elevation view displays
with hidden lines. This change is applied only to the active view, the east elevation. Notice that window
tags continue to display in the view.

Turn off the display of window tags in the elevation view

4 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.


5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides for Elevation: East dialog, click the Annotation Categories tab.
6 Under Visibility, scroll down and clear Window Tags.
7 Click OK.
The window tags are no longer displayed in this view. This change is applied only in this elevation view.

Create a 3D view of the building model

8 On the View toolbar, click .


The 3D view is displayed in a new viewing window. The default name of the view is {3D}.

Exploring the Building Model | 635


9 On the View toolbar, click to reorient the view.

10 Move the cursor to the drawing window and notice that it now displays as a hand .
This means you are in pan mode.

11 Pan the view by clicking and dragging the cursor in the drawing area.
The view follows the movement of the cursor.

NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel, you can enable pan mode by pressing and holding
the middle wheel button down. Move the mouse to pan the view.

12 Press and hold CTRL, and notice that the cursor displays as a magnifying glass .
This indicates that you are in zoom mode.

NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel, you can enable zoom mode by rolling the middle
wheel.

13 View the Dynamic View dialog in the lower left corner of the screen.
You can pan, zoom, and spin the building model by clicking the appropriate button in this dialog.

Save the current 3D view

14 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), and expand 3D Views.


15 In the Project Browser under 3D Views, right-click {3D}, and click Rename.
16 In the Rename View dialog, enter My 3D View, and click OK.
Notice that the view name is updated in the title bar of the viewing window and in the Project Browser.

17 In the upper right corner of the viewing window, click X to close the view.
18 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click My 3D View.

636 | Chapter 12 Viewing


Notice that the view continues to display with hidden lines and no window tags.

19 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Perspective View with a Camera” on page 637.

Creating a Perspective View with a Camera


In this exercise, you create a perspective view of the building model with a camera. Cameras define the eye point, eye
height, and distance from the target.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Viewing_Exercise.rvt.

Create the perspective view


1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Camera.

TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View.

3 Add the camera to the view by specifying two points: one for the camera position and the other for the
camera target point:

■ Specify the first point in the top right corner of the drawing, outside of the dimension lines.
■ Specify the second point in one of the rooms in the building, as shown in the following illustration.

After you specify the second point (the view target), the new view named 3D View 1 is displayed by default
in a perspective view.

Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 637


4 To resize the view to see the entire floor model, select the blue control grips on the sides of the crop region
and move them out.
5 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit.

Change the camera projection settings

6 On the View menu, click Dynamically Modify View.


7 In the Dynamic View dialog, click the Walkthrough tab located at the bottom of the dialog.
You can use the walkthrough controls in this dialog to move the camera position and change the view.

8 To move the camera eye position higher or lower:

■ Click Dolly and move the cursor into the perspective view.
■ Press and hold the left mouse button.
■ Move the cursor up, down, and sideways to see how the view changes.

9 To move the camera forward and backward in the view:

■ Click Forward/Back and move the cursor into the perspective view.
■ Press and hold the left mouse button.
■ Move the cursor up and down in the view to move the cursor forward and backward.

638 | Chapter 12 Viewing


10 To rotate the camera around the target:

■ Click Turn and move the cursor into the perspective view.
■ Press and hold the left mouse button.
■ Move the cursor side to side in the view to rotate the view. You may need to reposition the view with
the other controls.

11 Adjust the view as shown in the following illustration.

Change the camera position, height, and target

12 On the Window menu, click Tile.


Four views of the model display in the drawing area.

13 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit.

Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 639


14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.
The border of the window that contains the Level 1 view highlights.

15 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click 3D View 1.


16 In the Project Browser, right-click 3D View 1, and click Show Camera.
The camera and the view direction of the camera are displayed in the appropriate views.

640 | Chapter 12 Viewing


17 In My 3D View, select the camera target point (the magenta grip), and move it to another location.

3D View 1 should update immediately after you move the target point of the camera.

18 Change the target and eye elevation of the camera by modifying its properties:

■ Select the camera in My 3D View, right-click, and click Element Properties.


■ In the Element Properties dialog, under Camera, enter 15000 for Eye Elevation and 1700 for Target
Elevation.
■ Click OK.

3D View 1 immediately updates to show the change.

TIP The updated view depends on the location of the camera before you change the elevation values.

Use a section box to clip the model

19 On the View toolbar, click to create a new 3D view.

20 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style, and click Shading.

Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 641


21 Rotate the view as shown in the following illustration.

22 On the View menu, click View Properties.


23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, select Section Box, and click OK.
A section box is displayed around the model.

24 Click the section box.


The section box highlights and grips are displayed on its faces. A rotation tool is also displayed.

25 Select and move the lower right grip on the section box closer to the model, as shown in the following
illustration.

642 | Chapter 12 Viewing


26 Click and hold the rotation tool, and rotate the section box around the model.

27 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Section View” on page 643.

Creating a Section View


In this exercise, you create a section view by sketching a section line in a plan view.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Viewing_Exercise.rvt.

Sketch a section line in a plan view


1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, double-click Level 1, and maximize this view.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Section.

Creating a Section View | 643


3 Click to the left of the left wall of the building model, and then click to the right of the lower right wall
to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration.

Notice a dashed green box with blue grips is displayed on the section line. The box represents the extents
of the section view as well as the viewing direction of the section.

4 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

View the section

5 To view the section, double-click the section head, or in the Project Browser, expand Sections, and
double-click Section 1.

NOTE Fill pattern is dependent on the zoom ratio. You may need to zoom closer to the walls in order to see the
fill pattern.

6 In the Project Browser, select the section view, right-click, and click Find Referring Views.
7 In the Go To View dialog, select Floor Plan: Level 1, and click Open View.
8 Select the section line, and drag the section depth grip below the middle horizontal wall as shown in the
following illustration.

644 | Chapter 12 Viewing


9 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
10 Double-click the section head to display the section view.
Notice the change in section depth.

Change the view direction of the section

11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.


12 Select the section line.
Control arrows are displayed near the section tag.

13 Click the control arrows to flip the section view, and select and move the section depth grip under the
lower wall.
14 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
15 Double-click the section head to display the section view.
Notice the change in the view direction.

16 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Elevation Views” on page 645.

Creating Elevation Views


In this exercise, you learn to create an elevation view in a project by adding an elevation symbol to a plan view.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Viewing_Exercise.rvt.

Add an elevation symbol


1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.
2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Elevation.
An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor.

3 Without clicking in the drawing area, move the cursor around the building model.
Notice that the elevation symbol arrow points to the nearest wall as you move through the building model.
You may need to adjust your zoom settings to see the elevation symbol.

Creating Elevation Views | 645


4 To create an elevation view of the building lobby, place the cursor inside the building facing the lobby
entrance, and click.
Make sure the elevation symbol is pointing towards the lobby doors.

5 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

View the elevation

6 To view the new elevation, zoom in, and double-click the elevation symbol arrow.
The elevation is named Elevation 1 - a by default.

7 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.


8 Select the center of the elevation symbol. Do not select the arrow.
The elevation symbol is displayed with four check boxes, indicating the possible elevation views that you
can create. The check mark in the right box indicates the current elevation view, Elevation 1 - a.

9 Select the box shown in the following illustration to add a new elevation view, Elevation 1 - b.

10 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Elevation 1 - b.

646 | Chapter 12 Viewing


11 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Controlling Fill Pattern Colors


In this lesson, you learn to control the fill pattern color of a material and set the coarse scale fill pattern color of a wall
type.
You can control the fill pattern color of the cut and surface patterns for objects that obtain their fill pattern definition
from materials. This includes walls, floors, roofs, and other families, and applies to phasing override materials as well.
For example, in a compound wall, such as Brick on CMU, where each layer is assigned a different material, you can set
the fill pattern color for the brick to red, and the insulation color to pink.

In addition, you can set the color of the coarse scale fill pattern for wall types. This means that in views with a coarse
level of detail, such as the one below, you can choose the wall fill color for a wall type, in this case, a shade of gray.

Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material


In this exercise, you learn to control the fill pattern colors of a material. You change the color of the cut and surface
patterns in the brick material assigned to the exterior wall in the building model.

Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Showroom.rvt.

Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 647


Change the color of the brick cut pattern for the exterior walls
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Sections (Section Head - Filled), and double-click
Wall/Floor Join - Level 3.
Notice the different fill patterns assigned to each layer within the floor and wall structure. Each layer is
designated by the material settings of the layer.

2 On the Settings menu, click Materials.


3 In the Materials dialog, select Masonry - Brick for Name.
A color is assigned to both the Surface Pattern and Cut Pattern options in the dialog.

4 Under Cut Pattern, click Color.


5 In the Color dialog, select red, and click OK twice.
The brick cut pattern on the left is displayed as red.

View the surface pattern of the exterior brick walls

6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click 3D.
7 Zoom in on the brick pattern of the exterior walls.
The surface pattern of the brick is black.

Change the brick surface pattern from black to white

8 On the Settings menu, click Materials.


9 In the Materials dialog, select Masonry - Brick for Name.

648 | Chapter 12 Viewing


10 Under Surface Pattern, click Color.
11 In the Color dialog, select white, and click OK twice.
The surface pattern of the brick is now white.

12 Proceed to the next exercise, “Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type” on page 649.

Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type
In this exercise, you learn to set the coarse scale fill pattern color for a wall type. You change the coarse scale fill pattern
from the default color of black to a shade of gray for a wall type. The walls in the floor plan that you work with are
displayed with a gray fill pattern when displayed in a view with a coarse level of detail.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, c_Showroom.rvt.

View the detail level setting of the view


1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 On the View menu, click View Properties.


The view level of this view is set to display in Coarse detail as indicated by the Detail Level instance
parameter value under Graphics.

3 Click Cancel to exit the dialog without making any changes.

Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type | 649
Change coarse scale fill pattern color of the arced wall

4 Select the south arced wall, right-click, and click Element Properties.
5 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
By default, the Coarse Scale Fill Color is black and the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern is set to none.

6 In the Type Properties dialog, click in the Coarse Scale Fill Color value field.
7 In the Color dialog, select a shade of gray, and click OK.

8 In the Type Properties dialog, click in the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern parameter value field and click .
9 In the Fill Patterns dialog, select Solid fill for Name, and click OK three times.
10 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
The wall type is displayed as solid gray within any view where the Detail Level is set to Coarse.

View the arced wall in fine detail

11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2.


12 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Fine.
13 Zoom in on the arced wall.
Notice that the surface pattern and color of the brick wall that display in a coarse detail level are not applied
because the detail level is set to Fine.

14 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Creating a View Plan Region


In this lesson, you work with a split-level building model that requires a different view range than the rest of the view.
Plan regions are closed sketches that you can create in floor plan and reflected ceiling plan (RCP) views only. If you
create more than one plan region in a file, the plan regions cannot overlap each other, although they may have

650 | Chapter 12 Viewing


coincident edges. Plan regions do not work with linked Revit MEP files, and you cannot control their visibility, line
type, line color, or pattern.

If you are not familiar with view ranges in Revit MEP, refer to the online Help for more information.

Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan


In this exercise, you create a plan region in the Level 1 floor plan of the following building model.

Because the stepped portion of the walls in the building model is above the cut plane height in the Level 1 floor plan
view, it does not display in the Level 1 floor plan.

By creating a plan region in the view with a different cut plane height, you can display the stepped portion of the walls
in the Level 1 floor plan.

Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Plan_Region.rvt.

Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 651


View the Level 1 floor plan
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
The cut plane height of the view range for this view is 1200 mm. The stepped portion of the project walls
and windows are not displayed because the cut plane does not intersect any of the model geometry above
this height.
In the following illustration, the south elevation is also displayed, so you can view the height of the walls
and windows.

Add a plan region to view the stepped portion of the model

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Plan Region.

TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View.

Plan regions have a single property, view range, which is similar to the view range for plan views. You use
the view range property to control the cut plane, the top and bottom clip planes, and the view depth plane.

3 In the Level 1 view, sketch the plan region using the blue tick marks for guidance:

■ On the Design Bar, click Lines.

■ On the Options Bar, click .


■ Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the top left.
■ Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the bottom right.

652 | Chapter 12 Viewing


■ On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
■ Press ESC to end the command.

The plan region displays as a dashed green line. When you select the plan region, the line turns red.

4 Select the plan region, right-click, and click Element Properties.


5 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, click Edit for View Range.
6 In the View Range dialog, select Parent View’s Level (Level 1) for Cut Plane, and enter 2800 for the cut
plane Offset.
By selecting Parent View’s Level, you specify that the level used to define each plane (cut plane, top and
bottom clip planes, and view depth) in the view range is the same as the level used to define the
corresponding plane in the parent view. This means that the plan region view is going to cut all geometry
at 2800 mm above Level 1.

7 Because the top clip plane value cannot be set lower than the cut plane, enter 4000 for the Top Offset.
8 Click Apply, and then click OK twice.
9 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
The Level 1 floor plan should display as shown in the following illustration.

Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 653


The following illustration demonstrates how the level 1 floor plan view is being viewed with the plan
region.

10 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
11 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

654 | Chapter 12 Viewing


Rendering Views and
Creating Walkthroughs 13
In this tutorial, you learn to use the AccuRender® Radiosity and Raytrace features

in Revit MEP 2008 to create rendered interior and exterior views of your building

information model; to place and render decals to create signs, billboards, and

posters; and to create walkthroughs of your building information model.

AccuRender is the rendering engine incorporated into Revit MEP that is used to

produce rendered views.

655
Rendering an Exterior View
In this lesson, you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a building model and render it with the AccuRender
Raytrace feature.

You learn to create and apply materials to a building model, add realistic three-dimensional trees to the building site,
and create the perspective view that you want to render. After you create the perspective view, you select a scene that
defines the model environment, and then raytrace the view to produce the final rendered exterior view.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model


In this exercise, you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building
model. You also learn to create a new material and apply it to a building component. You work with a building model
that already has material applied to it.

In this exercise, you:

■ change the texture of the brick material applied to the exterior walls of the building.
■ change the material of the front terrace of the building from the default material to asphalt.
■ define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions on the front curtain wall.

When you complete these changes, you raytrace a region of the building that includes the exterior wall, the floor, and
the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.

656 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs


Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Cohouse.rvt.

View the finish material of the exterior walls


1 Verify that the 3D view of the townhouse building model is displayed.

2 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar, click Wall.

TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar, right-click in the Design Bar, and click the tab
in the context menu.

3 On the Options Bar, click .


4 In the Element Properties dialog, verify that Co-house - Cavity Wall - Heavyweight block is displayed for
Type, and click Edit/New.
5 In the Type Properties dialog, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. Verify that the material defined
for the exterior finish layer (Layer 1) of the building model is Masonry - Brick.
6 Click Cancel three times to return to the 3D view of the building model without making any changes to
the exterior finish at this time.

Change the brick texture of the exterior wall finish material

7 On the Settings menu, click Materials.


8 In the Materials dialog, under Name, select Masonry - Brick.

9 Under AccuRender, click next to Texture to display the Material Library.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 657


A preview of the brick texture that is currently assigned to the walls is displayed in the right pane of the
Material Library.

10 In the left pane of the Material Library dialog, under _accurender, expand Masonry and click Brick.
11 Under Name, select Carib,200mm,Running.
12 Click OK twice.
You can view the new brick texture when you raytrace a region of the building in a later step.

Change the material of the terrace from the default material to asphalt

13 On the Design Bar, click Modify and select the terrace in front of the building.

14 On the Options Bar, verify that Floor : Floor 1 displays in the Type Selector, and click .
15 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
16 In the Type Properties dialog, under Construction, click Edit for Structure.
17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for Layer 2, click in the Material field that contains Default Floor, and click

.
18 In the Materials dialog, under Name, select Site - Asphalt.
19 Click OK four times.

Define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions

20 On the Settings menu, click Materials.


21 In the Materials dialog, under Name, click Duplicate.
22 In the New Material dialog, enter Aluminum, Polished and click OK.

23 Under AccuRender, click next to Texture to display the Material Library.


24 In the Material Library, under _accurender, expand Metals, and click Aluminum.
25 Under Name, select Polished,Plain.
26 Click OK twice.
27 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
28 Select one of the curtain wall mullions on the exterior face of the building.

658 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs


TIP If you do not select the curtain wall mullion on the first selection, press TAB to cycle your selection through
different building model components. When Curtain Wall Mullions: Rectangular Mullion displays in the Status
Bar at the bottom of the screen, select the curtain wall mullion again.

29 On the Options Bar, click .


30 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.

31 In the Type Properties dialog, under Materials and Finishes, click in the Material field, and then click
.
32 In the Materials dialog, under Name, select Aluminum, Polished.
33 Click OK three times.
This completes the changes in materials and textures that you make for the building model.

Raytrace a region of the building to view the material changes that you made

34 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar, click Region Raytrace.


35 Move the cursor over the building model, and draw the rectangular region shown in the following
illustration.
Make sure the region includes the exterior walls, floor, and curtain wall mullions to which you made
material changes.

36 In the Scene Selection dialog, verify that New is selected, select Exterior under Type, and click OK.
37 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene, click No.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 659


The portion of the building that you selected is raytraced and the materials that you changed and applied
to the exterior walls, floor, and curtain wall mullions are rendered (this takes a few moments), producing
a photorealistic effect.

38 On the Design Bar, click Display Model to end the Region Raytrace command and redisplay the building
model in hidden line wireframe.
39 Proceed to the next exercise, “Adding Trees to the Site” on page 660.

Adding Trees to the Site


In this exercise, you place two different types of trees on the building site.

In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the leaves of the trees display as indicated by the
season and location specified in the render scene settings.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse.rvt.

Add red maple trees to the site


1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click 1st Flr. Cnst.

660 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs


2 Zoom out so you can easily view the area surrounding the building model.
3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component.

TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site.

4 In the Type Selector, select M_Tree - Deciduous : Acer Rubrum - 9 Meters.


Available tree types are listed in the Type Selector by their Latin names. The tree that you selected in this
step is a red maple.

5 Move the cursor to a location on the building site, and click to place a tree.
Continue to place trees until you have added several red maples to the building site as shown in the
following illustration.

Create a new type of tree, and add it to the site

6 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and click Site Component.

7 In the Type Selector, select any of the deciduous trees, and click .

Adding Trees to the Site | 661


8 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
9 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate.
10 In the Name dialog, enter Black Oak, and click OK.

11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Other, click in the Value field for Plant Name, and then click to
display the Plant Library.
12 In the Plant Library, under accurender, expand Trees and Shrubs, and click Deciduous.
13 Under Name, select Oak, Black, and click OK.
14 In the Type Properties dialog, under Identity Data, select Black Oak for Type Comments.
15 Under Other, enter 7000mm for Plant Height, and click OK twice.
The black oak is shorter than the red maple trees that you added to the site.

16 Move the cursor to the building site, and place two black oak trees, as shown in the following illustration.

17 Press ESC to end tree placement.


18 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Perspective View” on page 662.

Creating a Perspective View


In this exercise, you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse.rvt.

662 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs


Place a camera in the first floor view
1 With the 1st Flr. Cnst. view open, on the View tab of the Design Bar, click Camera.
2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point:

■ Specify the first point on the site facing the building to position the camera.
■ Specify the second point in front of the building facade to define the target point of the camera.

The new perspective view is displayed.

3 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the perspective view displays as in the following illustration.

Creating a Perspective View | 663


Modify the camera position and back clipping plane in the perspective view

4 In the Project Browser under Views (all), expand 3D Views, right-click 3D View 1 (the default perspective
view name), and click Show Camera.
5 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans, double-click 1st Flr. Cnst.
The camera position is displayed in the 1st Flr. Cnst. view. The red triangle represents the FOV (field of
vision) angle and the back clipping plane of the view.

6 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in
the following illustration.

664 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs


7 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click 3D View 1, and click Rename.
8 In the Rename View dialog, enter Exterior, and click OK.
9 Proceed to the next exercise, “Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View” on page 665.

Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View


In this exercise, you select a scene and specify time, date, place, lighting, and environment settings that you use to
render the view.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse.rvt.

Display the perspective view


1 In the Project Browser under 3D Views, double-click Exterior.

Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 665


You must define a scene because this is the first time settings are being applied to this view.

Select the render scene settings

2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar, click Settings.


3 In the Scene Selection dialog, click OK to accept the existing scene (Scene 1).
4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog, under Scene Settings, clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view,
and click Sun.
5 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog, click the Solar Angles tab.
6 Select By Date, Time, and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list.
Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time.

7 Under Date, enter 10 (October) for Month and 5 for Day.


8 Under Time, verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected, and drag the slider to set the time to 2:30 PM.

TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to adjust the minutes precisely.

666 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs


9 Click the Place tab.
10 Click in the Cities list, and enter bo.
11 Scroll down, and select Boston, MA, USA.
12 Click the Settings Tab.
13 Enter .20 for Cloudiness.
This setting produces a level of cloudiness in the sky that ranges from 0 (no clouds) to 1.00 (many clouds.)

14 Click OK.
15 In the Render Scene Settings dialog, under Scene Settings, click Environment.
16 In the Environment dialog, under Background Color, verify that Automatic Sky is selected.
17 Under Advanced, select Ground Plane.
The Ground Plane tab displays.

18 Click Material.
19 In the Material Library, under _accurender, click Site.
20 In the Name list, select Grass, Rye, Dark.
21 Click OK twice.
22 In the Render Scene Settings dialog, under Scene Settings, select Autumn for Plant Season.
23 Under Raytrace Settings, select Good for Quality, and click OK.

Render the perspective view

24 On the Design Bar, click Image Size.


25 Enter 150 for Resolution, and click OK.
26 On the Design Bar, click Raytrace.

27 On the Options Bar, click .


28 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene, click No.
The rendered exterior perspective view is displayed.

Save the rendered view

29 On the Design Bar, click Capture Rendering.


The rendered view is saved in the project and can be accessed from the Project Browser.

Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 667


30 On the Design Bar, click Display Model to end rendering and redisplay the wireframe perspective view of
the building model.

Redisplay the rendered view

31 In the Project Browser under Views (all), expand Renderings, and double-click Exterior to display the
rendered view of the townhouse that you saved.
32 If you want to save this exercise, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
33 Proceed to the next lesson, “Rendering an Interior View” on page 668.

Rendering an Interior View


In this lesson, you render an interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson.

To create the rendered scene, you add ArchVision realpeople (RPC people) to the floor plan of the second floor, define
the view and render scene settings, and finally, use both Radiosity and Raytracing to render the view.

Adding RPC People


In this exercise, you add two RPC people to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. RPC people are
represented by a circle in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse.rvt.

Open second floor plan to display the interior scene that you will render
1 In the Project Browser under Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click 2nd Flr. Cnst.

668 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs


2 Zoom in on the left side of the living room as shown.

3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar, click Component.


4 In the Type Selector, select M_RPC Female: Cathy.
5 On the Options Bar, select Rotate after placement.
6 Click to place Cathy to the right of the sofa and below the table, and then move the cursor to rotate her
so she is facing up and to the right (northeast).
7 Repeat steps 4 - 6 to select and place M_RPC Male: Alex to the right of Cathy and facing up and to the left
(northwest).

Adding RPC People | 669


8 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating the Interior Perspective View” on page 670.

Creating the Interior Perspective View


In this exercise, you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse.rvt.

Add a camera
1 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Camera.
2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point:

■ Specify the first point on the floor plan facing the table and RPC people to place the camera.

670 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs


■ Specify the target point of the camera in front of the corner of the table.

The interior perspective is displayed, but you must adjust the field of vision and far clipping plane to display
more of the view.

3 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans, double-click 2nd Flr. Cnst.

Creating the Interior Perspective View | 671


4 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the
following illustration.

5 In the Project Browser under 3D Views, double-click 3D View 1 to redisplay the interior perspective view.

Resize the perspective view

6 On the Options Bar, click the dimensions for Size.


7 In the Crop Region Size dialog, under Size, enter 229 mm for Width, enter 178 mm for Height, and click
OK.
8 In the Project Browser under 3D Views, right-click 3D View 1, and click Rename.

672 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs


9 In the Rename View dialog, enter Interior, and click OK.

Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view

10 On the View toolbar, click to display the 3D view of the building model.

11 On the View menu, click Shading to view the effects of the section box when you add it.
12 On the View menu, click View Properties.
13 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, select Section Box, and click OK.
A section box is displayed around the building model.

14 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the section box.
Grips are displayed on the section box.

15 Select and move the section box grips until only the room that you added RPC people to and that you
want to render is visible.

Creating the Interior Perspective View | 673


This process allows you to limit the geometry that will be rendered when you create a rendering of your
interior view. By limiting the geometry, you reduce the rendering time.

16 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a New Render Scene” on page 674.

Creating a New Render Scene


In this exercise, you create a render scene to specify the time, date, place, and environment settings used to render the
view.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse.rvt.

Display the interior perspective view


1 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Interior to display the interior perspective view.

Select the render scene settings

2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar, click Settings.


3 In the Scene Selection dialog, select New, and enter Interior Scene for Name.
4 Under Type, select Interior, and click OK.
5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog, under Scene Settings, clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view,
and click Sun.
6 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog, click the Solar Angles tab.
7 Select By Date, Time, and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list.
Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time.

8 Under Date, enter 6 (June) for Month and 6 for Day.


9 Under Time, verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected, and drag the slider to set the time to 8:30 PM.

TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to precisely adjust the minutes.

10 Click the Place tab.


11 Click in the Cities list, and enter bo.
12 Scroll down, and select Boston, MA, USA.
13 Click the Settings tab.
14 Click Save, specify a file location and name for the scene settings, and click Save.
15 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog, click OK.
16 In the Render Scene Settings dialog, under Scene Settings, click Environment.
17 In the Environment dialog, on the Main tab, under Background Color, verify that Automatic Sky is selected.

674 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs


18 Under Advanced, select Ground Plane.
The Ground Plane tab displays.

19 Click Material.
20 In the Material Library, under accurender, click Site.
21 In the Name list, select Grass, Rye, Dark.
22 Click OK twice.
23 In the Render Scene Settings dialog, under Use View’s Section Box, select {3D}.
24 Under Scene Settings, select Summer for Plant Season, and click OK.
25 Proceed to the next exercise, “Defining Daylights and Rendering the View” on page 675.

Defining Daylights and Rendering the View


In this exercise, you define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall and render the view. When you define
daylights for the curtain wall panels, you allow sunlight to pass through the panels when you render the view. You
can select families with transparent materials, such as windows and doors, as daylight sources.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse.rvt.

Define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall


1 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D}.
The 3D view of the building model with the section box is displayed.

2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar, click Daylights.


3 Select the curtain wall on the second floor (Walls: Curtain Wall; Curtain Wall 1).

Render the perspective view

4 In the Project Browser under 3D Views, double-click Interior.


5 On the Design Bar, click Radiate.
6 In the Radiosity Information dialog, click OK.

Defining Daylights and Rendering the View | 675


The radiosity process, which can take several minutes, begins. Light bounce is calculated for each individual
light. When radiate completes, the following rendered view is displayed. The RPC people do not display
in the view until you raytrace them in the next steps.

7 On the Design Bar, click Raytrace.

8 On the Options Bar, select Medium (150 dpi) for Resolution, and click .
The raytraced perspective view is displayed and now includes the RPC people.

9 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
10 Close the exercise file.

By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial, you rendered an exterior and an interior view. You
learned to use both the Radiosity and Raytracing features included in the AccuRender render engine.

676 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs


Creating and Recording Walkthroughs
In this lesson, you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit MEP 2008.
A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default, but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view.

Creating and Editing a Walkthrough

The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path, which is the path that a camera will follow
through your building model. Usually you define the walkthrough path in a plan view, but you can also define it in a
3D, elevation, or section view. The walkthrough path is a spline, and you create it by specifying points that create the
spline. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are
created between the key frames. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. In a plan
view, you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path.

Recording a Walkthrough

After you create a walkthrough, you can record the walkthrough by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with
any available video player independent of your Revit MEP software. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI,
you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough:

■ Wireframe
■ Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines)
■ Shaded or Shaded with Edges
■ AccuRender (Raytrace)

IMPORTANT If you record your walkthrough AVI with the AccuRender display option, you must select or define a scene.

Creating a Walkthrough
In this exercise, you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse.

You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse, proceeds through the dining room, and
ends in the far corner of the living room.
Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Townhouse.rvt.

NOTE Some Imperial values are used by default in this exercise. If you prefer to use Metric values, click Settings ➤ Project
Units, and change unit formats as desired.

Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 677


Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click 1st Floor.
The floor plan of the first floor of the townhouse is displayed.

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Walkthrough.

TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar, right-click in the Design Bar, and click the tab
in the context menu.

3 On the Options Bar, verify that Perspective is selected to create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view.
4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room, and click to specify the start point, or the first
key frame, of the walkthrough.
5 Specify four additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown in the
following illustration.

6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room, on the Options Bar, click

Edit and play the walkthrough

7 In the Project Browser under Views (all), expand Walkthroughs, and double-click Walkthrough 1.

678 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs


The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed, surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown in the
following illustration. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the
walkthrough path is not precisely the same.

8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips.
If it is not, select the crop boundary.
Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size.

9 On the Options Bar, click the dimensions for Size to change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region.
10 In the Crop Region Size dialog, enter 16" for Width and 9" for Height.
11 Under Change, verify Field of view is selected, and click OK.
12 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x), and select the crop boundary.

13 On the Options Bar, click Edit Walkthrough.


The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of
300 frames in the walkthrough.

14 Click .

Creating a Walkthrough | 679


15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog, enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from
300 to 60, and click OK.
16 On the Options Bar, enter 1 for Frame, and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning
(the key frame).

17 Click .
The walkthrough plays. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines.

NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time, press ESC.

18 When the walkthrough stops playing, proceed to the next exercise, “Changing the Walkthrough Path and
Camera Position” on page 680.

Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position


In this exercise, you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that
you created in the previous exercise.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, c_Townhouse.rvt.

Change the properties of the camera


1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans, double-click 1st Floor.
The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor.

2 On the Options Bar, click .


3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, clear Far Clip Active, and click OK.
Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera.

Edit the walkthrough path

4 On the Options Bar, click Edit Walkthrough.

680 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs


The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room.

5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip), and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown in the
following illustration.
Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration so do not be concerned if the camera
displays at a slightly different location.

6 On the Options Bar, select Path for Controls.


Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. You can move any camera target or key frame position.

Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 681


7 Click the third key frame position, and drag it to the location shown in the following illustration.

Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made

8 In the Project Browser, under Walkthroughs, double-click Walkthrough 1.

9 On the Options Bar, click Edit Walkthrough, and then click to play the walkthrough.
10 Proceed to the next exercise, “Recording the Walkthrough” on page 682.

Recording the Walkthrough


In this exercise, you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI. When
you export the walkthrough, you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe, hidden line, shaded, shaded with
edges, or with AccuRender raytracing.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, c_Townhouse.rvt.

1 On the File menu, click Export ➤ Walkthrough.


2 In the Save As dialog, specify a path and a file name for the AVI.
3 Under Output Length, specify 15 for Frames per Second.
4 Under Format, select <Shading> for Display mode, and click Save.
5 In the Video Compression dialog, select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your
system for Compressor, and click OK.

NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. If you are unsure of what
option to use, the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. It produces files that are larger
than compressed files, but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality.

The AVI is recorded.

6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walk-through from the location that you specified in step 3, without
opening Revit MEP 2008.

682 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs


7 Try creating other walkthroughs, specifying the number of frames, reducing the size of the image, perhaps
to 6” wide x 4” height, and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. If you had 150 frames and
a frame rate of 15 seconds, then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10
seconds. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and
smooth movement.
8 If you want to save this exercise, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Recording the Walkthrough | 683


684 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs
Creating Solar Studies
14
The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable

for creating sustainable designs. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of

shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. Interior solar

studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building

during specific times of the day and year.

In this tutorial, you create interior and exterior views of a building information

model to be used in solar studies that you define. You specify settings for summer

and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the

other as a series of images.

More specifically, you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a

building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during

the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year.

685
Creating Views for Solar Studies
In this lesson, you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies.

■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings.
■ A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building.
■ A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building.

Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View


In this exercise, you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis.
Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Solar_Study.rvt.

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click 01 Entry.
2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Camera.
3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click
in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point, as shown.

A 3D view is created. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because
of minor variations in camera placement.

686 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies


4 On the View toolbar, click to reorient the view.
5 In the Dynamic View dialog, click Spin and move the cursor in the drawing area to adjust the view, as
shown.

6 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


7 Click the view boundary to select it, and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view,
if necessary.
8 In the Project Browser, expand 3D Views, right-click 3D View 1, and click Rename.
9 In the Rename View dialog, enter Solar Study - Courtyard View, and click OK.
10 On the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name.
11 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View” on page 687.

Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View


In this exercise, you create a section cutaway view.
Dataset
Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise.

Create section
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 01 Entry.
2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house, as shown.

Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 687


3 On the Design Bar, click Section.
4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and, and then click to the left outside of the house
to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration.

5 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


6 To view the section, double-click the section head.

7 In the Project Browser, expand Sections, right-click Section 1, and click Rename.
8 In the Rename View dialog, enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway, and click OK.

Create 3D section view

9 On the View toolbar, click .

10 On the View toolbar, click to reorient the view.

688 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies


11 In the Dynamic View dialog, click to expand the dialog, and under Orient to a View, select Section:
Section for Solar Study Cutaway.
12 In the Dynamic View dialog, click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view down and to the right, as
shown.

13 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


14 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click {3D}, and click Rename.
15 In the Rename View dialog, enter Solar Study Section Cutaway, and click OK.
16 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level ➤ Coarse, then select Medium, then Fine.

NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse, some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid
and do not cast a shadow. In some cases, changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study.

17 To hide the section box, click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. On the Annotation Categories tab, clear
Section Boxes, and click OK.
18 On the File menu, click Save.
19 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View” on page 689.

Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View


In this exercise, you create a plan cutaway view.

NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. Typical plan views, such as floor
plans and ceiling plans, do not display many elements in 3D, so no shadows will be cast from these elements.

Dataset
Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise.

Create callout
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 01 Entry.
2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Callout.
3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site, including the
house, as shown.

Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 689


4 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Callout of 01 Entry.
5 In the Project Browser, right-click Callout of 01 Entry, and click Rename.
6 In the Rename View dialog, enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway, and click OK.

Create 3D Plan View

7 On the View toolbar, click .

8 On the View toolbar, click to reorient the view.

9 In the Dynamic View dialog click to expand the dialog, and under Orient to a View, select Floor Plan:
Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway.
10 In the Dynamic View dialog, click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view to the right and back to
view the front side, as shown.

11 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


12 Select the section box in the drawing area.
13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level
of the model.
14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the
building, as shown.

690 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies


15 Select the Roof.
16 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category, so you can see into the building
from the top.

17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate.
18 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click {3D}, and click Rename.
19 In the Rename View dialog, enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway, and click OK.
20 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level ➤ Fine.
21 On the File menu, click Save.

Display study views

22 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in
this lesson:

■ Solar Study - Courtyard View


■ Solar Study Plan Cutaway
■ Solar Study Section Cutaway

These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial.

Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 691


Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations
In this lesson, you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice, and preview the effects of each study as an
animation. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light
and shadows on the buildings and site.

Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice


In this exercise, you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice.
Dataset
Continue to use the customized c_solar_study.rvt dataset you used in the previous lesson.

Create summer solstice study


1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click Solar Study - Courtyard
View.
2 On the View Control Bar, click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.
3 Select Cast Shadows.
You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. For this study,
leave the slider at 50.

4 Under Sun and Shadows Settings, click .


The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. You can create a still, single-day, or multi-day solar study.

5 Click the Single-Day tab.


For the Single-Day solar study, you specify the location, date, and time range, as well as a time interval for
the frames of the solar animation.

6 Click the Multi-Day tab.


For the Multi-Day solar study, you specify the location, date range, and time, as well as a time interval for
the frames of the solar animation.

7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. Click the Single-Day tab.
8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study - Boston, MA, USA is selected, and click Duplicate.
9 In the Name dialog, enter Summer Solstice, Los Angeles, and click OK.

10 Under Place, click .

11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, for City, click , select Los Angeles, CA, USA, and click OK.
Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project.

692 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies


12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog:

■ For Date, select June 22, 2006.


■ For Time Range, verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected.

NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset, you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study.

■ For Time Interval, verify that the value is set to 15 minutes.

13 Select Ground Plane at Level.


Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. You can select the level to be used for shadow display.

14 In this case, you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. Clear Ground
Plane at Level.

Create winter solstice study

15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, confirm that Summer Solstice, Los Angeles is selected, and click
Duplicate.
16 In the Name dialog, enter Winter Solstice, Los Angeles, and click OK.
17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, for Date, select December 22, 2006, and click OK.
18 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click OK.
19 On the File menu, click Save.
20 Proceed to the next exercise, “Previewing Solar Study Animation” on page 693.

Previewing Solar Study Animation


In this exercise, you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise.
Dataset
Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise.

Preview winter solstice animation


1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study - Courtyard View is currently displayed.
2 On the View Control Bar, click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.

3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, under Sun and Shadows Settings, click .
4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, on the Single-Day tab, select Winter Solstice, Los Angeles, and
click OK.
5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click OK.
6 On the View Control Bar, click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study.
7 On the Options Bar, under Frame, you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation:

■ Under Frame, enter 10 and press ENTER.


■ Under Frame, enter 20 and press ENTER.

8 On the Options Bar, click the control buttons to preview the animation:

■ To display the previous key frame, click .

■ To display the next key frame, click .

■ To display the previous sequential frame, click .

Previewing Solar Study Animation | 693


■ To display the next sequential frame, click .

■ To play the animation from start to finish, click .

NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar.

Preview summer solstice animation

9 On the View Control Bar, click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.

10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, under Sun and Shadows Settings, click .
11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, on the Single-Day tab, select Summer Solstice, Los Angeles, and
click OK.
12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click OK.
13 On the View Control Bar, click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study.

14 On the Options Bar, click .


The solar study animation plays, showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date
specified.

Exporting Solar Studies


In this lesson, you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. AVI files are standalone video files that can
be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of
PNG format images. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. PNG format images can be easily
displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail.

Exporting the Study as AVI


In this exercise, you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a
cutaway view as an AVI video file.
Dataset
Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.rvt dataset you saved in the previous lesson.

Annotate view for solar study


1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 01 Entry.
2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house.
3 Label areas in the house:

■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Text.


■ Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area, approximately as shown.
■ Click outside of the text box to end the command.
■ Click and enter Dining, approximately as shown.

694 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies


4 Sketch rooms:

■ On the Design Bar, click Lines.

■ On the Options Bar, click .


■ Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area, as shown.
■ Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area, as shown.

NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. Sketching the
living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor
plan helps to determine the best layout.

5 In the Project Browser, expand 3D Views, and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway.
6 On the View Control Bar, click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.
7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, verify that Cast Shadows is selected.

8 Under Sun and Shadows Settings, click .


9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, on the Single-Day tab, select Summer Solstice, Los Angeles, and
click OK.
10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click OK.
11 To display the section box, click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. On the Annotation Categories tab,
select Section Boxes, and click OK.

Exporting the Study as AVI | 695


12 In the drawing area, select the section box.

13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang, as
shown.

NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control.

14 Click outside of the section box, and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area, if necessary.
15 To hide the section box, click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. On the Annotation Categories tab, clear
Section Boxes, and click OK.

Export as AVI

16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study.


17 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

■ Click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop.
■ For File name, enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway - Los Angeles.
■ For Save as type, select AVI Files.
■ Under Output Length, select Frame range, and enter 5 to 50.
■ For Frames per second, verify that the value is set to 15.
■ Under Format, for Model Graphics Style, verify that Hidden Line is selected.
■ For Dimensions, enter 450 in the first field (width), and click in the second field (height) to see the
value dynamically changed.
To maintain the proportions of the frame, you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated
automatically. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions.

696 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies


NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. Limiting
the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames.

18 In the Save As dialog, click Save.


19 In the Video Compression dialog, for Compressor, verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected, and
click OK.
The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop.

NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. The AVI can then typically be played from
within the zip file.

20 On the File menu, click Save.


21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Exporting a Study as PNG” on page 697.

Exporting a Study as PNG


In this lesson, you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping
(PNG format) graphics. To view the animation, you open each image, or frame, of the animation separately.
Dataset
Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise.

Export as PNG
1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed.
2 On the View Control Bar, click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.

3 Under Sun and Shadows Settings, click .


4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, on the Single-Day tab, select Winter Solstice, Los Angeles, and
click OK.
5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click OK.
6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study.
7 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

■ Click the Desktop icon.


■ For File name, enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway - Los Angeles.
■ For Save as type, select PNG.
■ Under Output Length, select Frame range, and enter 5 to 10.
■ For Frames per second, verify that the value is set to 15.
■ Under Format, for Model Graphics Style, verify that Hidden Line is selected.
■ For Dimensions, enter 450 in the first field (width), and click in the second field (height) to see the
value dynamically changed.

NOTE When you export to PNG, or any single-frame format, such as JPEG, TIFF, BMP, or GIF, it is recommended
that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files, depending on the Frame
Range. In this example, the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop.

8 In the Save As dialog, click Save.


The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. The resulting PNG images are date and time
stamped, as shown:

Exporting a Study as PNG | 697


9 On the File menu, click Save.

Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study


In this lesson, you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the
inside of the building.

Creating an Internal Plan Study


In this exercise, you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during
the warmest part of the day.
Dataset
Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.rvt dataset you saved in the previous lesson.

Create plan interior view


1 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway.

2 Select the section box in the drawing area.

698 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies


NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen.

3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts, as shown.

4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top.

5 Select the roof, and on the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category.
Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building.

Creating an Internal Plan Study | 699


Create multi-day solar study

6 To hide the section box, click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. On the Annotation Categories tab, clear
Section Boxes, and click OK.
7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar:

■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On.


■ Click Detail Level ➤ Fine.

8 On the View Control Bar, click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.

9 On the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, under Sun and Shadows Settings, click .
10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, click the Multi-Day tab.
11 Select Multi Day Solar Study - Boston, MA, USA, and click Duplicate.
12 In the Name dialog, for File name enter 2pm - Los Angeles - Week Interval, and click OK.
13 Specify values for the multi-day study:

■ For Time, specify 2:00 pm.


■ For Time Interval, select One week.
■ Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain, and click OK.

14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click OK.


Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day.

15 Export the animation:

■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study.


■ In the Save As dialog, for name enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway.
■ Click the Desktop icon, and click Save.

16 In the Video Compression dialog, for Compressor, select Full Frames (Uncompressed), and click OK.
The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop.

17 On the View Control Bar, click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off.


18 On the File menu, click Save.

Orienting to True North for Solar Studies


In this lesson, you compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed
to True North.

700 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies


Orienting to True North
Drafting convention is that project north is the top of the view. In this exercise, you create still solar studies and observe
that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. Then, you
change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy.
Dataset
Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise.

View still solar studies


1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Plan Cutaway is displayed in the drawing area.

2 On the View Control Bar, click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.


3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, select Cast Shadows.

4 Under Sun and Shadows Settings, click .


5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, click the Still tab, and select Winter Solstice, and click OK.
6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click Apply.
Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view.

7 Under Sun and Shadows Settings, click .


8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, on the Still tab, select Summer Solstice.
9 Under Date and Time, specify 11:00 AM for time, and click OK.

NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting, so you may need to make your own adjustment for
specific studies. For example, to see the sun at its highest point on June 22, you would set the time to 1:00 PM
rather than 12:00 PM.

10 Under Sun and Shadows Settings, click .


11 Under Date and Time, change the time back to 12:00 PM, and click OK.

Orienting to True North | 701


12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click OK.
13 On the View Control Bar, click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.

14 Under Sun and Shadows Settings, click .


15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, click the Still tab, and select Winter Solstice, and click OK.
16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click OK.

Rotate project to True North

17 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 01 Entry.

NOTE You must go to a plan view to set True North and you must change the view graphics to True North
before you can change the angle value.

18 Orient the project to True North:

■ Right-click in the drawing area, and select View Properties.


■ In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Orientation, select True North, and click OK.
■ Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North.
■ On the Options Bar, in the Angle from Project to True North field, enter 45 and press ENTER to set the
angle of rotation.

Notice that the project rotates in the view.

702 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies


NOTE Settings for the location and orientation, including the angle from True North, are saved with the project.

19 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway.
20 Click View menu ➤ Refresh.
Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North.

21 On the View Control Bar, click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.

22 Under Sun and Shadows Settings, click .


23 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, click the Still tab, select Summer Solstice, and click Apply.

24 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, click the Single-Day tab, click Summer Solstice, Los Angeles, and
click OK.
25 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click OK.

Export animated solar study

26 Export the animation:

■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study.


■ In the Save As dialog, for File name, enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway.
■ For Save as type, verify that AVI Files is selected.

Orienting to True North | 703


■ Under Format, for Dimensions, enter 600 in the first field, and click in the second dimension field to
see the value calculated automatically.
■ Click the Desktop icon, and click Save.

27 In the Video Compression dialog, for Compressor, verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected, and
click OK.
The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop.

28 Once you are finished with the study, it is a best practice to change the view graphics setting back to Project
North for documentation and annotation purposes:

■ In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 01 Entry.


■ Right-click in the drawing area, and select View Properties.
■ In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Orientation, select Project North, and click OK.

NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for
this project.

29 On the File menu, click Save.

Rendering Interior Shadow Views


In this lesson, you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. Since a rendered
image is temporary, you also capture the image and export it as a JPEG file for future use. JPEG format images can be
easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail.

Rendering an Interior View


Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the
view. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. Rendered views do not have this limitation.
Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. Refer to “Rendering Views and Creating
Walkthroughs” on page 655 for additional information on rendering.
In this exercise, you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering, capturing
it, and exporting it as a JPEG image.
Dataset
Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise.

1 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway.
2 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click each of the following views to review the available
views for rendering:

■ to house from SW
■ to west facade of house
■ living area
This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room.

3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar, click Raytrace.


4 Render the scene:

■ On the Options Bar, for Scene, select Winter solstice 2pm in LA.
■ On the Options Bar, for Resolution, select Draft (75 dpi).
■ On the Options Bar, click GO.
The scene is rendered in full color at draft resolution.

704 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies


■ On the Options Bar, for Resolution, select Presentation (300 dpi).
■ On the Options Bar, click GO.
The scene is rendered in high resolution. Notice that you can clearly see where light enters the windows
and how the shadows fall on the floor.

5 On the Design Bar, click Capture Rendering.

NOTE Rendered views are temporary, so use the Capture Rendering option to save the view in the project.

6 Export the image as a JPEG:

■ on the Design Bar, click Export Image.


■ In the Save As dialog, for Save as Type, select JPEG, and click Save.

7 Review some captured images of the building. In the Project Browser, under Renderings, double-click each
of the following images:

■ living area summer


■ living area winter
■ to house and studio summer solstice

8 On the File menu, click Save.

Rendering an Interior View | 705


706 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies
Presentation Views
15
In this tutorial, you learn various methods of effectively communicating your

design intent to your audience by creating presentation views.

The architect's primary goal in documentation is to communicate the intent of

the design. Whether the audience is the general contractor, a consultant, an

outside reviewer, or the client, tailoring the presentation is just as important as

the accuracy of the content. A majority of tools in Revit MEP 2008 are intended

to describe number, length, type, and other quantifiable elements within the

context of contract documents. There remain many options in the software that

do not quantify specific dimensions so much as they explain the subjective

complexity of the work. To express texture beyond material specifics, and line

quality without the measurement of its thickness is to transcend "building" and

to recognize the "architecture."

In Revit MEP, there are several options for expressing the architecture. They include

the Accurender® Plug-in for Rendering, Advanced Model Graphics, the Linework

Tool, and Section Boxes. There are two directions you can choose when organizing

presentation graphics: realism and stylistics. In this series of exercises, you explore

the stylistic approach. For the realistic approach, tutorials on the Accurender

features of Revit MEP can be found under “Rendering Views and Creating

Walkthroughs” on page 655.

In this tutorial, you learn several graphic techniques using these above mentioned

tools to create an "analytique." The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of

representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the

relationship among plans, sections, elevations, and details. You can use the

analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular

707
building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. Using the pre-built building model,

Co-house, you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views.

708 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views


Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique
In this lesson, you create a presentation floor plan. In order for the floor plan to fit into the analytique, you create a
copy of the plan, change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation, and place the plan on a dark
background for contrast.

Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique


In this exercise, you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique.

Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Cohouse.rvt.

Copy the floor plan


1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, right-click 2nd Flr. Cnst, and click Duplicate
View ➤ Duplicate.
A copy of the floor plan is created and opened.

Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 709


2 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. Cnst, and click Rename.
3 In the Rename View dialog, enter Presentation Second Floor Plan, and click OK.

Modify visibility/graphics

4 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.

TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active, exit the menu, click in the drawing area, and click View
menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again.

5 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog, click the Annotation Categories tab, and clear Show annotation
categories in this view.
This turns off the visibility of all tags, dimensions, sections, elevations, and so on in this view.

6 Click the Model Categories tab.


7 Under Visibility, expand the Stairs category, and clear DOWN Text, Down Arrow, UP Text, Up Arrow.

NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation.

8 Click OK.
Notice that no annotations display in this view.

Modify view scale

9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area, click the Scale control and select 1:100.
Notice the immediate change in the line weights; this represents the view getting smaller.

10 On the File menu, click Save As.

710 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views


11 In the Save As directory, navigate to the folder of your choice, name the project
m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt, and click Save.
12 Proceed with the next exercise, “Using Advanced Model Graphics” on page 711.

Using Advanced Model Graphics


In this exercise, you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan
view.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.

Modify advanced model graphics settings


1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view, double-click it in the Project Browser.
2 On the View Control Bar, click the Advanced Model Graphics control, and click Advanced Model Graphics.

Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view.

3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, specify the following:

■ Select Hidden Line for Style.


■ Under Shadows Properties, select Cast Shadows.

NOTE Shadows can be cast in all view styles except Wireframe.

■ Under Intensity, specify 35 for Shadow.


The Shadow intensity dictates the darkness of the shadow display. The higher the number, the darker
the shadows.

■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings, click .


The Sun and Shadows Settings are shared with Accurender and can also be used when rendering.

4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, on the Still tab, select Sun and Shadow Settings.
5 Under Settings, select By Date, Time and Place.

6 Under Settings, click for Place.


Within a Project, you can specify one place where the project resides within the world. At that place, you
can create, modify, and delete multiple locations in order to analyze a single prototype.

7 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click the Place tab.
8 Select Boston, MA, USA for City, and click OK.

Using Advanced Model Graphics | 711


NOTE For this step, you can enter any city you wish; however, be aware that if you enter a different city, most
of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen depending on the settings
that you choose.

9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, specify 10/27/2006 for Date and 1:00 PM for Time.
10 Select Ground Plane at Level, and select 1st Flr. Cnst.
This is the level the shadow will be cast upon.

11 Click OK.
12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click OK.

Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. This gives the plan depth and creates a
sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view.

Turn off the ground plane shadows

13 On the View Control Bar, click the Advanced Model Graphics control, and click Advanced Model Graphics.

14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, under Sun and Shadows Settings, click .
15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, under Settings, clear Ground Plane at Level, and click OK.
This turns off the shadows cast on the ground.

16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click OK.

This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet.

17 On the File menu, click Save.


18 Proceed with the next exercise, “Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet” on page 713.

712 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views


Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet
In this exercise, you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast.

Create a new sheet


1 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Sheet.

TIP If the View tab is not available, right-click the Design Bar, and click View.

2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, select Arch Portrait, and click OK.
Notice the blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented.

3 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Add View.


4 In the Views dialog, select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan, and click Add View to Sheet.
The viewport displays at the tip of the cursor.

5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown, and click to place it.

6 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


7 Zoom in around the viewport, and notice a view title displays.

Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 713


Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique, you need to create a new viewport type that
does not display the view title.

Create a new viewport type

8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet.

9 On the Options Bar, click .


10 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
11 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate.
12 In the Name dialog, enter Presentation, and click OK.
13 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, select No for Show Title, and click OK.
14 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK.
Notice the viewport no longer displays a view title.

For this analytique, you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. To accomplish this, you
will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view.

Create a solid fill background for contrast

15 Right-click the viewport, and click Activate View.


This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet.

714 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views


16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Filled Region.
You enter sketch mode where you define the line type, fill properties, and the boundary of the region.

17 In the Type Selector, select Invisible Lines.

18 On the Options Bar, click .


19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. The space between the perimeter of the building model and
each line should be equidistant.

Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region, you must define the inner perimeter
by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model.

20 On the Options Bar, click , and select Chain.


21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model, draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of
the building model as shown. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes.

TIP Use care when sketching this chain. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details, and you should
take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. If necessary, use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or
overlapping intersections.

TIP If you have difficulty sketching using invisible lines, create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide
lines. When you are finished drawing the chain, select the entire chain (use TAB) and change the line type back
to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector.

22 On the Design Bar, click Region Properties.


23 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
24 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate.
25 In the Name dialog, enter Solid Black, and click OK.

26 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Fill Pattern, click .

Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 715


27 In the Fill Patterns dialog, under Name, scroll down, select Solid Fill, and click OK.
28 In the Type Properties dialog, verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black, and click OK.
29 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK.
30 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast.

Name the sheet

31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet, and click Deactivate View.


32 Right-click the edge of the sheet, and click View Properties.
33 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, enter Presentation for Sheet Name, and click OK.
34 On the File menu, click Save.
35 Proceed with the next lesson, “Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique” on page 716.

Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique


In this lesson, you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise.

Preparing the Elevation Analytique


In this exercise, you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view.

716 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views


Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.

Copy and rename the elevation view


1 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand Elevations, right-click South, and click Duplicate
View ➤ Duplicate.
A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view.

2 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, right-click Copy of South, and click Rename.
3 In the Rename View dialog, enter Presentation South Elevation, and click OK.

Modify visibility/graphic overrides

4 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.

TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active, exit the menu, click in the drawing area, and click View
menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again.

5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog, on the Model Categories tab, under Visibility, click in the Walls
row. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls, click Override.
6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog, under Pattern Overrides, clear Visible, and click OK.
This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view.

7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog, under Visibility, scroll up, expand the Doors category, and clear
Elevation Swing.
8 Click the Annotation Categories tab, and clear Show annotation categories in this view.
This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view.

9 Click OK.

Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 717


Apply advanced model graphics

10 On the View Control Bar, click the Advanced Model Graphics control, and click Advanced Model Graphics.
Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view.

11 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, verify that Hidden Line is the selected Style.
12 Under Shadow Properties, select Cast Shadows.
13 Under Intensity, specify 35 for Shadow.

14 Under Sun and Shadows Settings, click .


15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, click Duplicate.
16 In the Name dialog, enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation, and click OK.
17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, under Settings, select By Date, Time and Place.
18 Specify 2:30 PM for Time, and click OK.
By changing the angle of the sun, you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view.

19 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click OK.

20 On the File menu, click Save.


21 Proceed with the next exercise, “Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet” on
page 718.

Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet


In this exercise, you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet.

718 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views


Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.

Add a view to the sheet


1 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand Sheets (all), and double-click A105 - Presentation.
2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Add View.
3 In the Views dialog, select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation, and click Add View to Sheet.
4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown.

TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane.

Notice the viewport displays a view title.

Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 719


5 In the Type Selector, select Viewport: Presentation.
Notice the view title no longer displays.

6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation
floor plan.
7 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

720 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views


8 On the File menu, click Save.
9 Proceed with the next lesson, “Adding Section Views to the Analytique” on page 721.

Adding Section Views to the Analytique


In this lesson, you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. You add silhouette edges and
filled regions to the views. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views.

Preparing a Section View for the Analytique


In this exercise, you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique.

Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 721


Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.

Add a section in a plan view


1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 1st Flr. Cnst.
2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Section.
3 On the Options Bar, select 1: 100 for Scale.

TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it.

4 Add the section shown below.


The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building
(lower wall). Adjust the controls to modify the extents, and use the flip arrows if necessary.

Section 2 is added to the building model.

Create a callout of the section view

5 In the Project Browser, expand Sections (Callout 1), and double-click Section 2.

To fit correctly in the analytique, this view needs to be rotated 180 degrees. To accomplish this, you will
create a callout around the building model components within the section view.

722 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views


6 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Callout.
7 On the Options Bar, select 1 : 100 for Scale.
8 Draw a callout around all the building model components within the section view as shown.
Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so it is readily
identifiable.

Rename the callout

9 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

TIP You can also open the callout in the Project Browser by double-clicking Callout of Section 2 under Sections
(Callout 1).

10 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Callout 1), right-click Callout of Section 2, and click Rename.
11 In the Rename View dialog, enter Presentation Section 2, and click OK.
12 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Callout 1), double-click Presentation Section 2.

Modify Visibility/Graphic Overrides

13 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.


14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog, click the Model Categories tab.
15 Under Visibility, click in the Walls row. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls, click Override.
16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog, under Pattern Overrides, clear Visible, and click OK.
This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view.

Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 723


17 Under Visibility, scroll up, expand the Doors category, and clear Elevation Swing.
18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories:

■ Casework
■ Ceilings
■ Furniture
■ Lighting Fixtures
■ Specialty Equipment

19 Click the Annotation Categories tab, and clear Show annotation categories in this view.
This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view.

20 Click OK.

Hide the crop boundary

21 Select the crop boundary.


When you select the crop boundary, Revit MEP displays 2 boundaries. The inner crop boundary shows the
crop region for model elements. The outer crop boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop
region for annotation elements.

22 On the Options Bar, click .


23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, clear Crop Region Visible, clear Annotation Crop, and
click OK.
Notice that the crop regions no longer display.

724 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views


24 On the File menu, click Save.
25 Proceed with the next exercise, “Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View” on page 725.

Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View


In this exercise, you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. In addition, you apply silhouette
edges to contrast the edges of the view.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.

Add shadows to the section view


1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view, open the Project Browser and, under Sections (Callout 1),
double-click Presentation Section 2.
2 On the View Control Bar, click the Advanced Model Graphics control, and click Advanced Model Graphics.
3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, specify the following:

■ Select Hidden Line for Style.


■ Under Shadows Properties, select Cast Shadows.
■ Under Intensity, specify 35 for Shadow.
■ Click Apply.
Notice that the shadows displayed do not offer much contrast.

TIP You may need to move the dialog off to the side in order to see the view.

Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 725


In the steps that follow, you create a new Sun and Shadow setting in order to make a presentation
view with more contrast.

■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings, click .

4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, click Duplicate.


5 In the Name dialog, enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section, and click OK.
6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, under Settings, select Directly, specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees,
specify an Altitude of 70 degrees, select Relative to View, and click OK.
7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click OK.
Notice the shadows on the view provide more contrast and a sense of depth.

TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of
the section line in the previous exercise.

Apply silhouette edges

8 On the View Control Bar, click the Advanced Model Graphics control, and click Advanced Model Graphics.
9 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, under Silhouette Edges, select Override Silhouettes.
10 Under Silhouette Edges, select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style, and click OK.

NOTE The line style, Silhouette Edges, was added to this dataset for training purposes. You can modify this line
style by selecting Line Styles from the Settings menu.

Notice application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model.

TIP You can also use the linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges.

11 On the File menu, click Save.


12 Proceed with the next exercise, “Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique” on page 727.

726 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views


Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique
In this exercise, you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180 degrees.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.

Add the view to the presentation sheet


1 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A105 - Presentation.
2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Add View.
3 In the Views dialog, select Section: Presentation Section 2, and click Add View to Sheet.
4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown, and click to place the selected view.

5 In the Type Selector, select Viewport: Presentation.


The view title no longer displays.

6 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 727


Notice the section needs to be rotated 180 degrees. In the steps that follow, you accomplish this by rotating
the callout within the section view.

Rotate the callout view

7 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Callout 1), double-click Section 2.


8 Select the callout that you added previously.

9 On the Edit toolbar, click .


To rotate an object, you click to specify the start radius, move the cursor in the direction of the rotation,
and either enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius.

10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. Using a clock as a reference, specify 3 o’clock as the
rotation start point.
11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise, and enter 180 to specify the number of degrees of
rotation, and press ENTER.

728 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views


After you enter the rotation value and press Enter, the callout rotates 180 degrees. Notice the extents need
to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model.

12 Drag the callout extents until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as
shown.

Reposition the viewport

13 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A105 - Presentation.


Notice that the Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180 degrees and now needs to be repositioned.

14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport, and drag it up and to the left as shown.

Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 729


15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
16 On the File menu, click Save.
17 Proceed with the next exercise, “Working with a Presentation View Template” on page 730.

Working with a Presentation View Template


In this exercise, you create a view template for presentation views in order to reduce repetitive work while creating
subsequent views. After applying the view template to a new section view, you add the modified view to the presentation
sheet.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.

Create a presentation view template


1 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Callout 1), double-click Presentation Section 2.
2 On the View menu, click Create View Template from View.
3 In the New View Template dialog, enter Presentation, and click OK.
4 In the View Templates dialog, click OK.

730 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views


Create a new presentation view

5 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Type 1), right-click Section 1, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
6 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Type 1), right-click Copy of Section 1, and click Rename.
7 In the Rename View dialog, enter Presentation Section 1, and click OK.
Now, rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique, you can simply apply the
presentation view template.

Apply presentation view template

8 On the View menu, click Apply View Template.


9 In the Select View Template dialog, select Presentation, and click OK.
Notice the furniture, lighting fixtures, annotations, and elevation swings no longer display.

Add the view to the presentation sheet

10 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A105 - Presentation.


11 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Add View.
12 In the Views dialog, select Section: Presentation Section 1, and click Add View to Sheet.
13 Place it to the left of the plan view.
14 In the Type Selector, select Viewport: Presentation.
15 Right-click the viewport, and click Activate View.
16 On the View menu, click View Properties.
Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet, you can use a view property to
accomplish the same thing.

Working with a Presentation View Template | 731


17 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select 90 degrees Counterclockwise for Rotation on Sheet,
and click OK.
18 Right-click the viewport, and click Deactivate View.
19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown.

20 On the File menu, click Save.


21 Proceed with the next exercise, “Working in a Callout Analytique” on page 732.

Working in a Callout Analytique


Typically, traditional analytiques contain a detail, such as a tracery window or column capital. In this exercise, you
create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique.

732 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views


Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.

Create callout
1 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Type 1), double-click Section 1.
2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Callout.
3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown.
After you add the callout, click Modify, select the callout, and modify the extents and the callout head
location as shown.

4 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Callout 1), right-click Callout of Section 1, and click Rename.
5 In the Rename View dialog, enter Presentation Callout, and click OK.
6 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Callout 1), double-click Presentation Callout.

Working in a Callout Analytique | 733


7 Select the crop boundary and adjust the bottom so that there is a small gap as shown.
This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties.


9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, clear Crop Region Visible, clear Annotation Crop, and
click OK.

734 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views


Add callout to presentation sheet

10 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A105 - Presentation.


11 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Add View.
12 In the Views dialog, select Section: Presentation Callout, and click Add View to Sheet.
13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet.
14 In the Type Selector, select Viewport: Presentation.
15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Modify presentation callout on sheet

16 Right-click the presentation callout viewport, and click Activate View.


17 On the View menu, click View Properties.
18 In the Element Properties dialog, select Custom for View Scale, specify a value of 22 for Scale Value 1, and
click OK.

19 Right-click the callout presentation view, and click Deactivate View.


20 Select the callout presentation viewport, and move it into the position shown below.

Working in a Callout Analytique | 735


NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet, activate the viewport, turn on the crop
region from the view properties dialog, and make adjustments as necessary. When finished, hide the crop region
and deactivate the viewport.

The composition set for the analytique is now complete. In the steps that follow, you add a heavy base to
the floors and a poche to the base. Although there are several methods you could use to create these areas
of contrast, the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout.

Apply filled regions to presentation callout

21 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Callout 1), double-click Presentation Callout.
22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Filled Region.
23 On the Design Bar, click Region Properties.
24 In the Element Properties dialog, select Solid Black for Type, and click OK.
25 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar, sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below.
Click Finish Sketch on the Design Bar when you are finished.
You can sketch all of them at once or one filled region at a time. You do not have to replicate the image
exactly. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as it is a stylized
representation of the architectural forms.

736 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views


26 On the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A105 - Presentation.

Add poche region

27 Right-click the presentation callout viewport, and click Activate View.


28 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Filled Region.

29 On the Options Bar, click , and sketch the rectangle shown below.

Working in a Callout Analytique | 737


30 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
Notice the entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled
region.

31 On the View menu, click View Properties.


32 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, select Crop Region Visible, and click OK.
33 Select the crop region, and drag the left and bottom extent until the entire poche region displays.

738 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views


34 On the View menu, click View Properties.
35 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, clear Crop Region Visible, and click OK.
36 Right-click the presentation callout viewport, and click Deactivate View.

37 On the File menu, click Save.


38 Proceed with the next lesson, “Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes” on page 739.

Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes


In this lesson, you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. You then add
perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet.

Creating Cutaway Isometric Views


In this exercise, you create three similar isometric views with different cutaways, and apply shadows to the views. You
then add each view to the presentation sheet.

Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 739


Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.

Create southwest isometric view


1 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Isometric.

2 On the View menu, click Orient ➤ Southwest.


3 On the View Control Bar, click the Scale control, and click 1 : 200.

Apply advanced model graphics

4 On the View Control Bar, click the Advanced Model Graphics control, and click Advanced Model Graphics.
5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, specify the following:

■ Select Hidden Line for Style.


■ Under Shadows Properties, select Cast Shadows.
■ Under Intensity, specify 35 for Shadow.

■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings, click .

6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, click Duplicate.


7 In the Name dialog, enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric, and click OK.

740 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views


8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, under Settings, specify the following:

■ Select Directly.
■ Specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees.
■ Specify an Altitude of 45 degrees.
■ Select Relative to View.
■ Select Ground Plane at Level.
■ Select 1st Flr. Cnst. in the list.

9 Click OK.
10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, under Silhouette Edges, select Override Silhouettes.
11 Under Silhouette Edges, select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style, and click OK.

Rename and duplicate isometric views

12 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click Isometric, and click Rename.
13 In the Rename View dialog, enter Isometric 1, and click OK.
14 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click Isometric 1, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
15 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click Copy of Isometric 1, and click Rename.
16 In the Rename View dialog, enter Isometric 2, and click OK.

Add a section box to Isometric 2

17 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Isometric 2.


18 On the View menu, click View Properties.
19 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, select Section Box, and click OK.
Notice the section box that displays around the building model.

Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 741


20 Select the section box.
Notice the grips that display on each face of the section box. These allow you to modify the extents of the
section box.

TIP Notice there is also a rotation symbol. You can use this to rotate the section box.

21 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box, and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway
through the second floor as shown.
When you are finished, click Modify on the Design Bar.

Before turning off the visibility of the section box, make a duplicate of the view.

22 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click Isometric 2, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
23 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click Copy of Isometric 2, and click Rename.

742 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views


24 In the Rename View dialog, enter Isometric 3, and click OK.
25 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Isometric 2.
26 To hide the section box, click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.
27 On the Annotation Categories tab, clear Section Boxes, and click OK.
Notice the section box no longer displays.

Modify the section box of Isometric 3

28 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Isometric 3.


29 Select the section box.
30 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box, and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway
through the first floor as shown.
When you are finished, click Modify on the Design Bar.

NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box, the stairs and railings may display.
In such a case, either adjust the plane location, or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the
Visibility/Graphics dialog.

31 To hide the section box, click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.


32 On the Annotation Categories tab, clear Section Boxes, and click OK.
Next, you stack the three isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the
continual erosion of the structure.

Add isometric views to the presentation sheet

33 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A105 - Presentation.


34 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, drag Isometric 3 underneath the left section view as shown and,
in the Type Selector, select Viewport: Presentation.

Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 743


35 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, drag Isometric 2 underneath Isometric 3 as shown and, in the
Type Selector, select Viewport: Presentation.

36 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, drag Isometric 1 underneath Isometric 2 as shown and, in the
Type Selector, select Viewport: Presentation.
Notice the filled region partially covers the view. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow.

744 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views


Modify filled region boundaries

37 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport, and click Activate View.


38 Select the poche filled region, and on the Options Bar, click Edit.
39 On the Design Bar, click Region Properties.
40 In the Element Properties dialog, select Concrete for Type, and then click Edit/New.
41 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Transparent for Background.
42 Click OK twice.
This will make it easier to draw lines. You change this back to solid fill when you are done.

43 On the Design Bar, click Lines.


44 Using the drawing tools, redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1.
You may need to use the split tools and trim tools to modify lines along the way. The image below shows
the lines redrawn.

45 On the Design Bar, click Region Properties.


46 In the Element Properties dialog, select Solid Black for Type, and click OK.
47 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
48 Right-click the Presentation Callout view, and click Deactivate View.

Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 745


49 On the File menu, click Save.
50 Proceed with the next exercise, “Creating Cutaway Perspective Views” on page 746.

Creating Cutaway Perspective Views


In this exercise, you create the final view for the analytique, a cutaway perspective view. After adding shadows and
silhouette edges to the view, you add it to the presentation sheet.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.

Create a perspective view


1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 1st Flr. Cnst.
2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Camera.
Adding a camera is a two-click process: first you specify the eye location, then you specify the eye direction
and range.

3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown, and specify the range and direction just
outside the upper right corner of the building model.

746 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views


The view opens immediately.

4 Adjust the crop boundary so the entire building model fits within it.

Add shadows and silhouette edges

5 On the View Control Bar, click the Advanced Model Graphics control, and click Advanced Model Graphics.
6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, specify the following:

■ Select Hidden Line for Style.


■ Under Shadows Properties, select Cast Shadows.
■ Under Intensity, specify 35 for Shadow.

■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings, click .

Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 747


7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric for Name, and click OK.
8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, under Silhouette Edges, select Override Silhouettes.
9 Under Silhouette Edges, select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style, and click OK.

Add a section box

10 On the View menu, click View Properties.


11 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, select Section Box, and click OK.
A section box now cuts through the building model.

12 Select the section box.


Notice the controls that display on each plane.

13 Use the section controls to modify the location of each respective plane until your view resembles the
following image. You may need to adjust the location of the crop boundary as well.

748 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views


14 Select the crop boundary.
15 On the Options Bar, click Size.
Because scale does not apply to perspective views, you must specify the actual size of the image.

16 In the Crop Region Size dialog, under Change, select Scale (locked proportions).
17 Under Model Crop Size, enter 165 mm for Width, and click OK.
18 To hide the crop region, click View menu ➤ View Properties. Clear Crop Region Visible, and click OK.
19 To hide the section box, click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. On the Annotation Categories tab, clear
Section Boxes, and click OK.

Add the view to the presentation sheet

20 On the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A105 - Presentation.


21 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet, and place it in the
upper-left corner as shown. After placing it, go to the Type Selector and select Viewport : Presentation.

Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 749


22 On the File menu, click Save.
23 Proceed with the next exercise, “Annotating the Analytique” on page 750.

Annotating the Analytique


In this exercise, you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.

Create new text types


1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Text.

2 On the Options Bar, click .


3 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
4 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate.
5 In the Name dialog, enter Title, and click OK.
6 In the Type Properties dialog, under Text, specify a text size of 40 mm, select a font, and click OK.
7 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
8 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate.
9 In the Name dialog, enter Description, and click OK.
10 In the Type Properties dialog, under Text, specify a text size of 6 mm, select the same font as the title, and
click OK.
11 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK.

Add a title and description

12 In the Type Selector, select Text : Title.


13 Add a title to the analytique as shown.

750 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views


14 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text.
15 In the Type Selector, select Text : Description.
16 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown.

17 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


18 On the File menu, click Save.
This completes the Presentation Views tutorial.

Annotating the Analytique | 751


752 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views
Creating Families
4

753
754 | Chapter 16 Creating Families
About Families and the
Family Editor 16
All elements in Revit MEP 2008 are “family based.” The term family describes a

powerful concept used throughout Revit MEP to help you manage your data and

make changes easily. Each family element can have multiple types defined within

it, each with a different size, shape, material set, or other parameter variables as

designed by the family creator. Even though various types within a family can

look completely different, they are still related and come from a single source,

thus the term family. Changes to a family type definition ripple through the

project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type

within the project. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and

effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date.

In this tutorial, you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor.

755
Using Families and the Family Editor
One of the many advantages of using Revit MEP is the ability to create your own families of components without
having to learn a complex programming language. Using the Family Editor, you create a family within predefined
templates that contain the intelligent objects needed to create the particular family type. You provide the information
necessary to uniquely describe the family geometry.
In this lesson, you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are
created. You also learn about the Family Editor, and when and how to use it.

Introduction to Families
Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an .rfa extension. All different types that
you create are stored with the master family file. For example, if you create a family called "double-hung window" that
includes types with several sizes, the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project.
This makes file management much easier, because there is only one file to track. There are, however, exceptions to this
rule. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit MEP and cannot be created or modified outside of the project
environment. Walls, floors, and roofs are examples of these types of families. In addition, there is another type of family
that allows you to create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit MEP recognize it as a
particular component type, such as a dome roof.
Revit MEP has three types of families:

■ System
■ Standard Component
■ In-place

System Families

System families are pre-defined within Revit MEP and comprise principle building components such as walls, floors,
and roofs. The basic walls system family, for example, has wall types that define interior, exterior, foundation, generic,
and partition wall styles. You can duplicate and modify existing system families, but you cannot create new system
families.

NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another.

The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family.

Standard Component Families

Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates, while many more are stored in component
libraries. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components. You can either duplicate and modify an
existing component family or create a new component family based on a variety of family templates.
Family templates are either host-based or standalone. Host-based families have components that require hosts. An
example is a door family hosted by a wall family. Standalone families include columns, trees, and furniture. Family
templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families.
Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an .rfa extension. You can load
them into projects, transfer them from one project to another, and save them from a project file to your library if
needed.

756 | Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor


The following illustration shows host-based window and door family components in a wall, and also a standalone
furniture family component.

In-place Families

In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. You create in-place families only
within the current project, so they are useful for objects unique to that project; for example, custom wall treatments.
You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families, and the category that you use determines the
component’s appearance and display control within the project.
The following illustration shows a building model of the Pantheon without a roof and with an in-place roof family.

Adding a family to a project


1 Open or start a project.
To add a family to your project, you can drag it into the document window, or you can load it using the
Load From Library, Load Family command on the File menu. After the family has been loaded in the
project, it is saved with the project. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective
component category. You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project. However, if
you change the original family, you need to reload the family in the project to see the updated family.

2 On the File menu, click Load From Library ➤ Load Family.


3 Navigate to the library or location of the family.
4 Select the family file name and click Open.

In this section, you learned about the different types of Revit MEP families and when to use them. In the final exercise,
you learn about the Family Editor, how to access it, and when to use it.

Introduction to the Family Editor


You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components.
Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions
of particular objects. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction, such as plan, elevation, or
3D, as well as the level of detail associated with that view.

Introduction to the Family Editor | 757


In this exercise, you learn when to use the Family Editor, how to access it, and the general procedure for creating a
standard component family.

When to use the Family Editor

During the design process, you will inevitably come to a point where you need a specific component for your design.
In this case, presume it is a bay window that you require. There is a logical thought process that you should follow:

1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so, it should be available within the Type
Selector.
2 If there isn’t a component family loaded in the project, you can search the component library loaded on your local
hard drive. Also consider any internal family libraries that may exist on the network.
3 Next, consider checking the web library and other web resources, such as newsgroups.
4 If you can’t find the component you require, you should then try to find the component that most closely resembles
it. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. If you
find a close match, open it in the Family Editor, modify it as needed, and then load it into the project.
5 Finally, if you have exhausted your external resources, you should create a new component family using one of
the family templates as a starting point.

How to use the Family Editor

You can access the Family Editor in several ways. With Revit MEP open, you can click File ➤ Open, navigate to a family
file, and click Open. When the family opens, it opens within the Family Editor. This will be apparent because the only
Design Bar tab available is Family.
Within the Windows® environment, you can double-click any file with an .rfa extension and it will open Revit MEP
in the Family Editor. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously.
To start a new family, click File ➤ New ➤ Family, select the appropriate template, and click Open.

General procedure for creating a standard component family


1 Select the appropriate family template.
2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object.
3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry.
4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry.
5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters.
6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior.
7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings.
8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters.
9 Save the newly-defined family, and then load it into a new project and see how it performs.

758 | Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor


Creating Components in
the Family Editor 17
In this tutorial, you learn how to create specific Revit MEP 2008 families. In each

lesson, you learn how to create a different type of component. Using the installed

templates, you start with a simple door family and then move onto a window

family. You create a furniture family, a lighting fixture, and several annotation

families. In addition, you create an in-place family. When you create an in-place

family, you create it within the project file, not within the Family Editor. This

allows you to create the family in the context of the current project.

759
Creating a Door Family
In this lesson, you create a custom door family based on the definition of a flush exterior door. After you create the
door leaf as an extrusion, you create new door types based on size and assign parameters respectively.

You also learn how to constrain the door design by adding labelled dimensions to specify values for the door width,
height, and thickness.

Drawing the Door Plan View Components


In this exercise, you draw the plan view components for the new door family. The door type has a variable height and
width.

760 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


Create a new family based on the default door template
1 Close any open projects or families.
2 On the File menu, click New ➤ Family.
3 In the left pane of the New dialog box, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates\Metric Door.rft.
4 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit.
5 On the Window menu, click Tile.
Notice the four tiled views.
The reference planes that display are part of the default door template, and represent the door opening
profile. The door opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. Labelled dimensions, part of the
door properties, are also displayed.

6 Maximize the window, Floor Plan: Ref. Level.


7 Enter ZF; this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit.

Draw the door panel plan view representation

8 On the Design Bar, click Symbolic Lines.


9 In the Type Selector, select Doors [projection].

10 On the Options Bar, click .


11 Starting at the door hinge point on the lower left corner of the door opening, sketch a 1000 mm x 50 mm
rectangle for the door leaf as shown.

Drawing the Door Plan View Components | 761


Dimension the door panel

12 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.


13 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the door panel as shown.

14 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the door panel to the bottom edge as shown.

762 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


Add dimension labels to the door leaf

15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


16 Select the vertical dimension that controls the door width.
17 On the Options Bar, select Width for Label.

NOTE This same label is applied to the dimension referencing the door opening. Because labelled dimensions
are parameters, a user can change the value of the Width parameter and all dimensions labelled with it change
accordingly.

18 Select the horizontal dimension that references the door thickness.


19 On the Options Bar, select Thickness for Label.

Drawing the Door Plan View Components | 763


Draw the door opening plan view arc

20 Select the dimension with the two EQ symbols and move it, along with the witness line controls, so it
doesn’t visually interfere with the door swing location, as shown.

21 On the Design Bar, click Symbolic Lines.


22 In the Type selector, select Plan Swing [cut].

23 On the Options Bar, click .

TIP If the Arc from Center and End Points command is not visible on the Options Bar, click the down arrow
button, and select the command from the menu.

When drawing an arc from center and end points, you first specify the arc center, then you specify each
end point.

24 Enter SI, and select the intersection at the upper left corner of the door opening for the arc center point.
25 Select the upper right corner of the door opening for the arc start point.
26 Select the upper left corner of the door leaf for the arc endpoint.
In the image below, the arc is selected so you can see the arc center and each end point.

764 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


Add a reference plane for the exterior face of the door

27 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry” on page 765.

Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry


In this exercise, you create the solid geometry of the door leaf with an extrusion.
Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Exterior.

2 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.


3 On the Design Bar, click Set Work Plane.
4 In the Work Plane dialog box, under Specify a new Work Plane, select Reference Plane: Exterior for Name,
and click OK.
5 On the Design Bar, click Lines.

6 On the Options Bar, enter 50 mm for Depth, and click .


7 Select the upper left corner of the door opening for the first corner of the rectangle, and then select the
lower right corner of the door opening for the second corner of the rectangle.

Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry | 765


8 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
9 In the Project Browser under Elevations, double-click Left.

10 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.


11 Add a horizontal dimension from the exterior face of the door extrusion to the interior face of the door
extrusion.

TIP When you add the witness line to the exterior face of the extrusion, use the TAB key to toggle to the extrusion
reference, then click to specify the dimension witness line.

766 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


12 On the Design Bar, click Modify and select the dimension.
13 On the Options Bar, select Thickness for Label.

14 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Ref. Level.

Specify the visibility of the door leaf in plan view

15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


16 Select the door leaf extrusion.

17 On the Options Bar, click Visibility.


18 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box, under View Specific Display, select Front/Back, and
clear Plan/RCP, Left/Right, and When cut in Plan/RCP.
19 Under Detail Levels, verify that Coarse, Medium, and Fine are selected, and click OK.

Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry | 767


20 On the Options Bar, click .
21 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Panel for Subcategory, and click OK.
The solid geometry of the door is now complete.

22 Proceed to the next exercise, “Assigning Materials to the Door Components” on page 768.

Assigning Materials to the Door Components


In this exercise, you assign a material to the door leaf. This material designation controls how it displays in shaded and
hidden line views. It also defines its appearance when rendered.
Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

Create a new material based on the existing red oak material


1 On the Settings menu, click Materials.
2 In the Materials dialog box, click Duplicate.
3 In the New Material dialog box, enter Oak Door for Name, and click OK.

4 In the Materials dialog box, under AccuRender, click for Texture.


5 In the Material Library dialog box, navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Oak,Red/Stained,Dark,No Gloss.
6 Click OK.
7 In the Materials dialog box, click OK.

Assign the Oak Door material to the door leaf

8 Select the door leaf extrusion.

9 On the Options Bar, click .

10 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Materials and Finishes, click for Material.
11 In the Materials dialog box, under Name, select Oak Door, and click OK.
12 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK.
The door leaf is assigned the new Oak Door material.

13 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Assign the Oak Door material to the door frame

14 Select the interior door frame extrusion.

15 On the Options Bar, click .

16 In the Element Properties dialog box, click for Material.


17 In the Materials dialog box, select Oak Door for Name, and click OK.
18 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK.
19 Repeat the previous five steps for the exterior frame extrusion.

768 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


The door frame is assigned the new Oak Door material.

View the new door

20 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, double-click View 1.
21 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control, and select Shading with Edges.

22 Zoom in on a door corner.

The Oak Door material is now assigned to the door leaf and door frame.

Flex the door model

23 Zoom out to view the entire door.

Assigning Materials to the Door Components | 769


Flexing the new family is an important part of the design process. By flexing the new component, you
ensure it adjusts to the changes it may encounter once loaded into a project.

24 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.


Try to move the dialog box off to the side so you can still see the door family next to it. This allows you
to apply changes made in the dialog box and see how the new door reacts.

25 In the Family Types dialog box, do the following:

■ Under Dimensions, enter 2500 mm for Height.


■ Enter 1500 mm for Width.
■ Under Other, enter 125 mm for Frame Width.
■ Click Apply.

Notice the door geometry adapts to the new dimension values.

26 Return the door parameters to their original values.


In the Family Types dialog box, do the following:

■ Under Dimensions, enter 2000 mm for Height.


■ Enter 1000 mm for Width.
■ Under Other, enter 75 mm for Frame Width.
■ Click Apply.

27 Click OK.
28 Proceed to the next exercise, “Defining New Door Types” on page 770

Defining New Door Types


In this exercise, you define new door types based on the door model that you have created.
Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

Define new door types with various heights and widths


1 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.
2 In the Family Types dialog box, under Family Types, click New.
3 In the Name dialog box, enter 925 x 2000mm for Name, and click OK.

770 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


4 In the Family Types dialog box, specify the following:

■ Under Dimensions, enter 2000 mm for Height.


■ Enter 925 mm for Width.
■ Click Apply.

Define the second new door type.

5 Under Family Types, click New.


6 In the Name dialog box, enter 750 x 2100mm for Name, and click OK.
7 In the Family Types dialog box, specify the following:

■ Under Dimensions, enter 2100 mm for Height.


■ Enter 750 mm for Width.
■ Click Apply.

Define the third new door type.

8 Under Family Types, click New.


9 In the Name dialog box, enter 1220 x 2134mm for Name, and click OK.
10 In the Family Types dialog box, specify the following:

■ Under Dimensions, enter 2134 mm for Height.


■ Enter 1220 mm for Width.
■ Click Apply.

11 Click OK.
You now have three new door types defined within your door family.

12 On the File menu, click Save.


13 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new door family with the name, Training Door.rfa.

Load the new door family into a new project

14 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project.


15 In the New Project dialog box, under Template file, click Browse.
16 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box, click Training Files, and open
Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric.rte.
17 Under Create new, select Project, and click OK.
18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Door.
19 On the Options Bar, click Load.
20 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location where you saved the door family, Training Door.rfa, select
it, and click Open.

Place new door types in the project

21 On the Design Bar, click Wall.


Use the default wall selection in the Type Selector.

22 Draw a wall segment 8000mm long.

Defining New Door Types | 771


23 On the View toolbar, click .
24 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control, and select Shading with Edges.

25 On the Design Bar, click Door.


26 In the Type Selector, select Training Door : 925 x 2000mm.
27 Add the door to the left side of the wall as shown.

28 In the Type Selector, select Training Door : 750 x 2100mm.


29 Add this door to the center of the wall as shown.

772 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


30 In the Type Selector, select Training Door : 1220 x 2134mm.
31 Add the third door type to the right side of the wall as shown.

32 You can close all files without saving.

You now have three new flush exterior doors based on the new door family prototype. This completes the lesson,
Creating a Door Family.

Creating a Window Family


In this lesson, you create a custom window family based on the definition of a fixed rectangular window with nine
lights. You create the window frame, glazing and mullions as extrusions, and create the window sash as a sweep. You
then assign parameters to the window family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the nine-light
prototype.
Finally, you assign new dimension values to the window to create new types within the window family, and specify
values for the window width, height, default sill height, and mullion offset.

Creating a Window Family | 773


Specifying the New Window Parameters
In this exercise, you specify the parameters for the new window family. The window type has a variable height and
width, equally spaced vertical mullions, and the height of the top and bottom row of lights is adjustable.

Create a new family based on the default window template


1 Close any open projects or families.
2 On the File menu, click New ➤ Family.
3 In the left pane of the New dialog box, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates\Metric Window.rft.
4 On the Window menu, click Tile.
5 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit.
Four views are tiled on your display. The reference planes that display are part of the default window
template and represent the window opening profile. The window opening is aligned and locked to the
reference planes. Labelled dimensions, part of the window properties, are also displayed.

6 Maximize the exterior elevation view.


7 Enter ZF; this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit.
8 Two dimension strings display with their labels, Height and Default Sill Height. The label name, also one
of the window properties, is one of the type parameters. When you add labels to dimensions, these specific
type parameters are adjustable once the window is part of a project.

774 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


Modify the new window type height and width parameters

9 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.


Move the dialog box off to the side so you can see the window opening.

10 In the Family Types dialog box, specify the following:

■ Under Dimensions, enter 1300 mm for Height.


■ Enter 1800 mm for Width.
■ Click Apply.

Change the height and width values again, and click Apply. Notice how the window opening adapts to
the changing dimension values. This process is called “flexing the model,” and it is done to avoid conflicts
and to ensure that all model geometry adjusts to changes as designed.

11 Enter 1000 mm for Height and 2000 mm for Width, and click Apply.
This is the starting point for the new window.

12 Click OK.
13 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry” on page 775.

Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry


In this exercise, you create the solid geometry of the window frame with a sweep. Creating sweep geometry requires
first sketching the sweep path, then sketching the sweep profile. The profile is swept along the path to create the solid
geometry.
Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 775


Create a sweep path for the window frame solid geometry
1 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep.
2 On the Design Bar, click Sketch 2D Path.
3 On the Design Bar, click Lines.

4 On the Options Bar, click .


5 Sketch a rectangle to represent the sweep path starting at the upper left corner of the opening and ending
at the lower right corner. Snap the cursor to each corner.

6 On the Design Bar, click Finish Path.

Add a reference plane for the sweep profile

7 On the Design Bar, click Sketch Profile.


8 In the Go To View dialog box, select Elevation: Right, and click Open View.
9 On the View Control Bar, click the Scale control, and select 1:10.
10 Zoom in on the red dot in the middle of the wall.

776 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


The red dot indicates the intersection of the sweep path and the profile plane.

11 On the Design Bar, click Ref Plane.

12 On the Options Bar, click , and specify an offset of 50 mm.


13 Pick the exterior wall face so that a reference line is offset 50 mm to the left of the exterior wall face as
shown.

14 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.


15 On the Options Bar, select Prefer: Wall faces.
16 Add a dimension between the exterior wall face and the new reference plane.
17 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the dimension.

Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 777


18 Drag the value control off to the side as shown.

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the reference plane.

20 On the Options Bar, click .


21 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Identity Data, enter Sash for the Name, and click OK.

Sketch the window frame profile

22 On the Design Bar, click Lines.

23 On the Options Bar, select Chain and click .


24 Below the red dot, sketch the frame profile approximately as shown.

NOTE When you sketch the frame profile, the exact dimensions are not critical. However, the frame profile
should extend beyond the edges of the wall. Precise dimensions are assigned to the frame profile in subsequent
steps.

25 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

778 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


26 Select the right edge of the frame section, and drag it to the exterior face of the wall. When the lock displays,
click it to constrain the frame to the exterior wall face.

27 Select the left edge of the frame section, and drag it to the interior face of the wall. When the lock displays,
click it to constrain the left edge of the frame to the interior face.

28 Select the short line parallel and to the right of the Sash reference plane. Drag it to the left and align it
with the Sash reference plane. When the lock displays, click it to lock the line to the reference plane.

Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 779


29 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.
30 Add a vertical dimension of 40 mm to the left side of the frame and another vertical dimension of 20 mm
to the right side of the frame, as shown.

TIP After adding the dimension, click Modify, select the line you want to move, and specify the dimension value.

Modify each dimension if necessary.

780 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


Align the new profile to the window opening edge

31 Select the 40 mm dimension. When the lock displays, click the lock to constrain the present value.

TIP If you don’t see the lock icon, zoom out until it displays.

32 Select the 20 mm dimension. When the lock displays, click the lock to constrain the present value.

33 On the Tools toolbar, click .


34 Select the horizontal reference plane that intersects the red dot; this is the top of the window opening.
Next, select the top horizontal line of the frame profile. Lock the alignment when the lock icon displays.

35 On the Design Bar, click Finish Profile.


36 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sweep.
The window frame profile is swept around the window opening.

37 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click View 1.
If necessary, spin the model so you can see the interior of the frame.

Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 781


38 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Exterior.
39 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry” on page 782.

Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry


In this exercise, you create the solid geometry of the window sash with an extrusion.
Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

Specify the window sash extrusion parameters


1 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.
2 On the Design Bar, click Set Work Plane.
3 In the Work Plane dialog box, under Specify a new Work Plane, select Reference Plane: Sash for Name, and
click OK.
4 On the Design Bar, click Lines.

5 On the Options Bar, click , and enter - 45 mm for Depth, and select Lock.

Pick the sash profile lines

6 Place the cursor over the left side of the frame, press TAB to cycle through the selection options, and select
the option, Chain of walls or lines.

782 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


The entire sash outline is selected, and lock icons display on each line.

Draw offset extrusion lines

7 On the Options Bar, set the following options:

■ Click .
■ Enter - 50 mm for Offset.
You specify a negative offset value to indicate an extrusion direction inside of the window frame.

■ Click .

8 Specify the upper left inside corner of the window frame for the first corner of the rectangle, and then
specify the lower right inside corner for the second corner of the rectangle.

9 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry | 783


10 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Right.
Notice the sash is aligned with the Sash reference plane.

11 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1.


Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles.

The window sash extrusion is now complete.

12 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry” on page 784.

Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry


In this exercise, you create the solid geometry of the window glass with an extrusion.

784 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

Add a reference plane to specify the glass work plane


1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Right.
2 On the Design Bar, click Ref Plane.

3 On the Options Bar, click , and enter 30 mm for Offset.


4 Select the left edge of the sash so that a vertical reference plane is added 30 mm to the right, as shown.

Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 785


5 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.
6 Add a horizontal dimension of 30 mm between the left edge of the sash and the reference plane.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


8 Select the reference plane.

9 On the Options Bar, click .


10 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Identity Data, enter Glazing for the Name instance parameter,
and click OK.
11 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Exterior.

Pick lines to define the glass extrusion

12 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.


13 On the Design Bar, click Set Work Plane.
14 In the Work Plane dialog box, under Specify a new Work Plane, select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name,
and click OK.
15 On the Design Bar, click Lines.

16 On the Options Bar, click , enter -12 mm for Depth, and select Lock.
17 Place the cursor on one of the sash extrusion lines, press TAB until the chain of lines is preselected, and
click to create the glass boundary.

786 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


18 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

View the window model with frame, sash, and glass

19 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Right.


20 Select the glass extrusion.

21 On the Options Bar, click .


22 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Identity Data, specify Glass for the Subcategory instance
parameter, and click OK.

NOTE Assigning subcategories to model elements is important. After the family is loaded into a project, you can
control subcategory visual style using the Objects Styles dialog box.

23 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 787


24 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1.
Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles.

Flex the window model

25 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.


Move the Family Types dialog box off to the side so you can see the window model.

26 In the Family Types dialog box, do the following:

■ Under Dimensions, enter 1500 mm for Height.


■ Enter 1500 mm for Width.
■ Under Other, enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height.
■ Click Apply.

Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters.

NOTE After flexing the model, it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as
expected. For example, make sure the window frame stretched with the opening and that the glass extrusion
remains attached to the interior edge of the sash. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems
early. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines.

788 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


27 In the Family Types dialog box, return the window to its original dimensions:

■ Under Dimensions, enter 1000 mm for Height.


■ Enter 2000 mm for Width.
■ Under Other, enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height.
■ Click Apply.
■ Click OK.

28 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry” on page 789.

Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry


In this exercise, you create the solid geometry of the window mullions based on reference planes and extrusions.

Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

Add reference planes to specify the location of the new window mullion centerlines
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Exterior.
2 On the Design Bar, click Ref Plane.
3 Add two horizontal and two vertical reference planes inside of the window opening to approximate the
mullion centerline locations as shown.

NOTE When you draw each reference plane, the exact location is not critical. Precise dimensions are assigned
to the reference planes in subsequent steps.

Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 789


4 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.
Add a multi-segmented dimension referencing all of the vertical reference planes except the center
(Left/Right) as shown. After adding the dimension, click the EQ symbol to make the dimension segments
equal.

5 Add a dimension between the top of the window opening (top reference plane) and the horizontal reference
plane below it, as shown. Do not be concerned with dimension values.

6 Add a dimension between the bottom of the window opening (bottom reference plane) and the horizontal
reference plane above it, as shown. Do not be concerned with dimension values.

790 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


Add a mullion offset family parameter

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


8 Select the dimension on the upper-right that references the top two horizontal reference planes.

9 On the Options Bar, select <Add parameter...> for Label.


10 In the Parameter Properties dialog box, specify the following parameters:

■ For Parameter Type, select Family parameter.


■ Under Parameter Data, enter Mullion Offset for Name.
■ Under Group parameter under, select Dimensions.
■ Select Instance.
■ Click OK.

11 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.


12 In the Family Types dialog box, under Dimensions, enter 350 mm for Mullion Offset, and click OK.

TIP Due to the length of the dimension label, you may want to drag the dimension value as shown.

13 Select the horizontal reference plane second from the bottom.

Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 791


Notice the dimension value becomes editable.

14 Click the dimension value, and enter 350 mm as the new value.

15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


16 Select the dimension on the lower-right.
17 On the Options Bar, select Mullion Offset for Label.
As you did before, move the dimension value as shown.

18 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Create the vertical mullion extrusions

19 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.


20 On the Design Bar, click Set Work Plane.

792 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


21 In the Work Plane dialog box, under Specify a new Work Plane, select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name,
and click OK.
22 On the Design Bar, click Lines.

23 On the Options Bar, enter 14 mm for Depth, and click .


24 Sketch a rectangle centered on the left vertical mullion reference plane approximately as shown. Do not
be concerned with precise dimensions. However, it is critical that the short horizontal lines align with the
horizontal edges of the sash. Watch the Status Bar to be sure that the lines are snapping to the sash.

After you complete the sketch, notice lock icons display on the interior horizontal edges of the sash.

25 Click both of the locks so the mullion adapts to changes in window height.

26 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.


27 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane centered
between the vertical mullion extrusion sketch lines, and to the right edge of the mullion extrusion.
Click the EQ symbol to make both horizontal dimensions equal. Move the dimension values as shown.

Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 793


28 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the mullion extrusion, and place it
above the dimension you placed in the previous steps.

29 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the dimension you added in the previous step.
30 On the Options Bar, select <Add parameter> for Label.
31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box, specify the following parameters:

■ For Parameter Type, select Family parameter.


■ Under Parameter Data, enter Mullion Width for Name.
■ Under Group parameter under, select Dimensions.
■ Select Type.
■ Click OK.

Move the Mullion Width value to the left as shown.

794 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


32 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the right vertical reference plane as
shown. Remember, follow these basic steps:

■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion on the left.

NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously.

■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality
constraint.
■ Add a dimension between the left and right mullion edges.
■ Select the dimension, and on the Options Bar, select Mullion Width for Label.

Do not be concerned with the value of the mullion width. This is changed in later steps.

33 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 795


Specify the mullion width parameter

34 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.


Move the dialog box off to the side so you can see the window in the drawing area.

35 In the Family Types dialog box, enter 40 mm for Mullion Width, and click Apply.

Notice the mullions remain centered and equally spaced on the reference planes.

Flex the window model

36 In the Family Types dialog box, do the following:

■ Under Dimensions, enter 1500 mm for Height.


■ Enter 1500 mm for Width.
■ Under Other, enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height.
■ Click Apply.

Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters, and the mullions stretch with the new window
height.

796 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


NOTE After flexing the model, it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as
expected. In this case, you should pay close attention to the new mullions and make sure they remain centered,
evenly spaced, and aligned with the sash edge. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems
early. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines, or undoing the same.

37 In the Family Types dialog box, return the window to its original dimensions:

■ Under Dimensions, enter 1000 mm for Height.


■ Enter 2000 mm for Width.
■ Under Other, enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height.
■ Click Apply.
■ Click OK.

Sketch the horizontal mullion extrusions

38 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.


39 On the Design Bar, click Set Work Plane.
40 In the Work Plane dialog box, under Specify a new Work Plane, select Reference Plane : Glazing for Name,
and click OK.
41 On the Design Bar, click Lines.

42 On the Options Bar, click .


Notice the Depth value on the Options Bar remains at the previously specified value.

43 Sketch a rectangle centered on the upper horizontal mullion reference plane approximately as shown, and
then click the lock icons to lock the left and right edges to the edge of the sash.

Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 797


44 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.
45 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane at the center
of the mullion, and then to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion.
Click the EQ symbol to make both vertical dimensions equal, and move the EQ values off to each side as
shown.

46 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.


47 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion, as shown. Do
not be concerned with the dimension value.

48 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the dimension you added in the previous step.
49 On the Options Bar, select Mullion Width for Label. Move the dimension value as shown.

50 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the lower horizontal reference plane
as shown. Remember, follow these basic steps:

■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion you just completed.

798 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously.

■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality
constraint.
■ Add a dimension between the upper and lower mullion edges.
■ Select the dimension, and on the Options Bar, select Mullion Width for Label.

51 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

The horizontal mullion extrusions are now complete.

Join the mullion geometry

52 On the Tools menu, click Join Geometry.


53 Select the horizontal mullions, and select the vertical mullions.

Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 799


54 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1.
If necessary, spin the model to get a good view of the mullions.

Notice the mullion extrusions are joined.

Flex the window model

55 Adjust the location of the window model within the drawing area, so when you open the Family Types
dialog box, you can still see the window.
56 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.
57 In the Family Types dialog box, do the following:

■ Under Dimensions, enter 1500 mm for Height.


■ Enter 1500 mm for Width.
■ Under Other, enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height.
■ Click Apply.

Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters and the mullions stretch with the new window
height.

800 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


58 In the Family Types dialog box, return the window to its original dimensions:

■ Under Dimensions, enter 1000 mm for Height.


■ Enter 2000 mm for Width.
■ Under Other, enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height.
■ Click Apply.
■ Click OK.

59 Proceed to the next exercise, “Assigning Materials to the Window Components” on page 801.

Assigning Materials to the Window Components


In this exercise, you assign materials to the frame, sash, and mullions that you want to display in renderings of the
new window.

Assigning Materials to the Window Components | 801


Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

Create a new material based on the existing yellow pine material


1 On the Settings menu, click Materials.
2 In the Materials dialog box, click Duplicate.
3 In the New Material dialog box, enter Pine Frame for Name, and click OK.

4 In the Materials dialog box, under AccuRender, click for Texture.


5 In the Material Library dialog box, navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Pine, Yellow/, select Stained, Dark, No
Gloss, and click OK.
6 In the Materials dialog box, click OK.

Assign the Pine Frame material to the frame, sash, and mullions

7 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Exterior.


8 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control, and select Shading with Edges.
9 Select the window frame sweep, the sash, and the mullions.

TIP Hold the CTRL key down as you select the sweep and various extrusions.

10 On the Options Bar, click .


11 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Identity Data, select Frame/Mullion for Subcategory.

12 Under Materials and Finishes, click for Material.


13 In the Materials dialog box, select Pine Frame for Name, and click OK.
14 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Graphics, select Edit for Visibility.
15 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box, under View Specific Display, select Front/Back and
When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits); clear the other view options.
16 Under Detail Levels, verify that Coarse, Medium, and Fine are selected, and click OK.
17 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK.
The window frame is assigned the new Pine Frame material.

18 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

802 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


Modify the glass visibility

19 In the Project Browser under Elevations, double-click Right.


20 Select the glass extrusion.
21 On the Options Bar, click Visibility.
22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box, under View Specific Display, select Front/Back and
When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits).
23 Under Detail Levels, verify that Coarse, Medium, and Fine are selected, and click OK.
24 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1.

25 Zoom in on a window corner.

Assigning Materials to the Window Components | 803


The window frame, sash, mullions, and glass display their assigned materials.

26 Proceed to the next exercise, “Defining New Window Types” on page 804.

Defining New Window Types


In this exercise, you define new window types based on the window model that you just created. You begin by adding
a formula to the mullion offset parameter to specify horizontal divisions of one third the overall height of the window.
You then create multiple window types that will be available to the user after the family is loaded into a project.

Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

804 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


Add a mullion offset formula to the family type
1 Zoom to fit and move the window model off the side of the drawing area so it will be visible after you open
the Family Types dialog box.
2 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.
3 In the Family Types dialog box, enter Height/3 in the Formula column for Mullion Offset, and click
Apply.
The horizontal mullions are now spaced apart at one third the height of the window.

Flex the window model

4 In addition to flexing the model after the addition or modification of model geometry, it is also a good
idea to flex the model after a new formula is applied.
In the Family Types dialog box, enter 2000 mm for Height, and click Apply.

The window height is doubled, but the one third height spacing is maintained in the horizontal mullions.

5 In the Family Types dialog box, enter 1000 mm for Height, and click Apply.

Define new window types with various heights and widths

6 In the Family Types dialog box, under Family Types, click New.
7 In the Name dialog box, enter 2500 w x 1250mm h for Name, and click OK.
8 In the Family Types dialog box, specify the following parameter values:

■ Enter 2500 mm for Width.


■ Enter 1250 mm for Height.
■ Click Apply.

Defining New Window Types | 805


9 Under Family Types, click New.
10 In the Name dialog box, enter 2600 w x 1300mm h for Name, and click OK.
11 In the Family Types dialog box, specify the following parameter values:

■ Enter 2600 mm for Width.


■ Enter 1300 mm for Height.
■ Click Apply.

Define the final window type

12 Under Family Types, click New.


13 In the Name dialog box, enter 1800 w x 1500mm h for Name and click OK.
14 In the Family Types dialog box, specify the following parameter values:

■ Enter 1800 mm for Width.


■ Enter 1500 mm for Height.
■ Click Apply.
■ Click OK.

You now have three new window types defined within your window family.

15 On the File menu, click Save.


16 Navigate to the location of your choice and save the new window family with the name, Training Window.rfa.

Load the new window family into a new project

17 On the Standard toolbar, click to start a new project based on your default template.
18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Window.
19 On the Options Bar, click Load.
20 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of your Training Window.rfa file, select it, and click Open.

806 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


Place new window types in the project

21 On the Design Bar, click Wall.


22 Draw a generic wall segment 12000 mm long.

23 On the Design Bar, click Window.


24 On the Options Bar, clear Tag on Placement.
25 In the Type Selector, select Training Window : 1800 w x 1500mm h.
26 Add the window to the left side of the wall.

27 In the Type Selector, select Training Window : 2500 w x 1250mm h.


28 Add this window to the center of the wall.
29 In the Type Selector, select Training Window :2600 w x 1300mm h.
30 Add the third window to the right side of the wall.

31 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


32 On the View menu, click Thin Lines.
33 Zoom in on the center window.
Notice the detail that displays. This is because you set the visibility values to display when cut in plan/RCP.

34 On the View toolbar, click .


35 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control, and select Shading with Edges.

Defining New Window Types | 807


You have three new fixed nine-light windows based on a new window family prototype. This completes the Creating
a Window Family lesson.

Creating a Furniture Family


In this lesson, you create a custom furniture family based on the definition of a rolltop desk. You begin by creating the
desktop, drawer base, rolltop, and drawers as extrusions. You then assign parameters to the furniture family to allow
for the creation of different-sized versions of the prototype.

Finally, you assign new dimension values to the furniture to create new types within the furniture family, and specify
values for the furniture length and depth.

Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters


In this exercise, you add reference planes and specify the parameters for the new rolltop desk furniture family.

808 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


Create a new family based on the default furniture template
1 Close all open projects or families.
2 On the File menu, click New ➤ Family.
3 In the left pane of the New dialog box, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates\Metric Furniture.rft.
4 Maximize the view, Floor Plan: Ref. Level.
5 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit.

The reference planes that display are part of the default furniture template; they represent the furniture
centerline axes.

Draw additional horizontal and vertical reference planes

6 On the Design Bar, click Ref Plane.

NOTE When you draw the reference planes, their exact location is not critical. Precise dimensions are assigned
to the reference planes in subsequent steps.

7 Draw two horizontal reference planes, one above and one below the existing horizontal centerline reference
plane as shown.

8 Draw two vertical reference planes, one to the left and one to the right of the existing vertical centerline
reference plane as shown.

Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 809


Dimension the reference planes

9 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.


10 Near the bottom of the drawing area, add a horizontal dimension string beginning at the left reference
plane, proceeding to the centerline reference plane, and ending at the right reference plane, as shown.
Click the EQ icon to make the segments equal.

11 Add an overall horizontal dimension underneath the dimension you just added. It should reference the
left reference plane and the right reference plane as shown.

810 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


12 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
13 Select the left reference plane.
14 Change the horizontal dimension to 2000 mm.

15 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.


16 On the right side of the drawing area, add a vertical dimension string beginning at the upper reference
plane, proceeding to the centerline reference plane, and ending at the lower reference plane, as shown.
Click the EQ symbol to make both segments equal.

Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 811


17 To the right of the dimension you just created, add an overall vertical dimension from the upper reference
plane to the lower reference plane, as shown.

18 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


19 Select the upper, horizontal reference plane.
20 Change the vertical dimension to 1000 mm.

812 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


21 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
22 Clean up the extents of the reference planes and the dimension witness lines as shown.

TIP To do this, select each reference plane and drag the extents to the new position. Afterwards, select each
dimension and drag the witness line controls as needed.

Add length and depth family parameters

23 Select the 2000 mm dimension.


24 On the Options Bar, select <Add parameter...> for Label.
25 In the Parameter Properties dialog box, specify the following:

■ Under Parameter type, select Family parameter.


■ Under Parameter Data, enter Length for Name.
■ For Group parameter under, select Dimensions.
■ Select Type.
■ Click OK.

Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 813


26 Select the 1000 mm dimension.
27 On the Options Bar, select <Add parameter...> for Label.
28 In the Parameter Properties dialog box, specify the following:

■ Under Parameter type, select Family parameter.


■ Under Parameter Data, enter Depth for Name.
■ For Group parameter under, select Dimensions.
■ Select Type.
■ Click OK.

These reference planes will be the skeleton that you snap the solid geometry to. Therefore, you should flex
the design now to ensure the reference planes and labelled dimensions adapt to changes as expected.

Flex the design

29 Adjust the location of the reference planes within the drawing area, so when you open the Family Types
dialog box, you can still see the model.
30 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.

814 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


31 In the Family Types dialog box, do the following:

■ Under Dimensions, enter 3000 mm for Length.


■ Enter 1500 mm for Depth.
■ Click Apply.

Notice the reference planes adapt to the new dimension parameters. When the solid geometry is snapped
to the reference planes, it will also adapt to the same changes.

32 In the Family Types dialog box, return the parameters to their original values:

■ Under Dimensions, enter 2000 mm for Length.


■ Enter 1000 mm for Depth.
■ Click Apply.
■ Click OK.

33 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry” on page 815.

Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry


In this exercise, you create the solid geometry of the desktop with an extrusion.
Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

Create the desktop using an extrusion


1 On the Design Bar, click Symbolic Lines.

2 On the Options Bar, click .


3 Select the upper left reference plane intersection for the first corner of the rectangle, and then select the
lower right reference plane intersection for the second corner of the rectangle.

NOTE In the image below, the symbolic line thickness was modified for training purposes. Your lines may have
a lighter weight.

Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry | 815


4 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.
5 On the Design Bar, click Set Work Plane.
6 In the Work Plane dialog box, under Specify a new Work Plane, select Level: Ref. Level for Name, and click
OK.
7 On the Design Bar, click Lines.

8 On the Options Bar, click , and enter 100 mm for Depth.


9 Move the cursor over one of the symbolic lines, press TAB until the chain of lines is offered as a selection
option, and click to select all four symbolic lines.

10 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.


11 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front.

The desktop extrusion extends 100 mm above the reference level.

Move the desktop up

12 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


13 Move the cursor over the top edge of the desktop, press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the
Status Bar, and select the top edge.

816 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


14 Drag the top edge of the desktop upward until the temporary dimension value is 750 mm.

15 Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the desktop, press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in
the Status Bar, and select the bottom edge.
16 Drag the bottom edge of the desktop up until the desktop is 100 mm thick.

Add height and thickness dimensions

17 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.


18 Add a vertical dimension from the reference level to the top edge of the desktop, as shown.

19 Add a vertical dimension from the bottom of the desktop to the top edge.

Add height and thickness family parameters

20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


21 Select the 750 mm dimension.
22 On the Options Bar, select <Add parameter...> for Label.
23 In the Parameter Properties dialog box, specify the following:

■ Under Parameter type, select Family parameter.


■ Under Parameter Data, enter Height for Name.

Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry | 817


■ For Group parameter under, select Dimensions.
■ Select Type.
■ Click OK.

24 Select the 100 mm dimension.


25 On the Options Bar, select <Add parameter...> for Label.
26 n the Parameter Properties dialog box, specify the following:

■ Under Parameter type, select Family parameter.


■ Under Parameter Data, enter Thickness for Name.
■ For Group parameter under, select Dimensions.
■ Select Type.
■ Click OK.

27 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Flex the design

28 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area, so when you open the Family Types dialog box,
you can still see the model.
29 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.
30 In the Family Types dialog box, do the following:

■ Under Dimensions, enter 4000 mm for Length, and click Apply.


■ Enter 1200 mm for Height, and click Apply.
■ Enter 150 mm for Thickness, and click Apply.

Notice the desk top adapts to the new dimension parameters.

31 In the Family Types dialog box, return the parameters to their original values:

■ Under Dimensions, enter 2000 mm for Length.


■ Enter 750 mm for Height.
■ Enter 100 mm for Thickness.
■ Click Apply.
■ Click OK.

32 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry” on page 818.

Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry


In this exercise, you create the solid geometry of the desk drawer base.

818 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

Offset two reference planes to locate the first drawer base corner
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Ref. Level.
2 On the Design Bar, click Ref Plane.

3 On the Options Bar, click , and enter 100 mm for Offset.


4 Move the cursor over the left vertical reference plane, and click to locate a new vertical reference plane
offset 100 mm to the right.

5 Move the cursor over the upper horizontal reference plane, and click to locate a new horizontal reference
plane offset 100 mm below it.

6 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.

Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 819


7 Add a dimension referencing the left vertical reference plane and the offset plane you added. Click the
lock icon as shown.

8 Add a dimension to the top horizontal reference plane and the offset plane below it. Lock the dimension
as shown.

Sketch the left drawer base

9 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.


10 On the Design Bar, click Set Work Plane.
11 In the Work Plane dialog box, under Specify a new Work Plane, select Level: Ref. Level for Name, and click
OK.
12 On the Design Bar, click Lines.

13 On the Options Bar, click .


14 Select the intersection of the new offset reference planes for the first corner of the rectangle, and then
specify a point 300 mm to the right and 800 mm down for the second corner of the rectangle, as shown.

820 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


After you complete the rectangle, two lock icons display.

15 Click both of the lock icons to lock the edges of the extrusion to the reference planes.

16 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.


17 Add a vertical dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base, and then
click the lock icon to lock the dimension.

Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 821


Mirror the left rectangle to create the right drawer base

18 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


19 Select the four sketched lines.

TIP You can select multiple elements by holding the CTRL key down. You can also highlight the entire line chain,
using the TAB key.

20 On the Tools toolbar, click the Mirror tool, .


21 Select the vertical centerline reference plane as the mirror axis.

A duplicate of the left drawer base is mirrored to create the right drawer base.

22 On the Tools toolbar, click .


23 For the align-to reference, select the horizontal reference plane second from the top, as shown below at
the cursor.

822 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


24 Select the top horizontal line of the right drawer extrusion as shown.

A lock icon displays.

25 Click the lock icon to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.

26 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.


27 Add and lock the following two dimensions to the right drawer extrusion:

■ Add a dimension from the right vertical reference plane to the right edge of the drawer base, and then
click the lock icon to lock the dimension.

Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 823


■ Add a dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base, and then click
the lock icon to lock the dimension.

28 Add two final dimensions, one on each extrusion that references the width of the drawer base, as shown.

29 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the left extrusion.
30 On the Options Bar, select <Add parameter...> for Label.
31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box, specify the following:

■ Under Parameter type, select Family parameter.


■ Under Parameter Data, enter Drawer Base Width for Name.
■ For Group parameter under, select Dimensions.
■ Select Type.
■ Click OK.

824 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


32 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the right extrusion.
33 On the Options Bar, select Drawer Base Width for Label.
34 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

35 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Extend the drawer base extrusions up to the desktop

36 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front.

Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 825


37 On the Tools toolbar, click .
38 Select the lower edge of the desktop as the align-to reference.

39 Select the upper edge of the drawer base.


After the alignment, a lock icon displays; click it to lock the alignment.

40 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

41 On the View toolbar, click .


The solid geometry for the desk drawer base is now complete. However, notice that annotations display
in this view.

42 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.


43 Click the Annotation Categories tab.
44 Clear Show annotation categories in this view, and click OK.
45 On the View Control Bar, click the Scale control and select 1:20.

826 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


Flex the design

46 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box,
you can still see the model.
47 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.
48 In the Family Types dialog box, do the following:

■ Under Dimensions, enter 4000 mm for Length, and click Apply.


■ Enter 1200 mm for Height, and click Apply.
■ Enter 150 mm for Thickness, and click Apply.

Notice the desk adapts to the new dimension parameters.

49 In the Family Types dialog box, return the parameters to their original values:

■ Under Dimensions, enter 2000 mm for Length.


■ Enter 750 mm for Height.
■ Enter 100 mm for Thickness.
■ Click Apply.
■ Click OK.

50 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry” on page 827.

Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry


In this exercise, you create the solid geometry of the desk rolltop.

Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 827


Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

Create the rolltop extrusion


1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Right.

2 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.


3 On the Design Bar, click Set Work Plane.
4 In the Work Plane dialog box, under Specify a new Work Plane, select Reference Plane: Center (Left\Right)
for Name, and click OK.
5 On the Design Bar, click Lines.

6 On the Options Bar, click .


7 Sketch the rectangle beginning at the intersection of the desktop and the right reference plane, then move
the cursor up 300mm and to the left 400mm, and click to specify the upper left corner, as shown.

828 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


8 On the Tools toolbar, click .
9 Select the desk top, then the lower horizontal sketch line, and click the lock icon to lock the alignment.

10 Select the right vertical edge of the desktop extrusion, then select the right parallel sketch line, and lock
the alignment.

Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 829


11 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.
12 Add one dimension referring to both vertical sketch lines, and lock it. Add another dimension to both
horizontal sketch lines, and lock it.

13 On the Design Bar, click Lines.

14 On the Options Bar, click the Fillet arc tool, .

TIP You may need to click the down arrow button, and then select the fillet arc tool from the menu.

15 Select the left vertical sketch line, the upper sketch line, and then move the cursor down and to the right
until you create and arc similar to the image below. Do not be concerned with the precise dimension of
the arc radius.

16 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

830 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


The rolltop extrusion outline is complete.

Align the left and right edges of the rolltop with the drawer bases

17 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front.

18 On the Tools toolbar, click .


19 Select the left edge of the left drawer base, select the left edge of the rolltop, and click the lock icon.

20 Select the right edge of the right drawer base, select the right edge of the rolltop, and click the lock icon.

Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 831


21 On the View toolbar, click .

The solid geometry of the rolltop is now complete.

Flex the design

22 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog
box, you can still see the model.
23 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.
24 In the Family Types dialog box, do the following:

■ Under Dimensions, enter 4000 mm for Length, and click Apply.


■ Enter 1500 mm for Depth, and click Apply.
■ Enter 1500 mm for Height, and click Apply.
■ Enter 200 mm for Thickness, and click Apply.

The desk should adapt to all the changes. If not, you may need to align and lock problematic edges that
did not remain aligned. You can also use dimension constraints.

832 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


25 In the Family Types dialog box, return the parameters to their original values:

■ Under Dimensions, enter 2000 mm for Length.


■ Enter 1000 mm for Depth.
■ Enter 750 mm for Height.
■ Enter 100 mm for Thickness.
■ Click Apply.
■ Click OK.

26 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry” on page 833.

Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry


In this exercise, you create the solid geometry of the drawers and apply material to the desk.

Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

Create the desk drawer extrusions


1 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.
2 On the Design Bar, click Set Work Plane.
3 In the Work Plane dialog box, under Specify a new Work Plane, select Pick a Plane, and click OK.
4 Select the front plane of the right drawer base.

Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry | 833


5 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front.
6 On the Design Bar, click Lines.

7 On the Options Bar, click .


8 Sketch six drawers similar to the image below.

NOTE The exact configuration of the rectangles representing the drawer fronts is not critical.

9 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.


10 Add a dimension between the vertical edges of the drawer base and the vertical lines of each bottom drawer.
Lock each dimension as you add it. There should be four dimensions as shown.

NOTE Adding and locking these dimensions is very important. If you modify the desk length or the drawer base
width, these locked dimension assure that the drawers flex as expected. If you cannot see the locks on the
dimensions, zoom the view until you do.

11 On the Tools toolbar, click .


12 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment.
13 To constrain the four upper drawers, select the left vertical line on the left lowest drawer first, and then
select the corresponding left vertical lines of the two drawers above it. After selecting the line of an upper
drawer, click the lock that displays to lock the alignment.

14 On the Tools toolbar, click , and repeat the previous step by selecting the right vertical lines of the
drawer set on the left.

834 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


15 On the Tools toolbar, click , and repeat the previous two steps on the right set of drawers.
These steps ensure the top drawers remain aligned and flex with the constrained bottom drawer.

16 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


17 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties.
18 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Constraints, enter 20mm for Extrusion End, and click OK.
19 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

20 On the View toolbar, click .

Apply material to the desk

21 Draw a pick box around the entire desk to select all the extrusions.

22 On the Options Bar, click .

23 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Materials and Finishes, click for Material.
24 In the Materials dialog box, click Duplicate.
25 In the New Material dialog box, enter Desk - Wood, Cherry, and click OK.

26 In the Materials dialog box, under AccuRender, click for Texture.


27 In the Material Library dialog box, navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Cherry and select Stained, Dark, Polished.
28 Click OK.
29 In the Materials dialog box, click OK.
30 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK.
31 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control, and select Shading with Edges.

Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry | 835


Flex the design

32 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog
box, you can still see the model.
33 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.
34 In the Family Types dialog box, do the following:

■ Under Dimensions, enter 4000 mm for Length, and click Apply.


■ Enter 1500 mm for Depth, and click Apply.
■ Enter 200 mm for Thickness, and click Apply.

The desk should adapt to all the changes. If not, you may need to align and lock problematic edges that
did not remain aligned. You can also use dimension constraints.

35 In the Family Types dialog box, return the parameters to their original values:

■ Under Dimensions, enter 2000 mm for Length.


■ Enter 1000 mm for Depth.
■ Enter 750 mm for Height.
■ Enter 100 mm for Thickness.
■ Click Apply.
■ Click OK.

36 Proceed with the final exercise in this lesson, “Defining New Furniture Types” on page 836.

Defining New Furniture Types


In this exercise, you define new furniture types based on the rolltop desk model that you just created.

836 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

Define new furniture types with various widths and depths


1 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.
2 In the Family Types dialog box, under Family Types, click New.
3 In the Name dialog box, enter Rolltop Desk 2000 x 1000mm for Name, and click OK.
4 In the Family Types dialog box, verify that Length is 2000 mm and Depth is 1000 mm, and click Apply.
5 Under Family Types, click New.
6 In the Name dialog box, enter Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm for Name, and click OK.
7 In the Family Types dialog box, enter 2100 mm for Length and 1100 mm for Depth, and click Apply.
8 Under Family Types, click New.
9 In the Name dialog box, enter Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm for Name, and click OK.
10 In the Family Types dialog box, enter 2250 mm for Length and 1250 mm for Depth, click Apply, and click
OK.
You now have three new furniture types defined within your furniture family.

11 On the File menu, click Save.


12 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new furniture family project with the name, Training
Furniture.rfa.

Load the new furniture family into a new project

13 On the Standard toolbar, click to start a new project based on your default template.

14 On the View toolbar, click .


15 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control and select Shading with Edges.
16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Component.
17 On the Options Bar, click Load.
18 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of your Training Furniture.rfa file, select it, and click Open.
19 In the Type Selector, select Rolltop Desk 200 x 1000mm.
20 Specify a point in the drawing area to add the first desk.

Defining New Furniture Types | 837


21 In the Type Selector, select Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm.
22 Specify a point to the right of the first desk, and add the second desk.

23 In the Type Selector, select Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm.


24 Specify a point in the drawing area to the right of the previous two desks, and click to add the third desk.

You now have three new rolltop desks based on the new rolltop desk furniture family prototype. This completes the
Creating a Furniture Family lesson.

Creating a Baluster Family


In this lesson, you create a custom baluster and apply it to a set of stair railings. Balusters are simply profile extrusions
with an assigned height family parameter.

Drawing a Baluster
In this exercise, you draw a baluster with an extrusion.

838 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


Dataset

■ On the File menu, click New ➤ Family.


■ In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Templates folder. Select
Metric Baluster.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default profile template


1 Expand the left elevation view.
2 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit.

The reference planes that display are part of the default baluster template. The bottom of the baluster is at
the reference level and the baluster has an assigned default height of 750mm. Top and bottom cut angles
for the baluster are also displayed.

Draw the baluster plan profile

3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Ref. Level.

4 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.


5 On the Design Bar, click Set Work Plane.
6 In the Work Plane dialog box, select Ref. Level for Name, and click OK.
7 On the Design Bar, click Lines.

NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the baluster
profile should be centered on the vertical and horizontal reference planes. Draw your profile approximately
30mm wide by 60mm deep.

8 Draw the closed baluster plan profile as shown.

9 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Drawing a Baluster | 839


Extend the baluster extrusion to the top reference plane

10 In the Project Browser under Elevations, double-click Front.

By default, the extrusion has a height of 250mm.

11 On the Design Bar, click Modify and select the extrusion.

12 On the Options Bar, click .


13 Select the top reference plane and select the top edge of the extrusion.
14 Click the lock icon.

15 Save the new baluster family with the name Training Baluster.rfa.
The new custom baluster is now complete.

Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run


In this exercise, you assign the new baluster that you just created to a stair run.

Load the new baluster family into a new project


1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project.
2 In the New Project dialog box, click Browse, and in the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training
Files. Navigate to the Metric ➤ Templates folder. Select the DefaultMetric.rte file, and click Open. In the New
Project Dialog box, click OK.

Draw a straight stair run

3 On the Design Bar, click the Modelling tab.


4 On the Design Bar, click Stairs.
5 Draw a straight stair run as shown.

6 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

840 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


7 On the File menu, click Load from Library ➤ Load Family.
8 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of your Training Baluster.rfa file, select it, and click Open.

9 On the View toolbar, click .


10 On the View menu, click Orient ➤ Southwest.
11 On the View menu, click Shading with Edges.

Apply the custom baluster to the stair run

12 On the Design Bar, click Modify and select the existing railing.

13 On the Options Bar, click .


14 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New.
15 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Edit for Baluster Placement.
16 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box, under Baluster Family, select Training Baluster : Training Baluster
for the Regular baluster.

17 Clear Use Balusters Per Tread on Stairs.


18 Specify Start and End posts as Training Baluster.
19 Click OK.
20 In the Type Properties dialog box, click OK.
21 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK.
22 Zoom in on the new balusters.

Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run | 841


The stair run is now assigned the new baluster that you created. This completes the Creating a Baluster
Family lesson.

Creating Profile Families


A profile is a series of closed two-dimensional lines and arcs. Use profiles to define object cross sections such as railings,
balusters, soffits, cornices, and other sweep-defined objects. Create profiles to define frequently used shapes in your
details.
In this lesson, you create five different profiles: a sweep, a railing, a stair nosing, a reveal, and a host sweep. You then
create an in-place sweep based on a 2D path and apply the host sweep to a wall.

Drawing a Sweep Profile


In this exercise, you draw a sweep profile.
Dataset

■ On the File menu, click New ➤ Family.


■ In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files, and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. Select
Metric Profile.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default profile template


1 On the Design Bar, click Lines.

NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the sweep
profile should begin at the reference plane intersection.

2 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the sweep profile with line and arc segments as shown.

3 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Sweep.rfa.
The new sweep profile is now complete.

Drawing a Rail Profile


In this exercise, you create a rail profile.

842 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


Dataset

■ On the File menu, click New ➤ Family.


■ In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files, and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. Select
Metric Profile-Rail.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default rail profile template


1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, verify that Ref. Level is open.
The reference planes that display are part of the default rail profile template, with the vertical reference
plane labeled as the rail centerline and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the rail top. The rail height
is measured from the floor elevation to the rail top.

Draw the rail profile

2 On the Design Bar, click Lines.

NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the top of
the rail profile should coincide with the rail top reference plane.

3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the rail profile with line segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Rail.rfa.
The new rail profile is now complete.

Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile


In this exercise, you create a stair nosing profile.
Dataset

■ On the File menu, click New ➤ Family.

Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile | 843


■ In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files, and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. Select
Metric Profile-Stair Nosing.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default stair nosing profile template
1 Notice the existing planes and text provided within the template.
The reference planes that display are part of the default stair nosing profile template, with the vertical
reference plane labeled as the riser face and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the tread surface.
Additional text specifies the lower-left quadrant as the location for the stair nosing.

Draw the stair nosing profile

2 On the Design Bar, click Lines.

NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, you must
draw the stair nosing in the lower-left quadrant. In addition, the top of the stair nosing profile should coincide
with the tread surface reference plane and the right edge of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the
riser face reference plane.

3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the stair nosing profile with line and arc segments as
shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Stair Nosing.rfa.
The new stair nosing profile is now complete.

Drawing a Reveal Profile


In this exercise, you create a reveal profile. Reveal profiles are used with the Reveal tool in the project environment to
define a wall cutout.
Dataset

■ On the File menu, click New ➤ Family.


■ In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files, and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. Select
Metric Profile-Reveal.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default reveal profile template


1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, verify that Ref. Level is open.
The reference planes that display are part of the default reveal profile template, with the vertical reference
plane labeled as the wall face, and the wall body indicated to the right of the wall face reference plane. The
horizontal reference plane represents the offset from floor level to the reveal.

844 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


Draw the reveal profile

2 On the Design Bar, click Lines.

NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines, their exact location is not critical. However, the left edge of the
reveal profile must coincide with wall face reference plane and the reveal must be drawn within the wall body
(to the right of the wall face reference plane).

3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the reveal profile with line segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Reveal.rfa.
The new reveal profile is now complete.

Drawing a Host Sweep Profile


In this exercise, you create a host sweep profile. Host Sweep profiles are similar to reveal profiles and are used with the
Host Sweep tool in the project environment to define a shape to add to a host surface, which may be any vertical
surface.
Dataset

■ On the File menu, click New ➤ Family.


■ In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files, and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. Select
Metric Profile-Hosted.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default host sweep profile template
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, verify that Ref. Level is open.

Drawing a Host Sweep Profile | 845


The reference planes that display are part of the default host sweep profile template, with the vertical
reference plane labeled as the host face and the host body indicated to the left of the host face reference
plane. The reference plane intersection is the origin of the host sweep profile.

Draw the host sweep profile

2 On the Design Bar, click Lines.

NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines, their exact location is not critical. However, the left edge of the
host sweep profile must coincide with the host face reference plane, and the host sweep profile must be drawn
outside of the host body (to the right of the host face reference plane).

3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the reveal profile with line and arc segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Host Sweep.rfa.
The new host sweep profile is now complete.

Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path


In this exercise, you apply the sweep profile that you just created to a 2D path.

Create a new project


1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project.
2 In the New Project dialog box, click Browse, and in the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training
Files. Navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. Select the DefaultMetric.rte file, and click Open. In the New
Project Dialog box, click OK.

Specify the family category

3 On the Modelling menu, click Create.

846 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box, select Generic Models for Family Category, and click
OK.
5 In the Name dialog box, enter Sweep for Name, and click OK.

Sketch the 2D sweep path

6 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep.
7 On the Design Bar, click Sketch 2D Path.

NOTE When you sketch the 2D path, the exact location of the path is not critical.

8 On the Design Bar, click Lines and sketch the 2D path approximately as shown.

9 On the Design Bar, click Finish Path.

Apply the sweep profile to the 2D path

10 On the Options Bar, click Load Profiles.


11 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of Profile - Sweep.rfa, select it, and click Open.
12 In the Type Selector, beside Load Profiles, select Profile - Sweep.
13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sweep.
14 On the Design Bar, click Finish Family.

15 On the View toolbar, click .

Modify the sweep profile configuration

16 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations, and double-click South.

17 Zoom in on the right end of the sweep.

Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path | 847


18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Ref Plane.
19 Draw a vertical reference plane coincident with the left edge of the profile as shown.

20 Select the sweep profile and, on the Options Bar, click Edit.

21 Select the sweep profile again and, on the Options Bar, click .
22 In the Element Properties dialog box, do the following:

■ Under Constraints, enter 600 for Vertical Profile Offset.


■ Enter 25 degrees for Angle.
■ Under Other, select Profile Is Flipped.

23 Click OK.
24 On the Design Bar, click Finish Family.

25 On the View toolbar, click .

The sweep profile application is now complete.

Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls


In this exercise, you apply the host sweep profile that you created to a group of walls.

Create a new project


1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project.
2 In the New Project dialog box, click Browse, and in the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training
Files. Navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. Select the DefaultMetric.rte file, and click Open. In the New
Project Dialog box, click OK.

Draw a wall group

3 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar, click Wall.

848 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


NOTE When you draw the walls, their exact location is not critical.

4 Draw four walls as shown.

5 On the View toolbar, click .

6 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar, click Host Sweep ➤ Wall Sweep.
7 On the Options Bar, verify that Horizontal is selected.
8 Select a point on the left wall for the wall sweep.

9 Select a point on the right wall for the next wall sweep.

Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls | 849


10 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Replace the default wall sweep with the new host wall sweep

11 On the File menu, click Load from Library ➤ Load Family.


12 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of Profile - Host Sweep.rfa, select it, and click Open.

13 Select the wall sweep and, on the Options Bar, click .


14 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New.
15 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select Profile - Host Sweep : Profile - Host Sweep
for Profile, and click OK.
16 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK.

17 On the View toolbar, click .


18 In the Dynamic View dialog box, click Spin [Shift].
19 Move the cursor to rotate your viewpoint to view the host sweep from underneath.

The default wall sweep is replaced with your host sweep profile.

This completes the Creating Profile Families lesson.

Creating a Room Tag


In this lesson, you create a room tag which displays room name, floor and ceiling finish, and area with labels added
to extract project data.

Specifying Room Tag Parameters


In this exercise, you specify the room tag parameters.
Dataset

■ On the File menu, click New ➤ Annotation Symbol.


■ In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files, and navigate to the Metric ➤ Templates folder. Select
M_Room Tag.rft, and click Open.

Create a new tag based on the default room tag template


1 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit.

The reference planes that display are part of the default room tag template.

850 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


Edit the 3mm label

2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Label.

3 On the Options Bar, click .


4 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New.
5 In the Type Properties dialog box, select Underline, and click OK.

Add a 2mm label

6 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New.


7 In the Type properties dialog box, click Duplicate.
8 In the Name dialog box, enter 2mm for Name, and click OK.
9 In the Type Properties dialog box, enter 2 for the Text Size parameter, clear Underline, and click OK.
10 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK.

Combine labels into a room tag

11 On the Design Bar, click Label.


12 In the Type Selector, verify that Label : 3mm is displayed.
13 On the Options Bar, verify that Center and Middle are selected for Text Alignment.
14 Specify the location for the first label as shown.

15 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Name, and click OK.
16 Zoom in on the label.

The name label is displayed with the text underlined.

17 In the Type Selector, select Label : 2mm.


18 Specify a point below the Name label for the next label location.
19 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Floor Finish, and click OK.

20 Specify a point below the Floor Finish label for the next label location.
21 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Ceiling Finish, and click OK.

22 Specify a point below the Ceiling Finish label for the last label location.
23 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Area, and click OK.

Specifying Room Tag Parameters | 851


The Area label has a predefined value of 150 SF.

24 Save the new room tag with the name Finish Area Tag.rfa.
The new room tag is now ready for use.

This completes the Creating a Room Tag lesson.

Creating an Annotation Symbol


In this lesson, you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol and place it in a new project.

Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol


In this exercise, you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol with a circle and lines.
Dataset

■ On the File menu, click New ➤ Annotation Symbol.


■ In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files, and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. Select
Generic Annotation.rft, and click Open.

Create a new annotation symbol based on the default generic annotation template
1 In the Project Browser, notice that there is only one view available.
The reference planes that display are part of the default generic annotation template. Notes included with
the template specify annotation parameters.

Sketch a north arrow symbol

2 On the Design Bar, click Lines.

3 On the Options Bar, click .


4 Specify the reference plane intersection for the circle center point.

852 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


5 Drag the cursor and specify a radius of 8mm.

6 On the Options Bar, click .


7 Draw a horizontal line from the left side to the right side of the circle through the center point.

8 Draw a vertical line from the top to the center point of the circle.

9 Draw a vertical line from the center point to the bottom of the circle.

Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol | 853


10 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
The new north arrow annotation symbol is ready to edit.

Add an annotation objects subcategory

11 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles.


12 In the Object Styles dialog box, under Modify Subcategories, click New.
13 In the New Subcategory dialog box, enter North Line for Name, verify that Generic Annotations is selected
for Subcategory of, and click OK.
14 In the Object Styles dialog box, in the North Line row, select 3 for Line Weight, and click OK.

Apply the new line weight to the upper vertical line

15 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the upper vertical line.
16 In the Type Selector, select North Line.
17 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

18 Select the template notes and press DELETE.


The north arrow annotation symbol is now complete.

19 Save the new north arrow with the name, Training North Arrow.rfa.

Adding the New North Arrow to a Project


In this exercise, you add the new north arrow annotation symbol that you created to a project.

854 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


Load the new north arrow into a new project
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project.
2 In the New Project dialog box, click Browse, and in the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training
Files. Navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. Select the DefaultMetric.rte file, and click Open. In the New
Project Dialog box, click OK.
3 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Sheet.
4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box, select A1 metric.
5 Click OK.
6 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet.
7 On the File menu, click Load from Library ➤ Load Family.
8 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of Training North Arrow.rfa, select it, and click Open.
9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Symbol.
10 In the Type Selector, select Training North Arrow.
11 Specify a point in the lower right corner of the sheet to place the symbol.

12 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

This completes the Creating an Annotation Symbol lesson.

Creating a Titleblock Family


In this lesson, you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the A0 metric titleblock template.

The titleblock has linework, text, and labels. You customize the titleblock with a new text style, graphics, and your
project data.

Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet


In this exercise, you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom A0-size sheet.
Dataset

■ On the File menu, click New ➤ Titleblock.

Creating a Titleblock Family | 855


■ In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. Select A0
metric.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default titleblock template


1 The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines.

Sketch the inside border

2 On the Design Bar, click Lines.

3 On the Options Bar, click , and enter -25 for Offset.


4 Specify the upper left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner, and then specify the lower right
corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle.

Add vertical and horizontal lines

5 On the Options Bar, click , and enter 140 for Offset.


6 Move the cursor over the right inside border line, and click to draw a new vertical line.

7 On the Options Bar, click , and click .


8 Enter 0 for Offset.
9 Draw a horizontal line 140mm below the upper inside border as shown.

10 Draw a horizontal line 120mm below the last horizontal line as shown.

856 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


11 Draw a horizontal line 120mm above the lower inside border as shown.

12 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press CTRL, and select the second and third horizontal lines.
13 In the Type Selector, select Wide Lines.
14 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet.
15 On the Design Bar, click Lines.
16 In the Type Selector, select Title Blocks.

17 On the Options Bar, click , and enter 20 for Offset.


18 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line, and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the
existing line.
19 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line, and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the
existing line.
20 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line, and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the
existing line.

21 On the Options Bar, enter 30 for Offset.


22 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line, and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the
existing line.
23 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line, and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above
the existing line.
24 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line, and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the
existing line.

Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet | 857


25 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
26 Zoom out to view the entire sheet.

The titleblock linework is now complete.

Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock


In this exercise, you add a company logo, text notes, and labels to your titleblock.

Add a company logo


1 On the File menu, click Import/Link ➤ Image.
2 In the Open dialog box, navigate to Training Files/Common, select Company Logo.jpg, and click Open.
3 Place the image in the upper right corner of the sheet as shown.

4 Zoom in on the logo.

858 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


Create a new 10mm text style

5 On the Design Bar, click Text.

6 On the Options Bar, click .


7 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New.
8 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate.
9 In the Name dialog box, enter 10mm Bold for Name, and click OK.
10 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Text, enter 10 for Text Size, and select Bold.
11 Click OK twice.

Add company name text

12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown.

13 Enter Arch Design Inc. in the text box.


14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text.

Add company address and phone number text

15 In the Type Selector, select Text : 8mm.


16 Draw a text box below the initial text, and add an address and phone number as shown.

Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 859


Press ENTER to add each new line of text and click outside of the text box to complete the text.

17 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the last text note.
18 Select the drag handle, and drag the text note down as shown.

19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification.

Add consultant name, address, and phone number text

20 On the Design Bar, click Text.


21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line, and enter the following text:

■ Consultant:
■ Address:
■ Address:
■ Telephone:

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the consultant text note.

860 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


23 On the Edit toolbar, click .
24 On the Options Bar, select Constrain and Multiple.
25 Click inside the Consultant text group.

26 Move the cursor down 120mm and click to specify the first copied text note position.

27 Move the cursor down another 120mm and click to specify the second copied text note location.

Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 861


Create a new 5mm text style

28 On the Design Bar, click Text.

29 On the Options Bar, click .


30 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New.
31 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate.
32 In the Name dialog box, enter 5mm for Name, and click OK.
33 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Text, enter 5 for Text Size.
34 Click OK twice.

Add drawing data text

35 In the Type Selector, select Text : 5mm.


36 Draw a text box in the lower right space of the titleblock, and enter Sheet Number:.
37 Draw a text box in the next space up, and enter Checked By:.
38 Draw a text box in the next space up, and enter Drawn By:.
39 Draw a text box in the next space up, and enter Date:.

862 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


Add drawing data labels

40 On the Design Bar, click Label.


41 On the Options Bar, select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment.
42 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Date field, and click to specify the label location.

43 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Project Issue Date, and click OK.
The label displays a default value wrapped to 3 lines.

44 Select the left drag handle on the label, and drag to the left until the label displays on one line.

NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text.

Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 863


45 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Drawn By field, and click to specify the label location.
46 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Drawn By, and click OK.

NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text.

47 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Checked By field, and click to specify the label location.
48 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Checked By and click OK.

NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text.

Create a new 15mm label style

49 On the Design Bar, click Label.

50 On the Options Bar, click .


51 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New.
52 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate.
53 In the Name dialog box, under Text, enter 15mm Label for Name, and click OK.
54 In the Type Properties dialog box, enter 15 for Text Size.
55 Click OK twice.

Add sheet number and project data labels

56 In the Type Selector, select Label : 15mm Label.


57 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Sheet Number field, and click to specify the label location.
58 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Sheet Number, and click OK.
59 On the Options Bar, click Center and Middle.
60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field, and click to specify the label location.
61 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Project Number, and click OK.

864 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


62 Select the left drag handle on the label, and drag to the left until the label displays on one line.

63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field, and click to specify the label
location.
64 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Project Name, and click OK.
65 Select the left drag handle on the label, and drag to the left until the label displays on one line.
66 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field, and click to specify the label
location.
67 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Client Name, and click OK.
68 Select the left drag handle on the label, and drag to the left until the label displays on one line.

Create a 4mm label style

69 On the Design Bar, click Label.

Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 865


70 On the Options Bar, click .
71 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New.
72 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate.
73 In the Name dialog box, enter 4mm Label, and click OK.
74 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Text, enter 4 for Text Size.
75 Click OK twice.

Add Project Path label

76 In the Type Selector, select 4mm Label.


77 On the Options Bar, click Left and Middle.
78 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field, and click to specify the
label location.
79 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select File Path, and click OK.
80 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately
equal to the width of the Sheet Number field.

81 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training A0Horizontal Titleblock.rfa.
The titleblock graphics, text, and labels are now complete.

Adding the Titleblock to a New Project


In this exercise, you add the titleblock that you created to a new project.

Load the new titleblock family into a new project


1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project.
2 In the New Project dialog box, click Browse, and in the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training
Files. Navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. Select the DefaultMetric.rte file, and click Open. In the New
Project Dialog box, click OK.
3 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Sheet.
4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box, click Load.
5 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of Training A0Horizontal Titleblock.rfa file, select it, and
click Open.
6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box, select Training A0Horizontal Titleblock.
7 Click OK.

866 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


Modify titleblock properties

8 On the Design Bar, click Modify and select the titleblock.

9 On the Options Bar, click .


10 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Other, enter Name for Drawn By, and click OK.
11 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet.

12 On the Settings menu, click Project Information.


13 In the Type Properties dialog box, do the following:

■ Enter January 1, 2005 for Project Issue Date.


■ Enter In Progress for Project Status.
■ Enter Jane Smith for Client Name.
■ Enter Office Building for Project Name.
■ Enter 2005-01 for Project Number.

14 Click OK.

Adding the Titleblock to a New Project | 867


This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson.

Creating In-Place Families


In this lesson, you start with an incomplete building information model of the Pantheon, and add a dome roof and a
concave floor with revolved forms as in-place families. You create an in-place family in your current project rather than
in the Family Editor. In-place families interact with the building model according to their assigned family category.

NOTE This project was created using an imperial template and components. To change the units of measurement to meters,
on the Settings menu, click Project Units. Set the Length units to millimeters, set the Area to Square meters, format the Area
to use 2 decimal places, and set the suffix to None.

Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family


In this exercise, you create the dome roof with a revolved form. Sketch the roof cross-section with a closed profile in
an elevation view.
Dataset

■ On the File menu, click Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog box, select Training and navigate to the Common folder.
■ Select c_Pantheon.rvt, and click Open.

Open the existing Pantheon building model


1 On the View menu, click Orient ➤ Southeast.

868 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


Next, you add a dome roof with oculus (circular opening) to the Pantheon building model.

2 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations, and double-click South.

Specify the Roofs family category

3 On the Modelling menu, click Create.


4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box, select Roofs for Family Category, and click OK.
5 In the Name dialog box, enter Dome for Name, and click OK.

Specify the dome roof revolved form parameters

6 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve.


7 On the Design Bar, click Set Work Plane.
8 In the Work Plane dialog box, select Pick a Plane, and click OK.
9 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown.

10 In the Go To View dialog box, select Section: Wall Section - Center, and click Open View.

Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 869


The center wall section view is displayed.

Draw the axis of rotation for the dome roof revolved form

11 On the Design Bar, click Axis.

12 On the Options Bar, click .


13 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis, and
then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis.

Draw the lower face of the dome roof

14 On the Design Bar, click Lines.

15 On the Options Bar, click .


16 Specify the intersection of the Upper Cornice horizontal reference plane and vertical axis as the circle center
point.

870 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


17 Move the cursor out, until it creates an intersection with the level 1 reference plane.

The circle is tangent to the interior wall face and the level 1 reference plane at the floor line.

Draw the oculus rim profile

18 Zoom in on the top of the circle.

The reference planes that display are guides for drawing the oculus rim profile.

19 On the Options Bar, click , and select Chain.


20 Specify the reference plane intersection for the start point of the rim profile as shown.

21 Snap to reference plane intersections, and draw the five rim profile line segments in the shape of a reverse
C as shown.

Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 871


Split the circle

22 On the Tools toolbar, click .


23 On the Options Bar, select Delete Inner Segment.
24 Select a point on the circle to the right of the rim profile.

25 Select the intersection of the circle and the lower left vertical line of the profile as shown.

The circle is trimmed between the rim profile and the first split point.

Draw the upper face of the dome roof

26 On the Design Bar, click Lines.

27 On the Options Bar, click .


28 Specify the endpoint of the upper left rim profile line segment as the arc start point.

872 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


29 Specify the top of the stairs in the wall section as the arc endpoint.

30 Specify a point on the arc approximately as shown.

Draw two lines to close the dome roof profile

31 On the Design Bar, click Lines.

32 On the Options Bar, click and select Chain.


33 Draw a horizontal line from the arc endpoint to the interior edge of the wall, and then draw a vertical line
down the interior wall face to the lower dome roof face tangent point.

Trim the arc below the tangent point

34 On the Tools toolbar, click .

Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 873


35 Select the interior face of the wall, and then select a point on the arc above the tangent point as the segment
to keep.

The dome roof closed profile is now complete.

Specify lightweight concrete for the dome roof material

36 On the Design Bar, click Revolution Properties.

37 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Materials and Finishes, click for Material.
38 In the Materials dialog box, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Lightweight Concrete for Name, and click OK.
39 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK.
40 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
41 On the Design Bar, click Finish Family.

42 On the View toolbar, click .

The dome roof in-place family is now complete.

Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family


In this exercise, you create the concave floor slab for the Pantheon building model.

Specify the concave floor revolved form parameters


1 On the Modelling menu, click Create.

874 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


2 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box, select Floors for Family Category, and click OK.
3 In the Name dialog box, enter Concave Floor for Name, and click OK.
4 In the Project Browser under Elevations, double-click South.

5 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve.


6 On the Design Bar, click Set Work Plane.
7 In the Work Plane dialog box, select Pick a Plane, and click OK.
8 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown.

9 In the Go To View dialog box, select Section: Wall Section - Center, and click Open View.

Draw the axis of rotation for the floor revolved form

10 On the Design Bar, click Axis.

11 On the Options Bar, click .


12 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis, and
then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis.

Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family | 875


Draw the concave floor profile

13 On the Design Bar, click Lines.

14 On the Options Bar, click , and select Chain.


15 Specify the intersection of the T.O. Footing level line and the axis, for the start point of the floor profile
as shown.

NOTE You may need to zoom in closer to the intersection to select the first point.

16 Drag the cursor up 800 mm, and specify the next point for the floor profile as shown.

17 Specify the intersection of the level 1 reference plane and the interior wall edge for the next point of the
floor profile as shown.

876 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor


18 Specify the intersection of the T.O. Footing level line and the interior wall edge for the next point of the
floor profile.
19 Specify the intersection of the of the T.O. Footing level line and the axis for the last point of the floor
profile.

The concave floor closed profile is now complete.

Specify cobblestone for the concave floor material

20 On the Design Bar, click Revolution Properties.

21 In the Element Properties dialog box, click for Material.


22 In the Materials dialog box, select Cobblestone for Name, and click OK.
23 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK.
24 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
25 On the Design Bar, click Finish Family.
26 In the Project Browser under 3D Views, double-click 3D Section View.

This completes the Creating In-Place Families lesson.

Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family | 877


878 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor
Parametric Component
Design Techniques 18
In this tutorial, you create a new parametric component within the Family Editor.

During this tutorial, you learn the process and methodology of creating a new

family. In exercises that become increasingly complex, you learn specific

techniques and best practices that you can apply broadly when creating other

families in Revit MEP 2008.

The parametric component that you design in this tutorial is an open web wood

floor truss. In this case, the length of the trimmable truss determines the size and

grade of the truss chords. In the center of the truss is a mechanical service clearance

to accommodate HVAC systems. The truss also has multiple types, formula-based

parameters, assigned subcatecories, and detail level controls. This type of

component uses a broad spectrum of design techniques within the Family Editor.

The goal of this tutorial is to teach you the proper approach to parametric

component creation, not specifically how to make a floor truss. At the end of this

tutorial, you will understand the process, methodology, and the specific techniques

for creating a parametric component.

879
Planning a Parametric Component Family
Creating a new parametric component family is no different than any other design process; planning ahead is one of
the most important steps. Knowing why you are creating a particular family and what you need it to do will drive the
specific design process. In this lesson, you accomplish two main tasks: you determine the component needs and select
the family template that is suited to those needs.

Determining Component Needs


In this exercise, you determine the requirements of the new component. In this case, it is an open-joist wood floor
truss. For training purposes, imagine that your firm specializes in light commercial and residential design. Your
assignment is to create a truss that adapts parametrically to changes in the building design.

Decide component type and design requirements


1 What type of component are you designing?
In this case, the design specification requires that the floor truss snaps to columns, beams, and structural
walls, and also works intuitively with them. It should also be an available option within a beam system.
In addition, the component should use the point-to-point insertion method with the joist web members
adjusting parametrically.
Because this component has to interact closely with other structural components, this must be a structural
beam component. This decision dictates which family template you begin with. If the component did not
have to interact so closely with other structural components, a generic floor-based component might work.
Although this solution is possible, it is not the best solution.
In the next exercise, you select the best available template with which to begin the new structural beam
family.

2 What additional design requirements affect the design plan for this beam family?

Additional design requirements

■ The truss should automatically adjust depth as the length changes.


■ Two types should be created, a 2x3 truss and a 2x4 truss.
■ A rectangular mechanical clearance opening must be centered within the beam.

The design requirements dictate how simple or complex a family must be. In this case, the beam design
must be advanced in order to have the flexibility that the specs require.

NOTE When creating a new family, you should avoid over-designing the component. If the design requirements
can be met with a simple design, then you should design only what is needed to satisfy the requirements. For
every complexity added to a family, there is a computing performance cost that must be paid within the project.
Take this into consideration during your design planning.

Using the new family within a project

3 How will you use the family within a project?

880 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques


For instance:

■ What materials need the most control?


These materials, such as wood type, would require Instance or Type parameters.

■ What materials remain constant throughout a project?


The chord and web material will always be wood. These materials can be applied using Object Styles.

■ What types are most commonly used?


In this training case, only the 2x3 and 2x4 trusses with wood web members are required.

■ How will the component need to be scheduled?


This is an important question, especially if you are going to be nesting subcomponents that may require
separate scheduling. In addition, the means by which you gather the information you require within
the schedule needs to be built into the component.

You have completed the planning stage for the new family. Depending on the family you are designing,
the planning stage and questions may differ.

4 Continue with the next exercise, “Selecting the Family Template” on page 881.

Selecting the Family Template


In this exercise, you determine which family template provides the best starting point for the new beam family. In the
previous exercise, you determined that the component type is a structural beam. This critical decision reduces the
quantity of template options.

Selecting the Family Template | 881


Review the template options
1 Close any open projects or families.
2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.
The New dialog box opens to the templates folder that is specified in your Settings ➤ Options dialog box.
You should be in the Metric Templates folder. Usually, this is where you access family templates. However,
to ensure you are using the templates referenced in this tutorial, you will access them from the Training
Files folder.

3 In the left pane of the New dialog box, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates.
4 Scroll through the various template options.
Notice that most of the template names include the component type. In addition, the template name often
includes information how the component would be used with a project, for example: wall based or floor
based.

5 Select Metric Generic Model floor based.rft.

NOTE Do not double-click the template or open it. Select it so that the preview displays.

On the right side of the New dialog box, notice the preview.

Like most generic family templates, it provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and
Center (front/back).

6 In the New dialog box, scroll to the structural framing templates.


There are two structural framing templates provided.

■ Metric Structural Framing - Beams and Braces.rft

882 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques


This template is design specifically to accommodate point-to-point insertion and the specific snapping,
spacing, and display functions required by structural beams.

■ Metric Structural Framing - Complex and Trusses.rft


This template is designed for complex framing components and trusses. It provides two intersecting
reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). Because of its simplicity, it is not designed
to create a component capable of point-to-point insertion.

7 Select Metric Structural Framing - Complex and Trusses.rft, and notice the preview.

Although the template name suggests this is the appropriate template, it is not the best starting point for
the beam family.

8 Select Metric Structural Framing - Beams and Braces.rft and notice the preview.

Notice this template offers three vertical planes on each side of the center (left/right) reference plane. These
planes are designed specifically to accommodate point-to-point beam insertion and the special snapping
and display requirements of beam components. This template is the best starting point for the new family.

Open the family template

9 Double-click Metric Structural Framing - Beams and Braces.rft to open it.


10 Maximize the view, Floor Plan: Ref. Level.

Floor Plan: Ref. Level

Selecting the Family Template | 883


In this view, you can see the rectangular beam extrusion and a symbolic line.

11 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front.


Notice that the beam extrusion is centered on the level line. When a beam family based on this template
is added to a project, the top of the beam extrusion is aligned to the associated level of the plan view.

12 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1.

This beam extrusion is supplied within the template as a starting point. Like many templates, the geometry
supplied can be used or discarded as needed.

13 Proceed to the next lesson, “Creating the Component Skeleton” on page 884.

Creating the Component Skeleton


In this lesson, you add the reference planes, lines, and dimensions that provide a skeleton for the solid geometry. As
you add solid geometry later in the tutorial, you snap and lock the solid geometry to these reference planes and lines.
Therefore, creating a skeleton to build upon is the foundation of a new component family.

NOTE When creating or modifying a family, it is not necessary to create a skeleton of reference planes or lines and then align
and lock the solid geometry to it. Dimensioning the solid geometry directly also works; however, using reference planes and
lines is considered more reliable and is therefore a best practice.

Adding Reference Planes


In this exercise, you add reference planes to the beam design. These reference planes act as part of the skeleton to which
the solid geometry will align and lock.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you started in the previous exercise.

Review existing reference planes


1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Ref. Level.
2 Place the cursor over the leftmost vertical reference plane until the tooltip displays the name of the plane,
Reference Plane: Left.

TIP The name also displays on the Status Bar.

884 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques


3 Repeat this step for the other two vertical planes on the left side.
The reference planes in this template are designed to accommodate the point-to-point insertion of a beam
component. The reference planes and their respective explanations are listed below.

■ Left and Right:


These two planes mark the points where the beam intersects with other columns. In the image below,
two steel columns and a steel beam have been added to a project. The two arrows point to the snap
points that the left and right reference planes refer to.

NOTE The reference planes shown in the project image below were added as a training reference. Reference
planes that display within a family file do not display within a project.

■ Member Left and Member Right:


These two planes refer to the left and right extent of the beam solid geometry when displayed in a
medium or fine display view of a project. In the project plan view image below, notice the location of
the beam extents. The six reference planes shown in the project below were added as a training reference;
they do not display when the family is loaded into a project.

■ Stick Symbol Left and Stick Symbol Right:

Adding Reference Planes | 885


These two planes refer to the extents of the stick symbol when it is loaded into a project and the plan
view display setting is coarse.

Each family template has a different set of reference planes established within it. Before adding new reference
planes, it is important to be familiar with the template so you do not create duplicate or conflicting planes.

Delete existing solid geometry

4 Select the rectangular beam extrusion.

NOTE Be careful not to select the symbolic line.

5 On the Edit Toolbar, click .


In a later exercise, you add the solid geometry for the truss as a sweep.

Add new reference planes

6 On the Design Bar, click Ref Plane.


7 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm above the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back).

8 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm below the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back).

You will use these two reference planes to control the beam width and keep it centered on the reference
plane: Center (Front/Back).

886 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques


Add ref. planes to control beam depth

9 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front.


10 On the Design Bar, click Ref Plane.
11 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm below the Level: Ref. Level.

12 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm above the Level: Ref. Level.

TIP You can also use the mirror tool to accomplish this task. To do this, select the lower horizontal reference

plane, click on the Edit toolbar, and select the Level: Ref. Level as the mirror axis.

These two reference planes mark the top and bottom extents of the beam. This beam requires additional
reference planes to complete the truss skeleton.

13 On the Design Bar, click Ref Plane.

14 On the Options Bar, click , and specify an Offset of 38 mm.


The next four reference planes that you add mark the thickness of the truss chords.

15 Place the cursor over the top horizontal reference plane. When a copy of the reference plane displays below
it, click to place it.

TIP You can control the direction of the offset by moving the cursor slightly to either side of the line you intend
to pick.

Adding Reference Planes | 887


16 Place the cursor over the lower horizontal reference plane and when a copy of the reference plane displays
above it, click to place it as shown.

17 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Left, and when a copy of the reference plane displays to
the right of it, click to place it as shown.

18 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Right, and when a copy of the reference plane displays to
the left of it, click to place it as shown.

You have completed the reference planes that make up the skeleton of the chords. Before you move on to
the next exercise, you must add four additional reference planes to accommodate the center chase.

19 On the Options Bar, specify an Offset of 200 mm.

888 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques


20 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right), and when a copy of the reference plane displays
to the left of it, click to place it as shown.

21 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right), and when a copy of the reference plane displays
to the right of it, click to place it as shown.

22 On the Options Bar, specify an Offset of 238 mm.


23 Use the Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right) to add reference planes to the left and right of it as shown
below.

24 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Ref. Level.


Notice the reference planes that you added in the elevation view. Although there is nothing technically
incorrect regarding the reference planes in this view, cleaning up some of the extents would make the view
easier, which you do in the next exercise.

Adding Reference Planes | 889


25 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

26 Click File menu ➤ Save.


27 In the Save As dialog box, enter Wood Floor Truss for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice,
and click Save.

NOTE You use this family for the remainder of this tutorial. Make sure you remember where you saved it.

28 Proceed to the next exercise, “Adding Dimensions and Constraints” on page 890.

Adding Dimensions and Constraints


In this exercise, you add some of the dimensions and constraints that control how the open web floor truss adapts to
changes in its geometry. By applying dimensions and constraints directly to the skeleton of the family, you can make
sure the new family adapts to changes in geometry as expected before adding solid geometry to it.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Dimension chord width


1 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.

2 On the Options Bar, click .


This tool is the aligned dimension tool. It allows you to dimension between parallel lines.

3 Select each of the horizontal reference planes and place the dimension to the left as shown. After adding
the dimension, separate the overriding values by dragging the value controls as shown.

890 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques


TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings during this procedure.

4 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


5 Select the dimension you added in the previous step, and click the EQ symbol when it displays.
This ensures that changes to the chord width are distributed equally across the center reference plane.

6 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.


7 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane.
Place the dimension as shown.

Add the depth dimension and equality constraint

8 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front.


9 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.
10 Select the upper horizontal reference plane, the Center reference plane, and the lower horizontal reference
plane, place the dimension to the left as shown, and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint.

Adding Dimensions and Constraints | 891


NOTE The center horizontal reference plane overlaps the level line: Ref. Level. You may need to use the TAB key
to toggle the selection to the reference plane.

11 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane
and move it to the left of the equality constrained dimension you added previously.

Dimension and constrain the center chase width

12 Add a dimension referring to the three vertical reference planes in the center of the model, place the
dimension under the lines as shown and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint.

13 Add a dimension referring to the reference planes to the left and right of the Center (Left/Right) reference
plane, and place it below the dimension you added previously.

892 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques


Dimension chord thickness

14 On the right side of the model, add two dimensions as shown.


These dimensions refer to the chord thickness.

15 Add four dimensions as shown.


These dimensions refer to the chord thickness of the vertical members and the members that border the
center chase.

You have finished adding the dimensions and constraints that control how the truss skeleton adapts to
changes. Throughout the tutorial, you will add additional reference planes, dimensions, and constraints
as needed.
In the next exercise, you label the dimensions to create instance and type parameters. These parameters
are the key to providing flexibility within a project. In addition, they allow you to “flex” the model in
order to test your design.

16 Click File menu ➤ Save.


17 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating New Length Parameters” on page 894.

Adding Dimensions and Constraints | 893


Creating New Length Parameters
In this exercise, you create new length parameters that control the basic dimensions of the floor truss. The parameters
that you create when designing a family are the same parameters used within a project to control the instance and type
parameters of that family. When you design a new family, it is important to decide how much control over the
component will be required after the component is loaded into a project.
There are many types of parameters and various ways to create them. In this exercise, you label the dimensions that
you added in the previous exercise. When you label a dimension in the Family Editor, it becomes a parameter. You
choose whether to make it an instance or type parameter.

Things to consider when deciding “instance” or “type:”

■ If the component comes in standard sizes that must be maintained, consider making it a type parameter.
■ If the component is something that is cut or otherwise extremely flexible, consider making it an instance parameter.
■ If the component has material that varies per component, consider making the material parameter an instance
parameter.
■ If the parameter controls something that usually remains constant by its nature, consider making it a type parameter.
You should lean towards simplicity whenever possible.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Create the chord width parameter


1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Ref. Level.
2 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the chord as shown.

3 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label.


4 In the Parameter Properties dialog box, do the following:

■ Under Parameter Type, select Family parameter.


■ Under Parameter Data, enter Chord Width for Name.
■ Select Dimensions for Group parameter under.
■ Select Type.
This indicates whether the parameter is a type or instance parameter.

■ Click OK.

894 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques


Create truss depth parameter

5 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front.


6 Select the dimension on the left that refers to the depth of the truss.

7 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label.


8 In the Parameter Properties dialog box, do the following:

■ Under Parameter Type, select Family parameter.


■ Under Parameter Data, enter Depth for Name.
■ Select Dimensions for Group parameter under.
■ Select Type.
■ Click OK.

Create center chase width parameter

9 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the center chase interior.

10 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label.


11 In the Parameter Properties dialog box, do the following:

■ Under Parameter Type, select Family parameter.


■ Under Parameter Data, enter Center Chase Width for Name.
■ Select Dimensions for Group parameter under.
■ Select Type.
■ Click OK.

Creating New Length Parameters | 895


Create chord thickness parameter

12 On the right side of the model, select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the lower horizontal
truss chord as shown.

13 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label.


14 In the Parameter Properties dialog box, do the following:

■ Under Parameter Type, select Family parameter.


■ Under Parameter Data, enter Chord Thickness for Name.
■ Select Dimensions for Group parameter under.
■ Select Type.
■ Click OK.

TIP You may need to drag the text label downward as shown.

Apply chord thickness label to other dimensions

15 On the right side of the model, select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the upper horizontal
truss chord.
16 On the Options Bar, select Chord Thickness for Label.

896 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques


17 Apply the Chord Thickness label to the vertical chords and the vertical members on the left and right side
of the center chase as shown.

18 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.


In the Family Types dialog box, notice the labelled dimensions display under the list of parameters and
under the group, Dimensions.
When you load this family into a project, these parameters will be available within the Type Properties
dialog box for the beam.

19 Click Cancel.
20 On the File menu, click Save.
21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Flexing the Component Model” on page 897.

Flexing the Component Model


One of the most important steps in the process of creating a new parametric component is the flexing of the model.
Flexing the model means to change parameter values, thus forcing the model to adapt to the changes. This is not
limited to length parameters. If you add a new material parameter, you should also test it to make sure it works as
expected. You should flex the model after any major change to the design.

You should flex a new family after:

■ Adding or modifying an element.


■ Adding or modifying a parameter.

Flexing the Component Model | 897


■ Adding a new constraint.
■ Nesting a component.
■ Adding or modifying a parameter formula.

When you flex a family, you should always do it from the Family Types dialog box, rather than by manually stretching
or manipulating the objects within the family. When you change a parameter value and apply the change, this is the
most accurate way of testing how the family will behave within a project.

In this exercise, you flex the model to test the various length parameters that you added in the previous exercise. Even
though you have yet to add any model geometry to the family, it is important to verify that the reference lines adjust
to changes as constraints are maintained. After you verify this, you can add the model geometry to the skeleton and
be relatively certain that it will also flex as expected.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Preparing the family for flexing


1 When flexing the model, you need to be able to see the model within the drawing area and also apply new
values within the Family Types dialog box:

■ Maximize the Revit window and adjust the zoom settings so the model is in one corner of the drawing
area. When you open the Family Types dialog, you can drag it to the opposing corner.
or

■ Reduce the Revit window and keep the model centered in the drawing area. When you open the Family
Types dialog box, you can drag it off the Revit window as shown.

Adjust your display using one of the two methods before opening the Family Types dialog box.

2 On the Design Bar, click Family Types, and drag the dialog box so that you can view the model.

Flex the truss depth

3 In the Family Types dialog box, under Dimensions, enter 600 mm for Depth, and click Apply.

898 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques


Notice the depth of the truss adapts to the change in dimension value. Also notice the equality constraint
spreads the additional depth evenly above and below the Ref. Level. In addition, notice that the reference
planes marking the chord thickness adapted to the change in depth while maintaining their specified
value. Verifying that the entire model adapts to changes and making sure nothing “breaks” is the essence
of flexing.

4 Enter 450 mm for Depth, 80 mm for Chord Thickness, 800 mm for Center Chase Width, and click Apply.
Notice that the model adapts to all of the changes.

Reset parameters

5 In the Family Types dialog box, reset the parameters back to their original values:

■ Enter 300 mm for Depth.


■ Enter 38 mm for Chord Thickness.
■ Enter 400 mm for Center Chase Width.
■ Click Apply.
■ Click OK.

Flexing the Component Model | 899


When working within the Family Editor, you should always flex the design after you add new elements or
modify the existing design in any way.

6 On the File menu, click Save.


7 Proceed to the next lesson, “Adding Solid Geometry” on page 900.

Adding Solid Geometry


In this lesson, you add the solid geometry using extrusions for the chords and trimmable plywood ends. After creating
the extrusions, you constrain them using a combination of locked alignments and labelled dimensions. After flexing
the design, you load the truss into a project to verify that it works as designed.

Creating Solid Extrusions


In this exercise, you create the top and bottom chords of the truss. After adding the chords, you align and lock their
position.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Add chord extrusions


1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Left.
2 Zoom in around the center of the truss design.

3 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.


4 In the Work Plane dialog box, click Name, select Reference Plane: Member Left, and click OK.
5 On the Design Bar, click Lines.

6 On the Options Bar, click , and select Lock.


7 Select the four reference planes that border the top chord as shown.

900 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques


Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes.

8 On the Tools toolbar, click .


When using the Trim tool, click the part of the line you want to keep.

9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the top chord sketch as shown.

10 On the Design Bar, click Lines.

11 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.


12 Select the four reference planes that border the bottom chord as shown.

NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. You can ignore this warning
because after you finish trimming, the lines will no longer overlap.

13 On the Tools toolbar, click .


14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the bottom chord sketch as shown.

Creating Solid Extrusions | 901


15 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
16 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1.
Notice the chord extrusions and the symbolic line. The chords need to be aligned and locked to the correct
reference planes in order for them to flex with changes in the geometry.

17 On the File menu, click Save.


18 Proceed to the next exercise, “Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry” on page 902.

Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry


In this exercise, you add constraints to the chord extrusions and then flex the family to verify that it works as designed.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Constrain the extrusion ends


1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front.
2 Enter SD; this is the keyboard shortcut for Shading with Edges.
This makes the chord extrusions more visible within the view.

3 Select the chord extrusions.

4 Drag the right arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Right, as shown.
Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.

902 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques


5 Drag the left arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Left, as shown.
Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.

Flex the design

6 Prepare the view for flexing in the same way you did during the flexing exercise. You’ll want to set up your
screen so you can see the model truss while the Family Types dialog box is open.
On the Design Bar, click Family Types.

7 In the Family Types dialog box, enter 6000 for Length, and click Apply.
Notice that the extrusions did not move or change their length. This is because the length dimension
references the extreme left and right reference planes, not the member right or member left reference
planes. Therefore, you must add a new constraint before flexing the length.

8 In the Family Types dialog box, enter 3000 for Length, click Apply, and click OK.

Add a new dimension and constraint

9 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.


10 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Left and the reference plane: Member Left as shown.
Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value.

Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry | 903


11 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Right and the reference plane: Member Right as shown.
Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value.

In this particular case, adding this constraint to the model has no impact on how it works within a project.
This is a two-point placement beam family that uses the member left and member right reference planes
as the determining extents of this component. Later in this lesson, you load this family into a project to
test how it works within a project environment.

Flex the length

12 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.


13 In the Family Types dialog box, enter 6000 for Length, and click Apply.
Notice that the extrusions adjusted to the change in length. This tells you that the constraints on the
extrusion ends are working.

TIP If one of the extrusion ends did not adjust as expected, use the Align tool and add the constraint. Afterwards,
flex the model once again to make sure the fix works as expected.

14 Click OK.

904 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques


In a later exercise, you add the web members. Therefore, you need a truss long enough to add web arrays
and do not need to return the truss back to its original length value.

Flex the chord width, depth, and thickness

15 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1.


16 Enter SD for Shading with Edges.

17 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.


18 In the Family Types dialog box, specify the following:

■ Enter 600mm for Depth.


■ Enter 200mm for Chord Width.
■ Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness.

TIP When flexing, it is important to remember the original values so you can reset them afterwards. Therefore,
try picking a method, such as doubling, that allows you to easily return to the original values.

■ Click Apply.

The chords should adjust to each of the new values.

19 Specify the beam values shown below:

■ Enter 286mm for Depth.


■ Enter 89mm for Chord Width.
■ Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness.
■ Click Apply, and click OK.

20 On the File menu, click Save.


21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Additional Solid Geometry” on page 905.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry


In this exercise, you add the extrusions for the truss ends and the center chase.

Dataset

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 905


Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Add the center chase extrusions


1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Ref. Level.
2 Zoom in on the center of the truss and select the model line that represents the beam stick symbol.
3 On the View Control Bar, click the Hide/Isolate control, and click Hide Object.
This will make it easier to sketch the center chase extrusions.

4 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.


5 On the Design Bar, click Lines.

6 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.


7 Select the four reference planes that border the left, vertical member of the center chase as shown.

Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes.

8 On the Tools toolbar, click .


9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the left, vertical member of the center chase sketch as
shown.

10 On the Design Bar, click Lines.

11 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.


12 Select the four reference planes that border the right, vertical member of the center chase as shown.

906 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques


NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. You can ignore this warning
because after you finish trimming, the lines will no longer overlap.

13 On the Tools toolbar, click .


14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the center chase sketch as shown.

15 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.


16 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front.
17 Zoom in on the center chase.

Align and lock the new extrusions

18 On the Tools menu, click Align.


This next process is very important. The ends of the chase extrusions must be aligned and locked to the
horizontal reference planes coincident with the interior edges of the chords. Although you can align and
lock extrusion to extrusion, it is considered a best practice to align and lock to reference planes.

19 For the align-to reference, select the reference line on the top of the lower chord as shown.
You may need to press TAB to toggle the selection options.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 907


20 Click the bottom edge of one of the chase extrusions, and after the alignment, click the lock symbol to
lock the alignment.

21 Align the top edge of the chase extrusions with the reference line coincident with the lower edge of the
upper chord, and lock the alignment as shown.

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Flex the center chase

23 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.


24 In the Family Types dialog box, specify the following:

■ Enter 486mm for Depth.


■ Enter 800mm for Center Chase Width.
■ Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, redo any problematic alignments and constraints.

25 In the Family Types dialog box, reset the values as follows:

■ Enter 286mm for Depth.


■ Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width.
■ Click Apply, and click OK.

Clean up the view

26 Zoom to Fit.

908 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques


27 Clean up the view by moving the dimensions off to the side as shown.
This will make subsequent work much easier.

Add the truss end extrusions

28 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-left corner as shown.

29 On the Options Bar, select Add Parameter for Label.


30 In the Parameter Properties dialog box, under Parameter Data, do the following:

■ Enter Trimmable End Length for Name.


■ Select Dimensions for Group parameter under.
■ Select Instance.
■ Click OK.

31 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-right corner of the view.
32 On the Options Bar, select Trimmable End Length for Label.
33 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.
34 In the Family Types dialog box, under Dimensions, enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length, click Apply,
and click OK.

Sketch the right end extrusion

35 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Right.


36 Zoom around the truss elements.
37 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.
38 In the Work Plane dialog box, select Reference Plane: Member Right for Name, and click OK.
39 On the Design Bar, click Lines.

40 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 909


41 On the upper chord, select the lower horizontal reference plane; on the lower chord, select the upper
horizontal reference plane. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch.

42 On the Options Bar, enter19mm for Offset.


43 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown.

44 On the Tools toolbar, click .


45 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown.

910 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques


46 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties.
47 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Constraints, verify that 300mm is specified for the Extrusion
End value, and click OK.
48 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Sketch the left end extrusion

49 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Left.


50 Zoom around the truss elements.
51 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.
52 In the Work Plane dialog box, select Reference Plane: Member Left for Name, and click OK.
53 On the Design Bar, click Lines.

54 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.


55 On the upper chord, select the lower horizontal reference plane; on the lower chord, select the upper
horizontal reference plane. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch.
56 On the Options Bar, enter 19mm for Offset.
57 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 911


58 On the Tools toolbar, click .
59 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown.

60 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties.


61 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Constraints, specify -300mm for the Extrusion End value, and
click OK.

NOTE This extrusion value must be negative in order to push the extrusion towards the center of the truss.

62 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Add alignment constraints

63 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front.

Although the truss ends line up with the reference planes controlling the length of the trimmable ends,
they are not aligned and locked to those reference planes and would not pass a flex test.

64 Zoom in on the left end of the truss.


65 On the Tools menu, click Align.
66 Select the Member Left reference plane as the align-to point.

67 Select the left edge of the left end extrusion, and lock the alignment.

912 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques


68 Select the reference plane coincident with the right edge of the left end extrusion; this is the align-to point.
69 Select the right edge of the left end extrusion, and lock the alignment.

70 Repeat the previous five steps for the right end of the truss. Make adjustments to account for the right side.

TIP When you finish the alignments, if you select the end extrusion, a lock displays on each side indicating the
constraints to the reference planes.

71 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Flex the design

72 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.


73 In the Family Types dialog box, specify the following:

■ Enter 486mm for Depth.


■ Enter 600mm for Trimmable End Length.
■ Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints.

74 In the Family Types dialog box, reset the values as follows:

■ Enter 286mm for Depth.


■ Enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length.
■ Click Apply, and click OK.

75 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1.

76 Save the Family.


A new dataset is provided for you beginning with the next lesson. It is identical to the truss you have been
designing. If you are comfortable with your design, you can continue using it in the next lesson. If you
have experienced any errors or have deviated from the exercises in any way, you should close the file and
begin with a fresh dataset.

77 Proceed to the next lesson, “Testing the Family in a Project” on page 914.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 913


Testing the Family in a Project
In this lesson, you load the family into a project to test it in a real-world environment. After you load it into the project,
you add several beam instances and then modify the shape of the foundation to see how the beams adapt.

Loading a Family into a Project


In this exercise, you load the truss family into a project that consists of foundation walls, a sill, and a rim joist.

NOTE Close any open families or projects. The truss family that you use in this lesson is identical to the truss you have created
in the previous exercises. Although you could continue using the previous family, it is recommended that you use the new
family in order to ensure consistency.

Datasets

Open the truss family

■ On the File menu, click Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa file located in the Metric\Families folder.

Open the project file

■ On the File menu, click Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.

914 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques


■ Open the m_WWF1.rvt file located in the Metric folder.

Load the truss family into the project


1 On the Window menu, click m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa.
2 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects.
The truss family is loaded directly into the only other open file. If you had multiple projects or families
open, a dialog box would have displayed asking for you to specify which projects you wanted to load the
family into.
Notice that the project file is now active.

3 In the Project Browser, expand Families, expand Structural Framing, and notice that the Wood Floor Truss_1
family has been loaded.
4 Proceed to the next exercise, “Testing a Family Instance in a Project” on page 915.

Testing a Family Instance in a Project


In this exercise, you add several instances of the truss family to the project, and then modify the project to see how
the beams adapt.
Dataset
Continue to use the datasets that you used in the previous exercise.

Testing a Family Instance in a Project | 915


Add beams to project
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views, expand 3D Views, and double-click 3D - Southeast Isometric.

This project consists of foundation walls, a slab, a wood sill, and a wood rim joist. The rim joist was added
as a beam; therefore, the truss family you loaded will interact with it as one beam does to another.

2 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.


3 On the Structuraltab of the Design Bar, click Beam.

TIP If the Structural tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Structural.

4 In the Type Selector, select m_Wood Floor Truss_1.


5 Using point-to-point insertion, add three vertical beams that snap to the rim joist at each end.

NOTE Do not be concerned with the exact location of the three beams. Try to make them approximately
equidistant as shown.

916 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques


6 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click 3D - Southeast Isometric.

Notice the wood truss sits on top of the sill and attaches to the rim joist as expected.

7 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.


8 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until the walls form an approximate square.

NOTE Make sure you drag the grid line, not the wall or rim joist. You do not need to be precise; you are merely
testing the new floor truss to verify that it adapts to the changes.

Testing a Family Instance in a Project | 917


9 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click 3D - Southeast Isometric.

Notice the wood truss adjusted to the changes.

■ The truss ends remained constant and adapted to the new beam length.
■ The center chase remained the same width while remaining centered.

In the next lesson, you nest the web components into the truss and create an array that adapts to changes
in length.

10 On the Edit menu, click Undo Drag.


This should return the project to its original dimension.

11 On the File menu, click Save as.


12 In the Save as dialog box, navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project with its existing name.

IMPORTANT Do not change the name of the family. The project and family need to interact based on a
consistent file name.

918 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques


Edit a family from within a project

13 Select one of the wooden truss components.


14 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family.
15 When prompted to open the truss family for editing, click Yes.
Because the family is already open, the wood floor truss family becomes the active view.

16 Proceed to the next lesson, “Working with Nested Subcomponents” on page 919.

Working with Nested Subcomponents


In this lesson, you nest wood web members into the floor truss, and create a formula controlled array to fill in the truss.

Adding a Nested Component


In this exercise, you nest two wooden web members into the truss. You then align and lock the web extents before
applying a formula-controlled array.
Dataset
Continue to use the datasets from the previous exercise.

Prepare the view for nesting


1 Make sure that m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa is the active file.
2 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Ref. Level.
3 Select the symbolic line in the center of the truss.
4 On the View Control Bar, click Hide/Isolate, and click Hide Object.
This will aid in the placement of the wood web.

5 On the File menu, click Load from Library ➤ Load Family.

Load the wood web family

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m_Wood_Web.rfa file located in the Metric\Families folder.

Working with Nested Subcomponents | 919


This family is a single extrusion as shown. The extrusion is aligned and locked to invisible model lines that
make it easier to array within the truss. The geometry is driven by formula-based parameters that link to
the host family.

Add two wood web components

6 On the Design Bar, click Component.


7 In the Type Selector, verify that m_Wood_Web: Wood Web is selected.
8 Add two instances of the wood web component as shown.
Place one wood web on each side of the center chase. Snap the center line of the web to the center reference
plane of the truss. Leave a slight gap between the chase and the web. This will make aligning the wood
web easier.

IMPORTANT Make sure you snap the center line of the web components to the center reference line of the
truss.

9 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


10 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front.
11 Place the cursor over the left wood web. Do not select it.

Notice the model lines that surround the web component; they are visible only when you place the cursor
over the component. In the following steps, you align the web panel using these lines rather than the
extrusion edges.
Also notice that the depth of the web members needs to be changed. This will be accomplished in the next
exercise when you link the nested parameter with the host parameter.

Align the nested web components

12 Enter AL; this is the keyboard shortcut for Align.


You will align the left web component first.

13 For the align-to point, select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the left center chase
extrusion.

920 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques


14 Select the right vertical model line of the left web component as shown.

IMPORTANT Do not lock the alignment

15 Repeat the previous two steps to align the left edge of the right web component to the right edge of the
center chase as shown.

Each of these web components represents the starting point of the web arrays that you add later in this
lesson.

NOTE You do not have to align the top or bottom the web components because the height of the web members
will adapt to the truss height after you create and link the parameters in the next exercise. In addition, it is
important to note that you should avoid adding unnecessary constraints.

16 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Add reference planes for array anchors

17 On the Design Bar, click Ref Plane.


18 Add two reference planes as shown. Place each reference plane just to the outside of the center of the web
components.

Adding a Nested Component | 921


19 On the Tools menu, click Align.
The reference plane you added in the previous step represents half the web width. In the steps that follow,
you align the reference planes to the center of the web components.

20 Select the center of the left web component as the align-to point.

21 Select the reference plane that you added to the left of the web components center as shown.

22 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the web component.

23 Repeat the previous two steps to align and lock the right web component and the reference plane as shown.

Dimension and label array anchors

24 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.


25 Add the following two dimensions:

922 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques


Left web dimension

■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the left web component.
■ Select the reference plane that is coincident with the right edge of the left web component and the
outside edge of the center chase.
■ Place the dimension as shown.

Right web dimension

■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the right web component.
■ Select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the right web component and the
outside edge of the center chase.
■ Place the dimension as shown.

In the next exercise, you label these dimensions. You also add a formula to the parameter in order to
maintain the web position as the truss changes depth, length, or the width of the center chase.

26 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


27 On the File menu, click Save As.
28 In the Save As dialog box, navigate to the same directory in which you saved the project file and save this
family there with its current name.
29 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Formula-controlled Parameters” on page 923.

Creating Formula-controlled Parameters


In this exercise, you add new parameters to control the web components. You then link the nested web parameters to
the new host parameters.
Dataset
Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise.

Create a new parameter for web depth


1 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.
2 In the Family Types dialog box, under Parameters, click Add.

Creating Formula-controlled Parameters | 923


3 In the Parameter Properties dialog box, under Parameter Data, do the following:

■ Enter WebDepth for Name.


■ Select Constraints for Group parameter under.
■ Select Common for Discipline.
■ Select Length for Type.
■ Select Type.
■ Click OK.

4 In the Family Types dialog box, under Constraints, enter Depth - (Chord Thickness * 2) for the WebDepth
Formula.

TIP You can expand the width of the Family Types dialog box to facilitate typing within the formula field.

This formula ensures that the web depth will account for any changes in the chord thickness or truss depth.

NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. When you refer to another parameter within a formula, ensure you enter it
exactly as it is named.

5 Click OK.

Link the nested component to the new parameter

6 Right-click the left web component, and click Properties.


7 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New.
8 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Other, click the button to the right of the WebHeight value.

9 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box, select WebDepth, and click OK.
In the Type Properties dialog box, notice that “= “displays within the WebHeight button.

10 In the Type Properties dialog box, click OK.


11 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK.
12 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Notice the web members are resized to fit more precisely between the chords. In addition, notice the center
of each nested web component is locked to the reference plane that bisects it.

924 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques


Create new formula-controlled parameter for center chase

13 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.


14 In the Family Types dialog box, under Parameters, click Add.
15 In the Parameter Properties dialog box, under Parameter Data, do the following:

■ Enter CC for Name.


This parameter is primarily for convenience. It will use a formula to add the center chase width and
the thickness of the two bordering chords.

■ Select Other for Group parameter under.


■ Select Common for Discipline.
■ Select Length for Type.
■ Select Instance.
■ Click OK.

16 Under Other, enter Center Chase Width + (2*Chord Thickness) for CC Formula.
After you enter the formula, the resulting value is displayed as an inactive field.

Create WebArrayLength formula-controlled parameter

17 In the Family Types dialog box, under Parameters, click Add.


18 In the Parameter Properties dialog box, under Parameter Data, do the following:

■ Enter WebArrayLength for Name.


■ Select Constraints for Group parameter under.
■ Select Common for Discipline.
■ Select Length for Type.
■ Select Instance.
■ Click OK.

19 Under Constraints, enter (Length - (CC+300))/2 for WebArrayLength Formula.


This formula subtracts the length of the center chase and its two bordering chords plus an additional
300mm before dividing it in two to specify the length of each array. The additional 300mm is to account
for the ends, which must remain at least 150mm long.

Create WebArrayNum formula-controlled parameter

20 In the Family Types dialog box, under Parameters, click Add.


21 In the Parameter Properties dialog box, under Parameter Data, do the following:

■ Enter WebArrayNum for Name.


■ Select Constraints for Group parameter under.
■ Select Common for Discipline.
■ Select Integer for Type.
■ Select Instance.
■ Click OK.

22 Under Constraints, enter WebArrayLength/(2*WebDepth) for WebArrayNum Formula.


23 Click OK.

Creating Formula-controlled Parameters | 925


Add parameter to anchor web array

24 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the left web as shown.

25 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label.


26 In the Parameter Properties dialog box, under Parameter Data, do the following:

■ Enter Webhalflength for Name.


■ Select Constraints for Group parameter under.
■ Select Instance.
■ Click OK.

27 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the right web.
28 On the Options Bar, select Webhalflength for Label.
29 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Add formula for Webhalflength

30 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.


31 Under Constraints, enter (WebArrayLength/WebArrayNum)/2 for Webhalflength Formula.
32 Click OK.
Notice the location of the web components has adapted to the formula.

926 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques


Associate web component parameters

33 Right-click the left web component, and click Properties.


34 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New.
35 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Other, click the button to the right of the WebArrayLength value.
36 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box, select WebArrayLength, and click OK.
In the Type Properties dialog box, the button next to the WebArrayLength value should have an equals
sign within it.

37 In the Type Properties dialog box, click OK.


38 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK.
39 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
40 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1.

Because you have added and constrained new components, it is very important that you flex the model
to ensure the nested components and the formulas that controls them work as expected. It is especially
important to flex the model before arraying the truss so that you don’t multiply any existing problems.

Flex the design

41 Adjust the view so you can flex the truss while in the Family Types dialog box.
42 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.
43 In the Family Types dialog box, specify the following:

■ Enter 686mm for Depth.


■ Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness.
■ Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints.

44 In the Family Types dialog box, reset the values as follows:

■ Enter 286mm for Depth.


■ Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness.

Creating Formula-controlled Parameters | 927


■ Click Apply, and click OK.

45 On the File menu, click Save.


46 Proceed to the next exercise, “Arraying Nested Subcomponents” on page 928.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents


In this exercise, you array the nested web components, add alignment constraints, and link the arrays to the
WebArrayNum parameter.
Dataset
Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise.

Array the left web component


1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front.
2 Select the nested web component left of the center chase.

3 On the Edit menu, click Array.


Creating an array requires two basic steps. First, you specify the move start point; then you specify the
move end point. You must use precision when arraying because any error is multiplied as the array grows.

4 On the Options Bar, specify the following:

■ Verify that Group and Associate is selected.


■ Enter 3 for Number.
■ Select 2nd for Move to.
■ Select Constrain.

5 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. When picking the
corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.

928 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques


6 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. When picking the corner,
use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.

7 Press ENTER to complete the array.


8 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Array the right nested web component

9 Select the nested web component right of the center chase.


10 On the Edit menu, click Array.
11 On the Options Bar, specify the following:

■ Verify that Group and Associate is selected.


■ Enter 3 for Number.
■ Select 2nd for Move to.
■ Select Constrain.

12 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. When picking the corner,
use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.
13 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. When picking the
corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.

14 Press ENTER to complete the array.


15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
16 Zoom out to view the truss.

Align and lock the arrays

17 Zoom in on the left array of web components.


18 On the Tools menu, click Align.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents | 929


19 In the left array, place the cursor over the boundary between the two left web components until the
reference highlights, then select the line twice.

Because there are two overlapping lines at this location, you are aligning the two bordering web components
to each other.

20 Click the lock symbol to keep the web components locked at their edges.

21 Within the left array, align and lock the two right web components.

22 Within the right array, align and lock the two boundaries between the three web components. Use the
same techniques as you did in the previous three steps.

NOTE This step is very important. If you do not lock the edges of the array, the web components overlap each
other when you change the depth of the truss.

Label the arrays

23 Select the middle web component of the left array.


24 Notice the array line displays above the components with the array value. Place the cursor over the array
line as shown and select it.

NOTE Do not select the array value.

25 On the Options Bar, select WebArrayNum for Label.


26 Select the middle web component of the right array.
27 Select the array line over the web components on the right.
28 On the Options Bar, select WebArrayNum for Label.
29 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

930 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques


30 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss.

Notice the arrays appear to be too long. This is because earlier in the tutorial, you added a dimension to
lock the Member Left and Member Right reference plane to the outer Left and Right reference planes. The
primary reason for this was to allow for flexing the length.

31 Zoom around the left side of the truss.


32 Select the dimension between reference plane Left and Member Left as shown.

33 Delete the dimension.


34 On the Tools menu, click Align.
35 Select the reference plane, Left, as the align-to point.
36 Select the reference plane, Member Left, and lock the alignment as shown.

Notice the end of the array still overlaps the trimmable end. You will fix this in later steps by changing
the parameter value.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents | 931


NOTE With most beam families, you would not want to align and lock these two reference planes; however, in
this case, the wood floor truss normally sits on a sill bordering a rim joist. Therefore, this solution has little, if any,
significant impact.

37 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


38 Zoom in around the right side of the truss.
39 Delete the dimension between reference plane Right and Member Right.
40 Align and lock reference plane Right and Member Right.

41 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss.

Change trimmable end length value

42 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.


43 In the Family Types dialog box, under Dimensions, enter 150mm for Trimmable End Length.
44 Click Apply, and click OK.
Notice the web arrays fit within the truss without overlapping the ends.

Flex the design

45 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1, and prepare the view for flexing.
46 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.
47 In the Family Types dialog box, specify the following:

■ Enter 686mm for Depth.


■ Enter 12000mm for Length.
■ Enter 900mm for Center Chase Width.
■ Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints.

932 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques


TIP When flexing a complex model such as this, you should flex the model in as many ways as possible to verify
it is working correctly; however, for training and time purposes, these steps have been reduced.

48 In the Family Types dialog box, reset the values as follows:

■ Enter 286mm for Depth.


■ Enter 6000mm for Length.
■ Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width.
■ Click Apply, and click OK.

You have completed the design of the primary components of the truss.

49 On the File menu, click Save.


50 Proceed to the next exercise, “Reloading a Family into a Project” on page 933.

Reloading a Family into a Project


In this exercise, you reload the truss family into the project. You then increase the distance between the foundation
walls to see how the truss adapts to the changes in length.

Reloading a Family into a Project | 933


Dataset
Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise.
In addition to the truss family, the project, m_WWF1.rvt, should be open.

Reload the truss into the project.


1 Verify that the truss family is active and the 3D View, View 1, displays.
2 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects.
3 In the Reload Family dialog box, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes.
Notice the project file becomes active and the beam has updated with the latest changes.

4 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.


5 Drag Grid 2 downward until the shape of the building footprint is almost square.
6 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click 3D - Southeast Isometric.
Notice the truss has adapted to the changes.

934 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques


7 On the Edit menu, click Undo Drag.
8 Save and close the project file and the family file.
In the next lesson, you begin with a new dataset which is identical to both of these files.

9 Proceed to the next lesson, “Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters” on page 935.

Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters


In this lesson, you create and apply subcategories and materials. You then create a parameter to specifically control
material application.

Creating and Applying Subcategories


In this exercise, you create new subcategories within the truss family. You then reload the family into the project and
apply a material to the subcategory.
Datasets

■ On the File menu, click Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m_WWF2.rvt file located in the Metric folder.

Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters | 935


In this dataset, the truss was added to a beam system that occupies approximately half the building footprint. In
addition, four instances of the floor truss were added to the other end of the structure.

Apply Object Styles


1 Zoom in around beam system.
Notice no material has been applied to the truss. Within the family, the material values were set to By
Category by default.

2 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles.


3 In the Object Styles dialog box, verify that the Model Objects tab is selected, and expand the category
Structural Framing.
Notice that the Structural Framing category and all of the subcategories have no material value defined.
In addition, notice that the subcategories do not apply to the wood floor truss that you have designed.

4 On the Structural Framing category line, click in the material field until the button displays as shown.

936 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques


5 Click the button that displays in the Structural Framing Material field.
6 In the Materials dialog box, click Wood - Timber for Name, and click OK.
7 In the Object Styles dialog box, click OK.
Notice the Wood - Timber material has been applied to all Structural Framing components.

When you apply a material to the Structural Framing category, all subcomponents of that category are
assigned that material. If there was a metal beam in this building model, it would also have the wood
material applied to it. If you create subcategories as you design in the Family Editor, you have more control
over component visibility within a project.

8 On the Edit menu, click Undo Object Styles.

Create subcategories within the truss family

9 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system.


10 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family.
11 Click Yes to open the family for editing.
12 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles.
13 In the Object Styles dialog box, under Modify Subcategories, click New.
14 In the New Subcategory dialog box, enter Wood Floor Truss for Name, and click OK.

Apply material to subcategory

15 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss subcategory, and click the button to open the Materials
dialog box.
16 In the Materials dialog box, click Duplicate.
17 In the New Material dialog box, enter Wood Floor Truss, and click OK.

18 In the Materials dialog box, under AccuRender, click .


19 In the Material Library dialog box, navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine, Yellow, select Natural,No Gloss for
Name, and click OK.
20 In the Materials dialog box, click OK.
21 In the Object Styles dialog box, click OK.

Apply the subcategory to the truss components

22 Draw a pick box around the entire truss.

23 On the Options Bar, click .


24 In the Filter dialog box, click Check None, select Other, and click OK.
Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected.

Creating and Applying Subcategories | 937


25 On the Options Bar, click .
26 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Identity Data, select Wood Floor Truss for Subcategory, and
click OK.
27 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Apply a subcategory to the nested web components

28 Place the cursor over one of the arrayed web components, press TAB to toggle to the web component and
click to select it.
29 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family.
30 Click Yes to open the family for editing.
The web component family opens in a 3D view.

31 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles.


32 In the Object Styles dialog box, under Modify Subcategories, click New.
33 In the New Subcategory dialog box, enter Wood Floor Truss - Webs for Name, and click OK.
By creating a separate subcategory for the web components, you can apply a different material to all web
components when using this truss within a project.

938 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques


34 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss - Webs subcategory, and click the button to open the
Materials dialog box.
35 In the Materials dialog box, click Duplicate.
36 In the New Material dialog box, enter Wood Floor Truss - Webs, and click OK.

37 In the Materials dialog box, under AccuRender, click .


38 In the Material Library dialog box, navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine, Yellow, select Natural,No Gloss for
Name, and click OK.
39 In the Materials dialog box, click OK.
40 In the Object Styles dialog box, click OK.
41 Select the web extrusion.

42 On the Options Bar, click .


43 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Identity Data, select Wood Floor Truss - Webs for Subcategory,
and click OK.

Reload web component into truss family

44 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects.


45 In the Load into Projects dialog box, select m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa, and click OK.
46 In the Reload Family dialog box, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes.

Reload truss into project

47 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects.


48 In the Load into Projects dialog box, select m_WWF2.rvt, and click OK.
49 In the Reload Family dialog box, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes.
Notice the new object subcategory styles are applied to the truss components.

50 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles.


51 In the Object Styles dialog box, under Categories, expand Structural Framing.

Creating and Applying Subcategories | 939


Notice the two new subcategories are listed. You can change the style of only the wood truss components
without impacting other structural framing components.

52 Click OK.
53 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
54 In the Visibility Graphics dialog box, under Visibility, expand Structural Framing, clear Wood Floor Truss
- Webs, and click OK.
Notice the web extrusions not longer display; however, the stick symbols continue to display.

55 On the Edit menu, click Undo Visibility/Graphics.


56 On the File menu, click Save As.
57 In the Save as dialog box, navigate to a folder of your preference and save the project with the current
name.
58 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Material Parameters” on page 940.

Creating Material Parameters


In this exercise, you add a new material parameter that allows you to specify a material for each truss instance.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset that you saved in the previous exercise.

Open truss family for editing


1 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system.
2 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family.
3 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

Create material parameter

4 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.


5 In the Family Types dialog box, under Parameters, click Add.
6 In the Parameter Properties dialog box, under Parameter Data, do the following:

■ Enter Floor Truss Material for Name.


■ Select Materials and Finishes for Group parameter under.
■ Select Common for Discipline.
■ Select Material for Type.
■ Select Instance.
■ Click OK.

7 In the Family Types dialog box, notice the default material is By Category.

940 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques


In this case, do not assign a material to the parameter. When reloaded into a project, this component will
continue to use the material assigned to the subcategory by default. This material parameter allows you to
assign a material on an instance parameter.

8 Click OK.

Link truss extrusions to material parameter

9 Draw a pick box around the entire truss.

10 On the Options Bar, click .


11 In the Filter dialog box, click Check None, select Structural Framing (Wood Floor Truss), and click OK.
Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected.

12 On the Options Bar, click .


13 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Materials and Finishes, click the button to the right of the
Material value field.
14 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box, select Floor Truss Material, and click OK.
15 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK.
16 Place the cursor over one of the web components, press TAB, and select the component.

17 On the Options Bar, click .


18 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New.
19 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Other, click the button to the right of the WebMaterial value field.
20 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box, select Floor Truss Material, and click OK.
21 Click OK twice.
22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Reload truss into project

23 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects.


24 In the Load into Projects dialog box, select m_WWF2.rvt, and click OK.
25 In the Reload Family dialog box, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes.
Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed.

26 Select a floor truss that is not part of the beam system.

27 On the Options Bar, click .


28 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Materials and Finishes, click the Floor Truss Material field and
click the button that displays.
29 In the Materials dialog box, select Metal - Steel for Name, and click OK.
30 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK.
31 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
Notice the material is applied only to the selected beam.

Creating Material Parameters | 941


32 On the File menu, click Save.
33 On the File menu, click Close.
34 Close any open files.
You can save the open files if you wish. In the next lesson, a new dataset is supplied.

35 Proceed to the next lesson, “Controlling Component Visibility” on page 942.

Controlling Component Visibility


In this lesson, you add controls to specify the views in which each element displays and at what detail level.

Assigning Detail Level and View Controls


In this exercise, you designate the display of elements in specific views and at specific detail levels.

Datasets

■ On the File menu, click Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m_WWF3.rvt file located in the Metric folder.

Change detail levels


1 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Coarse.

942 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques


Notice the rim joist no longer displays. However, notice the floor truss has not changed appearance, because
you have yet to assign a detail level to each of the elements within the truss family. Currently within the
truss, all elements display at all times in all views.

2 Select a floor truss.


3 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family.
4 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

Apply detail level controls to web components

5 Select a web component.


6 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family.
7 Click Yes to open the family for editing.
8 Select the web extrusion.
9 On the Options Bar, click Visibility.
10 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box, specify the following:

■ Under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP.


■ Clear Left/Right.
■ Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse.
■ Click OK.

11 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects.


12 In the Load into Projects dialog box, select m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa, and click OK.
13 In the Reload Family dialog box, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes.
Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed.

Assign detail level to center chase extrusions

14 Select the center chase extrusions.


15 On the Options Bar, click Visibility.
16 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box, specify the following:

■ Under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP.


■ Clear Left/Right.
■ Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse.
■ Click OK.

Assigning Detail Level and View Controls | 943


Assign detail level to truss ends

17 Select the end extrusions.


18 On the Options Bar, click Visibility.
19 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box, specify the following:

■ Under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP.


■ Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse.
■ Click OK.

Assign detail level to truss chords

20 Select the truss chords.


21 On the Options Bar, click Visibility.
22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box, specify the following:

■ Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse.


■ Click OK.

Reload truss into project

23 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects.


24 In the Load into Projects dialog box, select m_WWF3.rvt, and click OK.
25 In the Reload Family dialog box, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes.
Notice that the floor truss solid geometry is not displayed.

26 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Medium.
Notice the floor truss solid geometry is displayed.

27 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.


28 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Coarse.

944 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques


Notice the symbolic representation of the beams.

29 On the File menu, click Save As.


30 In the Save As dialog box, navigate to your preferred location and save the project with the current name.
31 Proceed to the next lesson, “Creating Component Types” on page 945.

Creating Component Types


In this lesson, you create multiple floor truss types to speed up the design process when working in a project. In the
final exercise, you create a conditional formula that adjusts the truss depth based on the truss length.

Creating Multiple Component Types


In this exercise, you create multiple types for a 89x38 truss and a 64x38 truss. Although you can change the parameters
of a truss within a project, creating predefined types can speed up the design process.

Open the truss family for editing


1 Select a floor truss.
2 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family.
3 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

Create new types

4 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.


5 In the Family Types dialog box, under Family Types, click New.
6 In the New dialog box, enter 89x38 for Name, and click OK.
7 In the Family Types dialog box, under Family Types, click New.
8 In the New dialog box, enter 64x38 for Name, and click OK.
9 In the Family Types dialog box, under Dimensions, enter 64mm for Chord Width, and click Apply.
Notice the chord changes width.

10 Select 89x38 for Name, and click Apply.


The truss returns to its original designed value.

NOTE When creating new components, create types for those most frequently used in your projects.

11 Click OK.

Creating Component Types | 945


TIP You can also use new types to flex the model.

Load new types into the project

12 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects.


13 In the Load into Projects dialog box, select m_WWF3.rvt, and click OK.
14 In the Reload Family dialog box, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes.
15 On the Structuraltab of the Design Bar, click Beam.
16 In the Type Selector, select 64x38.
17 Add a beam in the center of the open space.
18 In the Type Selector, select 89x38.
19 Add a beam next to the 64x38.
20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
21 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click 3D - Southeast Isometric.
Notice the two beam types.

22 On the File menu, click Save.


23 Proceed to the final exercise, “Creating Conditional Formulas” on page 946.

Creating Conditional Formulas


In this exercise, you create a conditional formula that changes the depth automatically as the truss increases in length.

Open the truss for editing


1 Select a floor truss.
2 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family.
3 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

Adding a conditional formula

4 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.


You are going to enter a conditional formula that follows this basic rule:
IF ( <condition>, <result-if-true>, <result-if-false>)

5 In the Family Types dialog box, under Dimensions, enter the follow formula for Depth:
if(Length < 6600, 286, if(Length < 7500, 350, if(Length < 9000, 400, 400)))

6 Click Apply.

946 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques


Flex the design

7 In the Family Types dialog box, enter 8000 for length, and click Apply.
Notice the truss depth increases.

8 In the Family Types dialog box, enter 6000 for length, click Apply, and click OK.

Load the truss into the project

9 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects.


10 In the Load into Projects dialog box, select m_WWF3.rvt, and click OK.
11 In the Reload Family dialog box, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes.

Test the conditional formula within a project

12 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.


13 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until it is between 8000-9000mm from Grid 1.
14 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click 3D - Southeast Isometric.
15 Notice the change in floor truss depth.

NOTE You would have to change the depth of the sill and rim joist to accommodate this change.

16 On the File menu, click Save.

IMPORTANT When you changed the width of the building footprint, you probably noticed a change in the
amount of time the view needed to regenerate. Regeneration time and overall performance can be affected by
over-designed families.

You have completed this tutorial.

17 Close any open files.

Creating Conditional Formulas | 947


948 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques
Using Advanced Features
5

949
950 | Chapter 19 Using Advanced Features
Roofs
19
In this tutorial, you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit MEP 2008.

In addition, you learn how to add fascia, gutters, and soffits to the roofs that you

create.

951
Creating Roofs
In this lesson, you learn to create several different types of roofs, including hip, gable, shed, and mansard roofs. In this
lesson, you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion.

Creating an Extruded Roof


In this exercise, you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage.

You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. Before you can
sketch the roof profile, you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. You do not need to create the work
plane; a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise.

Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Roofs.rvt.

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion.
3 In the Work Plane dialog, select Name, and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway.
4 Click OK.
5 In the Go To View dialog, verify that Section: Section1 is selected, and then click Open View to select a
section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof.
6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog, verify Level 3 is selected for Level, and click OK.

952 | Chapter 19 Roofs


The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof.

Before you can sketch the profile of the roof, you need to define four reference planes to help determine
key points on the profile sketch.

7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Ref Plane.


8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face.

TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially, you can place it in the general
location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from
the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. To change where the temporary dimension is measured
from (face, centerline, and so on), click the blue square on the witness line.

9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face.

10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls.

Creating an Extruded Roof | 953


11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2.

Next, sketch the roof profile.

12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Lines.


13 On the Options Bar, select Chain.
14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile.
Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. Use
automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections.

15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch to complete the roof.

954 | Chapter 19 Roofs


The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction.

16 On the View toolbar, click to display the model.


Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately.

Next, use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior
walls.

17 On the Tools toolbar, click .


18 Select the edge of the roof, and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage
wall.

Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of
the house that joins the breezeway.

19 On the Tools toolbar, click .


20 Select the breezeway roof edge, press TAB, and then select the exterior face of the wall.

The roof should resemble the following illustration.

Creating an Extruded Roof | 955


The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof, so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof.

21 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Sections (Type 1), and double-click Section 1.
22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.
23 Select one of the breezeway walls, press CTRL, and select the second wall.

24 On the Options Bar, click Attach for Top/Base, and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected.
25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof.

26 On the View toolbar, click to view the completed breezeway roof in the model.

27 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint” on page 956.

Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint


In this exercise, you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint.

You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. You use roof slope lines to
define the roof gable ends.

956 | Chapter 19 Roofs


To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch, you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Roofs.rvt.

1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.
2 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Pick Walls.
3 On the Options Bar, verify that Defines slope is selected, and enter 600 for Overhang.
4 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. Verify that a dashed green line
displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall.

5 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. Verify that a dashed green line
displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall.

6 On the Options Bar, clear Defines slope.


7 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint.

Next, edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch.

8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.

9 Press CTRL, select both slope definition lines, and on the Options Bar, click .
The Element Properties dialog is displayed. By default, the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm
run.

Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 957


10 In the Element Properties dialog, under Dimensions, enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope,
and click OK.
11 On the Design Bar, click Finish Roof.
12 When you see the informational dialog, click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the
roof.

13 On the View toolbar, click to view the gable roof and attached walls in the model.

14 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint” on page 958.

Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint


In this exercise, you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. The roof requires an opening to accommodate
a chimney.

You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. After you define the roof
slope lines and complete the footprint, you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. When you
complete the roof, the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Roofs.rvt.

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3.
2 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.
3 On the Options Bar, clear Defines slope, and enter 600 for Overhang.

NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step.

4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Pick Walls.

958 | Chapter 19 Roofs


5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls, press TAB, and then verify that a dashed green line displays
to the exterior side of the walls.

6 Click to select all the walls.


Next, sketch the chimney opening.

7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Lines.

8 On the Options Bar, click .


9 Using automatic snaps, sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the
lower right corner of the exterior chimney face.

10 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan.
Next, add new slope lines to the roof.

11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.


12 Select the uppermost horizontal line.
13 On the Options Bar, select Defines Slope.
14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration.

Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 959


15 On the Options bar, select Defines Slope.
16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Roof.
17 When you see the informational dialog, click Yes to attach the walls to the roof.

18 On the View toolbar, click to view the new roof in the model.

19 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint” on page 960.

Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint


In this exercise, you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Roofs.rvt.

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.

2 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.
3 On the Options Bar, select Defines slope, and enter 600 for Overhang.
4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Pick Walls.
5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. Verify that a dashed
green line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls.

Next, close the roof sketch. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. The
sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other.

960 | Chapter 19 Roofs


6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Lines.

7 On the Options Bar, clear Defines Slope, and click .


8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building, using the following
illustration for guidance.

Next, trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. You must trim these
lines to create a valid sketch.

9 On the Tools toolbar, click .


10 On the Options Bar, verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected.
11 To trim the first line segment, select the left vertical slope definition line, and then specify a point near
the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building.
Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep.

12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections.

Next, raise the roof 600 mm above the current level.

13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Roof Properties.


The Element Properties dialog is displayed.

14 Under Constraints, enter 600 for Base Offset From Level, and click OK.
15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Roof.

16 On the View toolbar, click to display the model.

Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 961


17 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to view the back of the house.
Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the
roof.

18 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof, click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar, and then verify
that Attach Wall: Top is selected.
20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof.

21 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof.

22 Using the same method that you used previously, join the two remaining walls to the roof. Press and hold
CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time.

Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. Next, use the Join Roof
command to fix the roof.

23 On the Tools toolbar, click .


24 Select the edge of the hip roof, and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs.

962 | Chapter 19 Roofs


The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration.

25 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint” on page 963.

Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint


In this exercise, you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Roofs.rvt.

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.

2 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.
3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Pick Walls.
4 On the Options Bar, clear Defines Slope, and enter 300 for Overhang.
5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way, press TAB, and then click to select
all three of the entry way walls.
Verify that a green dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the
walls.

6 On the Options Bar, enter 0 for Overhang.

Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 963


7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch.

Next, trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. You must trim these
lines to create a valid sketch.

8 On the Tools toolbar, click .


9 On the Options Bar, verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected.
10 To trim the first line segment, select the left vertical roof line, and then select a point near the midpoint
of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you
want to keep.
11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections.

Next, you add a slope-defining line.

12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the
roof.
13 On the Options Bar, select Defines slope.
Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker.

14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope, and press ENTER.

15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Roof Properties.


16 Under Constraints, enter -600 for Base Offset From Level, and click OK.
17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Roof to complete the roof.
18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof.

19 Click on the View toolbar to display the model.

20 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to rotate the model.

964 | Chapter 19 Roofs


21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof” on page 965.

Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof


In this exercise, you add slope arrows to the shed roof.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Roofs.rvt.

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click 3D.
2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house.
3 On the Options Bar, click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch.
4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.
5 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region, and zoom in around the shed roof footprint.
Before you can add slope arrows, you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. To help
locate the position of each split, you need to add two reference planes.

6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Ref Plane.

7 On the Options Bar, click , and enter 600 for Offset.


8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch.

9 On the Tools menu, click Split Walls and Lines.


10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration.

Next, change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope.

11 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the middle segment of the slope defining line.
12 On the Options Bar, clear Defines Slope.
Next, add two new slope arrows.

13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Slope Arrow.

14 On the Options Bar, verify is selected.

Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 965


15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line:

■ Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of
the slope arrow tail.
■ Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays, and then select it to specify the location
of the slope arrow head.

16 Repeat steps 13 - 15 to add the second slope arrow.


Begin the tail at the right reference plane, and move the cursor to place the arrow. The head should snap
to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps.

17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.

18 Press CTRL, select both slope arrows, and click .


19 Under Constraints, select Slope for Specify.
20 Under Dimensions, enter 500 for Rise/1000, and then click OK.
21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Roof to complete the roof.

22 Click on the View toolbar to display the model.

NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof, use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof.

23 Proceed to the next exercise, “Aligning Roof Eaves” on page 966.

Aligning Roof Eaves


In this exercise, you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave
heights. When you sketch a hip roof, the adjacent eave heights must align. When eave heights differ, you can use the
Align Eaves tool to align them.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Roofs.rvt.

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Garage Roof.
2 Select the gable roof over the garage.
3 On the Options Bar, click Edit.
4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition).
5 On the Options Bar, select Defines Slope.

966 | Chapter 19 Roofs


6 With the two gable end lines selected, on the Options Bar, click .
7 In the Element Properties dialog, under Dimensions, enter 800 mm for Rise/1000, and click OK.
8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Align Eaves.
The eave lines display with a dimension. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch
plane.

9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. When aligning eaves, you must select one eave to use
to align both eaves.
Next, select a method to align the eaves.

10 On the Options Bar, select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the
eave height of the first eave.
11 Select both the horizontal eave lines.
Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave.

12 On the Design Bar, click Finish Roof.

13 On the View toolbar, click to display the model.

14 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.
16 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Mansard Roof” on page 967.

Creating a Mansard Roof


In this exercise, you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top
of it.

Creating a Mansard Roof | 967


Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof.rvt.

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations, and double-click North.
Notice the model has four defined levels:

In the next steps, you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.

3 Select the roof and, on the Options Bar, click .


4 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Level 3 for Cutoff Level.
5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3.

6 On the View toolbar, click to display the model.

968 | Chapter 19 Roofs


Next, create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof.

7 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3.

8 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.
9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Lines.

10 On the Options Bar, click , and then select Defines slope.


11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff.

12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.


13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines, press TAB, and select the remaining three lines.

14 On the Options Bar, click .


15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Dimensions, enter 750 mm for Rise/1000, and click OK.
16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Roof.

17 On the View toolbar, click to display the model with the complete mansard roof.

18 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits


In this lesson, you learn how to create roof fascia, gutters, and soffits in Revit MEP. After you create a roof, you can
easily create its fascia, gutters, and soffits.

Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits | 969


Creating Roof Fascia
In this exercise, you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium.

Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Condominium.rvt.

1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family.


2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs.
3 Press CTRL, select M_Fascia-Built-Up.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove.rfa, and click Open.

4 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar, click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia.

5 On the Options Bar, click .


6 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia.
7 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate.
8 In the Name dialog, enter Built-up Fascia, and click OK.
9 In the Type Properties dialog, under Construction, select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for
Profile, and click OK twice.
10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof.

11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia.

12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building.

970 | Chapter 19 Roofs


13 On the Design Bar, click Modify to exit the Fascia command.
14 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Gutters” on page 971.

Creating Gutters
In this exercise, you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium
building model.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, c_Condominium.rvt.

1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter.

2 On the Options Bar, click .


3 In the Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
4 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate.
5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name, and click OK.
6 In the Type Properties dialog, under Construction, select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile.

7 Under Materials and Finishes, click in the Value field for Material, and then click .
8 In the Materials dialog, select Metal-Aluminum for Name, and click OK three times.
9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof.

10 Click to place the gutter.

Creating Gutters | 971


11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model.
12 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Soffits” on page 972.

Creating Soffits
In this exercise, you learn how to place a roof soffit. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium
building model that you used in the previous exercise.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, c_Condominium.rvt.

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Roof.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit.
3 On the Design Bar, click Pick Roofs.
4 Select the roof.

972 | Chapter 19 Roofs


5 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click 3D.
Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap.

7 On the Tools menu, click Join Geometry.


8 Select the roof, and then select the soffit to join them.

9 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Creating Soffits | 973


974 | Chapter 19 Roofs
Customizing Project
Settings and Templates 6

975
976 | Chapter 20 Customizing Project Settings and Templates
Modifying Project and
System Settings 20
In this tutorial, you learn how to modify your Revit MEP 2008 working

environment. In the first lesson, you modify the system environment, which is

independent of the project settings. In the second lesson, you modify project

settings to control the appearance of the components and subcomponents within

that project. Finally, you create an office template, and set it as your default

template.

977
Modifying System Settings
In this lesson, you learn how to control the system settings within Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer
and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project or template files.

Modifying General System Options


In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control
the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when
using worksets.

Set graphics settings


1 On the File menu, click Close to close all open projects.
2 On the Settings menu, click Options.
3 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.
4 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK.
5 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project.
6 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse.
7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open
Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default.rte.
8 In the New Project dialog, click OK.
Notice that the drawing area is black.

9 On the Settings menu, click Options.


10 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.
11 Under Colors, click the value for Selection Color.
12 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK.

NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using
this color.

13 Click the General tab.


14 Under Notifications, specify the following options:

■ Select One hour for Save Reminder interval.


■ Select None for Tooltip Assistance.

15 Click OK.
16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall.
17 Sketch a simple straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area.
18 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the wall.

978 | Chapter 20 Modifying Project and System Settings


Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red.

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it.
Notice that a tooltip is not displayed.

21 Place the cursor over any of the icons on the toolbars.


Notice that a tooltip is displayed even though you set Tooltip Assistance to None. This setting controls
only the tooltips that display within the drawing area.

22 On the File menu, click Close.


23 When prompted to save, click No.
24 On the File menu, click Open.
25 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Settings.rvt.
Notice that the system settings apply to this project.

26 On the Settings menu, click Options.


27 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab and make the following changes:

■ Under Graphics, clear Invert background color.


■ Select Red for Selection Color.

28 Click the General tab and make the following changes:

■ Under Notifications, select your preferred Save Reminder interval, and select Normal for Tooltip
Assistance.
■ Under Username, enter the name you want to use during worksharing. Your login name displays by
default.
■ Under Journal File Cleanup, select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals
older than (days).
Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. Journal files
are text documents that record each step during your Revit MEP sessions. These files are used primarily
in the software support process. Journals can be run in order to detect a problem or recreate lost steps
or files. They are saved at the termination of each Revit MEP session.

29 Click OK.
Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you
place the cursor over any building component.

Modifying General System Options | 979


30 On the File menu, click Close. If prompted, do not save the changes.
31 Proceed to the next exercise, “Specifying File Locations” on page 980.

Specifying File Locations


In this exercise, you specify your default file locations. These settings control location of important Revit MEP files
such as your default project template, the family template files, the family libraries, as well as the material and rendering
libraries.

Set file locations


1 On the Settings menu, click Options.
2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab.
3 Under Default template file, click Browse.
Notice that there are industry-specific templates that you can set as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. On the File menu, choose New ➤ Project,
and click Browse to select a template.

4 Click Cancel.
5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.
6 In the Browse for Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click OK.
7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse.
This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use
to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are
some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, architectural
firm where customized templates reside on a network drive.

8 Click Cancel.

Specify library settings and create a new library

9 In the Options dialog, under Libraries, notice the list of library names.
The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit
MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you
can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load,
and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in
the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left
pane of the dialog.

980 | Chapter 20 Modifying Project and System Settings


10 Under Libraries, click .
11 Click in the Library Name field of the new library, and change the name to My Library.
12 Click in the Library Path field for My Library, and click the icon that displays on the right side of the field.

13 Navigate to C:\My Documents or any other folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP
projects, templates, or families, and click OK.

TIP You may want to create a new folder first, and select it as the library path.

The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs. The library
icons display in the order that they are listed in the Options dialog.

14 Under Library Name, click My Library.

15 Click until My Library is at the top of the list, and click OK.
16 On the File menu, click Open.
17 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the My Library icon.
Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. If you work in a large office, you may want to
set up an office library on a network path in order to increase productivity and maintain office standards.

18 Click Cancel.
19 On the Settings menu, click Options.
20 Click the File Locations tab.
21 Under Libraries, select My Library.

22 Click to delete the library.

Specify rendering settings

23 Click the Rendering tab.


24 Under AccuRender resource location, view the current path.

Specifying File Locations | 981


This path specifies the location of the AccuRender® texture library. This path is determined during
installation. If you want to relocate this path, specify the new location here.

25 Click OK.
26 Proceed to the next exercise, “Specifying Spelling Options” on page 982.

Specifying Spelling Options


In this exercise, you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP.

Modify spelling settings


1 On the Settings menu, click Options.
2 In the Options dialog, click the Spelling tab.
3 Under Settings, select Ignore words in UPPERCASE.
4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check, click Edit.
The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor.

5 In the text editor, enter sheetmtl-Cu.


6 On the File menu, click Save.
7 On the File menu, click Exit.
Notice that there is also a building industry dictionary.

8 Under Building industry dictionary, click Edit.


9 In the text editor, scroll down the list of building industry terms.
10 On the File menu, click Exit.
11 In the Options dialog, click OK.

12 On the Standard toolbar, click to open a new Revit MEP project using the default template.
13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Text.
14 Click in the drawing area, and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU.
15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.
16 On the Tools menu, click Spelling.
Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. It allowed
SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase.

17 Click OK.
18 On the Settings menu, click Options.
19 In the Options dialog, click the Spelling tab.
20 Under Settings, click Restore Defaults.
This resets the spelling settings to their original configuration.

21 Under Personal dictionary, click Edit.


The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor.

22 In the text editor, delete sheetmtl-CU.


23 On the File menu of the text editor, click Save, and then click File ➤ Exit.
24 In the Options dialog, click OK.
25 On the File menu, click Close. If prompted, do not save the changes.
26 Proceed to the next exercise, “Modifying Snap Settings” on page 983.

982 | Chapter 20 Modifying Project and System Settings


Modifying Snap Settings
In this exercise, you modify snap settings. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not
saved within a project file. You can turn snap settings on and off, or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap
method. In this exercise, you modify snap increments, work with snapping turned off, and use shortcut keys to control
snapping on an instance basis.

Modify snap increments


1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project.
2 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse.
3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open
Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default.rte.
4 In the New Project dialog, click OK.
5 On the Settings menu, click Snaps.
Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. As you zoom in and out within a
view, Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. You can
add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it.

6 Under Dimension Snaps, click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000;
and enter 500 ;.

7 Under Object Snaps, notice the two-letter acronyms next to each object snap option.
These are shortcut keys that you can use at any time when working on the design. For example, if you
want to snap an object to a wall midpoint, enter SM and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you
commit an action. After you click to place the object at the midpoint, snapping reverts to the system default
settings.

8 In the Snaps dialog, click OK.


9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall.
10 Click in the center of the drawing area, and move the cursor to the right.

Modifying Snap Settings | 983


Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. If it does not, zoom out until it does
so.
A listening dimension refers specifically to the dimension that appears while in the act of sketching. This
dimension reacts to the movement of your cursor and numerical keyboard entries.

TIP To zoom while in the act of sketching, use the wheel button on your mouse. If you do not have a wheel
button, you can right-click and select a zoom option from the context menu. While sketching, you can also use
the zoom shortcut keys such as ZO to zoom out.

11 While sketching a generic straight wall, zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to
500 mm.
This is the increment that you added previously.

Sketch without snapping

12 While sketching the wall, enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off.

Notice that when snapping is turned off completely, the listening dimension reflects the exact length of
the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right.

13 Click to set the wall endpoint.


14 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall, and move the cursor to the right. Do not set the wall end
point.

Notice that snapping is once again active. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping, the command
is only active for one click of the mouse.

Use snapping shortcut keys

15 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and click Wall.


16 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously.
Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. If you move the cursor along the wall, it will
snap to the endpoints, the midpoint, and the wall edges.

17 Enter SM.

984 | Chapter 20 Modifying Project and System Settings


This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints.

18 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall.

19 Click to start the wall at the midpoint.


20 Move the cursor downward, and specify the wall endpoint.
21 On the Settings menu, click Snaps.
22 Under Dimension Snaps, click in the Length dimension snap increments box, and delete the value 500 ;.
Make sure you also delete the semicolon.

23 Click OK.
24 On the File menu, click Close, and do not save the file.
25 Proceed to the next lesson, “Modifying Project Settings” on page 985.

Modifying Project Settings


In this lesson, you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu.
Using these options, you modify the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. You create
and modify materials, annotations, lines, fill patterns, and object styles. Finally, you modify the way the Project Browser
organizes the project.
The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. If you cannot complete the exercises
in their entirety, save the project file with a unique name, and use it to complete the exercises.

Creating and Applying Materials


In this exercise, you create a new material and apply it to a model component. When you apply a material to a
component, it defines the appearance of that component in shaded and rendered views. Well designed materials provide
the foundation for photorealistic renderings.
In the steps that follow, you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls.

This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the
exterior wall face, you render a region to observe the changes.

Modifying Project Settings | 985


Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Settings.rvt.

Create a new material


1 On the Settings menu, click Materials.
Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. This list includes all materials available for use on
model components. When a model component is loaded into a project, all materials that are part of that
component family are also loaded into the project.

2 Scroll down, and select Masonry - Stone for Name.


Notice that there is no Surface Pattern applied to this material, nor is there an AccuRender texture applied.
However, this material provides a good foundation for the new material, Masonry-Fieldstone.

3 Click Duplicate.
This creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point.

4 In the New Material dialog, enter Masonry - Fieldstone, and click OK.
You have created a new material that can be applied to any model component in this project. Notice that
the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. In the steps that follow, you
modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view.

Modify material settings

5 Under AccuRender, click to select a texture.


6 Navigate to BMCD2AR3\Bitmap Textures\Stone\, select Stone04, and under Name, select Normal.
7 In the Material Library dialog, on the Material menu, click New ➤ Use Current Material as Template.
8 In the Material Editor dialog, click the Maps tab.
9 Select the entry under Image Mapping, and click Edit.
10 In the Image Mapping dialog, click the Orientation tab.
11 Under Offset, enter 0.75 for X and Y, and click OK.
By offsetting the X and Y values of the image map, you help prevent the appearance of repetitive patterns
within the rendering.

12 In the Material Editor dialog, click OK.


13 In the Save Material As dialog, enter Masonry - Fieldstone for the name, select user from the list of
libraries, and click OK.
The AccuRender texture Masonry - Fieldstone is now part of your AccuRender User library.

14 In the Material Library dialog, click OK.


Before closing the Materials dialog, notice that the Surface Pattern is still blank. In the next exercise, you
create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry - Fieldstone material.

15 Click OK.

Apply the new material

16 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click 02 Entry Level.

17 Select the lower exterior wall, and click .

986 | Chapter 20 Modifying Project and System Settings


18 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
19 Click Duplicate.
20 Enter the new wall name, Fieldstone on CMU, and click OK.
21 In the Value field for Structure, click Edit.
22 Click in the Material field for Finish 1.
Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. It is currently assigned the material Masonry - Brick.

23 On the right side of the Material field, click .


24 In the Materials dialog, select Masonry - Fieldstone for Name, and click OK.
This is the material you created previously.

25 Click OK three times.


The lower wall now uses the Fieldstone on CMU AccuRender texture when you render it.

26 Select the left exterior wall.


27 Press CTRL, and select the rear exterior wall.
28 In the Type Selector, select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU.
All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU.

29 On the View Toolbar, click .


30 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style, and verify that Shading with Edges is selected.

Creating and Applying Materials | 987


Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick, and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. This
is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. In the following
exercise, “Creating and Applying Fill Patterns” on page 989, you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to
this material.

31 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar, click Region Raytrace.

TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Rendering.

32 In the drawing area, drag a rectangle around the 3D image.

After you draw the rectangle around the 3D model and select the scene, the rendering process begins.
When finished, the fieldstone material that you created is displayed.

TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail, click Display Model on the Rendering tab of the Design Bar.
Zoom into the model, select Region Raytrace, and drag a rectangle around the area you want to render.

Notice the roof did not render. This is because a material has not been applied to the roof. In the exercise,
“Controlling Object Styles” on page 991, you apply a material to default roofs and resolve this.

33 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar, click Display Model.


34 On the File menu, click Save As.
35 Navigate to a folder of your preference, and save the file as m_Settings-in progress.rvt.
36 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating and Applying Fill Patterns” on page 989.

988 | Chapter 20 Modifying Project and System Settings


Creating and Applying Fill Patterns
In this exercise, you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous
exercise.
There are two types of fill patterns: model and drafting. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a
building, such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. Drafting
patterns represent material in symbolic form, such as steel, which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern.
Drafting pattern density is fixed. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way.

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that
exercise, m_Settings-in progress.rvt.

Create a new fill pattern


1 In the Project Browser, expand Elevations, and double-click West.

Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall.

2 On the Settings menu, click Fill Patterns.


3 Under Pattern Type, choose Model.
4 Scroll down the list of patterns.
Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available.

5 Click New.
6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog, click Custom.
7 Under Custom, click Import.
8 Navigate to the training folders installed with your Revit MEP software.

TIP Typically, your training files can be found on C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\Revit MEP\Training. The location of these files can vary depending on the path you set during
installation.

9 Select Fieldstone_Model.pat from the Common folder, and click Open.


10 Under Custom, select fldstn, and enter .56 for Import scale.
11 Enter Fieldstone for Name, and click OK.
The new model pattern is available in the Name list in the Fill Patterns dialog.

12 Click OK.

Apply the fieldstone pattern

13 Select the west exterior wall with windows.

Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 989


14 On the Options Bar, click .
15 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
16 In the Value field for Structure, click Edit.
17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, click in the Material field for Finish 1.
Finish 1 is the exterior finish of the wall. It is currently assigned the material Masonry - Fieldstone.

18 On the right side of the Materials field, click .


In the Materials dialog, notice that there is no surface pattern applied to the Masonry - Fieldstone material.

19 Under Surface Pattern, click to select a fill pattern.


20 In the Fill Patterns dialog, under Pattern Type, select Model.
21 Select the Fieldstone model pattern, and click OK.
22 In the Materials dialog, click OK.
23 Click OK three times.
The west wall of the building displays as solid fill.

24 On the Design Bar, click Modify.


25 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears.

26 On the View Toolbar, click .

TIP If the pattern does not display, adjust your zoom settings as needed.

27 On the File menu, click Save.


28 Proceed to the next exercise, “Controlling Object Styles” on page 991.

990 | Chapter 20 Modifying Project and System Settings


Controlling Object Styles
You can use Object Styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. Object Styles are applied in
every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. Object Styles allow
you to control the appearance of multiple component types.
For example, there are often multiple window types within a project. The client may not be certain of the exact window
frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. Rather than continually modify the type properties
of each window type, you can set the window frame material to “By Category.” You can then change the material in
the Object Styles dialog and apply it to all window types.

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that
exercise, m_Settings-in progress.rvt.

Apply object styles


1 In the Project Browser, expand 3D Views, and double-click 3 Windows.

2 On the keyboard, use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region) and drag a rectangle around the three windows
facing you.

3 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style, and click Shading with Edges.
4 Select one of the rectangular windows.

5 On the Options Bar, click .


6 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
7 In the Type Properties dialog, under Materials and Finishes, click the Trim Exterior Material value, and

select .
8 In the Materials dialog, click By Category (located under the Name list).
This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting.

9 In the Type Properties dialog, click OK.


10 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK.

Controlling Object Styles | 991


11 Select the arched window.

12 On the Options Bar, click .


13 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
14 In the Type Properties dialog, under Materials and Finishes, click the Trim Exterior Material value, and

select .
15 In the Materials dialog, click By Category.
16 In the Type Properties dialog, click OK.
17 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK.
18 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray.

19 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles.


20 Under Category, expand Windows, and select Trim.

21 Click the Trim Material value, and select .


22 In the Materials dialog, select Trim, and click Duplicate.
23 In the New Material dialog, for Name, enter Trim - red paint, and click OK.

24 On the right side of the dialog, under AccuRender, for Texture, click .
25 In the Material Library dialog, expand Solid Colors, and select Reds and Oranges.
26 Under Name, select Indian,Dark,Glossy, and click OK.
27 Under Surface Pattern, click the Color value, select a red color, and click OK.
28 In the Materials dialog, click OK.
29 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK.
Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type.

30 On the View Toolbar, click .


31 On the File menu, click Save.
32 Proceed to the next exercise, “Modifying Line Patterns and Styles” on page 992.

Modifying Line Patterns and Styles


In this exercise, you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof. You then create a new line style to
mark the zoning setback from the property line.

992 | Chapter 20 Modifying Project and System Settings


NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that
exercise, m_Settings-in progress.rvt.

Create a new line pattern


1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise, m_Settings-in progress.rvt, is open with the 3D view active.
2 On the Settings menu, click Line Patterns.
3 In the Line Patterns dialog, click New.
4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog, enter Roof Line for Name.
5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration:

6 Click OK twice.
You have created a new line pattern; now you must apply it. There are two ways to apply the line style to
the roof. You can use the Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view, or
you can use Object Styles to apply the change to all views.

7 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style, and click Hidden Line.
8 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles.
9 In the Object Styles dialog, under Category, select Roofs.
10 Select Red for Line Color, and select Roof Line for Line Pattern.

Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 993


11 Click OK.
The line style is applied to the roof in the view.

12 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click to building.


13 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style, and verify that Hidden Line is selected.
Notice that the line color displays in this view, but not the line pattern.

NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera
view where you expect to see a solid line. Plans, sections, elevations, and orthogonal 3D views show line color
and pattern.

14 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 03 Roof.

994 | Chapter 20 Modifying Project and System Settings


15 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles.
16 In the Object Styles dialog, under Category, select Roofs.
17 Select Black for Line Color, and select Solid for Line Pattern.
18 Click OK.
19 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
20 Click the Model Categories tab, and select Roofs for Visibility.
21 Click Override for Projection/Surface Lines.
This overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view.

22 In the Line Graphics dialog, specify the following options:

■ Select 5 for Line Weight.


■ Select Blue for Line Color.
■ Select Roof Line for Line Pattern.

23 Click OK twice.

Create a new line style

24 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site.


Notice the site topography and the property lines.

25 On the Settings menu, click Line Styles.


26 In the Line Styles dialog, under Modify Subcategories, click New.
27 Enter Zoning Setback for Name, and click OK.

Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 995


28 For the Zoning Setback category, specify the following values:

■ Select 2 for Line Weight Projection.


■ Select Red for Line Color.
■ Select Double dash for Line Pattern.

29 Click OK.
30 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Lines.
31 In the Type Selector, select Zoning Setback.
32 On the Options Bar, specify the following:

■ For Plane, select Level: 02 Entry Level.


A line is placed in the model. You want to place it above the topography.

■ Click .

■ Click .

33 Draw lines for the setback approximately as shown:

NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view, use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting
tab of the Design Bar. Detail lines only show in the view where they are created, as if they are placed on an
overlay of the view.

34 On the View Toolbar, click .


Notice the Zoning Setback lines appear in this view.

35 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.


36 On the Model Categories tab, expand Lines, and clear Zoning Setback.
This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view.

37 Click OK.

996 | Chapter 20 Modifying Project and System Settings


38 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 02 Entry Level.
39 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
40 On the Model Categories tab, expand Lines, and clear Zoning Setback.
41 On the Model Categories tab, expand Site, and clear Property Lines.

NOTE If Site is not selected, select it and then clear Property Lines.

42 Click OK.

43 On the View Toolbar, click .


44 On the File menu, click Save.
45 Proceed to the next exercise, “Modifying Annotations” on page 997.

Modifying Annotations
In this exercise, you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. You
also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window
type.

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that
exercise, m_Settings-in progress.rvt.

Create a new dimension style


1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise, m_Settings-in progress.rvt, is open with the 02 Entry Level
floor plan active.
2 On the Settings menu, click Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear.
3 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate.
4 Enter the name Linear - Metric and click OK.
5 Under Text, click the default value for Units Format.
6 In the Format dialog:

■ Clear Use project settings.


■ Select Millimeters for Units.
■ Select mm for Unit suffix.

7 Click OK twice.
You have created a new dimension style.

8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension.


9 In the Type Selector, select Linear - Metric, and place a dimension on the floor plan.

10 On the Standard toolbar, click to undo the dimension.


11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.

Load a new window tag

12 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 02 Entry Level.

Modifying Annotations | 997


Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged, and that the tags display the window type rather
than the window instance number.

13 Select a tagged window in the west wall.

14 On the Options Bar, click .


15 In the Element Properties dialog, notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value.
The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type. In the steps that follow, you load a
new window tag that displays the window instance mark.

16 Click Cancel.
17 On the Settings menu, click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.
18 In the Tags dialog, under Category, scroll down to Windows.
Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows.

19 Click Load.
20 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window
Tag - Number.rfa.
In the preview image, notice that the label displays 1i. This indicates this tag is designed to display the
window instance value rather than the type value.

21 Click Open.
22 In the Tags dialog, scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag - Number is now the assigned tag.
This tag is used when tagging windows By Category.

23 Under Loaded Tags, click M_Window Tag - Number, and select the drop-down arrow that displays.
Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. Leave M_Window
Tag - Number as the assigned tag.

24 Click OK.
25 Press and hold CTRL, select the 3 window tags, and press Delete.

26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category.


27 On the Options Bar, clear Leader.
28 On the west wall, click the bottom window.
A window instance tag displays on the selected window.

998 | Chapter 20 Modifying Project and System Settings


29 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged.
Under Category, notice Window Tags appears twice. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag:
one displays the type value, the other displays the instance value.

30 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag, M_Window Tag - Number.
31 Under Leader, verify that Create is clear, and click OK.
The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. Both window tag types can coexist within
the same view.

32 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps, you can have multiple views: one displaying window
type tags and the other displaying window instance values.

33 On the View Toolbar, click .


34 On the File menu, click Save.
35 Proceed to the next exercise, “Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level
Options” on page 999.

Specifying Units of Measurement,Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options


In this exercise, you modify three settings that have a broad impact on the project. In the first section, you specify the
project units of measurements. Unless overridden, dimension values display using this setting. In the second section,
you modify the temporary dimension settings. In the final section, you modify the detail level assignments.

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that
exercise, m_Settings-in progress.rvt.

Set units of measurement


1 On the Settings menu, click Project Units.
2 In the Project Units dialog, under Length, click the default value for Format.
3 In the Format dialog, select To the nearest 100 for Rounding, and click OK.
4 In the Project Units dialog, under Area, click the default value for Format.
5 In the Format dialog, select 0 decimal places for Rounding, select meters squared for Unit suffix, and click
OK.

Specifying Units of Measurement,Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options | 999


Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags.

6 Click OK.
Unless overridden, dimensions use these project settings.

Specify temporary dimension properties

7 On the Settings menu, click Temporary Dimensions.


8 Under Walls, select Faces.
9 Under Doors and Windows, select Openings, and click OK.

NOTE In this project, temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings.
The location of temporary witness lines can be changed by clicking the control.

Specify detail levels

10 On the Settings menu, click Detail Level.


When you create a new view and specify its view scale, the detail level is specified automatically according
to the arrangement in the table.

TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties
dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar.

In this table, you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another.
You do not select a view scale to move it. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the
column based on the direction.

11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium, click .


Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. Any new view created using this scale is
automatically assigned the detail level Medium.

12 Click OK.
13 On the File menu, click Save.
14 On the File menu, click Close.
15 Proceed to the next exercise, “Modifying Project Browser Organization” on page 1000.

Modifying Project Browser Organization


In a typical project, you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. These drawings and sheets can become
so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. In order to organize the views and
sheets into sets of deliverables, you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser
groups and sorts.
In this exercise, you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the
views and sheets.
Dataset

■ Click File menu ➤ Open.


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Project_Browser.rvt.

Organize the Project Browser by views


1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and expand 3D Views.

1000 | Chapter 20 Modifying Project and System Settings


Notice that the views are listed alphabetically.

2 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all).


Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number.

3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order, and notice the progression of each view:

■ Main Bldg - Phase 1-Structure


■ East Wing - Phase 2-Structure
■ West Wing - Phase 3-Structure
■ Completed Project-Structure
■ Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors
■ Completed Project

Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline.

4 On the Settings menu, click Browser Organization.


5 On the Views tab, select Discipline, and click OK.
On the Project Browser, notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines.

6 In the Project Browser, expand both the Architectural and Structural views.
7 On the Settings menu, click Browser Organization.
8 Select Phase, and click Apply.
In the Project Browser, notice that Views are grouped based on Phase.

9 In the Browser Organization dialog, select Type/Discipline, and click OK.


10 In the Project Browser, expand each view type, and notice that each is grouped by discipline.

Modifying Project Browser Organization | 1001


Organize Project Browser by sheets

11 On the Settings menu, click Browser Organization.


12 Click the Sheets tab.
13 Select Sheet Prefix, and click OK.
14 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, expand each sheet set.

Create a new browser organization name

15 On the Settings menu, click Browser Organization.


16 Click the Views tab, and click New.
17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline, and click OK.
18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog, click the Folders tab, and specify the following:

■ Group by: Phase


■ Then by: Family and Type
■ Then by: Discipline

19 Click OK.
20 In the Browser Organization dialog, select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization, and
click OK.
21 In the Project Browser, under Views, expand Complete, expand 3D Views, and expand both Architectural
and Structural.
Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase, View
Type (Family and Type), and Discipline.

22 On the File menu, click Close.


If you want to save this file, navigate to your preferred directory, enter a unique file name, and click OK.
Proceed to the next lesson, “Creating an Office Template” on page 1003.

In this lesson, you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. All the settings
that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. You can also save these settings in a template file. By saving
these settings as a template and using it throughout the office, you maintain consistent standards and reduce the
amount of repetitive work. In the lesson that follows, you create an office template.

1002 | Chapter 20 Modifying Project and System Settings


Creating an Office Template
In this lesson, you create a Revit MEP template file and set it as your default template. When you create new projects,
the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials, dimensions styles, levels, and view
names. You can save Project Browser organization schemes, named print settings, and render scenes in a template.
Although Revit MEP provides many templates to choose from, you may decide to modify one or more of these templates
to the specific needs of your company. A well designed template will ensure office standards are maintained and will
reduce repetitive work.
This lesson is intended to provide you with a blueprint of how to create your office template. It is mostly conceptual
and designed as a road map with options for your consideration. The lesson begins with choosing the right base template
and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you would consider in order to make a template
unique to your situation.

Choosing the Base Template


In this exercise, you select the starting point for your office template.
Whenever you create a new project or template, a group of settings are used to specify the project environment. For
example, when you create a new project, you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template.
Even if you choose not to base that project on a template, certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project.
When you create a new template based on an existing template, the same rules apply. You can use an existing template
as the baseline or use no template at all. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template
with the least amount of work.

Review existing templates


1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project.
2 Under Template File, click Browse.
3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates.
Notice there are a number of different templates to choose from. The template selection may vary depending
on your installation. Other than the default template, each is modified in a way to make it useful to the
applicable industry; for instance, structural or construction.
The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. You
may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. In that case, you can modify one
template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates.

4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric.rte template, and click Open.


5 In the New Project dialog, select Project for Create new.
6 Click OK.
7 In the Project Browser, expand Views, expand Elevations, and double-click North.
8 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and, in the drawing area, drag a zoom region around
the level heads.
Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template.

9 In the Project Browser, navigate throughout the various views and schedules.
Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. Other templates, such
as the structural template, are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules, but the view properties
have been modified to maximize the use of the structural tools.

10 On the File menu, click Close.


If you have additional projects open, close them.

11 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project.


12 Under Template File, click Browse.
13 Select the default template.

Creating an Office Template | 1003


TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. If you want to use a template other than the
default, you can select it now.

14 Click Open.
15 Under Create New, select Project Template, and click OK.
16 Proceed to the next exercise, “Modifying Project Settings” on page 1004.

Modifying Project Settings


In this exercise, you modify the project settings for your new template. These settings control the appearance of
components and their subcomponents within a project. In order to maintain office standards and reduce rework, you
can establish the settings that are common to most projects. For example, you can create the materials commonly used
in most projects. When you create the material, you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered.
In this exercise, you modify the following:

■ Materials
■ Fill patterns
■ Object styles
■ Line styles, weights, and patterns
■ Annotations
■ Project units
■ Temporary dimensions
■ Detail levels
■ Project Browser organization

In addition to the list above, there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that
can be saved in a template. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise.
During this exercise, specific modifications are not dictated. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt
the template to your needs. For more details on modifying these settings, see the previous lesson, “Modifying System
Settings” on page 978 or refer to the Help documentation.

Create and modify materials


1 On the Settings menu, click Materials.
2 Scroll down the Name list.
Observe the materials that are already defined. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing
materials. If there are materials that are commonly used within your office or industry, create and modify
them as needed.
If you create or modify new materials, you may want to specify their appearance when rendered. You can
do this by setting the AccuRender Texture.

3 Under AccuRender, click to access the AccuRender Material Library.


If there are custom AccuRender materials that you want to add to the template, you can do so by going to
the Material menu and selecting New. Choose the appropriate option, and create the AccuRender material.

RELATED See “Modifying System Settings” on page 978 for more information on creating new AccuRender
materials.

When you save a new AccuRender material designed to be used in an office template, be aware that access
to the original material library may be necessary at some point. You may want to save the material to a
library located on a network path.

4 Click OK twice to close the Material Library and Materials dialogs.

1004 | Chapter 20 Modifying Project and System Settings


Create and modify fill patterns

5 On the Settings menu, click Fill Patterns.


6 Scroll through the list of model and drafting patterns.

TIP Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. Model patterns represent actual element appearance
on a building. You can align, rotate, and move model patterns. You can also dimension to model pattern lines.

7 Create new fill patterns as needed, or modify existing patterns.

RELATED See “Modifying Project Settings” on page 985 for more information on creating new fill patterns.

8 Click OK when finished.

Specify object styles

9 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles.


In the Object Styles dialog, you can set line weights, line colors, line patterns, and materials for different
categories and subcategories of components or imported objects.

TIP When the material of a component is set to by category, it adopts the material assigned to its object styles
category.

10 Click the Model Objects tab, and scroll through the list of categories.
11 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed.
12 If necessary, create new subcategories.
13 Click the Annotation Objects tab.
14 Modify categories, and create new subcategories as needed.
15 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog.

Modify line styles

16 On the Settings menu, click Line Styles.


17 For existing line categories, modify the line weight, line color, or line pattern as needed.
18 If necessary, create new line subcategories.
19 Click OK.

Modify line weights

20 On the Settings menu, click Line Weights.


The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. You can add and
delete view scales.
In the dialog, there are three tabs: one for model component line styles, one for perspective model line
styles, and one for annotation symbol line styles.
The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of modeling components, such as walls and windows
in orthographic views. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. You can define the widths of
16 different pens for six different drawing scales.
The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of objects such as walls and windows in perspective
views.
The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols, such as section lines and
dimension lines. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale.

21 Click the Model Line Weights tab.

Modifying Project Settings | 1005


22 Modify existing line weights as needed.
23 Add and delete view scales as needed.
24 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab.
25 Modify existing line weights as needed.
26 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab.
27 Modify existing line weights as needed.
28 Click OK.

Modify line patterns

29 On the Settings menu, click Line Patterns.


30 Scroll through the list of line patterns.
31 To modify a line pattern, select it, and click Edit.
32 Add and delete line patterns as needed.
33 Click OK.

Modify arrowheads

34 On the Settings menu, click Annotations ➤ Arrowheads.


The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes, tags, and dimensions.

35 Select the Type drop-down list, and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles.
To see the details of a particular style, select it from this list.

36 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary.


37 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead.
38 If you need to create a new arrowhead style, click Duplicate, name the style, and specify the properties.
39 Click OK.

Modify Dimension Styles

40 On the Settings menu, click Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear.


Linear, angular, and radial dimensions are modified separately.

41 Select the Type drop-down list, and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles.
To see the details of a particular style, select it from this list.

42 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary.


43 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style.
44 If you need to create a new linear dimension style, click Duplicate, name the style, and specify the properties.
45 Click OK.
46 Repeat the previous five steps for angular and radial dimensions.

■ On the Settings menu, click Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular.


■ On the Settings menu, click Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial.

Modify loaded tags

47 On the Settings menu, click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.


The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. For example, when you add a
door with the tag option selected, the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this
dialog. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector.

1006 | Chapter 20 Modifying Project and System Settings


48 Scroll through the list of loaded tags.
Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. When
more than one tag has been loaded for a category, the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. In the Tags
dialog, you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list.

49 To load new annotation tags, click Load.


50 After you have loaded the necessary tags, make sure each category is assigned the desired tag, and click
OK.

Specify project units

51 On the Settings menu, click Project Units.


52 Under Length, click Format.
53 Modify the unit settings if necessary.
54 Click OK.
55 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area, Volume, and Angle settings.
56 Specify the Slope option, and choose a decimal symbol.
57 Click OK.

Specify temporary dimensions

58 On the Settings menu, click Temporary Dimensions.


59 Under Walls, specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default.

TIP In the drawing area, you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines.

60 Under Doors and Windows, specify the default location for temporary dimensions.
61 Click OK.

Specify detail levels

62 On the Settings menu, click Detail Level.


When you create a new view, the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. The
detail level is based on view scale. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail
Level parameter in the View Properties command.
View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse, Medium, or Fine. Using the arrows between
the columns, you can move view scales from one detail level to another.

63 Review the table, and move view scales as needed.

NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. To move the view scales, click the arrows between columns.
The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa.

64 Click OK.

Modify project browser organization

65 On the Settings menu, click Browser Organization.


In a typical project, you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. These views and sheets can
become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. In order to organize
the views and sheets into sets of deliverables, you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify
the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. If you routinely create the same documentation sets,
you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template.

Modifying Project Settings | 1007


RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization, see “Modifying Project Browser
Organization” on page 1000.

66 In the Browser Organization dialog, click the Views tab.


67 Delete, Rename, or Edit existing organization types.
68 If necessary, create new browser organization types.
69 Click the Sheets tab.
70 Delete, rename, or edit existing organization types.
71 If necessary, create new browser organization types.
72 Click OK.

Additional project settings

73 On the Settings menu, there are several additional commands that control the project environment.
Although these settings can be saved within a template, you should consider each carefully before applying
changes to a template.
For example, you can save rendered scene settings to a template. However, you may only want to add
generically named settings that would be applicable to most projects. In such a case, you must decide if
the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work.
Each of these areas are covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. Use the table below as a checklist,
and make modifications in each area as necessary. Links to associated tutorials are provided. You can find
additional information in Help. Each command is available on the Settings menu.

Settings Menu Associated Tutorial Considerations


Command

Project Parameters This command is covered in an exercise If necessary, you can add project (and shared)
later in this lesson. See “Setting up Shared parameters to a template. This could be useful for
and Project Parameters” on page 1016. things such as hardware, furniture, or electrical fixtures.

Phases Project Phasing If necessary, you can set up the phases, phase filters,
and graphic overrides applicable to most projects.

Room and Area Area Analysis If necessary, you can create and modify area schemes
Settings if there are default settings applicable to most projects.

View Templates This command is covered in an exercise Create and modify the view templates to control the
later in this lesson. See “Modifying Views appearance of default views.
and View Templates” on page 1011.

Render Scene This command is covered in an exercise If necessary, you can create scene settings and save
later in this lesson. See “Modifying Render them to the template.
Scene Settings” on page 1013

Site Settings Modifying Contour Visibility and Site If necessary, you can set the default contour line
Settings interval, the section cut material, and the poche depth.

74 Proceed to the next exercise, “Loading and Modifying Families and Groups” on page 1008.

Loading and Modifying Families and Groups


In this exercise, you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. If you have
not completed the previous exercise, do so before starting this exercise. Depending on the intended use of this template,
you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. You
can load any family or group into a template. Obviously, you should only load components that tend to be used in
every project and are not likely to change. For example, you could load detail components, titleblocks, and electrical
fixtures. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. Although the options
are endless, there are some important thoughts to consider.

1008 | Chapter 20 Modifying Project and System Settings


It is important to understand that you should not load every conceivable family into a template file. Although this is
possible, it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was
added to the project. In addition, each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. For
example, if you loaded every window type you could find, you would have to scroll through a lengthy list of windows
every time you changed a window within a project. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. You should
think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template.

Load and modify families


1 Use the project started in the previous exercise, and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Door.
2 In the Type Selector, notice the list of doors already loaded.
If this selection is satisfactory, you can move onto the next component type. However, you may want to
delete, modify, or add to this selection. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click
Properties, or use the Project Browser. In the steps that follow, you do both.

3 To modify, create, or load a new door type, click on the Options Bar.
Use the instructions in the table below to load, create, or modify a door.

Goal: Steps:

Load new door type In the Element Properties dialog, select Load. Navigate to the directory containing the
door type. Select it, and click Open.

Modify door type In the Element Properties dialog, select Edit/New. Make modifications, and click OK.

Create new door type In the Element Properties dialog, select Edit/New. Click Duplicate. Enter Name, and
click OK. Modify type properties, and click OK.

4 Click OK.
5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify.
You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this
tab. You can also load families and groups from the File menu.

6 On the File menu, click Load from Library.


Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load File as Group. Loading from the library is the
quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. Press ESC twice to return to the template.

Use Project Browser to modify families

7 In the Project Browser, expand Families.

Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 1009


Notice that each family category is listed. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types.

8 Expand Annotation Symbols.


Notice that there is a titleblock symbol loaded. (The titleblock name may vary depending on the template
you started with.)

9 Expand the titleblock, and select the titleblock type.

10 On the Options Bar, click .


11 Click Preview.
This titleblock is currently part of the template. Notice it has Autodesk Revit in the upper-right corner. You
may want to load a titleblock applicable to your office and then delete this titleblock.
To load a titleblock, click Load. For more information, see Creating a Titleblock Family.

12 Click OK.

1010 | Chapter 20 Modifying Project and System Settings


You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project/template. To do so, right-click the
component, and click Delete.

13 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps, load, create, or modify any component families or
groups as necessary.
14 Proceed to the next exercise, “Modifying Views and View Templates” on page 1011.

Modifying Views and View Templates


At the beginning of this lesson, you created new projects using different templates, and you noticed that each template
had a unique set of predefined views. In this exercise, you create the views required for your template. In addition, you
create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance.
View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. In addition, you can
apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. The view inherits view
properties such as View Scale, View Range, Discipline, Detail Level, and the visibility settings of categories and
subcategories. In this exercise, you will first modify view templates, and then create new views that will automatically
use those templates.

Create and modify view templates


1 On the Settings menu, click View Templates.
2 Select Architectural Plan for Name.
These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. At any time, you can
apply a view template to any view. These values represent the starting point for each plan view.
By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs, you reduce rework and increase
consistency across projects.

3 Specify each value according to your needs. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for
this view type.
4 If necessary, rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications.
5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the Name drop-down list.
6 Click OK.

Apply view templates

7 In the Project Browser, expand Views, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
8 On the View menu, click Apply View Template.
Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. Upon the application of the view template, the
view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. After applying the
template, the view is not linked to the template in any way. Subsequent modifications to the view template
do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. There is no limit to the number of
times you can apply a view template to a view. In addition, there is no limit to the number of view templates
that you can apply.

9 Select the Architectural Plan template.


10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type.
This option means that every time a new plan view is created, it will use this view template to set the initial
view properties.

11 Click Apply, and click OK.


12 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2.
13 On the View menu, click Apply View Template.
14 Select the Architectural Plan template, click Apply, and click OK.
15 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site.
16 On the View menu, click Apply View Template.

Modifying Views and View Templates | 1011


17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template, select Site Plan, click Apply, and then click OK.

NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. This would result in the Site Plan view
template becoming the default template for all new plan views.

18 If you modified any other view templates, open the view from the Project Browser, and apply the appropriate
template.

Create and modify views

19 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South.


Notice the level names. Blue level heads have associated plan views. Black level heads have no associated
views.

20 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, review the existing floor plans.
21 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Level 1, and, in the context menu, notice that you
have the option to rename, duplicate, or delete this view.
If necessary, you can rename this view according to your preference. You can also duplicate or delete the
view.

22 In the Project Browser, review the floor plans, ceiling plans, and elevations. Rename, duplicate, or delete
them as needed.
23 To add additional levels to the template, click Level from the Basics tab of the Design Bar.
Make sure you are still in the South Elevation view.

24 On the Options Bar, select Make Plan View.


25 Add the new level within the elevation view.
The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties.

26 Rename and reposition the level as needed.


27 Create additional levels as needed.

Create 3D views

28 To add 3D views to the template, click on the View toolbar.


29 In the Project Browser, expand 3D Views.
30 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click {3D}, and select Rename.
31 Rename the 3D View.
If necessary, you may want to modify the view properties of any new views. To do so, go to the View menu,
and click View Properties.

32 To create additional 3D views, click on the View toolbar.

33 On the View toolbar, click .


You can use this tool, Dynamically Modify View, to orient and save the view.

34 Click the arrow on the right side of the Dynamic View dialog.

35 You can use Orient to a Direction or Orient to a View to set the camera location and target.

1012 | Chapter 20 Modifying Project and System Settings


36 To save the view, click , supply a view name, and click OK.
The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views ➤ 3D Views.

Create and modify schedules

37 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities.


You can add schedules to a template. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most
often, and modify their properties accordingly. This can save significant time and ensure office standards
are maintained.

38 If you want to add schedules to your template, select the category type, and click OK.
39 In the Schedule Properties dialog, make the following modifications as needed:

■ On the Fields tab, select and order required fields.


■ On the Filter tab, assign filters.
■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab, modify settings as needed.
■ On the Formatting tab, modify settings as needed.
■ On the Appearance tab, modify settings as needed.

40 Click OK.
41 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template.

Add sheets to the template

42 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Sheet.


You are prompted to select a titleblock. If you have already loaded your office titleblocks into the template,
select one, and click OK.

TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the titleblock. To do so, select the default titleblock, and
click OK. After the sheet is created, select the titleblock and delete it. You can still add views to the sheet. To
later add a titleblock to a sheet, go to the View menu, and click New ➤ Place Titleblock.

43 Add views to the sheet by selecting Add View from the View tab of the Design Bar.

TIP You can drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet.

44 To rename or renumber the sheet, right-click the sheet in the Project Browser, and click Rename.
45 Create new sheets as needed.
Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet.

46 Proceed to the next exercise, “Modifying Render Scene Settings” on page 1013.

Modifying Render Scene Settings


You can create interior and exterior scene settings and save them within the template. By adding a default interior and
exterior rendered scene setting to the template, you could render basic scenes much faster and with greater consistency
without the need to spend time modifying these settings.

Modifying Render Scene Settings | 1013


Create and modify an exterior scene
1 On the Settings menu, click Render Scene.
2 In the Scene Selection dialog, click New, then enter exterior-default for Name.
3 Under Type, select Exterior, and click OK.
4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog, under Scene Settings, click Environment.
5 Specify the background color.

■ Automatic Sky: Treats the background as a sky, and changes the color automatically depending on the
sun and sky conditions.
■ Solid Color: Specifies a single color that appears behind your rendering.
■ 2 Color Gradient: Lets you vary the color between two selected colors.
■ 3 Color Gradient: Lets you vary the color between three selected colors.

6 Specify the Advanced features:

TIP As you select options, the relevant tab appears; for example, select the Clouds option, and a Clouds tab
appears.

■ Background Image: Lets you map images to your background. Choose from bitmap, tiff, jpeg, or targa.
Background images are available from the AccuRender software, which is included on the Revit MEP
CD. Be sure that you have installed this software; if not, you can install AccuRender by running the
install program on the Revit MEP CD.
■ Clouds: Adds procedurally generated clouds to the background.
■ Haze: Simulates effects from slight “depth cues” to dense fog.
■ Ground Plane: Adds an infinite plane to your rendering.
■ Alpha Channel: Lets you use the image's alpha channel (embedded pixel-by-pixel masking information),
if one exists.

You can also save and load environmental settings.

7 Click OK.
8 Under Scene Settings, clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view.
9 Click Sun.
10 On the Solar Angles tab, verify On is selected and select By Date, Time, and Place for Specify Solar Angles.
11 Specify the date and time, place, settings, and colors, and then click OK.
12 Under Plant Season, choose the appropriate season for plant rendering.
Different seasons directly affect any AccuRender plants in the view; for example, a deciduous tree in summer
appears in full bloom with leaves, while in winter, it is completely bare.

13 Under Limit Model Geometry, specify Culling options:

■ Select Back Face Culling to eliminate rendering on model faces that do not face the camera eye. This
works on opaque faces only. AccuRender always processes transparent faces. Back face culling decreases
rendering time and space; however, the quality also is lower.
■ Select View Culling to eliminate rendering model faces that lie outside the area being raytraced. This
setting is effective for region raytraces.

14 Specify the Radiosity Settings:

■ Select Quality: Click the Quality drop-down list to choose an option: Draft, Medium, Good, Better,
Best.

1014 | Chapter 20 Modifying Project and System Settings


Radiosity quality affects the relative coarseness of the mesh and the amount of time to process the
solution. Setting the quality to Better or Best reduces meshing artifacts, such as jaggy shadows or light
leaks, but also increases the solution time.

■ Specify the Solution Goal: This limits the radiosity calculation to a certain number of steps. This value
is used both for the initial number of steps when you first use the Radiate command and for any
subsequent calculation by clicking Continue from the Options Bar.
■ Specify the Color Bleeding value: This controls the color saturation of reflected light. Higher values
cause the color of reflected light to more closely approximate the color of the reflecting surface.
Meaningful values are between 0 and 1.

15 Specify Raytrace Settings:

■ Select Quality: Click the Quality drop-down list to choose an antialiasing option: Draft, Medium, Good,
Better, Best.
Antialiasing is a process in which more than one ray is shot for each pixel in an attempt to better
resolve the value of the pixel. Increasing the antialiasing level adds considerable rendering time. Draft
provides the lowest quality and fastest speed. Best is the slowest, but provides the highest quality.

■ Set values for Reflection and Transparency bounces.


The number of bounces determines how many levels of reflections or transparencies are permitted.
Higher values cause longer rendering times.

■ Select Soft Shadows to produce more realistic shadow edges. Shadows based on the size of the light
source are calculated.
■ Select Blurry Reflections to affect the look of reflections in glass.
■ Select Blurry Transparency to affect the look of material seen behind glass.
■ Select Recalc Radiosity Lights to recalculate the shadows cast during the radiosity preprocess. This is
a very time consuming operation but, when used in conjunction with high antialiasing and soft
shadows it can produce very high quality renderings with fewer radiosity artifacts.

Create and modify an interior scene

16 In the Render Scene Settings dialog, click New.


17 Provide a name for the new interior scene, for example Interior - Default, and click OK.
18 Under Scene Settings, select Interior.
19 Repeat the steps you performed when creating an exterior scene.
20 Click OK when finished.
These scenes are now part of the template and will provide users with two basic rendering scenes.

21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Modifying Import/Export Settings” on page 1015.

Modifying Import/Export Settings


In this exercise, you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN files. You then set the import line weights
for DWG/DXF. When you import a DWG or DXF file, each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen
number/line weight settings you created.

Modify export layers for DWG and DXF


1 On the File menu, click Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF.
The Export Layers command maps Revit MEP categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are
available after exporting to other CAD programs. Revit MEP presets the layer names to American Institute
of Architects (AIA) industry standards. The layer names are stored in a text file (either exportlayers.txt for
AutoCAD or exportlayersdgn.txt for MicroStation), and then are exported along with your project into the
appropriate CAD program. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit MEP program
installation directory.

Modifying Import/Export Settings | 1015


TIP Color ID in the Export Layers dialog corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. Layer name
corresponds to level name for MicroStation.

2 For each category, specify the following:

■ Projection Layer Name and Color ID


■ Cut Layer Name and Color ID

3 If you modified the settings in this dialog, select Save As, name the file, and click Save.

Modify export layers for DGN

4 On the File menu, click Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN.


5 For each category, specify the following:

■ Projection Level Number and Color ID


■ Cut Level Number and Color ID

6 If you modified the settings in this dialog, select Save As, name the file, and click Save.

Modify import line weights

7 On the File menu, click Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF.
You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit MEP line weight. You can
save these mappings to a text file, and they become the set mappings for the project. These settings are
retained within the project template; therefore, you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved.

8 In the dialog, match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight, for example, Pen
Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1, Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2, and so on. Set as many
pen-line weight mappings as desired.
9 Select Save As, name the file, and click Save.
When you import a DWG or DXF file, each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen
number/line weight settings you created.

10 Proceed to the next exercise, “Setting up Shared and Project Parameters” on page 1016.

Setting up Shared and Project Parameters


In this exercise, you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters, project parameters, and
related multi-category tags and schedules.
Using Shared Parameters, you can define additional parameters that are not included in either the pre-defined instance
and type parameters within family components or within the project template. You can add these shared parameters
to any family regardless of category. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families
and projects. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. For example, you could
use Shared Parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when
those parameters are not initially present by default.
Project Parameters are those parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes
of scheduling information specific to that project. They cannot be shared with other projects, and they cannot be used
to tag objects (as with Shared Parameters).
Multi-Category Tags employ Shared Parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category.
When scheduling, you normally schedule a single category: rooms, doors, windows, and so on. When you create a
multi-category schedule, it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter.
In this exercise, detailed instructions are not supplied since each office has a unique set of needs. If you are unfamiliar
with shared parameters, project parameters, and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules, see “Scheduling
Shared Parameters” on page 505or “Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule” on page 487. If you do not need
to make changes to shared or project parameters, you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this
lesson, “Creating Named Print Settings” on page 1018.

1016 | Chapter 20 Modifying Project and System Settings


Set up shared parameters
1 On the File menu, click Shared Parameters.

NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. If a file already exists, you can browse to that
file and modify it as needed.

2 Click Create.
This allows you to name the external parameter file. If this template will be used by multiple people within
an office, you may want to save the file to a network location.

3 Name and save the file.


After the file is named, you can begin creating parameter groups.

4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, under Groups, click New.


5 Enter the group name, and click OK.
6 Create as many groups as needed.
For each parameter group, you can create a list of parameters.

7 Under Parameter group, select a group that you want to add parameters to.
8 Under Parameters, click New.
9 Name the Parameter, and specify the Discipline and Type of Parameter.
10 Click OK.
11 For each parameter group, add required parameters.
12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters.

Set up project parameters

13 On the Settings menu, click Project Parameters.


14 Click Add.
15 In the Parameter Properties dialog, select Project parameter.
16 Under Name, enter a parameter name.
17 Under Discipline, select a parameter discipline type.
18 Under Type of Parameter, select a parameter value type.
19 Under Group parameter under, select the group you want the parameter to be listed with in the Element
Properties dialog.
20 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type.
21 Select the element categories this parameter applies to.
22 Click OK.
23 Add project parameters as needed.
24 To add a shared project parameter, click Add, and select Shared Parameter.
25 Click Select, and choose a shared parameter.
26 Click OK.
27 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance or a type parameter, the group the
parameter belongs to, and assign which categories this parameter applies to.
28 Click OK.
29 Add shared project parameters as needed, and click OK when finished.

Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 1017


Create and load multi-category tags

30 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor.


For information on creating multi-category tags, see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this
exercise, or use the Help documentation for assistance.
After you have created the multi-category tags within the Family Editor, you can load them into the
template.

31 On the File menu, click Load from Library ➤ Load Family.


32 Navigate to the directory, select the tag, and click Open.
The tag is now part of the template.

Create multi-category schedules

33 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities.


34 Select <Multi-Category> for Category.
35 Under Name, enter a name for the schedule, and click OK.
36 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise.
Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields.

37 When you have completed the schedule, click OK.


38 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed.
39 Proceed to the final exercise, “Creating Named Print Settings” on page 1018.

Creating Named Print Settings


In this exercise, you create named print settings, save the file as a template, and make it your default template file.
Depending on your office environment, you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. This
is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. For each printer, you can set options such
as sheet sizes, paper placement, and the percent of actual size. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF
and to a PDF writer. By creating named settings within the template, you need only select a setting, make minor
modifications if necessary, and print.

Create named print settings


1 On the File menu, click Print.
By going first to the Print command, you can select the printer for each set of named settings within the
Print Setup dialog.

2 Under Name, select the first printer for which you want to create named settings.
3 Under Settings, click Setup.
4 Click Save As.
5 In the New dialog, enter a name for the print setting and click OK.
6 Modify the printer settings.
7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer, modify the printer settings, click Save as, enter a new
name for the printer, and click OK. Create additional settings as needed.
8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer.
9 In the Print dialog, select a different printer, click Setup, and create new settings for this printer.
10 Repeat these steps as needed.

TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer.

11 Click OK when finished.

1018 | Chapter 20 Modifying Project and System Settings


Your template is complete. The only remaining task is to save it.

Save the template

12 On the File menu, click Save.


13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template.
If you need to share this file with others, you should save it to a network path.

14 Under Save as type, select Template Files (*.rte).


15 Name the template, and click Save.

Use the template

16 To use the template, go to the File menu, and click New ➤ Project.
17 Select Browse, and navigate to the location where you saved the template.
18 Select the template, and click Open.
19 Click OK.
The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project.
You can also set this template as your default template.

Set the template as your default template file

20 On the Settings menu, click Options.


21 Click the File Locations tab.
22 Next to Default template file, click Browse.
23 Navigate to the template location, select it, and click Open.
24 Click OK.

TIP There are other ways you can create a template. If you have a project, you could delete the model geometry
and save the empty project as a template file. This can provide a good starting point for a template. In addition,
you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another.

In this lesson, you modified settings, loaded components, and saved them to a template. By investing the time to
individualize your template, you ensure that office standards are maintained. In addition, you significantly reduce the
amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project.

Creating Named Print Settings | 1019


1020 | Chapter 20 Modifying Project and System Settings

You might also like